Safety Program

H3O, INC. OVERALL SAFETY PROGRAM 2009

1

H30, INC. Occupational Health and Safety Program

Corporate Policy Statement The Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 clearly states our common goal of safe and healthful working conditions. The safety and health of our employees continues to be the first consideration in the operation of this business. Safety and health in our business must be a part of every operation. Without question it is every employee's responsibility at all levels. It is the intent of H3O, Inc. to comply with all laws. To do this we must constantly be aware of conditions in all work areas that can produce injuries. No employee is required to work at a job he or she knows is not safe or healthful. Your cooperation in detecting hazards and, in turn, controlling them is a condition of your employment. Inform your supervisor immediately of any situation beyond your ability or authority to correct. The personal safety and health of each employee of H3O, Inc. is of primary importance. The prevention of occupationally-induced injuries and illnesses is of such consequence that it will be given precedence over operating productivity whenever necessary. To the greatest degree possible, management will provide all mechanical and physical facilities required for personal safety and health in keeping with the highest standards. We will maintain a safety and health program conforming to the best management practices of organizations of this type. To be successful, such a program must embody the proper attitudes toward injury and illness prevention not only on the part of supervisors and employees, but also between each employee and his or her co-workers. Only through such a cooperative effort can a safety program in the best interest of all be established and preserved. Our objective is a safety and health program that will reduce the number of injuries and illnesses to an absolute minimum, not merely in keeping with, but surpassing, the best experience of operations similar to ours. Our goal is nothing less than zero accidents and injuries.

_____________________ President H3O,INC.


2

H3O, INC. Occupational Health and Safety Program

Health and Safety Guidelines

Date of Last Revision: March 26, 2010 Program Responsibility: The company Safety Coordinator is Jared Hunter. He is responsible for all managerial facets of this program and has full authority to make necessary decisions to ensure success of the program. Safety is also the responsibility of every employee of H3O, Inc.. The Safety Coordinator will develop written detailed instructions covering each of the basic elements in this program, and is the sole person authorized to amend these instructions. H3O, Inc. has expressly authorized the Safety Coordinator to halt any operation of the company where there is danger of serious personal injury. SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITY: H3O, Inc.’s Supervisors are responsible for all facets of this program and the safety of our employees, and have full authority to make necessary decisions to ensure success of the program. They are authorized and expected to halt any operation of the company where there is danger of serious personal injury. H3O, Inc. takes into great consideration the responsibilities, role’s, and expectations to be a Supervisor in H3O, Inc.’s. This is why we have a more stringent selection process when filling this role. Success in any facet of life derives from leadership.

Program Content The H3O, INC. safety and health program will include, but is not limited to development and maintenance of the following: 1. Company Health and Safety Program Guidelines. 2. Written Programs. 3. Safety Committee. 4. Routine Safety and Health Inspections. 5. Safety Meetings. 6. Accident and Incident Reporting. 7. Accident Investigation. 8. General Safety Rules for all Departments. 9. Disciplinary Actions for Willful Unsafe Acts. 10. Complaints/Suggestions 11. Posting Requirements


3

1. Company Health and Safety Program Guidelines. H3O, INC. will review and evaluate this document: 1.1 On an annual basis. 1.2 When changes occur to 29 CFR that prompt a revision. 1.3 When changes occur to any related regulatory document that prompts a

revision of this document. 1.4 When facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this

document. 2. Written Individual Programs. H3O, Inc. will maintain written individual procedures for the types of hazards/issues that our employees will or could potentially be exposed to. Each program will be reviewed/revised on an annual basis or as required by the respective governing OSHA Standard. Each program insofar as possible will be maintained as an independent program to avoid situations where it is unclear where responsibility for given issues belong. Effective implementation of these programs requires support from all levels of management within H3O, Inc.. Each written program will be communicated to all personnel that are affected by it. Each will encompass the total workplace, regardless of number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. They will be designed to establish clear goals, and objectives. 3. Safety Committee. 3.1 Composition. The company safety committee will be comprised of ( 6 )

members of management/supervision and hourly personnel. The make up of the committee will consist of the following:

Safety Committee Title Member President Sam Hesseltine Vice President Larry Hesseltine Fraly Sherrie Manager Office Chase Gene Superintendant Laborer Jay Lyon

George Tom Laborer

Safety Coordinator

___________________________


4

3.2 Principal Responsibilities. The principal responsibilities of the company

safety committee will be as follows: 3.2.1 Assemble on a monthly basis to conduct safety meetings. 3.2.2 Conduct and oversee departmental safety inspections. 3.2.3 Review accident/injury reports and discuss corrective actions. 3.2.4 Direct and monitor departmental training and safety meetings. 3.2.5 Discuss and report on unfinished business from previous meetings. 3.2.6 Discuss new business. 3.2.7 Maintain appropriate records of activities. 3.2.9 The Safety Coordinator will be present to make notations of the

meeting and offer advice. He/she will track open safety items to conclusion. He/she will also act as chairman in the absence of the designated chairman or vice chairman.

3.3 Charter. Charter for the H3O, INC. Safety Committee. This safety

committee will encourage safety awareness among all employees. It will be established to monitor safety performance, safety inspections, and aid the Safety Coordinator in administering the company safety program.

- To reduce injuries and save lives. - To constantly be aware of conditions in all work areas that can produce injuries. - To aid the company in complying with all laws pertaining to safety. - To ensure that no employee is required to work at a job that is not safe or

healthful. - To place the personal safety and health of each employee of H3O, Inc. in a

position of primary importance. - To aid in the prevention of occupationally-induced injuries and illnesses.


5

- To the greatest degree possible, aid management in providing all mechanical and physical facilities required for personal safety and health in keeping with the highest standards.

- To maintain a safety and health program conforming to the best management

practices of organizations of this type. - To establish a program that instills the proper attitudes toward injury and illness

prevention not only on the part of supervisors and employees, but also between each employee and his or her co-workers.

- To ultimately achieve a safety program maintained in the best interest of all

concerned. 4. Routine Safety and Health Inspections. Routine safety and health inspections of all company facilities. The inspection will be conducted to discover through specific, methodical auditing, checking, or inspection procedures; conditions and work practices that lead to job accidents and industrial illnesses. 4.1 Inspection team composition. The company safety inspection team will be

comprised of ( ) members of management/supervision and hourly personnel. The recommended make up of the team will consist of the following:

Safety Inspection Team Title Member Superintendant ____________________ Superintendant ____________________ Safety Coordinator ____________________ Hourly Employee ____________________ 4.2 Inspection Intervals. The Safety Coordinator will coordinate inspection dates

and times with all assigned inspection team members. The team will conduct inspections on a weekly basis.

4.3 Hazard priority classification system. Hazards will be rated according to the

following rating system. Where it is unclear where a hazard should be rated the next higher priority classification will be assumed.

4.3.1 Priority 1 Hazard. The most serious type of unsafe condition or

unsafe work practice that could cause loss of life, permanent disability, the loss of a body part (amputation or crippling injury), or extensive loss of structure, equipment, or material.


6

4.3.2 Priority 2 Hazard. Unsafe condition or work practice that could cause serious injury, industrial illness, or disruptive property damage.

4.3.3 Priority 3 Hazard. Unsafe condition or work practice that might

cause a recordable injury or industrial illness or nondisruptive property damage.

4.3.4 Priority 4 Hazard. Minor condition, a housekeeping item or unsafe

work practice infraction with little likelihood of injury or illness other than perhaps a first-aid case.

4.4 Inspection elements. The following inspection elements will be checked

during safety inspections. Where an individualized safety program exists, the company standard practice instruction will be used as the basis for development of inspection criteria.

Element Criteria Floors Condition, slip, trip, falls Aisles Marking, obstructions Stairs Condition, railings, obstructions Ladders Condition, Metal in electrical areas Scaffolds Condition, Nonskid, level, 2 feet wide Lightin g Suitable Illumination for work Exits Obstructions, locked?, lighted? Ventilation Adequate, fans guarded?, maintained Noise control 85db or less?, hearing protection? Hand tools Grounded, guarded, pressure switches Machine tools Guarded, stop buttons, training? Chemicals MSDS's, labels, storage, separated Hoists/lifts Load limits, unrestricted view, limits Compressed gas Storage, heat sources, labels, training Guarding Installed, over, under, around, between Forklifts Licenses, checklists, capacity, keys Lockout tagout Procedures, training, devices, tags Eye protection Used, training, Z-87 rated protectors Fire protection Extinguishers, training, locations First Aid Kits, OSHA 300 logs, training Waste disposal Containers, labeled, separated Building exterior Defective overhangs, lighting Building interior Defective overhangs, lighting Yards/roads Obstructions, housekeeping, signs Confined Spaces Marked, training, ventilation, equipment Elevators Good repair, load rating, inspected Offices Floors, aisles, exits, ventilation Power systems Mechanical, hydraulic, electrical


7

Work practices Unsafe work practices observed? (list) 4.5 Inspection report. The Safety Coordinator will develop a safety report based

on the inspection items noted during the inspection. The following items will be accomplished:

4.5.1 The report will be distributed immediately to maintenance personnel

responsible for correcting deficiencies noted during the inspection. Maintenance personnel will use the hazard classification system to prioritize deficiency correction.

4.5.2 The report will be distributed to all supervisors and key

management personnel. Supervisors will brief the results to all employees under their control. Any employee requesting to be placed on the distribution list will be accommodated.

4.5.3 The Safety Coordinator will develop a statistical analysis of

deficiencies noted to determine jobs/areas that have a high incidence of injury potential. These areas will be emphasized during inspections and meetings.

5. Safety Meetings. A well ordered flow of information is essential to a good safety program. The company, through a program of safety meetings at all levels, intends to accomplish the goals of safety awareness, education, and participation. 5.1 Safety meeting outlines. The Safety Coordinator will maintain outlines

serving various topics of importance to the safety of company employees. The outlines will be flexible. They will be intended to be adapted to the widest range of situations and groups. Supervisors can add the level of detail required to make the material completely relevant to his or employees.

5.2 Safety meeting schedules. Employees will be given safety briefings by their

respective supervisors on a(n) daily basis. Safety briefings will be given immediately:

5.2.1 Upon initial job assignment or reassignment. 5.2.2 When operational changes to equipment or the job occur. 5.2.3 When a co-worker in their department is injured. 5.2.4 When manufacturers provide safety related information pertaining to

defects, use, etc., for equipment used by H3O, Inc.. 5.3 Departmental staff meetings. Safety will be included in the agenda of all

staff meetings. The Safety Coordinator will keep department heads informed of


8

safety performance developments in the area of accident prevention, and safety. Department heads may ask the Safety Coordinator to provide safety briefings as required.

5.4 Supervisor meetings. Safety will be included in the agenda of all routine

supervisor meetings. The Safety Coordinator will keep department heads informed of safety performance developments in the area of accident prevention, and safety. Department heads will ensure the information is transmitted to supervisors for inclusion in meetings. Supervisors may ask the Safety Coordinator to provide safety briefings as required.

6. Accident and Incident Reporting. The H3O, INC. Hazard Report will be used by all employees to report potential or known hazards. The following procedures apply: 6.1 Person reporting hazard: 6.1.1 Notify supervisor of the hazard. 6.1.2 Accomplish lock-out/tag-out if required on the machine. 6.1.3 Fill out required sections of the hazard report. 6.1.4 Forward report immediately to the Safety Coordinator. 6.2 Supervisor: 6.2.1 Notify all affected workers of hazard. 6.2.2 Notify maintenance of hazard, if required. 6.2.3 Ensure hazard is properly marked and controlled. 6.2.4 Contact Safety Coordinator if needed. 7. Accident Investigation. Accident investigation is primarily a fact-finding procedure; the facts revealed are used to prevent recurrences of similar accidents. The focus of accident investigation will be to prevent future accidents and injuries to increase the safety and health of all our employees. 7.1 Immediate concerns. 7.1.1 Ensure any injured person receives proper care. 7.1.2 Ensure co-workers and personnel working with similar equipment or

in similar jobs are aware of the situation. This is to ensure that procedural problems or defects in certain models of equipment do not exist.


9

7.1.3 Start the investigation promptly. 7.2 Investigation Team. The accident investigation team will be composed of

the following:

Accident Investigation Team Title Member Project Manager ________________________________ Safety Coordinator ________________________________ Supervisor of injured employee ________________________________ Hourly Employee ________________________________ 7.3 Accident Investigation Form. A standardized investigation form which details

specific company requirements for investigation will be developed and used to gather data to determine causes and corrective actions. As a minimum the form will contain the following areas of concern.

7.3.1 Accident investigation form data. - Injured employee's name - Date and time of injury - Occupation or task being performed when injured - Shift and department - Company ID number - Employee's address - Sex/age/DOB - Social security number - Length of service - Length of time at specific job - Time shift started - Overtime length when injury occurred - Physician's and hospital name (if transported) - Type of injury - Resulting fatalities - Description and analysis of accident - Complete accident tree - Action taken to prevent recurrence and person - Employee's statement - Witnesses' statement - Employer's statement - Person completing form and date - Person reviewing form and date - _____________________________________________ - _____________________________________________


10

7.4 Reviewers. All injury investigation reports will be reviewed by a member of

management responsible for the department/section involved to ensure pertinent information in transmitted to all concerned and remedial action taken.

Accident Investigation Review Team

Title Project Manager Safety Coordinator Supervisor of injured employee Hourly Employee 7.5 Accident investigation report. The final report will be numbered in the upper

right hand corner, Page _ of _ Pages. The report will include but is not limited to the following.

7.5.1 Investigation form and pertinent data 7.5.2 Photographs/drawings/exhibits of scene 7.5.3 Narrative of accident 7.5.4 Sequence of events 7.5.5 Contributing information 7.5.6 Findings and recommendations of review team 7.5.7 Action items and completion dates 7.5.8 Responsible persons 7.5.9 Follow-up procedures to ensure completion 7.5.10 Distribution list 8. General Safety Rules for all Job Sites. The following safety rules are established by H3O, Inc. as general safety rules for all departments/sections. 8.1 Never operate any machine or equipment unless you are authorized and

trained to do so. 8.2 Do not operate defective equipment. Do not use broken hand tools. Report

them to your supervisor immediately.


11

8.3 Obtain full instructions from your supervisor before operating a machine with which you are not familiar.

8.4 Never start on any job without being completely familiar with the safety

techniques which apply to it. Check with your supervisor if in doubt. 8.5 Make sure all safety attachments are in place and properly adjusted before

operating any machine. 8.6 Do not operate any machine or equipment at unsafe speeds. Shut off

equipment which is not in use. 8.7 Wear all protective garments and equipment necessary to be safe on the

job. Wear proper PPE; sandals or other open-toed or thin-soled shoes should not be worn.

8.8 Do not wear loose, flowing clothing or long hair while operating moving

machinery. 8.9 Never repair or adjust any machine or equipment unless you are specifically

authorized to do so by your foreman. 8.10 Never oil, clean, repair, or adjust any machine while it is in motion. 8.11 Never repair or adjust any electrically driven machine without properly

locking and tagging the main switch. 8.12 Put tools and equipment away when they are not in use. 8.13 Do not lift items which are too bulky or too heavy to be handled by one

person. Ask for assistance for items over 35# 8.14 Keep all aisles, stairways, and exits clear of skids, boxes, air hoses,

equipment, and spillage. 8.15 Do not place equipment and materials so as to block emergency exit

routes, fire boxes, sprinkler shutoffs, machine or electrical control panels, or fire extinguishers.

8.16 Stack all materials neatly and make sure piles are stable. 8.17 Keep your work area, machinery and all company facilities which you use

clean and neat. 8.18 Do not participate in horseplay, or tease or otherwise distract fellow

workers. Do not run on company premises - always walk.


12

8.19 Power-truck operators must safeguard other workers at all times; workers

must show courtesy to power-truck operators. 8.20 Filing cabinets, desks, storage cabinets, and other storage devices should

have drawers closed when not in use to prevent tripping hazards. 8.21 Floor mounted extension cords should be placed so that they are flush to

the ground at all times. 8.22 Burned out light bulbs should be replaced immediately. 8.23 Frayed or damaged electrical cords should replaced. 8.24 Never take chances. If you're unsure, you’re unsafe! 8.25 Ask for help, Let good common sense be your guide. 9. Disciplinary Actions for Willful Unsafe Acts. Employee safety is paramount at H3O, Inc.. The willful commitment of an unsafe act cannot be condoned. Employees who willfully jeopardize their own or coworkers safety will be disciplined. The type of discipline can range from a verbal warning to dismissal. The company Safety Coordinator, and supervisory personnel in the administrative chain of any employee may give employees a verbal warning for a known unsafe act or procedural, or operational infraction. Disciplinary action other than a release from shift without pay must be reviewed by Safety Commtee. All supervisory personnel are held to the same standard and are subject to the same disciplinary actions. 9.1 Forms of discipline. 9.1.1 Verbal warning. The company Safety Coordinator, and supervisory

personnel in the administrative chain of any employee may give employees a verbal warning for a known unsafe act or procedural, or operational infraction. A second verbal warning in the same shift will be grounds for release from the current work shift without pay. The immediate supervisor will be consulted in all cases and will make the determination for release.

9.1.2 Written warning. A written warning will be issued automatically for a

second verbal warning for an unsafe act. The written warning will become part of the employees permanent personnel record.

9.1.3 Retraining. It must be considered that the possibility exists that lack

of proper training may be a cause of the unsafe act. Supervisors will


13

review the need for employee remedial training in their job skill code to enable them to better accomplish their jobs.

9.1.4 Dismissal hearing. The employee concerned will be notified of his

or her rights in writing at least 3 days in advance of the hearing. The employee will be told in writing of the cut-off date for submission of a rebuttal. The option of dismissal will be reviewed by Safety Committee at a dismissal hearing. The immediate supervisor will be consulted to determine if a lesser form of discipline is warranted. The employees' rebuttal (if provided) will be considered along with the severity of the act, the supervisors recommendation and any other supporting information provided at the time of the time of the hearing.

9.2 Unsafe act priority classification system. Unsafe acts will be rated according

to the following rating system. Where it is unclear where an unsafe act should be rated the next higher priority classification will be assumed. While any unsafe act is serious, this classification system will be used to gage the severity of an unsafe act for use in determining the appropriate level of disciplinary action.

9.2.1 Priority 1 Unsafe Act. The most serious type of unsafe act or

unsafe work practice that could cause loss of life, permanent disability, the loss of a body part (amputation or crippling injury), or extensive loss of structure, equipment, or material.

9.2.2 Priority 2 Unsafe Act. Unsafe act or work practice that could cause

serious injury, industrial illness, or disruptive property damage. 9.2.3 Priority 3 Unsafe Act. Unsafe act or work practice that might cause

a recordable injury or industrial illness or nondisruptive property damage. 9.2.4 Priority 4 Unsafe Act. Minor unsafe work practice infraction with

little likelihood of injury or illness. 10. Complaints/Suggestions. It is the expectation of all employees to address any complaints or suggestions they see in the workplace. The following procedures apply: 10.1 If they see an unsafe act or situation, they are expected to

immediately take any actions necessary to prevent any injuries to themselves of others.

10.2 Notify a supervisor with you concern. 10.3 Document in a manner which best suits the notifier to clearly

present His/Her complaint/suggestion. I.e. hand written letter, E-mail.


14

. 10.4 Follow up to insure the issue has been dealt with to you satisfaction. 10.5 Employee Incentive. H3O, Inc. understands it’s difficult for some to come forward and address their Complaints/Suggestions, so we recognize them with praise and small prizes to incurrage them to be an active participant in building a SAFE, STRONG and SUCCESFULL work Place. 11. Posting Requirements

11.1 Employers are responsible for keeping employees informed about OSHA and about the various safety and health matters with which they are involved. Federal OSHA and states with their own occupational safety and health programs require that each employer post certain materials at a prominent location in the workplace. These postings include

11.2 Job Safety and Health Protection workplace poster (OSHA 2203 or state equivalent) informing employees of their rights and responsibilities under the Act. Besides displaying the workplace poster, the employer must make available to employees, upon request, copies of the Act and copies of relevant OSHA rules and regulations. Any official edition of the poster is acceptable.

11.3 Summaries of petitions for variances from standards or recordkeeping procedures.

11.3.1 Copies of all OSHA citations for violations of standards. These must remain posted at or near the location of alleged violations for three days, or until the violations are corrected, whichever is longer.

11.3.2 Log and Summary of Occupational Injuries and Illnesses (OSHA No. 200). The summary page of the log must be posted no later than February 1, and must remain in place until March 1rst.

11.4 Employee Rights to Exposure Monitoring Records

11.4.1 All employees have the right to examine any records kept by their employers regarding their exposure to hazardous materials, or the results of medical surveillance. Occasionally, OSHA standards or NIOSH research activities will require an employer to measure and record employee exposure to potentially harmful substances. Employees have the right (in person or through their authorized representative) to be present during the measuring as well as to examine records of the results.


15

11.4.2 Under these substance-specific requirements, each employee or former employee has the right to see his or her examination records. The employee must be told by the employer if exposure has exceeded the levels established by the standards. The employee must also be told what corrective measures are being taken.

11.4.3 In addition to having access to records, employees in manufacturing facilities must be provided information about all of the hazardous chemicals in their work areas in accordance with the OSHA Hazard Communication standard. Employers are to provide this information by means of labels on containers, material safety data sheets, and training programs at a minimum.

WRITTEN POLICY / PROCEDURES

STANDARD PRACTICE INSTRUCTION

DATE: FEBRUARY 27, 2009 SUBJECT: Occupational Exposure to Asbestos REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.1028, Asbestos OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.1000, Air Contaminants OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.1200, Hazard Communication OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.132-138, Personal Protective

Equipment BASIS: The purpose of this program is to establish guidelines and procedures in the operations and maintenance of asbestos containing materials at H3O, INC. to protect all employees, contractors, visitors and vendors from potential health hazards of asbestos related diseases. This Program applies to all buildings and structures owned by H3O, INC., to all employees and sub contractors of H3O, INC., to occupants of H3O, INC. buildings and to external organizations who may come into contact with or disturb asbestos-containing material in H3O, INC. buildings. The Program applies to routine work during which an employee might encounter asbestos as well as work undertaken to repair or remove asbestos-containing material.


16

Contents of the Asbestos Program 1. Written Program

2. Hazard Overview

3. Health Affects

4. OSHA Overview

5. General Rules H3O, INC. Asbestos Safety Program 1. Written Program. H3O, INC. will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction in accordance with the following:

1. On an annual basis. 2. When changes occur to governing regulatory sources that require revision. 3. When changes occur to related company procedures that require a revision. 4. When facility operational changes occur that requires a revision. 5. When there is an accident or close-call that relates to this area of safety. 6. Anytime the procedures fail.

2. Hazard Overview. Asbestos is a widely used, mineral-based material that is resistant to heat and corrosive chemicals. Depending on the chemical composition, fibers may range in texture from course to silky. The properties that make asbestos fibers so valuable to industry are it’s high-tensile strength, flexibility, heat and chemical resistance, and good frictional properties. Asbestos is a common, naturally occurring group of fibrous minerals. Asbestos fibers have been used in a variety of building materials, however, H3O, INC. takes an aggressive effort to use non-asbestos containing materials in new construction and renovation projects. Generally, most asbestos is found in pipe insulation, doors, textured paints and plasters, structural fireproofing, and floor tiles. Friable asbestos (that is, material that contains more than 0.1% asbestos by weight and can be crumbled by hand) is a potential hazard because it can release fibers into the air if damaged. 3. Health Affects. Asbestos fibers enter the body through inhalation of airborne particles or by ingestion and can become embedded in the tissues of respiratory or digestive systems. Years of exposure to asbestos can cause numerous disabling or fatal diseases. Among these diseases are asbestosis, an emphysema-like condition; lung cancer; mesothelioma, a cancerous tumor that spreads rapidly in the cells of membranes covering the lungs and body organs; and gastrointestinal cancer. Routes of entry into the body are primarily by Inhalation. 3.1 Long and short term exposure. Long term exposure to airborne asbestos is

necessary for chronic lung disease. Asbestos-related cancers tend to result from substantial long-term exposure, however, mesothelioma may result from much smaller exposures to asbestos.


17

4. OSHA Overview. Since 1972 OSHA has regulated asbestos exposure in general industry thereby causing a significant decline in the use of asbestos-containing materials. The OSHA standards are designed to protect workers who may be exposed to asbestos-containing materials. In addition, OSHA Standards also include provisions that apply to workers performing brake and clutch repair and to those doing housekeeping in buildings and facilities where asbestos-containing materials exist. 5. General Rules.

5.1 When in doubt, treat all material as containing asbestos and comply with all applicable rules and regulations and protective measures.

5.2 Asbestos removal by H3O personnel is strictly prohibited. Under no circumstance shall an employ attempt to touch, disturb or remove it. Should we come across some material we suspect to be asbestos we will immediately put warning tape around the material, and contact the client’s representative so they can arrange for verification and disposal of the material.

5.3 H3O, Inc. shall ensure that our employees understand and comply with the restrictions and prohibitions of the Host employer's Asbestos Policies.


18


DATE: June 10, 2009 SUBJECT: Occupational Exposure to Benzene REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.1028, Benzene OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.1000, Air Contaminants OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.1200, Hazard Communication OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.132-138, Personal Protective Equipment BASIS: Benzene affects primarily the respiratory system. Benzene is also a highly flammable liquid. Systemic absorption may cause various blood disorders including, pancytopenia, aplastic anemia, and leukemia. Inhalation and skin absorption of high concentrations can affect central nervous system function. Aspiration of small amounts of liquid benzene immediately causes pulmonary edema and hemorrhage of pulmonary tissue. This poses a serious problem for exposed workers and their employer. Various OSHA Standards establish uniform requirements to ensure that the hazards of toxic and flammable liquids in U.S. workplaces are evaluated, safety procedures are implemented, and that the proper hazard information is transmitted to all affected workers. GENERAL: H3O Inc will ensure that all potential sources of Benzene within our facility(s) or host employers are evaluated. This standard practice instruction is intended to address comprehensively the issues of; evaluating and identifying potential sources of Benzene, evaluating the associated potential hazards, communicating information concerning these hazards, and establishing appropriate procedures, and protective measures for employees.

Contents of the Benzene Safety Program 1. Written Program. 2. Related Programs. 3. Hazard Overview. 4. Health Affects. 5. OSHA Overview. 6. DOT Overview. 7. NFPA Overview. 8. General Requirements. 9. Employee Notification and Signage. 10. Training. 11. Retraining. 12. Work Operations. 13. Monitoring and Medical Surveillance. 14. Spill and Leak Procedures. 15. Emergency First Aid Procedures. 16. Protective Clothing and Equipment.


19

17. Tool Selection, Evaluation, Condition. 18. Work Practices. 19. Medical Surveillance.

H3O Inc Benzene Safety Program 1. Written Program. H3O Inc will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction in accordance with the following:

On an annual basis. When changes occur to governing regulatory sources that require revision. When changes occur to related company procedures that require a revision. When facility operational changes occur that require a revision. When there is an accident or close-call that relates to this area of safety. Anytime the procedures fail.

Effective implementation of this program requires support from all levels of management. This written program will be communicated to all personnel that are affected by it. It encompasses the total workplace, regardless of the number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals and objectives. 2. Related Programs. The following safety programs are to be used in consonance with this program:

OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.1000, Air Contaminants OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.1200, Hazard Communication OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.132-138, Personal Protective Equipment

3. Hazard Overview. Benzene is a clear, colorless liquid with a pleasant, sweet odor. The odor of benzene does not provide adequate warning of its hazard. Benzene can affect your health if you inhale it, or if it comes in contact with your skin or eyes. Benzene is also harmful if you happen to swallow it. Routes of entry into the body include; Inhalation and skin absorption. 4. Health Affects. 4.1 Short-term (acute) overexposure: If you are overexposed to high

concentrations of benzene, well above the levels where its odor is first recognizable, you may feel breathless, irritable, euphoric, or giddy; you may experience irritation in eyes, nose, and respiratory tract. You may develop a headache, feel dizzy, nauseated, or intoxicated. Severe exposures to benzene may cause convulsions and loss of consciousness.


20

4.2 Long-term (chronic) exposure: Repeated or prolonged exposure to benzene, even at relatively low concentrations, may result in various blood disorders, ranging from anemia to leukemia, an irreversible, fatal disease. Many blood disorders associated with benzene exposure may occur without symptoms.

5. OSHA Overview. Benzene is available industrially, mainly as a clear, colorless water-insoluble liquid that vaporizes readily at room temperature conditions. When exposed to an ignition source, a mixture of benzene vapor and air burns readily with a very sooty flame. In the workplace, OSHA regulates the exposure of employees to Benzene. Benzene is formerly recognized as a popular industrial solvent, but no longer. Benzene is now recognized as a human carcinogen, causing a number of health problems. OSHA stipulates a permissible exposure limit of 1 ppm as an 8-hour time-weighted average. 6. DOT Overview. The Department of Transportation regulates Benzene as a flammable liquid. Containers are labeled as FLAMMABLE LIQUID, and their transport vehicles are similarly placarded. 7. NFPA Overview.

Description: Clear, colorless liquid with a distinctive sweet odor. Fire and Explosion Hazard: Flammable liquid. Vapors form flammable mixture in air. Flammable Range: Lower: 1.3%, Upper: 7.5%. Ignition Temperature: 580 degrees (C) (1076 Degrees (F). Vapor Density: 2.7, (vapors are heavier than air) (air = 1.0) will seek lower areas. Boiling Point: 80.1 deg. C (176 deg. F). Chemical Abstract Service (CAS) Number: 71-43-2.

8. General Requirements. H3O Inc will establish Benzene operational procedures through the use of this document. 8.1 Facility Evaluation. This employer shall evaluate our facility(s) to determine

if any work area meets the criteria for designation as a Regulated Benzene Hazard Area.

8.2 Regulated areas. This employer shall establish a regulated area wherever

the airborne concentration of benzene exceeds or can reasonably be expected to exceed the permissible exposure limits, either the 8-hour time weighted average exposure of 1 ppm or the short-term exposure limit of 5 ppm for 15 minutes.

9. Employee Notification and Signage. This employer shall post signs at entrances to regulated areas. The signs shall bear the following legend:

DANGER


21

BENZENE CANCER HAZARD

FLAMMABLE - NO SMOKING AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY

RESPIRATOR REQUIRED 9.1 Containers. This employer shall ensure that labels or other appropriate

forms of warning are provided for containers of benzene within the workplace. There is no requirement to label pipes. The labels shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.1200 (Hazard Communication Standard) and in addition shall include the following legend:

DANGER CONTAINS BENZENE

CANCER HAZARD 10. Training. 10.1 Types of training. The company will determine whether training required for

specific jobs will be conducted in a classroom or on-the-job. The degree of training provided shall be determined by the complexity of the job and the Benzene exposure hazards associated with the individual job.

10.1.1 Initial Training. Prior to job assignment, this employer shall

provide training to ensure that the hazards associated with Benzene are understood by employees and that the knowledge, skills and personal protective equipment required are acquired by employees. The training shall as a minimum include the following:

10.1.1.1 Each authorized employee shall receive training in the

recognition of applicable hazards involved with the particular job and job site, as well as the methods and means necessary for safe work.

10.1.1.2 The specific nature of the operation which could result in

exposure to Benzene. 10.1.1.3 The purpose, proper selection, fitting, use and limitation of

personal protective equipment (PPE). 10.1.1.4 The adverse health effects associated with excessive

exposure to Benzene. 10.1.1.5 The engineering controls and work practices associated

with the employee's job assignment, including training of employees to follow relevant good work practices.


22

10.1.1.6 The contents of any compliance plan in effect. 10.1.1.7 The requirements of the Hazard Communication Standard

under 29 CFR 1910.1200. 10.1.1.8 The employee's right of access to records under

29 CFR 1910.20. 10.1.1.9 The medical surveillance program in place at this facility

used to determine Benzene exposure. 10.1.2 Refresher Training. Scheduled refresher training will be conducted

on a(n) annual basis. 11. Retraining.

11.1 Retraining shall be provided for all affected employees as a minimum whenever:

11.1.1 There is a change in job assignments. 11.1.2 There is a change in personal protective equipment. 11.1.3 There is a change in equipment that presents a new hazard. 11.1.4 There is a change in processes that presents a new hazard. 11.1.5 Their work takes them into hazardous or regulated area. 11.1.6 There is a change in Benzene safety procedures. 11.1.7 Safety procedure fails resulting in a near-miss, illness, or injury.

11.2 Additional retraining. Additional retraining shall also be conducted whenever a periodic inspection reveals, or whenever this employer has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge of known hazards, or use of equipment or procedures.

11.3 The retraining shall reestablish employee proficiency and introduce new

equipment, or revised control methods and procedures, as necessary. 11.4 Certification. This employer shall certify that employee training has been

accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification shall contain a synopsis of the training conducted, each employee's name, and dates of training.


23

12. Work operations. 12.1 Work operations at this facility will not encounter Benzene. However it may

be present in some of our clients facilities such as Petroleum refining sites, Tank Gauging (tanks producing pipeline & refining operations) or field maintenance.

12.2 The equipment and materials used to accomplish work operations are

those normally associated with are unknown at this time. 12.3 Employee crew size will vary and employee job responsibilities will be that

of their craft as stated in the company's policy manual. Specific additional responsibilities will be:

12.3.1 Superintendent/General Supervisor.

12.3.1.1 Monitors procedure to ensure compliance with this work practice.

12.3.2 Supervisors.

12.3.2.1 Ensures that the initial determination for potential Benzene or toxic exposure has been accomplished before work begins. 12.3.2.2 Supervises the safe performance of work in accordance with this and other related work practices. 12.3.2.3 Assigns jobs only to qualified employees.

12.3.3 Employees.

12.3.3.1 Uses the protective and safety equipment as assigned and directed. 12.3.3.2 Be aware of Owners contingency plan provisions. Employees will be informed where benzene is used in host facility and aware of additional plant safety rules.

13. Monitoring and Medical Surveillance. This employer shall monitor our workplace and work operations to determine accurately the airborne concentrations of benzene to which employees may be exposed. 13.1 Initial monitoring. Initial monitoring will be completed within 30 days of the

introduction of benzene into the workplace.


24

13.2 Periodic monitoring and monitoring frequency. If the monitoring reveals employee exposure at or above the action level but at or below the TWA, the monitoring will be repeated each such employee at least every year.

13.3 Exposures above TWA. If the monitoring reveals employee exposure

above the TWA, the monitoring will be repeated for each such employee at least every six (6) months.

13.4 Exposures at or below the TWA. The monitoring schedule may be reduced

from every six months to annually for any employee for whom two consecutive measurements taken at least 7 days apart indicate that the employee exposure has decreased to the TWA or below, but is at or above the action level.

13.5 Termination of monitoring. If the initial reveals employee exposure to be

below the action level, the monitoring may be discontinued for that employee, except as otherwise required.

14. Spill and Leak Procedures

14.1 Persons not wearing protective equipment and clothing will be restricted from areas of spills or leaks until cleanup has been completed. 14.2 Emergency Containment. Benzene exposure can be hazardous. Only authorized and trained emergency response personnel should attempt containment. If you are not trained in containment of Benzene, evacuate the area in accordance with established procedures. If Benzene is spilled or leaked the following steps as a minimum should be taken.

14.2.1 Remove all ignition sources. 14.2.2 Ventilate the area of the spill or leak to disperse vapors. 14.2.3 If possible, stop flow of liquid, allow to vaporize. 14.2.4 Use containment equipment such as dikes, compatible absorbent materials, etc. 14.2.5 Use non-sparking tools and explosion proof equipment at all times in the spill area.

15. Emergency First Aid Procedures. In the event of an emergency, institute first aid procedures and send for first aid or medical assistance in accordance with local procedures. Dial ________ (9-1-1 or detail other) for emergency response personnel.


25

15.1 Eye Exposure: Wash immediately with large amounts of water for at least 15 minutes. Lifting the lower and upper lids occasionally, get medical attention as soon as possible. 15.2 Skin Exposure: Immediately flush with copious amounts of water. Remove any clothing contaminated, and flush exposed skin areas, get medical attention as soon as possible. 15.3 Swallowing Exposure: If benzene has been swallowed and the patient is conscious, do not induce vomiting. Call for medical assistance or a doctor immediately. 15.4 Respiratory Exposure: Get the victim to open, fresh air immediately. If breathing has stopped perform CPR. Keep the victim warm and at rest. Get medical attention as soon as possible. 15.5 Rescue Considerations. Don’t become a second victim. Move the affected person from the hazardous area. If the exposed person has been overcome, initiate local emergency notification procedures. Never enter any vessel or confined space where the benzene concentration might be high enough to displace air or create an explosive atmosphere without proper training, equipment and procedures. Understand the facility’s emergency rescue procedures and know the locations of rescue equipment before the need arises.

16. Protective Clothing and Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Where engineering controls, administrative controls, and job hazard analyses do not eliminate all job hazards, employees will (where appropriate) wear personal protective equipment (PPE). 16.1 These include items such as caps, hair nets, face shields, safety goggles,

glasses, hearing protection, foot guards, gloves, sleeves, aprons, respirators etc. Supervisors will ensure that equipment selected will meet the following requirements:

16.1.1 It will be appropriate for the particular hazard. 16.1.2 It will be maintained in good condition. 16.1.3 It will be properly stored when not in use, to prevent damage or loss. 16.1.4 It will be kept clean, fully functional and sanitary.

16.2 Hazards associated with wear of protective clothing, PPE, personal clothing

and jewelry. Protective clothing and PPE can present additional safety hazards.


26

Supervisors will ensure workers wear appropriate clothing and PPE. These items will be worn so as not create additional hazards.

16.2.1 Personal clothing and jewelry. Personal clothing and jewelry will be monitored by the immediate supervisor. Clothing or jewelry that could become entangled in tools, equipment or machinery or of an excessively flammable nature will be prohibited.

16.3 Respirators. Respirators are required for those operations in which

engineering controls or work practice controls are not feasible to reduce exposure to the permissible level. If it can be documented that benzene is present in the workplace less than 30 days a year, respirators may be used in lieu of engineering controls. If you experience difficulty breathing while wearing a respirator, you may request a positive pressure respirator. Contact your supervisor immediately.

16.4 Protective Clothing. You must wear appropriate protective clothing (such

as boots, gloves, sleeves, aprons, etc.) over any parts of your body that could be exposed to liquid benzene.

16.5 Eye and Face Protection. You must wear splash-proof safety goggles if it

is possible that benzene may get into your eyes. In addition, you must wear a face shield if your face could be splashed with benzene liquid.

16.6 Documentation. PPE requirements will be documented on a “Protective

Measures Determination” form and properly filed. 17. Tool Selection, Evaluation and Condition. The greatest hazards posed by tools usually result from misuse and/or improper maintenance. Tool selection sometimes is not considered a priority when arrangements are made to begin work. All employees will consider the following when selecting tools: 17.1 Is the tool correct for the type work to be performed? 17.2 Are grounding methods sufficient when working in wet conditions? 17.3 Does the tool create sparks or heat? Has this been considered when

working around flammable substances? 17.4 Are tools stored properly when not being used? 17.5 Have tools been modified beyond the manufacturers specification? If so,

have the modifications been approved by a “competent person”? 18. Work Practices. Benzene liquid is highly flammable. It should be stored in tightly closed containers in a cool, well ventilated area. Benzene vapor may form explosive


27

mixtures in air. All sources of ignition must be controlled. Use nonsparking tools when opening or closing benzene containers. Fire extinguishers, where provided, must be readily available. Know where they are located and how to operate them. Smoking is prohibited in areas where benzene is used or stored. Ask your supervisor where benzene is used in your area and for additional facility safety rules.

19. Medical Surveillance. The medical surveillance provisions of this standard practice instruction are intended to provide our employees with a comprehensive approach to prevention of benzene-related illnesses or disease. The primary purpose is to supplement the OSHA standard's primary mechanisms of disease and illness prevention, the elimination or reduction of benzene exposure, by facilitating the early detection of medical effects associated with exposure to benzene. The medical surveillance program is in place for employees who are or may be exposed to benzene at or above the action level 30 or more days per year; and for employees who are or may be exposed to benzene at or above the PELs 10 or more days per year; for employees who have been exposed to more than 10 ppm of benzene for 30 or more days in a year. 19.1 All medical examinations and procedures will be performed by or under the

supervision of a licensed physician and are to be provided without cost to employees at a reasonable time and place.

19.2 Initial and periodic examinations. Will be conducted before the time of

initial assignment of work where benzene hazards are present this employer shall provide each employee with a medical examination in accordance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.1028.

19.3 Emergency examinations. In addition to the initial and periodic examination

and surveillance, if an employee is exposed to benzene in an emergency situation, the employee will be asked to provide a urine sample at the end of the employee's shift and have a urinary phenol test performed on the sample within 72 hours. The urine specific gravity shall be corrected to 1.024. If the result of the urinary phenol test is below 75 mg phenol/L of urine, no further testing is required. If the result of the urinary phenol test is equal to or greater than 75 mg phenol/L of urine, this employer shall provide the employee with a complete blood count including an erythrocyte count, leukocyte count with differential and thrombocyte count at monthly intervals for a duration of three (3) months following the emergency exposure.


28


DATE: June 12, 2009 SUBJECT: Occupational Exposure to Cadmium REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA – Industrial: 29 CFR 1910.1027 Construction: 29 CFR 1926.63 BASIS: Cadmium is an extremely toxic metal commonly found in industrial workplaces, particularly where any ore is being processed or smelted. Due to its low Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL), overexposures may occur even in situations where trace quantities of cadmium are found in the parent ore or smelter dust. Several deaths from acute exposure have occurred among welders who have unsuspectingly welded on cadmium-containing alloys or working with silver solders. Cadmium is also found in industrial paints and may represent a hazard when sprayed. Operations involving the use of cadmium or where a dosage of Cadmium is received as a result of a related operation similarly pose a significant hazard. This poses a serious problem for exposed workers and their employer. This standard practice instruction establishes uniform requirements to ensure that procedures within this company to limit the spread of such hazards are implemented, evaluated, and that the proper hazard information is transmitted to all affected workers. GENERAL: H3O Inc will ensure that all potential cadmium exposure hazards within our facility(s) are evaluated and controlled. This standard practice instruction is intended to address comprehensively the issues of; evaluating and identifying potential sources of cadmium exposure, evaluating engineering controls, work practices, administrative controls, medical management, training, and establishing appropriate procedures.


29

Contents of the Cadmium Safety Program 1. Written Program Requirements. 2. General Requirements. 3. Exposure Monitoring. 4. Regulated Areas. 5. Job Classification and Exposure Control. 6. Training. 7. Work Operations. 8. Medical Surveillance. 9. Ventilation Requirements. 10. Respiratory Protection. 11. Protective Clothing and Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). 12. Hygiene Areas and Practices. 13. Communication Of Cadmium Hazards To Employees. 14. Recordkeeping Requirements. 15. Definitions.

H3O Inc Cadmium Safety Program 1. Written Program Requirements.

1.1 Written Program Review. H3O Inc will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction in accordance with the following:

1.1.1 On an annual basis. 1.1.2 When changes occur to governing regulatory sources that require revision. 1.1.3 When changes occur to related company procedures that require a revision. 1.1.4 When facility operational changes occur that require a revision. 1.1.5 When there is an accident or close-call that relates to this area of safety. 1.1.6 Anytime the procedures fail.


30

1.2 Supervisors of this company will develop and maintain the following for each job where cadmium is emitted.

1.2.1 A description of each job. 1.2.2 A list of machinery used in the job. 1.2.3 Types of materials processed. 1.2.4 Exposure controls that are in place. 1.2.5 Crew size (if applicable). 1.2.6 Employee job responsibilities. 1.2.7 Operating procedures specific to the job. 1.2.8 Maintenance practices specific to the job. 1.2.9 Means to achieve compliance with a specific job.

1.3 Means to achieve compliance. Each job where cadmium is emitted will have a written description of the specific means that will be employed to achieve compliance, including engineering plans and studies used to determine methods selected for controlling exposure to cadmium. 1.4 Technology. Any reports of the technology considered by this company to achieve compliance will be maintained as long as is appropriate. 1.5 Air monitoring data. Any air monitoring data which documents the source of cadmium emissions will be maintained. 1.6 Implementation schedules. Data which supports the implementation of this program or equipment upgrades will be maintained as long as appropriate. 1.7 Administrative controls. Job rotation will not be used as a means of reducing employees TWA exposure to cadmium.

1.8 Written program distribution. Effective implementation of this program requires support from all levels of management. This written program will be communicated to all personnel that are affected by it. It encompasses the total workplace, regardless of the number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals and objectives.


31

2. General Requirements. OSHA guidelines require that each employer who has employee(s) with potential occupational exposure to cadmium prepare an exposure determination. This exposure determination shall contain the following:

2.1 A list of job classifications for all employees whose job classifications have occupational exposure. 2.2 A list of job classifications in which some employees have occupational exposure. 2.3 A list of all tasks and procedures or groups of closely related tasks and procedures in which occupational exposure occurs and that are performed by employees in job classifications listed in accordance with the provisions of the this standard practice instruction. 2.4 The schedule and method of implementation, methods of compliance, Communication of Hazards and record keeping required by 29 CFR 1910.1025. 2.5 The procedure for the evaluation of circumstances surrounding incidents. 2.6 Methods of compliance.

3. Exposure Monitoring. Jobs or areas having the potential for employee exposure to Cadmium at or above the action levels identified in 29CFR1910.1027 will be sampled to ensure no employee is exposed to hazardous levels of cadmium. Sampling will be done in accordance with the provisions of 29CFR1910.1027.

3.1 Exposure Limits – Action Level (AL). 2.5 ug/m3 (two and on half micrograms per cubic meter of air) , the AL is the exposure level at which OSHA regulations take effect and the lower limit where an occupational health risk could occur. The AL is generally one-half of the PEL. 3.2 Exposure Limits – Permissible Exposure Limits (PEL). 5 ug/m3 (five micrograms per cubic meter of air) (TWA), PEL is a time-weighted average (TWA) or absolute value (usually prescribed by regulation) setting out the maximum permitted exposure to a hazardous chemical. This value is generally twice the PEL. 3.3 Determinations of employee exposure. Exposure determinations will be made from breathing zone air samples that reflect the monitored employee's regular, daily 8-hour TWA exposure to cadmium. 3.4 Eight-hour TWA’s. Eight-hour TWA exposures shall be determined for each employee on the basis of one or more personal breathing zone air samples reflecting full shift exposure on each shift, for each job classification, in each work area. Where several employees perform the same job tasks, in the same job


32

classification, on the same shift, in the same work area, and the length, duration, and level of cadmium exposures are similar, a representative fraction of the employees may be sampled instead of all employees in order to meet this requirement. In representative sampling, the sample having the highest cadmium exposure will be used to determine employee protective measures. 3.5 Initial monitoring. Eight-hour TWA exposures will be determined for each employee on the basis of one or more personal breathing zone air samples reflecting full shift exposure on each shift, for each job classification where cadmium is known or suspected to be present. Where objective data is present demonstrating that employee exposure to cadmium will not exceed the action level under the expected conditions of processing, use, or handling, this data may be relied upon instead of implementing initial monitoring. 3.6 Monitoring frequency. If the initial monitoring or periodic monitoring reveals employee exposures to be at or above the action level, this employer shall monitor at a frequency and pattern needed to represent the levels of exposure of employees and where exposures are above the PEL to assure the adequacy of respiratory selection and the effectiveness of engineering and work practice controls. Such exposure monitoring shall be performed at least every six months. As a minimum, monitoring will continue semi-annually until the action levels are met. 3.7 Discontinuance of monitoring. If the initial monitoring or the periodic monitoring indicates that employee exposures are below the action level and that result is confirmed by the results of another monitoring taken at least seven days later, the employer may discontinue the monitoring for those employees whose exposures are represented by such monitoring.

3.8 Additional monitoring. Additional monitoring will be instituted whenever there has been a change in the raw materials, equipment, personnel, work practices, or finished products that may result in additional employees being exposed to cadmium at or above the action level or in employees already exposed to cadmium at or above the action level being exposed above the PEL, or whenever the employer has any reason to suspect that any other change might result in such further exposure.

3.9 Employee notification of monitoring results. The employee will be notified within 15 working days after the receipt of the results of any monitoring. The employee will be notified either individually in writing or by posting the results in an appropriate location that is accessible to employees. Wherever monitoring results indicate that employee exposure exceeds the PEL, the notification will include in the written notice a statement that the PEL has been exceeded and a description of the corrective action being taken to reduce exposure to or below the PEL.


33

3.10 Observation of monitoring. Employees will afforded the opportunity to observe workplace monitoring for cadmium exposure.

3.10.1 Employee observation. Affected employees or their designated representatives will be afforded an opportunity to observe any monitoring of employee exposure to cadmium. 3.10.2 Observation procedures. When observation of monitoring requires entry into an area where the use of protective clothing or equipment is required, observers will be provided with clothing and equipment that complies with all applicable safety and health procedures.

4. Regulated Areas. Regulated areas will be established wherever an employee's exposure to airborne concentrations of cadmium is, or can reasonably be expected to be in excess of the permissible exposure limit (PEL).

4.1 Demarcation. Regulated areas will be demarcated from the rest of the workplace in any manner that adequately establishes and alerts employees of the boundaries of the regulated area. 4.2 Access. Access to regulated areas will be limited to authorized persons. 4.3 Respiratory protection. Each person entering a regulated area shall be supplied with and required to use a respirator, selected in accordance with the provisions of this standard practice instruction and 29CFR1910.1027. 4.4 Prohibited activities. Employees are not permitted to eat, drink, smoke, chew tobacco or gum, or apply cosmetics in regulated areas, carry the products associated with these activities into regulated areas, or store such products in those areas.

5. Job Classification and Exposure Control.

5.1 Job Classifications in Which All Employees in Those Classifications Have Occupational Exposure.

5.1.1 ____NONE______________________________________.

5.2 Job Classifications in Which Some Employees Have Occupational Exposure:

5.2.1 ____NONE______________________________________.


34

6. Training. A training program will be implemented for all employees who are potentially exposed to cadmium. This company will assure employee participation in the program, and maintain a record of the contents of such program.

6.1 Types of training. The company will determine whether training required for specific jobs will be conducted in a classroom or on-the-job. The degree of training provided shall be determined by the complexity of the job and the cadmium exposure hazards associated with the individual job.

6.1.1 Initial Training. Prior to job assignment, this employer shall provide training to ensure that the hazards associated with cadmium are understood by employees and that the knowledge, skills and personal protective equipment required are acquired by employees. The training shall as a minimum include the following:

6.1.1.1 The health hazards associated with cadmium exposure.

6.1.1.2 The quantity, location, manner of use, release, and storage of cadmium in the workplace and the specific nature of operations that could result in exposure to cadmium, especially exposures above the PEL.

6.1.1.3 The engineering controls and work practices associated with the employee's job assignment. 6.1.1.4 The measures employees can take to protect themselves from exposure to cadmium, including modification of such habits as smoking and personal hygiene, and specific procedures the employer has implemented to protect employees from exposure to cadmium such as appropriate work practices, emergency procedures, and the provision of personal protective equipment. 6.1.1.5 The purpose, proper selection, fitting, proper use, and limitations of respirators and protective clothing. 6.1.1.6 The purpose and a description of the company medical surveillance program. 6.1.1.7 The contents of 29CFR1910.1027 and its appendices. 6.1.1.8 The employee's rights of access to records under 29CFR1910.1020.


35

6.1.1.9 The specific nature of the operation which could result in exposure to cadmium above the action level. 6.1.1.10 The engineering controls and work practices associated with the employee's job assignment, including training of employees to follow relevant good work practices. 6.1.1.11 The company shall make readily available to all affected employees a copy of 29 CFR 1910.1027 and all other pertinent information upon request. 6.1.1.12 The contents of any compliance plan in effect.

6.1.2 Refresher Training. Scheduled refresher training will be conducted on a(n) annual basis.

6.1.2.1 Retraining shall be provided for all authorized and affected employees whenever there is a change in their job assignments, a change in personal protective equipment, equipment or processes that present a new hazard, when their work takes them into hazardous areas, or when there is a change in the cadmium safety procedures. Retraining will also be provided whenever a safety procedure fails resulting in a near-miss, illness, or injury. 6.1.2.2 Additional retraining shall also be conducted whenever a periodic inspection reveals, or whenever this employer has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge of known hazards, or use of equipment or procedures. 6.1.2.3 The retraining shall reestablish employee proficiency and introduce new equipment, or revised control methods and procedures, as necessary.

6.1.3 Certification. This employer shall certify that employee training has been accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification shall contain a synopsis of the training conducted, each employee's name, and dates of training.

7. Work Operations.

7.1 Work operations at this facility in which cadmium may be encountered involve NONE_


36

7.2 The equipment and materials used to accomplish work operations are those normally associated with (UNKNOWN) 7.3 Employee crew size will vary and employee job responsibilities will be that of their craft as stated in the company's policy manual. Specific additional responsibilities will be:

7.3.1 Superintendent/General Supervisor

7.3.1.1 Monitors procedure to ensure compliance with this work practice and 29 CFR 1910.1027.

7.3.2 Supervisors

7.3.2.1 Ensures that the initial determination for potential cadmium or toxic exposure has been accomplished before work begins. 7.3.2.2 Supervises the safe performance of work in accordance with this and other work practices and 29 CFR 1910.1027. 7.3.2.3 Assigns jobs only to qualified employees.

7.3.3 Employee

7.3.3.1 Uses the protective and safety equipment as assigned and directed. 7.3.3.2 Abides by the requirements of this standard practice instruction. 7.3.3.3 Participates in the biological monitoring.

7.3.4 Company Safety Director

7.3.4.1 Coordinates the requirements of this program in accordance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.1027.

NOTE:

- The medical surveillance section of 29CFR.1910.1027 is quite extensive. In the interest maintaining a concise, practical document for use by all employees and not duplicating large amounts of the regulation, it is not detailed in its entirety below. In the interest of simplicity it may be advisable to reference the OSHA Standard rather than detail the full requirements of the Regulation in this document since this section of the Regulation is directed toward Industrial Hygienists and Medical Providers. Employees interested in reading the section can reference the Regulation.


37

8. Medical Surveillance. The medical surveillance provisions of this standard practice instruction are intended to provide our employees with a comprehensive approach to prevention of cadmium-related disease. The primary purpose is to supplement the OSHA standard's primary mechanisms of disease and illness prevention, the elimination or reduction of airborne concentrations of cadmium and sources of ingestion, by facilitating the early detection of medical effects associated with exposure to cadmium. Note To Employees: The medical surveillance section of 29CFR.1910.1027 is quite extensive. In the interest maintaining a concise, practical document for use by all employees and not duplicating large amounts of the regulation, it is not detailed in its entirety below. Employees interested in reading the section can reference the Regulation. A copy of the Regulation may be obtain by contacting the office.

8.1 All medical examinations and procedures will be performed by or under the supervision of a licensed physician and are to be provided without cost to employees at a reasonable time and place. 8.2 Two phases of surveillance. The medical surveillance provisions contemplate two phases of medical surveillance; one is initial medical surveillance, the other is a medical surveillance program.

8.2.1 Currently exposed - This employer shall institute a medical surveillance program for all employees who are or may be exposed to cadmium at or above the action level unless it can be demonstrated that the employee is not, and will not be, exposed at or above the action level on 30 or more days per year (twelve consecutive months). 8.2.2 Previously exposed - This employer shall institute a medical surveillance program for all employees who might previously have been exposed to cadmium at or above the action level, unless it has been demonstrated that the employee did not work with exposure to cadmium for an aggregated total of more than 60 months.

8.3 Initial medical examination. This employer shall provide an initial (preplacement) examination to all employees covered by the medical surveillance program. The examination shall be provided to those employees within 30 days after initial assignment to a job with exposure to cadmium. The initial (preplacement) medical examination shall include:

8.3.1 Medical and work history. A detailed medical and work history, with emphasis on: past, present, and anticipated future exposure to cadmium; any history of renal, cardiovascular, respiratory, hematopoietic, reproductive, and/or musculo-skeletal system dysfunction; current usage of medication with potential nephrotoxic side-effects; and smoking history


38

and current status; and Biological monitoring that includes the following tests: - Cadmium in urine (CdU), standardized to grams of creatinine (g/Cr). - Beta-2 microglobulin in urine (B(2)-M), standardized to grams of creatinine (g/Cr), with pH specified, as described in Appendix F of 29CFR1910.1027. - Cadmium in blood (CdB), standardized to liters of whole blood (lwb). 8.3.2 Recent examinations. An initial examination is not required to be provided if adequate records show that the employee has been examined in accordance with the requirements of 29CFR1910.1027 within the past 12 months. In that case, such records shall be maintained as part of the employee's medical record and the prior exam shall be treated as if it were an initial examination for the purposes of this program. 8.3.3 Actions triggered by initial biological monitoring: If the results of the initial biological monitoring tests show the employee's CdU level to be at or below 3 ug/g Cr, B(2)-M level to be at or below 300 ug/g Cr and CdB level to be at or below 5 ug/lwb, then:

8.4 follow-on medical examinations.

8.4.1 Currently exposed employees. For currently exposed employees, who are subject to medical surveillance under 29CFR1910.1027, this employer shall provide periodic medical surveillance in accordance with the requirements 29CFR1910.1027 (too detailed to mention here).

8.4.2 Previously exposed employees. For previously exposed employees, who are subject to medical surveillance under 29CFR1910.1027, this employer shall provide biological monitoring for CdU, B(2)-M, and CdB one year after the initial biological monitoring in accordance with 29CFR1910.1027 (too detailed to mention here).

8.5 Exceeding recommended levels at initial monitoring. For all employees who are subject to medical surveillance under 29CFR1910.1027, if the results of the initial biological monitoring tests show the level of CdU to exceed 3 ug/g Cr, the level of B(2)-M to exceed 300 ug/g Cr, or the level of CdB to exceed 5 ug/lwb, this employer shall:

8.5.1 Within 14 days. Within two weeks after receipt of biological monitoring results, reassess the employee's occupational exposure to cadmium as follows:


39

8.5.1.1 Reassess the employee's work practices and personal hygiene;

8.5.1.2 Reevaluate the employee's respirator use, if any, and the respirator program; 8.5.1.3 Review the hygiene facilities; 8.5.1.4 Reevaluate the maintenance and effectiveness of the relevant engineering controls; 8.5.1.5 Assess the employee's smoking history and status;

8.5.2 Within 30 days. Within 30 days after the exposure reassessment, specified in 29CFR1910.1027, take reasonable steps to correct any deficiencies found in the reassessment that may be responsible for the employee's excess exposure to cadmium; and,

8.5.3 Within 90 days. Within 90 days after receipt of biological monitoring results, provide a full medical examination to the employee in accordance with the requirements of 29CFR1910.1027. After completing the medical examination, the examining physician shall determine in a written medical opinion whether to medically remove the employee. If the physician determines that medical removal is not necessary, then until the employee's CdU level falls to or below 3 ug/g Cr, B(2)-M level falls to or below 300 ug/g Cr and CdB level falls to or below 5 ug/lwb, this employer shall:

8.5.3.1 Provide biological monitoring on a semiannual basis; and 8.5.3.2 Provide annual medical examinations. 8.5.3.3 Provide a full medical examination to the employee. After completing the medical examination, the examining physician shall determine in a written medical opinion whether to medically remove the employee. However, if the initial biological monitoring results and the biological monitoring results obtained during the medical examination both show that: CdU exceeds 15 ug/g Cr; or CdB exceeds 15 ug/lwb; or B(2)-M exceeds 1500 ug/g Cr, and in addition CdU exceeds 3 ug/g Cr or CdB exceeds 5 ug/liter of whole blood, then the physician shall medically remove the employee from exposure to cadmium at or above the action level. If the second set of biological monitoring results obtained during the medical examination does not show that a mandatory removal trigger level has been exceeded, then the employee is not required to be removed by the mandatory provisions of this paragraph. If


40

the employee is not required to be removed by the mandatory provisions of this paragraph or by the physician's determination, then until the employee's CdU level falls to or below 3 ug/g Cr, B(2)-M level falls to or below 300 ug/g Cr and CdB level falls to or below 5 ug/lwb, this employer shall: 8.5.3.4 Periodically reassess the employee's occupational exposure to cadmium; 8.5.3.5 Provide biological monitoring on a quarterly basis; 8.5.3.6 Provide semiannual medical examinations. 8.5.3.7 For all employees to whom medical surveillance is provided, beginning on January 1, 1999 (see 29CFR1910.1027).

8.5.4 Periodic medical surveillance. Periodic medical surveillance will be conducted in accordance with the requirements of 29CFR1910.1027. After completing any periodic medical surveillance, the examining physician shall provide surveillance results and recommendations for health safety to the respective employee and to (company representative). Information gathered from the physician will be used to lower workplace cadmium exposures. No employees name or identifying information will be used in this process.

8.6 Emergency examinations. This company will provide a medical examination as soon as possible to any employee who may have been acutely exposed to cadmium because of an emergency. The examination shall include the requirements of 29CFR1910.1027 with emphasis on the respiratory system, other organ systems considered appropriate by the examining physician, and symptoms of acute overexposure to Cadmium.

8.7 Termination of employment examination. At termination of employment, this company will provide a medical examination in accordance with 29CFR1910.1027.

8.8 Information provided to the physician. This company will provide the following information to the examining physician:

8.8.1 A copy of this standard and appendices; 8.8.2 A description of the affected employee's former, current, and anticipated duties as they relate to the employee's occupational exposure to cadmium;


41

8.8.3 The employee's former, current, and anticipated future levels of occupational exposure to cadmium; 8.8.4 A description of any personal protective equipment, including respirators, used or to be used by the employee, including when and for how long the employee has used that equipment; and 8.8.5 Relevant results of previous biological monitoring and medical examinations.

8.9 Physician's written medical opinion. This company will promptly obtain a written, medical opinion from the examining physician for each medical examination performed on each employee. This written opinion shall contain information as required by 29CFR1910.1027.

8.10 Medical Removal Protection (MRP). This company will temporarily remove an employee from work where there is excess exposure to cadmium on each occasion that medical removal is required under 29CFR1910.1027 and on each occasion that a physician determines in a written medical opinion that the employee should be removed from such exposure. The physician's determination may be based on biological monitoring results, inability to wear a respirator, evidence of illness, other signs or symptoms of cadmium-related dysfunction or disease, or any other reason deemed medically sufficient by the physician..

9. Ventilation Requirements. When ventilation is used to control exposure, measurements that demonstrate the effectiveness of the system in controlling exposure, such as capture velocity, duct velocity, or static pressure shall be made as necessary to maintain its effectiveness.

9.1 Change in processes or controls. Measurements of the system's effectiveness in controlling exposure shall be made as necessary within five working days of any change in production, process, or control that might result in a significant increase in employee exposure to cadmium. 9.2 Recirculation of air. If air from exhaust ventilation is recirculated into the workplace, the system shall have a high efficiency filter and be monitored to assure effectiveness. 9.3 Maintenance requirements. Procedures shall be developed and implemented to minimize employee exposure to cadmium when maintenance of ventilation systems and changing of filters is being conducted.

10. Respiratory Protection. Respiratory protection surveys will be conducted in accordance with the Respiratory Protection Program and 29 CFR 1910.134 to


42

determine if, and which employees will be required to wear respiratory protection in the course of their duties. Respirators are considered personal protective equipment (PPE) and will be used as a last choice in protecting employees from the hazardous effects of cadmium exposure.

10.1 Respirator selection for Cadmium exposure. Respirators will be selected based on Table 2 of 29CFR1910.1027 as detailed below.

10.2 Respirators usage. Respirators must be used during the following activities/conditions:

10.2.1 Periods necessary to install or implement engineering and work-practice controls when employee exposure levels exceed the PEL. 10.2.2 Maintenance and repair activities, and brief or intermittent operations, for which employee exposures exceed the PEL and engineering and work-practice controls are not feasible or are not required. 10.2.3 Activities in regulated areas specified in 29CFR1910.1027. 10.2.4 Work operations in which this employer has implemented all feasible engineering and work-practice controls and such controls are not sufficient to reduce employee exposures to or below the PEL. 10.2.5 Work operations for which an employee is exposed to cadmium at or above the action level, and the employee requests a respirator.


43

10.2.6 Work operations for which an employee is exposed to cadmium above the PEL and engineering controls are not required by 29CFR1910.1027. 10.2.7 Emergency situations where other controls are not effective. A written plan for dealing with emergency situations involving substantial releases of airborne cadmium will be developed for specific jobs or processes. The plan shall include provisions for the use of appropriate respirators and personal protective equipment. In addition, employees not essential to correcting the emergency situation shall be restricted from the area and normal operations halted in that area until the emergency is abated.

11. Protective Clothing and Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Where engineering controls and job hazard analyses do not eliminate all job hazards, employees will (where appropriate) wear personal protective equipment (PPE).

11.1 These include items such as, caps, hair nets, face shields, safety goggles, glasses, hearing protection, footguards, gloves etc. Supervisors will ensure that equipment selected will meet the following requirements:

11.1.1 It will be appropriate for the particular hazard.

11.1.2 It will be maintained in good condition.

11.1.3 It will be properly stored when not in use, to prevent damage or loss.

11.1.4 It will be kept clean, fully functional and sanitary.

11.2 Hazards associated with wear of protective clothing, PPE, personal clothing and jewelry. Protective clothing and PPE can present additional safety hazards. Supervisors will ensure workers wear appropriate clothing and PPE. These items will be worn so as not create additional hazards.

11.3 Documentation. PPE requirements will be documented on the “Protective Measures Determination form and properly filed. 11.4 Provision and use. If an employee is exposed to airborne cadmium above the PEL or where skin or eye irritation is associated with cadmium exposure at any level, this employer shall provide at no cost to the employee, and assure that the employee uses, appropriate protective work clothing and equipment that


44

prevents contamination of the employee and the employee's garments. Protective work clothing and equipment includes, but is not limited to:

11.4.1 Gloves, head coverings, and boots or foot coverings; and, 11.4.2 Face shields, vented goggles, or other appropriate protective equipment that complies with safety requirements of cadmium exposure.

11.5 Removal and storage of contaminated equipment and clothing. This employer shall assure that employees remove all protective clothing and equipment contaminated with cadmium at the completion of the work shift and do so only in change rooms provided in accordance with 29CFR1910.1027.

11.5.1 Cross-contamination. Job safety procedures will be developed to ensure that no employee takes cadmium-contaminated protective clothing or equipment from the workplace, except for employees authorized to do so for purposes of laundering, cleaning, maintaining, or disposing of cadmium contaminated protective clothing and equipment at an appropriate location or facility away from the workplace. 11.5.2 Dispersion of cadmium dust. Contaminated protective clothing and equipment, when removed for laundering, cleaning, maintenance, or disposal, will be placed and stored in sealed, impermeable bags or other closed, impermeable containers that are designed to prevent dispersion of cadmium dust. 11.5.3 Labeling of contaminated clothing or equipment. Contaminated protective clothing and equipment that are to be removed from change rooms or the workplace for laundering, cleaning, maintenance or disposal will be labeled accordance with the requirements of 29CFR1910.1027.

11.6 Cleaning, replacement, and disposal of contaminated equipment and clothing. Protective clothing and equipment will be provided in a clean and dry condition as often as necessary to maintain its effectiveness, but in any event at least weekly.

11.6.1 Repair and replacement of PPE. Repair and replacement of PPE will be accomplished as needed to maintain its effectiveness. When rips or tears are detected while an employee is working they shall be immediately mended, or the worksuit shall be immediately replaced. 11.6.2 Unauthorized removal of cadmium from clothing and equipment. It The removal of cadmium from protective clothing and equipment by blowing, shaking, or any other means that disperses cadmium into the air is strictly forbidden.


45

11.6.3 Cleaning of contaminated clothing or equipment. Laundering of contaminated clothing or cleaning of contaminated equipment in the workplace will be accomplished in a manner that prevents the release of airborne cadmium in excess of the permissible exposure limits. 11.6.4 Notification of cleaning contractors. Any person or company who launders or cleans protective clothing or equipment contaminated with cadmium will be notified of the potentially harmful effects of exposure to cadmium and that the clothing and equipment should be laundered or cleaned in a manner sufficient to effectively prevent the release of airborne cadmium in excess of the PEL.

12. Hygiene Areas and Practices. For employees whose airborne exposure to cadmium is above the PEL, clean change rooms, handwashing facilities, showers, and lunchroom facilities that comply with 29 CFR 1910.141 will be provided.

12.1 Change rooms. Change rooms will be equipped with separate storage facilities for street clothes and for protective clothing and equipment, which are designed to prevent dispersion of cadmium and contamination of the employee's street clothes.

12.2 Showers and handwashing facilities. Employees who are exposed to cadmium above the PEL will shower at the end of the work shift.

12.3 Showers and handwashing facilities. Employees whose airborne exposure to cadmium is above the PEL must wash their hands and faces prior to eating, drinking, smoking, chewing tobacco or gum, or applying cosmetics.

12.4 Lunchroom facilities. Lunchroom facilities must be maintained free of cadmium, no employee in a lunchroom facility may be exposed at any time to cadmium at or above a concentration of 2.5 ug/m(3). Employees may not enter lunchroom facilities with protective work clothing or equipment unless surface cadmium has been removed from the clothing and equipment by HEPA vacuuming or some other method that removes cadmium dust without dispersing it.

12.5 Housekeeping.

12.5.1 All surfaces shall be maintained as free as practicable of accumulations of cadmium. 12.5.2 All spills and sudden releases of material containing cadmium shall be cleaned up as soon as possible.


46

12.5.3 Surfaces contaminated with cadmium shall, wherever possible, be cleaned by vacuuming or other methods that minimize the likelihood of cadmium becoming airborne. 12.5.4 HEPA-filtered vacuuming equipment or equally effective filtration methods shall be used for vacuuming. The equipment shall be used and emptied in a manner that minimizes the reentry of cadmium into the workplace. 12.5.5 Shoveling, dry or wet sweeping, and brushing may be used only where vacuuming or other methods that minimize the likelihood of cadmium becoming airborne have been tried and found not to be effective. 12.5.6 Compressed air shall not be used to remove cadmium from any surface unless the compressed air is used in conjunction with a ventilation system designed to capture the dust cloud created by the compressed air. 12.5.7 Waste, scrap, debris, bags, containers, personal protective equipment, and clothing contaminated with cadmium and consigned for disposal shall be collected and disposed of in sealed impermeable bags or other closed, impermeable containers. These bags and containers shall be labeled in accordance with 29CFR1910.1027.

13. Communication Of Cadmium Hazards To Employees. This company will communicate the hazards concerning cadmium to all potentially exposed employees.

13.1 Employee notification. The requirements of OSHA's Hazard Communication Standard, 29 CFR 1910.1200, including but not limited to the requirements concerning warning signs and labels, material safety data sheets (MSDS), and employee information and training will be used to meet this requirement.

13.2 Warning signs. Warning signs will be provided and displayed in regulated areas. In addition, warning signs shall be posted at all approaches to regulated areas so that an employee may read the signs and take necessary protective steps before entering the area. Warning signs will bear the following information:

DANGER CADMIUM

CANCER HAZARD CAN CAUSE LUNG AND KIDNEY DISEASE

AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY RESPIRATORS REQUIRED IN THIS AREA

13.3 Warning labels. Shipping and storage containers containing cadmium, cadmium compounds, or cadmium contaminated clothing, equipment, waste, scrap,


47

or debris shall bear appropriate warning labels. Where feasible, installed cadmium products shall have a visible label or other indication that cadmium is present. Warning labels will bear the following information:

DANGER

CONTAINS CADMIUM CANCER HAZARD

AVOID CREATING DUST CAN CAUSE LUNG AND KIDNEY DISEASE

14. Recordkeeping Requirements. This employer will keep all records of exposure monitoring for airborne cadmium.

14.1 These records will include as a minimum the following: - Name and job classification - Details of sampling and the analytic technique used - Results of sampling - Type of respiratory protection being worn 14.2 Records of biological monitoring will include: - Names of the employee - The physician's written opinion - A copy of the results of the examination 14.3 Records retention. This employer shall assure that cadmium exposure related records are maintained for the duration of employment plus thirty (30) years, in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020.

14.3.1 Records will also be retained if the employee is temporarily removed from the job under the medical removal protection program. This record will include: - The employee’s name and social security number - How the removal was or is being accomplished - Dates of removal from work and return - Details of how each removal was or is being accomplished - Whether or not the removal was due to cadmium related exposure 14.3.2 This company will keep each medical removal record for the duration of an employee's employment. For employees who request to see or copy environmental monitoring, or other pertinent records, they will be made available to the employee or to a representative that he or she authorizes.


48

14.4 Exposure Monitoring Records. Records of all air monitoring will be established and maintained for cadmium in the workplace. The record shall include at least the following information:

14.4.1 The monitoring date, duration, and results in terms of an 8-hour TWA of each sample taken; 14.4.2 The name, social security number, and job classification of the employees monitored and of all other employees whose exposures the monitoring is intended to represent; 14.4.3 A description of the sampling and analytical methods used and evidence of their accuracy; 14.4.4 The type of respiratory protective device, if any, worn by the monitored employee; 14.4.5 A notation of any other conditions that might have affected the monitoring results. 14.4.6 Records maintenance. Records will be maintained for at least thirty (30) years, in accordance with 29CFR1910.1027

14.5 Medical surveillance records. This company shall establish and maintain an accurate record for each employee covered by medical surveillance under 29CFR1910.1027. Per OSHA Regulations, the record shall include at least the following information about the employee:

14.5.1 Name, social security number, and description of the duties; 14.5.2 A copy of the physician's written opinions and an explanation sheet for biological monitoring results; 14.5.3 A copy of the medical history, and the results of any physical examination and all test results that are required to be provided by this section, including biological tests, X-rays, pulmonary function tests, etc., or that have been obtained to further evaluate any condition that might be related to cadmium exposure; 14.5.4 The employee's medical symptoms that might be related to exposure to cadmium; and 14.5.5 A copy of the information provided to the physician as required by 29CFR1910.1027.


49

14.6 Records training. This company will certify that employees have been trained by preparing a certification record which includes the identity of the person trained, the signature of the employer or the person who conducted the training, and the date the training was completed. The certification records shall be prepared at the completion of training and shall be maintained on file for one (1) year beyond the date of training of that employee.

14.7 Records availability. Records pertinent to the Cadmium Safety Program will be made available to authorized personnel as required by 29CFR1910.1027 and 29 CFR 1910.1020. Within 15 days after a request, this employer will make an employee's medical records available for examination and copying to the subject employee, to designated representatives, to anyone having the specific written consent of the subject employee, and after the employee's death or incapacitation, to the employee's family members.

14.8 Transfer of record(s). Whenever this employer ceases to do business and there is no successor employer to receive and retain records for the prescribed period or this employer intends to dispose of any records required to be preserved for at least 30 years, this employer shall comply with the requirements concerning transfer of records set forth in 29 CFR 1910.1020.

15. Definitions. Action Level - means employee exposure, as an airborne concentration of cadmium of 2.5 micrograms per cubic meter of air (2.5 ug/m(3)), calculated as an 8-hour time-weighted average (TWA). Cadmium - Cadmium is an extremely toxic metal commonly found in industrial workplaces, particularly where any ore is being processed or smelted. Due to its low Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL), overexposures may occur even in situations where trace quantities of cadmium are found in the parent ore or smelter dust. Cadmium is used extensively in electroplating, although the nature of the operation does not generally lead to overexposures. Several deaths from acute exposure have occurred among welders who have unsuspectingly welded on cadmium-containing alloys or working with silver solders. Cadmium is also found in industrial paints and may represent a hazard when sprayed. Operations involving removal of cadmium paints by scraping or blasting may similarly pose a significant hazard. Cadmium is also present in the manufacture of some types of batteries. Cadmium emits a characteristic brown fume (CdO) upon heating, which is relatively non-irritating, and thus does not alarm the exposed individual.


50

Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL) - the legally established time-weighted average (TWA) concentration or ceiling concentration of a contaminant that shall not be exceeded. The employer shall assure that no employee is exposed to an airborne concentration of cadmium in excess of five micrograms per cubic meter of air (5 ug/m(3)), calculated as an eight-hour time-weighted average exposure (TWA). Employee Exposure - and similar language referring to the air cadmium level to which an employee is exposed means the exposure to airborne cadmium that would occur if the employee were not using respiratory protective equipment. Final Medical Determination - is the written medical opinion of the employee's health status by the examining physician under paragraphs (l)(3)-(12) or, if multiple physician review under paragraph (l)(13) or the alternative physician determination under paragraph (l)(14) is invoked, it is the final, written medical finding, recommendation or determination that emerges from that process. High-Efficiency Particulate Air [HEPA] Filter - means a filter capable of trapping and retaining at least 99.97 percent of mono-dispersed particles of 0.3 micrometers in diameter. Regulated Area - means an area demarcated by the employer where an employee's exposure to airborne concentrations of cadmium exceeds, or can reasonably be expected to exceed the permissible exposure limit (PEL).


DATE: FEBRUARY 27, 2009 (Rev. 4-6-09) SUBJECT: Bloodborne Pathogens REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.1030 BASIS: Approximately 5.6 million American workers are at risk of developing various types of illnesses due to their exposure to bloodborne pathogens such as the human immunodeficiency (HIV) and hepatitis B (HBV) viruses and other potentially infectious materials in the workplace. In recent years there has been a significant increase in the number of cases reported. This poses a serious problem for exposed workers and their employer. This standard practice instruction establishes uniform requirements to ensure that procedures to limit the spread of such hazards are implemented, evaluated, and that the proper hazard information is transmitted to all affected workers.


51

Contents of the Bloodborne Pathogens Program

1. Written Program. 2. General Requirements. 3. Exposure Control Plan. 4. Employee Training. 5. Housekeeping Schedules. 6. Use and Disposal of Contaminated Needles and other Contaminated Sharps. 7. Exhibits. - Declination Statement H3O, INC. Bloodborne Pathogens Program 1. Written program. ABC Corporation will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction on an annual basis, or when changes occur that prompt revision of this document, or when facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document. This written program will be communicated to all personnel. It encompasses the total workplace, regardless of number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals, and objectives. 2. General requirements. OSHA guidelines require that each employer who has employee(s) with potential occupational exposure to bloodborne pathogens shall prepare an exposure determination. This exposure determination shall contain the following: 2.1 A list of job classifications for all employees whose job classifications have

occupational exposure. 2.2 A list of job classifications in which some employees have occupational

exposure. 2.3 A list of all tasks and procedures or groups of closely related tasks and

procedures in which occupational exposure occurs and that are performed by employees in job classifications listed in accordance with the provisions of the this standard practice instruction.

2.4 The schedule and method of implementation, methods of compliance,

Hepatitis B vaccinations and post-exposure evaluation and follow-up, communication of hazards and record keeping required by 29 CFR 1910.1904 and 1030.


52

2.5 The procedure for the evaluation of circumstances surrounding possible bodily fluid transfer and needle stick incidents.

2.6 Disposal procedures for contaminated needles and other contaminated

sharps. 2.7 Methods of compliance. 3. Exposure Control Plan. 3.1 Job Classifications in Which All Employees in Those Classifications Have

Occupational Exposure. 3.1.2 First Aid Response Teams. 3.1.3 Sam Hesseltine . 3.1.4 Larry Hesseltine . 3.1.5 Mike Olsen _____________________________________. 3.1.6 Jamie Webb_____________________________________. 3.1.7 Gene Chase_____________________________________. 3.2 Job Classifications in Which Some Employees Have Occupational Exposure: 3.2.1 Front line supervisors with First Aid Training___________. 3.3 Tasks and Procedures or Groups of Closely Related Tasks and Procedures.

Procedures in which occupational exposure occurs and that are performed by employees in job classifications listed in accordance with the provisions of 29 CFR 1910.1030.

3.3.1 Cardio Pulmonary Resuscitation (C.P.R.) 3.3.2 Treatment for wounds to skin involving tears of skin tissue. 3.3.3 Disposal of contaminated sharps. 3.3.4 Contaminated dressing changes. 3.3.5 Clean-ups of Biohazard spills.


53

3.3.16 Disposal of Biohazard wastes from first-aid treatment area and women's restrooms.

3.4 Methods of Compliance. 3.4.1 General-Universal precautions shall be observed to prevent contact

with blood or other potentially infectious materials. Under circumstances in which differentiation between body fluid types is difficult or impossible, all body fluids shall be considered potentially infectious materials.

3.5 Engineering and Work Practice Controls. 3.5.1 Engineering and work practice controls shall be used to eliminate or

minimize employee exposure. Where occupational exposure remains after institution of these controls, personal protective equipment shall also be used.

3.5.2 Engineering controls shall be examined and maintained or replaced

on a regular schedule to ensure their effectiveness. This schedule will be posted and documented.

3.5.3 This employer will provide handwashing facilities which are readily

accessible to employees. 3.5.4 When provision of handwashing facilities is not feasible, this

employer shall provide an appropriate hand cleanser in conjunction with clean cloth/paper towels or antiseptic towelette. When antiseptic cleansers or towelette are used, hands shall be washed with soap and running water as soon as feasible.

3.5.5 This employer shall ensure that employees wash their hands

immediately or as soon as feasible after removal of gloves or other personal protective equipment.

3.5.6 This employer shall ensure that employees wash their hands and

any other skin with soap and water, or flush mucous membranes with water immediately or as soon as feasible following contact of such body areas with blood or other potentially infectious materials.

3.5.7 Contaminated needles or other contaminated sharps shall not be

bent, recapped, or removed. Shearing or breaking of contaminated needles or other contaminated sharps is prohibited.

3.5.8 Immediately or as soon as possible after use, contaminated sharps

shall be placed in appropriate containers. The containers shall be:


54

3.5.8.1 Puncture resistant. 3.5.8.2 Labeled or color coded in accordance with this standard. 3.5.8.3 Leak-proof on the sides and bottom. 3.5.9 Eating, drinking, smoking, applying cosmetics, or lip balm, and

handling contact lenses are prohibited in first-aid and restroom areas where there is reasonable likelihood of occupational exposure.

3.5.10 Food and drink shall not be kept in refrigerator, freezer, shelves,

cabinets, or on countertops where blood or other infectious materials are present.

3.5.11 All procedures involving blood or other potentially infectious

materials shall be performed in such a manner as to minimize splashing, spraying, splattering, and generation of droplets of these substances.

3.5.12 H3O, Inc. shall ensure that our employees understand and comply

with the restrictions and prohibitions of the Host employer's Policies and Procedures.

3.6 Personal Protective Equipment 3.6.1 When there is occupational exposure, the First-Aid Department

shall provide, at no cost to the employee, appropriate personal protective equipment such as, but not limited to: gowns, gloves, laboratory coats, face shields or masks and eye protection, mouthpieces, resuscitation bags, pocket masks, or other ventilation devices. Personal Protective Equipment shall be considered "appropriate" only if it does not permit blood or other potentially infectious materials to pass through, to, or reach employee's work clothes, street clothes, undergarments, skin, eyes, mouth or other mucous membranes under normal conditions of use and for the duration of time for which the protective equipment will be used.

3.6.2 This employer shall ensure that employees use appropriate

Personal Protective Equipment unless the employer shows that the employee temporarily and briefly declined to use Personal Protective Equipment when, under rare and extraordinary circumstances, it was the employee's professional judgment that in the specific instance its use should have prevented the delivery of health care or safety services or would have posed an increased hazard to the safety of the worker. When the employee makes this judgment, the circumstances shall be investigated in order to determine whether changes can be instituted to prevent such occurrences in the future.


55

3.6.3 This employer shall ensure that appropriate protective equipment in the appropriate sizes is readily accessible at the worksite or issued to employees. Hypoallergenic gloves or alternatives shall be readily accessible to those employees who are allergic to the gloves normally provided.

3.6.4 This employer shall clean, launder, and dispose of Personal

Protective Equipment required by 29 CFR 1910.1030 at no cost to the employee.

3.6.5 This employer shall repair or replace Personal Protective Equipment

as needed to maintain its effectiveness at no cost to the employee. 3.6.6 If a garment(s) is penetrated by blood or other potentially infectious

materials, the garment(s) shall be removed as soon as feasible. 3.6.7 All Personal Protective Equipment shall be removed prior to leaving

the facility. 3.6.8 When Personal Protective Equipment is removed, it shall be placed

in an appropriately designed area or container for storage, washing, decontamination or disposal.

3.6.9 Gloves shall be worn when it can be reasonably anticipated that the

employee may have contact with blood, other potentially infectious materials, mucous membranes, non-intact skin, when performing vascular access procedures such as removing foreign bodies, and when handling or touching contaminated items or surfaces.

3.6.9.1 Disposable (single use) gloves shall be replaced as soon

as feasible if they tear, are punctured, or when their ability to function as a barrier is compromised.

3.6.9.2 Disposable (single use) gloves shall not be washed or

decontaminated for reuse. 3.6.10 Masks, eye protection, and face shields, masks in combination

with eye protective devices such as goggles or glasses with solid side shields, or chin- length face shields, shall be worn whenever splashes, sprays, splatters, or droplets of blood or potentially infectious materials may be generated and eye, nose, or mouth contamination can reasonably be expected.

3.6.11 Appropriate protective clothing such as, but not limited to, gowns,

aprons, lab coats, clinic jackets or similar outer garments shall be worn in


56

occupational exposure situations. The type and characteristics will depend upon the task and degree of occupational exposure anticipated.

3.7 General Housekeeping 3.7.1 This employer shall ensure that the worksite is maintained in a

clean and sanitary condition. An appropriate schedule for cleaning and method of decontamination based upon the location within the facility, type of surface to be cleaned, type of soil present, and tasks or procedures being performed in the area. This employer will maintain records and documentation of decontamination schedules.

3.7.2 All equipment and environmental working surfaces shall be cleaned

and decontaminated after contact with blood and other potentially infectious materials.

3.7.2.1 Contaminated work surfaces shall be decontaminated with

an appropriate disinfectant after completion of procures, immediately or as soon as feasible when surfaces are overtly contaminated or after any spill of any other potentially infectious materials; and at the end of the work shift if the surface may have become contaminated since the last cleaning.

3.7.2.2 Protective covering, such as imperviously-backed

absorbent paper used to cover equipment and surfaces shall be removed and replaced as soon as feasible when they have been contaminated or at the end of the work shift if they have become contaminated during the shift.

3.7.2.3 All bins, pails, cans, and similar receptacles intended for

reuse which have a reasonable likelihood for contamination with blood or other potentially infectious materials shall be inspected and decontaminated on a regularly scheduled basis and cleaned and decontaminated or, as feasible, upon visible contamination. This employer will maintain records and documentation of cleaning and decontamination.

3.7.2.4 Broken glassware which may have been contaminated

shall not be picked up directly with the hands. It shall be cleaned up using mechanical means, such as a brush and dust pan, tongs, or forceps.

3.7.3 Regulated waste and contaminated sharps shall be discarded

immediately or as soon as feasible in containers that are: 3.7.3.1 Closable.


57

3.7.3.2 Puncture resistant. 3.7.3.3 Leak-proof on sides and bottom. 3.7.3.4 Labeled or color-coded in accordance with 29 CFR

1910.1030. 3.7.4 During use, containers for contaminated sharps shall be: 3.7.4.1. Easily accessible to personnel and located as close as is

feasible to the immediate area where sharps are used. 3.7.4.2 Maintained upright throughout use. 3.7.4.3 Replaced routinely and not allowed to overfill. 3.7.5 When moving containers of contaminated sharps from the area of

use, the containers shall be: 3.7.5.1 Closed immediately prior to removal or replacement to

prevent spillage or protrusion of contents during handling, storage, transport, or shipping.

3.7.5.2 Placed in a secondary container if leakage is possible. The

second container shall be: a. Closable. b. Constructed to contain all contents and prevent leakage

during handling, storage, transport, or shipping c. Labeled or color-coded according to 29 CFR 1910.1030. 3.7.6 Reusable containers shall not be opened, emptied, or cleaned

manually or in any other manner which would expose employees to the risk of percutaneous injury.

3.7.7 Other regulated waste shall be placed in containers which are: 3.7.7.1 Closable. 3.7.7.2 Constructed to contain all contents and prevent leakage of

fluids during handling, storage, transport, or shipping.


58

3.7.7.3 Labeled or color-coded in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1030.

3.7.7.4 Closed prior to removal to prevent spillage or protrusion of

contents during handling, storage, transport, or shipping. 3.7.8 If outside contamination of the regulated waste container occurs, it

shall be placed in a second container. The second container shall be: 3.7.8.1 Closable. 3.7.8.2 Constructed to contain all contents and prevent leakage of

fluids during handling, storage, transport, or shipping. 3.7.8.3 Labeled or color-coded in accordance with 29 CFR

1910.1030. 3.7.8.4 Closed prior to removal to prevent spillage or protrusion of

contents during handling, storage, transport, or shipping. 3.7.8.5 Disposal of all regulated waste shall be in accordance with

applicable regulations of the United States and its Territories, The State of Host Company, and County.

3.7.9 Contaminated laundry shall be handled as little as possible with a

minimum of agitation. 3.7.9.1 Contaminated laundry shall be bagged or containerized at

the location where it was used and shall not be rinsed or sorted in the location of use.

3.7.9.2 Contaminated laundry shall be placed and transported in

bags or containers labeled or color-coded in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1030.

3.7.9.3 Whenever contaminated laundry is wet and presents a

reasonable likelihood of soak-through of or leakage from the bag or container, the laundry shall be placed and transported in bags or containers which prevent soak-through and/or leakage of fluids to the exterior.

3.7.9.4 This employer shall ensure that employees who have

contact with contaminated laundry wear protective gloves and other appropriate Personal Protective Equipment.


59

3.7.9.5 If contaminated laundry is shipped off-site to a second facility own by this company which does not utilize universal precautions in the handling of all laundry, the facility generating the contaminated laundry will place such laundry in bags or containers which are labeled or color-coded.

3.8 Hepatitis B Vaccination and Post-Exposure Evaluation and Follow-Up. 3.8.1 General Guidelines. 3.8.1.1 This employer shall make available the Hepatitis B vaccine

and vaccination series to all employees who have occupational exposure, and post-exposure evaluation and follow-up to all employees who have had an exposure incident.

3.8.1.2 This employer shall ensure that all medical evaluations and

procedures including the Hepatitis B vaccine and vaccination series, and post-exposure evaluation and follow-up, including prophylaxis, are:

a. Made available at no cost to the employee. b. Made available to the employee at a reasonable time and

place. c. Performed by or under the supervision of a licensed

physician or by or under the supervision of another licensed healthcare professional.

d. Provided according to recommendations of the U.S.

Public Health Service current at the time these evaluations and procedures take place.

3.8.1.3 This employer shall ensure that all laboratory tests are

conducted by an accredited laboratory at no cost to the employee. 3.8.2 Hepatitis B Vaccination. 3.8.2.1 Hepatitis B vaccination shall be made available after the

employee has received the required training and within 10 working days of initial assignment to all employees who have occupational exposure unless the employee has previously received the complete Hepatitis B vaccination series, antibody testing has revealed that the employee is immune, or the vaccine is contraindicated for medical reasons.


60

3.8.2.2 This employer shall not make participation in a prescreening program a prerequisite for receiving Hepatitis B vaccination.

3.8.2.3 If the employee initially declines Hepatitis B vaccination but

at a later date while still covered under 29 CFR 1910.1030 decides to accept the vaccination, this employer shall make available Hepatitis vaccination at that time.

3.8.2.4 This employer shall assure that employees who decline to

accept Hepatitis B vaccination offered by the employer sign the statement shown in Exhibit #1.

3.8.2.5 If a routine booster dose(s) of Hepatitis B vaccine is

recommended by the U.S. Public Health Service at a future date, such booster dose(s) shall be made available in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1030.

3.8.3 Post-Evaluation and Follow-Up. 3.8.3.1 Following a report of an exposure incident the employer

shall immediately make available to the exposed employee a confidential medical evaluation and follow-up, including at least the following elements:

a. Documentation of the route(s) of exposure(s), and the

circumstances under which the exposure incident occurred. b. Identification and documentation of the source individual,

unless the employer can establish that identification is unfeasible or prohibited by state or local law.

c. Identification of the type and brand of device involved in

the incident. 3.8.3.2 The source individual's blood shall be tested as soon as

feasible and after consent is obtained in order to determine HBV and HIV infectivity. If consent is not obtained, this employer shall establish that legally required consent cannot be obtained. When the source individual's consent is not required by law, the source individual's blood, if available, shall be tested and the results documented.

3.8.3.3 When the source individual is already known to be infected

with HBV or HIV, testing for the source individual's known HBV or HIV status need not be repeated.


61

3.8.3.4 Results of the source individual's testing shall be made

available to the exposed employee, and the employee shall be informed of applicable laws and regulations concerning disclosure of the identity and infectious status of the source individual.

3.8.3.5 Post-exposure prophylaxis, when medically indicated, as

recommended by the U.S. Public Health Service: a. Counseling. b. Evaluation of reported illness. 3.8.3.6 This employer shall ensure that the healthcare professional

evaluating an employee after an exposure incident is provided the following information:

a. A copy of 29 CFR 1910.1030. b. A description of the exposed employee's duties as they

relate to the exposure incident. c. Documentation of the route(s) of exposure and

circumstances under which exposure occurred; d. Results of the source individual's blood testing, if

available. e. All medical records relevant to the appropriate treatment

of the employee including vaccination status which are this employer's responsibility to maintain.

3.8.3.7 Healthcare Professional's Written Opinion. 3.8.3.7.1 This employer shall obtain and provide the

employee with a copy of the evaluating healthcare professional's written opinion within 15 days of the completion of the evaluation.

3.8.3.7.1.1 The healthcare professional's written

opinion for Hepatitis B vaccination shall be limited to whether Hepatitis B vaccination is indicated for an employee and if the employee has received such vaccination.


62

3.8.3.7.2 The healthcare professional's written opinion for post-exposure evaluation and follow-up shall be limited to the following information:

a. That the employee has been informed of the

results of the evaluation. b. That the employee has been told about any

medical conditions resulting from exposure from blood or other potentially infectious materials which require further evaluation or treatment.

3.8.3.7.3 All other findings or diagnosis shall remain

confidential and shall not be included in the written report. 3.8.3.8 Medical Recordkeeping 3.8.3.8.1 Medical records required shall be maintained in

accordance with standard medical practice. 3.9 Communication of Hazard to Employees. 3.9.1 Labels and Signs. 3.9.1.1 Warning labels shall be affixed to containers of regulated

waste, refrigerators, and other containers used to store, transport, or ship blood or other potentially infectious materials.

3.9.1.2 Labels required by this section shall be as shown below in

Figure #1.

Figure #1

BIOHAZARD

3.9.1.3 These labels shall be fluorescent orange or orange-red or

predominantly so, with lettering or symbols in a contrasting color.


63

3.9.1.4 Labels required shall be affixed as close as feasible to the container by wire, adhesive, or other method that prevents their loss or unintentional removal.

3.9.1.5 Red bags or red containers may be substituted for labels. 3.9.1.6 Labels required for contaminated equipment shall be in

accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1030 and shall also state which portions of the equipment remain uncontaminated.

3.9.2 Signs. 3.9.2.1 This employer shall post signs at the entrance to the work

areas which shall bear a sign as shown below in Figure #2.

Figure #2

BIOHAZARD

a. Name of infectious agent. b. Name, telephone number for person responsible. 3.9.2.2 These signs shall be fluorescent orange-red with lettering

in a contrasting color.


64

3.9.3 Information and Training. 3.9.3.1 H3O Inc. shall ensure that all employees with occupational

exposure participate in a training program which must be provided at no cost to the employee and during working hours.

3.9.3.2 Training shall be as follows: a. At the time of initial assignment to tasks where

occupational exposure may take place. b. Within 90 days after the effective date of 29 CFR

1910.1030. c. At least annually thereafter. 3.9.3.3 For employees who have received training on bloodborne

pathogens in the year preceding the effective date of 29 CFR 1910.1030, only training with respect to the provisions of 29 CFR 1910.1030, which were not included, need to be provided.

3.9.3.4 Annual training for all employees shall be provided within

one year of their previous training. 3.9.3.5 H3O, INC. shall provide additional training when changes

such as modification of tasks or procedures, or institution of new tasks or procedures, affect the employee's occupational exposure. New training may be limited to addressing the new exposures created.

3.9.3.6 Material appropriate in content and vocabulary to

educational level, literacy and language of employees shall be used.

3.9.3.7 The training program shall contain at a minimum the

following elements: a. An accessible copy of the text of 29 CFR 1910.1030 and

an explanation of its contents. b. A general explanation of epidemiology and symptoms of

bloodborne diseases. c. An explanation of the modes of transportation of

bloodborne pathogens.


65

d. An explanation of this employer's exposure control plan and the means by which the employee can obtain a copy of the written plan.

e. An explanation of the appropriate methods for

recognizing tasks and other activities that may involve exposure to blood and other potentially infectious materials.

f. An explanation of the use and limitations of methods that

will prevent or reduce exposure including appropriate engineering controls, work practices, and Personal Protective Equipment.

g. Information on the types, proper use, location, removal,

handling, decontamination, and disposal of Personal Protective Equipment.

h. An explanation of the basis for selection of Personal

Protective Equipment. i. Information on the Hepatitis B vaccine, including

information on its efficiency, safety, method of administration, the benefits of being vaccinated, and the vaccine and vaccination being offered free of charge.

j. Information on the appropriate actions to take and persons

to contact in an emergency involving blood or other potentially infectious materials.

k. An explanation of the procedure to follow if an exposure

incident occurs, including the method of reporting the incident and the medical follow-up that will be made available.

l. Information on the post-exposure evaluation and follow-up

that this employer is required to provide for the employee following an exposure incident.

m. An explanation of the signs and color labels and/or color

coding required by 29 CFR 1910.1030. n. An opportunity for interactive questions and answers with

the person conducting the training session.


66

3.9.3.8 The person conducting the training session shall be knowledgeable in the subject matter covered by the elements contained.

3.9.4 Recordkeeping 3.9.4.1 Medical Records. 3.9.4.1.1 H3O, INC. shall ensure that all records required

by this section shall be made available upon request of employees, Assistant Secretary & the Director for examination & copying. Medical records must have written consent of employee before released. This employer shall comply with the requirements involving transfer of records set forth in 29 CFR 1910.1020(h).

3.9.4.1.2 Records shall include: a. Employee's name and Social Security Number. b. A copy of the employee's Hepatitis B vaccination

status including dates of all Hepatitis B vaccinations and any medical records relative to the employee's ability to receive vaccination as required by 29 CFR 1910.1030.

c. A copy of all results of examinations, medical

testing, and follow-up procedures as required by 29 CFR 1910.1030.

d. This employer's copy of the healthcare

professional's written opinion as required by 29 CFR 1910.1030.

e. A copy of the information provided to the

healthcare professional as required by 29 CFR 1910.1030.

3.9.4.1.3 Retention of OSHA medical records are to be held

during the length of employment, plus 30 years. 3.9.4.1.4 This employer shall ensure that employee medical

records required by 29 CFR 1910.1030 are: a. Kept confidential.


67

b. Are not disclosed or reported without the employee's express written consent to any person within or outside the workplace except as required by 29 CFR 1910.1030 or as may be required by law.

3.9.4.1.5 Training records shall include the following: a. The dates of the training sessions. b. The contents or a summary of the training

sessions. c. The names and qualifications of persons

conducting the training session. d. Training records shall be maintained for 3 years

from the date on which the training occurred. 3.9.4.1.6 Availability of Records. a. This employer shall ensure that all records

required to be maintained shall be made available upon request to the Assistant Secretary and the Director for examination and copying.

b. Employee training records required by 29 CFR

1910.1030 shall be provided upon request in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.20.

c. Employee medical records required by 29 CFR

1910.1030 shall be provided upon request in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.20.

3.9.4.1.7 Transfer of Records. a. This employer shall comply with the requirements

set forth in 29 CFR 1910.20. b. If this employer ceases to do business and there is

no successor employer to receive and retain the records for the prescribed period, this employer shall notify the local OSHA Office, at least three months prior to their disposal and transmit them per their instructions, if required, within that three month period.


68

. 4. Employee Training. This company shall ensure that all employees with potential occupational exposure participate in a training program provided at no cost to the employee and during working hours. Training shall be provided as follows:

4.1 At the time of initial assignment to tasks where occupational exposure may take place. 4.2 At least annually thereafter. 4.3 Annual training for all employees will be provided within one year of their previous training. 4.4 Additional training will be provided when tasks or procedures affect the employee's occupational exposure. 4.5 Material appropriate in content and vocabulary to educational level, literacy, and language of employees shall be used. 4.6 The training program shall contain as a minimum the following elements:

4.6.1 An accessible copy of the regulatory text of the BBP standard and an explanation of its contents. 4.6.2 A general explanation of the epidemiology and symptoms of bloodborne diseases. 4.6.3 An explanation of the modes of transmission of bloodborne pathogens. 4.6.4 An explanation of the BBP exposure control plan and the means by which a copy of the written plan may be obtained. 4.6.5 An explanation of the appropriate methods for recognizing tasks and other activities that may involve exposure to blood and other potentially infectious materials. 4.6.6 An explanation of the use and limitations of methods that will prevent or reduce exposure including appropriate engineering controls, work practices, and personal protective equipment. 4.6.7 Information on the types, proper use, location, removal, handling, decontamination and disposal of personal protective equipment.


69

4.6.8 An explanation of the basis for selection of personal protective equipment. 4.6.9 Information on the hepatitis B vaccine, including information on its efficacy, safety, method of administration, the benefits of being vaccinated, and that the vaccine and vaccination will be offered free of charge. 4.6.10 Information on the appropriate actions to take and persons to contact in an emergency involving blood or other potentially infectious materials. 4.6.11 An explanation of the procedure to follow if an exposure incident occurs, including the method of reporting the incident and the medical follow-up that will be made available. 4.6.12 Information on the post-exposure evaluation and follow-up required for employee following an exposure incident. 4.6.13 An explanation of the BBP signs and labels and/or color coding. 4.6.14 An opportunity for interactive questions and answers with the person conducting the training session.

5. Housekeeping Schedules. 5.1 Disposal of Biohazard Waste. 5.2 H3O, Inc. shall ensure that our employees understand and comply with the restrictions and prohibitions of the Host employer's Policies and Procedures.

6. Use and Disposal of Contaminated Needles and other Contaminated Sharps.

6.1 Contaminated needles and other contaminated sharps shall not be bent, recapped or removed unless it can demonstrate that no alternative is feasible or that such action is required by a specific medical or dental procedure.

6.2 Such bending, recapping or needle removal must be accomplished through the use of a mechanical device or a one-handed technique. 6.3 Immediately or as soon as possible after use, contaminated reusable sharps shall be placed in appropriate containers until properly reprocessed. These containers shall be:

6.3.1 Puncture resistant;


70

6.3.2 Labeled or color-coded in accordance with 29CFR 1910.1030;

6.3.3 Leakproof on the sides and bottom.

6.4 During use, containers for contaminated sharps shall be:

6.4.1 Easily accessible to personnel and located as close as is feasible to the immediate area where sharps are used or can be reasonably anticipated to be found (e.g., laundries); 6.4.2 Maintained upright throughout use; and 6.4.3 Replaced routinely and not be allowed to overfill.

6.5 When moving containers of contaminated sharps from the area of use, the containers shall be:

6.5.1 Closed immediately prior to removal or replacement to prevent spillage or protrusion of contents during handling, storage, transport, or shipping; 6.5.2 Placed in a secondary container if leakage is possible. The second container shall be:

- Closable; - Constructed to contain all contents and prevent leakage during handling, storage, transport, or shipping; and - Labeled or color-coded according to 29CFR 1910.1030.

6.6 Reusable containers shall not be opened, emptied, or cleaned manually or in any other manner which would expose employees to the risk of percutaneous injury.

7. Exhibits. 7.1 Sample vaccination declination statement.


71

EXHIBIT # 7.1

H3O, INC.

DECLINATION STATEMENT I understand that due to my occupational exposure to blood or other potentially infectious materials I may be at risk of acquiring Hepatitis B virus (HBV) infection. I have been given the opportunity to be vaccinated with Hepatitis B vaccine, at no charge to myself. However, I decline Hepatitis vaccination at this time. I understand that by declining this vaccine, I continue to be at risk of acquiring Hepatitis B, a serious disease. If in the future I continue to have occupational exposure to blood or other potentially infectious materials and I want to be vaccinated with Hepatitis B vaccine, I can receive the vaccination series at no charge to me. _______________________ ____________________ ________ Employee's Printed Name Employee's Signature Date ______________________ ___________________ ________ Witness's Printed Name Witness's Signature Date


72


DATE: FEBRUARY 27, 2009 SUBJECT: Compressed Gas Safety Practices Program. REGULATORY STANDARDS: OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.101 - 105 CGA - CGA Pamphlets G-1, 4, 4.1, 5, 6, 8.1, P-1, 2, V-1, SB-2 BASIS:: OSHA Requires all employer's to maintain a written program. Because some compressed gases are flammable, toxic or both and all are under pressure, they must be used, handled, and stored with extreme care. An exploding cylinder can have the same destructive effect as a bomb. This poses a serious problem for exposed workers and their employer. The OSHA Compressed Gas Safety Standards establish uniform requirements to ensure that the hazards of compressed gases in U.S. workplaces are evaluated, safety procedures implemented, and that the proper hazard information is transmitted to all affected workers.

Contents of the Compressed Gas Safety Practices Program 1. Written Program. 2. Initial Training. 3. Refresher Training. 4. Safe Handling Procedures for Compressed Gases. 5. General Safety Rules for Specific Types of Gases. 6. Visual Inspection of Compressed Gas Cylinders. 7. General Company Safety Rules for Use of Compressed Gas.


73

H3O, Inc. Compressed Gas Safety Practices Program 1. Written Program. H3O, Inc. will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction on an annual basis, or when changes occur to regulations that govern this program, that prompt revision of this document, or when facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document. Effective implementation of this program requires support from all levels of management within H3O, Inc.. This written program will be communicated to all personnel that are affected by it. It encompasses the total workplace, regardless of number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals, and objectives. 2. Initial Training. Initial training will be provided to all new employees. This employer shall provide training to ensure that the purpose and function of the compressed gas safety program is understood by employees and that the knowledge and skills required for the safe application, and usage, of compressed gases are acquired by employees. The training shall include the following: 2.1 Applicable hazards. Each authorized employee shall receive training in the

recognition of applicable hazards associated with compressed gases, and the methods and means necessary for safe operation.

2.2 Purpose and use. Each affected employee shall be instructed in the

purpose and use of the compressed gas they will come in contact 2.3 Awareness level training. All other employees whose work operations are or

may be in an area where compressed gas may be utilized, shall be instructed about the emergency procedure, and about the prohibition(s) relating to compressed gases used in their work area.

2.4 Warning labels. All employees whose work operations are or may be in an

area where compressed gas may be utilized, shall be instructed in the recognition and use of warning labels.

2.5 Storage requirements. Storing and handling requirements will be covered in

accordance with this SPI. 2.6 Handling requirements. Handling requirements will be covered in

accordance with this SPI. 2.7 Moving requirements. Moving requirements will be covered in accordance

with this SPI. 2.8 Connecting and disconnecting requirements. Connecting and disconnecting

requirements will be covered in accordance with this SPI.


74

2.9 Health hazards regarding specific gases. Health hazard regarding specific gases will be covered in accordance with this SPI.

2.10 General safety precautions. General safety precautions will be covered in

accordance with this SPI. 2.11 Certification. This employer shall certify that employee training has been

accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification shall contain each employee's name and dates of training.

3. Refresher Training. Refresher will be conducted on a(n) annual basis. Retraining shall be provided for all authorized and affected employees whenever there is a change in their job assignments, a change in the type of gas used, equipment or processes that present a new hazard, or when there is a change in operating procedures. 3.1 Additional retraining shall also be conducted whenever a periodic inspection

reveals, or whenever this employer has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or use of the compressed gas safety procedures.

3.2 The retraining shall reestablish employee proficiency and introduce new or

revised control methods and procedures, as necessary. 3.3 Certification. This employer shall certify that employee training has been


4. Safe handling procedures for compressed gases. 4.1 Filling. Containers will not be filled except by the supplier of the cylinder or

with the supplier's consent. Where filling is authorized it will be accomplished in accordance with DOT, OSHA and CGA regulations.

4.2 Content identification 4.2.1 Warning labels. All employees whose work operations are or may

be in an area where compressed gas may be utilized, shall be instructed in the recognition and use of warning labels. Warning labels are essentially warning devices and must be legible at all times. The following will be addressed as a minimum:

4.2.1.1 Removal. When a warning label is attached to a

compressed gas cylinder, it is not to be removed without


75

authorization of the person responsible for it, and it is never to be bypassed, ignored, or otherwise defeated.

4.2.1.2 Legibility. In order to be effective, warning labels must be

legible and understandable by all authorized employees, affected employees, and other employees whose work operations are or may be in the area. Non-legible or missing labels will be reported to a supervisor immediately.

4.2.1.3 Durability. Labels and their means of attachment must be

made of materials which will withstand the environmental conditions encountered in the workplace.

4.2.1.4 Labels may evoke a false sense of security, and their

meaning needs to be understood as part of the overall compressed gas safety program.

4.2.1.5 Labels must be securely attached to cylinders so that they

cannot be inadvertently or accidentally detached during use. 4.2.2 Labeling. Each container will bear the proper label for the

compressed gas contained. 4.3 Maintenance. 4.3.1 Authorization. Containers and their appurtenances used by H3O,

Inc. will be maintained only by the container supplier or authorized representative. Any employee who is not sure of the type of maintenance allowed on containers used by H3O, Inc. should contact a supervisor for further information.

4.3.2 Changing prescribed markings. The prescribed markings,

supplier/owner markings or symbols stamped into containers will not be removed or changed unless in accordance with pertinent regulations.

4.3.3 Changing content markings. No employee will deface or remove

any markings, labels, decals, tags or stencil marks applied by our supplier and used for the identification of content. Like markings may be affixed if the original becomes illegible or detached.

4.3.4 Pressure relief devices. No employee will change, modify, tamper

with, obstruct, or repair pressure relief devices in container valves or in containers.


76

4.4 Painting. 4.4.1 Containers will not be painted. If a container shows signs of

corrosion it will be removed from service and returned to the supplier. 4.4.2 Cylinder color. All employees should be aware that containers may

only be painted by the supplier for the purpose of recognition and segregation. Should H3O, Inc. change suppliers' of compressed gas the color codings could also change. Always double-check to ensure you have the correct cylinder for the intended use. Never rely solely on the cylinder color for identification.

4.5 Contamination or improper contents. Any container found suspected to be

contaminated or having its contents suspect will be immediately removed from service and reported to a supervisor. The supplier will be immediately notified.

4.6 Leaking or defective containers. 4.6.1 Leaking Containers. Supervisors will ensure all employees under

their control understand the following. Any employee discovering a leaking container should attempt to take the following actions:

Notify workers in the immediate area of the leak.

If the container could contain hazardous material (or if you're not sure), evacuate personnel in the area to fresh air (preferably up-wind or side-wind relative to the source).

Report the following as soon as possible to your supervisor.

Contents.

Location.

Number of employees in immediate area.

Circumstances of the release.

Condition of container.

Other pertinent information as required. 4.6.2 Defective Containers. Supervisors will ensure all employees under

their control understand the following. Any employee discovering a defective or corroded container should attempt to take the following actions:

Notify the supervisor where the container was discovered.

If the container could contain hazardous material (if you're not sure), evacuate personnel in the area to fresh air (preferably up-wind or side-wind relative to the source).


77

Supervisor. Report the following as soon as possible to all necessary personal.

Contents.

Location.

Number of employees in immediate area.

Circumstances.

Condition of container.

Other pertinent information as required. 4.7 Container usage requirements. 4.7.1 Content Identification. Where company employees are responsible

to handle and connect the container for use the operation will not proceed unless the contents can be verified by legible markings and labels.

4.7.2 Container caps, valve outlet caps, and plugs. 4.7.2.1 Container caps. Where removable caps are provided by

the gas supplier for valve protection, company employees shall keep such caps on containers at all times except when containers are connected to dispensing equipment.

4.7.2.2 Valve outlet caps and plugs. Where valve outlet caps and

plugs are provided by the supplier, employees will keep such devices on the containers and valve outlets at all times except when containers are connected to dispensing equipment.

4.7.3 Misuse. No container will be used for anything other than it's

intended purpose. Containers will not be used as rollers, supports or for any purpose other than to contain the content as received. No employee will allow an unsafe condition such as this to occur without notifying his or her supervisor.

4.7.4 Containers not in use (configuration). When containers are not

being used the valves will remain closed at all times except when operational constraints apply.

4.8 Movement of compressed gas containers. 4.8.1 Trucks. Containers will not be rolled, dragged, or slid. A suitable

hand truck, fork truck, roll platform, or similar device will be used to move containers.

4.8.2 Rough handling. Containers will not be dropped or permitted to

strike violently against each other or other surfaces.


78

4.8.3 Lifting requirements. 4.8.3.1 Container caps. Container caps will not be used for lifting

containers except for the use of hand trucks which grip the container cap for lifting on to the hand truck. In any case the container will not be lifted higher than six inches above the operating surface.

4.8.3.2 Magnetic lifting devices. Magnetic lifting devices are

prohibited from use with compressed gas containers. 4.8.3.3 Ropes, chains, or slings. Ropes, chains, or slings are

prohibited from use with compressed gas containers unless lugs or lifting attachments are provided by the manufacturer.

4.8.3.4 Cradles or platforms. Where approved lifting attachments

have been provided by the manufacturer, cradles or platforms are authorized for use.

4.9 Container storage requirements. 4.9.1 Posting requirements. 4.9.1.1 No Smoking. No Smoking signs will be posted in the

storage area. 4.9.1.2 Type gas. Signs designating the type gas stored in the

area will be posted. 4.9.2 Grouping requirements. Where different types of gases are stored

in the same general area the following apply. 4.9.2.1 Like gases. Gases will stored with like gases and

segregated from dissimilar gases. 4.9.2.2 Full and empty containers. Full and empty containers will

not be intermingled. Separate storage areas will be delineated for each.

4.9.3 Stock rotation. Stock will be rotated so that the oldest material will

be the first to be used. The storage layout will be such that old stock can be removed first with a minimum handling of other containers.


79

4.9.4 Storage rooms. Storage rooms used by H3O, Inc. will be well ventilated and dry. Room temperature will not exceed 125 degrees F. Storage in subsurface location will be avoided.

4.9.5 Separation from combustibles. Containers will not stored near

readily ignitable substances such as gasoline or waste, or near combustibles in bulk, including oil.

4.9.6 External corrosion requirements. Containers will not be exposed to

continuous dampness and should not be stored near salt or other corrosive chemicals or fumes. Corrosion may damage the containers and may cause the valve protection caps to stick.

4.9.7 Mechanical damage requirements. Containers shall be protected

from any object that will produce a harmful cut or other abrasion in the surface of the metal. Containers will not be stored near elevators, gangways, unprotected platform edges or in locations where heavy moving objects may strike or fall on them.

4.9.8 Storage and use requirements. 4.9.8.1 Store upright. All compressed gas containers in service or

in storage will be stored standing upright where they are not likely to be knocked over.

4.9.8.2 Restrain. All compressed gas containers in use will be

restrained above the midpoint to prevent accidental fall-over of the container.

4.9.8.3 Gas containers with a water volume up to 305 cu.in. (5.0 L)

may be stored in a horizontal position. 4.9.8.4 Container valve end up. Liquefied gas containers except

those designed for use in a horizontal position on tow motors, etc., will be stored and used valve end up. Acetylene containers will be stored and used valve end up. Storage of acetylene containers valve end up will minimize the possibility of solvent being discharged. Note: Valve end up includes conditions where the container axis is inclined as much as 45 degrees from the vertical.

4.9.9 Outdoor storage. Containers may be stored in the open, but

will be stored on a clean dry surface to prevent corrosion to the bottom of the container.

4.9.9.1 Sunlight. Containers may be stored in direct sunlight,

except in localities where extreme temperatures prevail (above 125


80

degrees F.). If our supplier recommends storage in the shade for a particular gas, this recommendation will be observed.

4.9.10 Public area. Containers used or stored in public areas will be

protected to prevent tampering. 4.9.11 Interference with egress. Containers when stored inside will not

be located near exits, stairways, or in areas normally used or intended for the safe exit of employees.

4.10 Connecting containers and withdrawing content. 4.10.1 Trained personnel. Compressed gases will be handled and used

only by properly trained employees. Employees must have had initial training in order to handle and use compressed gases.

4.10.2 Content identification. Employees will verify that a label exists and

review the label before beginning operations with a compressed gas. Unmarked containers will not be used. Such containers will be reported to a supervisor. The container color will never be relied on for identification of a container.

4.10.3 Container caps. Caps will be retained and not removed until the

container is placed in service. 4.10.4 Secure containers. H3O, Inc. will ensure that compressed gases

will be secured above the midpoint to prevent them from being knocked over.

4.10.5 Pressure regulator. A suitable pressure regulating device will be

used where gas is admitted to a system of lower pressure rating than the supply pressure, and where, due to the gas capacity of the supply source, the system rating may be exceeded.

4.10.6 Pressure relief device. A suitable pressure relief device will be

used to protect a system using a compressed has where the system has a pressure rating less than the compressed gas supply source and where, due to the gas capacity of the supply source, the system pressure rating may be exceeded.

4.10.7 Connection requirements. Connections that do not fit will not be

forced. Threads on regulator connections or other auxiliary equipment will match those on container valve outlets.

4.10.8 Manifold. Where compressed gas containers are connected to a

manifold, the manifold, and its related equipment will be of proper design


81

for the product(s) they are to contain at the appropriate temperatures, pressures, and flows.

4.10.9 Equipment compatibility. Regulators, gauges, hoses, and other

appliances provided for use with a particular gas or group of gases, will not be used on containers containing gases having different chemical properties unless information obtained from the supplier indicates that this can be done safely.

4.10.10 Container valve requirements. 4.10.10.1 Container valves will be opened slowly and pointed away

from personnel and sources of ignition. 4.10.10.2 For valves having no handwheel the wrench provided by,

or recommended by the supplier will be used. 4.10.10.3 On valve containing a handwheel wrenches will not be

used. 4.10.10.4 Valves will never be forced open or closed. If valves

become frozen for whatever reason, the supplier will be contacted to provide instructions.

4.10.11 Dusting clothing, cleaning work areas. Compressed has will not

used to dust off clothing or clean work areas of debris. This may cause serious injury to the eyes or body or create a fire hazard.

4.10.12 Residual empty container pressure. When withdrawing a

nonliquefied compressed gas from a container, the internal pressure should not be reduced to below 20 psig so as to preclude the backflow of atmospheric air or other contaminants into the container. The container valve should be closed tightly to retain this residual pressure.

4.10.13 Check valves. Compressed gases will not be used where the

container may be contaminated by the feedback of process materials unless protected by suitable traps or check valves.

4.10.14 Gas tightness. Connections to piping, regulators, and other

appliances will be kept tight to prevent leakage. Where hose is used, it shall be kept in good condition.

4.10.15 Removing pressure regulator. Before a regulator is removed

from a container, the container valve shall be closed and the regulator drained of gas pressure.


82

5. General safety rules for specific types of gases. 5.1 Flammable gases. 5.1.1 Adjoining exposures. Provisions will be made to protect flammable

gases from hazardous exposure to and against hazardous exposure from adjoining buildings, equipment, property, and concentrations of people.

5.1.2 Heating requirements. Where storage areas are heated, the source

will be by steam, hot water, or other indirect means. Heating by flames or fire is prohibited.

5.1.3 Electrical equipment requirements. Will conform to the provisions of

NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, article 501, for Class 1 Division 2 locations.

5.1.4 Sources of ignition will be forbidden. 5.1.5 Storage buildings will be well ventilated. 5.1.6 Combustibles and ignition sources. Flammable gas containers

stored inside of buildings with other occupancies will be kept at least 20 feet from combustibles or ignitions sources.

5.1.7 Capacity limitations. Flammable gas containers stored inside

industrial buildings on company property except those in use or those attached for use are limited to a total gas capacity of 2500 cubic feet of acetylene or nonliquefied flammable gas, or a total container content water capacity of 735 pounds for liquefied petroleum gas or stabilized methylacetylene-propadiene.

5.1.8 Fire protection requirements. 5.1.8.1 Fire extinguishers. Adequate portable fire extinguishers of

carbon dioxide or dry chemical types will be made available for fire emergencies at company storage locations.

5.1.8.2 No smoking signs. Signs will be posted around the storage

area of buildings or at the entrance to storage rooms. 5.1.8.3 Leak testing. A flame or other ignition source will not be

used for detection of flammable gas leaks. Use either a flammable gas leak detector, soapy water, or other suitable solution.

5.2 Oxygen (Including oxidizing gases)


83

5.2.1 Cleanliness. Oxygen containers, valves, regulators, hose and other oxygen apparatus will be kept free at all times from oil or grease and will not be handled with oily hands, oily gloves, or with greasy equipment.

5.2.2 Separation of oxygen from combustibles. Oxygen containers in

storage will be separated from flammable has containers or combustible materials (especially oil and grease) a minimum distance of 20 feet or by a noncombustible barrier at least 5 feet high having a fire resistance rating of at least one-half hour.

5.2.3 Oxygen-rich atmospheres. The oxygen content in work areas (other

than hyperbaric chambers) must not exceed 23 percent by volume. 5.2.4 Compatibility of materials. Any materials used by H3O, Inc. that

come into contact with oxygen in valves, piping, fittings, regulators, and utilization equipment must be suitable for use with oxygen, ant at the pressures and conditions involved at the specific use point of material. The handling and use of oxygen above 3000 psi may involve greater fire potential, adequate safety systems analysis need to be made.

5.3 Acid and alkaline gases. 5.3.1 Personal protective equipment. Supervisors will ensure that

precautions are taken to avoid contacting skin or eyes with acid or alkaline gases. Chemical goggles or face shields, rubber (or other suitable chemically protective material) gloves and aprons will be worn. Long sleeves and trousers will be worn. Open toed shoes or sneakers are prohibited.

5.3.2 Respiratory equipment. Employees handling and using acid and

alkaline gases will have gas masks or self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) immediately available for use. SCBA must be used when the concentration of the gas could be higher than the mask canister rating, and or where the oxygen content of the atmosphere could be below 19 percent by volume.

5.3.3 Emergency showers and eyewash fountains. Supervisors will

ensure that areas where acid or alkaline gases are used are equipped with an emergency shower and eyewash fountain.

5.3.4 Quantity on site. Because of their hazardous nature, supervisors

will limit the quantity of this type of gas to the minimum requirements for the foreseeable future.

5.3.5 Ventilation. Acid and alkaline gases will only be used in well

ventilated areas.


84

5.4 Highly toxic gases. 5.4.1 Respiratory equipment. Employees handling and using highly toxic

gases will have gas masks or self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) immediately available for use. SCBA must be used when the concentration of the gas could be higher than the mask canister rating, and or where the oxygen content of the atmosphere could be below 19 percent by volume.

5.4.2 Storage locations. Storage of highly toxic gases will be: 5.4.2.1 Outdoors, or in a separate noncombustible building without

other occupancy, or in a separate room without other occupancy. 5.4.2.2 Of noncombustible construction with a fire-resistance rating

of at least one hour. 5.4.2.3 Well ventilated to preclude development of hazardous

concentrations. 5.4.2.4 Protected against tampering. 5.4.3 Ventilation. Highly toxic gases will be used only in forced ventilated

areas or in hoods with forced ventilation, or outdoors. Hazard analysis will be conducted on equipment emitting high concentrations. The gas will be discharged into appropriate scrubbing equipment which will remove or neutralize the toxic effects before entering the effluent gas stream.

5.4.4 Toxicity. Supervisors will ensure the following. Before using a

highly toxic gas, employees must read and understand all warning labels and material data sheet information. All employees working in the immediate area where these gases are handled will be instructed as to the toxicity of the gases and methods of protection against harmful exposure. Employees will not be exposed to concentrations greater than those determined to be safe levels by OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1000 and the threshold limit values guidance by the ACGIH.

5.4.5 Quantity on site. Because of their hazardous nature, supervisors

will limit the quantity of this type of gas to the minimum requirements for the foreseeable future.

5.5 Cryogenic liquefied gases. Cryogenic liquids are gases which are handled in

liquid form at relatively low pressure and extremely low temperatures, usually below -238 degrees F. Because of their low temperature, cryogenic liquids are handled in multi-wall, vacuum-insulated containers, tank trucks, tank cars, and


85

storage tanks to minimize evaporation and venting of the gas. Some cryogenic liquids in small quantities are also handled in open, low pressure thermos type containers in laboratory work.

5.5.1 Personal protective equipment. Cryogenic liquids and cold gases

can cause frostbite injury upon contact with the body. When handling cryogenic liquids supervisors will ensure that employees use suitable eye protection, such as a face shield, safety glasses, or safety goggles, hand protection, such as insulated loose fitting gloves, and proper clothing to prevent other bodily exposure.

5.5.2 Ventilation. Cryogenic liquid containers will only be stored and

handled in well ventilated areas to prevent excessive concentrations of the gas. Containers are equipped with pressure relief devices which permit venting of gas intentionally.

5.5.3 Container handling. Cryogenic liquid containers will be handled and

stored in an upright position. The containers must not be dropped, tipped over, or rolled on their sides. A four wheeled handling truck will be used to move cryogenic liquid containers over 20 gallons capacity.

5.5.4 Containers. Containers designed for specific gas storage will not be

used for any other type of gas. 5.5.5 Pressure relief devices. Containers entering this facility will be

provided with DOT approved devices to prevent excessive buildup of pressure from warming gas. Where cryogenic liquids or cold gas may be trapped between valves, piping will be equipped with appropriate pressure relief devices.

5.5.6 Transfer of cryogenic liquids. Only transfer lines designed for

cryogenic liquids will be used. Transfer of cryogenic liquids will be performed slowly enough to minimize excess evaporation and stress due to rapid cooling and contraction of warm containers and equipment.

5.5.7 Liquid oxygen. Liquid oxygen containers, piping and equipment will

be kept clean and free of grease, oil, and organic materials. Ignitions sources are not permitted in areas where liquid oxygen is stored or transferred.

5.5.8 Liquid hydrogen. Ignitions sources are not permitted in areas

where liquid hydrogen is stored or transferred. Liquid hydrogen must be stored and transferred under positive pressure to prevent the infiltration and solidification of air or other gases.


86

5.5.9 Liquid helium and liquid neon. Liquid helium and liquid neon must be stored and transferred under positive pressure to prevent the infiltration and solidification of air or other gases.

5.5.10 Liquefied natural gas. Ignitions sources are not permitted in areas

where liquefied natural gas is stored or transferred. Liquefied natural gas must be stored and transferred under positive pressure to prevent the infiltration of air or other gases.

5.5.11 Inert gases. In areas where inert gases are used or stored

employees will have self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) immediately available for use. SCBA must be used in the even the oxygen in the room is displaced by the inert gas creating an oxygen deficient atmosphere where the oxygen content of the atmosphere could be below 19 percent by volume.

6. Visual inspection of compressed gas cylinders. Employees of H3O, Inc. will use the following for general inspection of compressed gas cylinders. Our supplier has the first responsibility for inspection of cylinders used by H3O, Inc. in accordance with CGA and NFPA guidelines. Only the following inspection criteria will be followed by employees of H3O, Inc.: *The following inspection criteria assumes that our employees will only inspect for superficial deficiencies with compressed gas cylinders. Detailed inspection of cylinders requires extensive training. It is recommended that if cylinders are suspected to be deficient in any manner that they be removed from service, and the supplier be notified and a representative of the supplier inspect the cylinder.

General Visual Inspection Criteria For Compressed Gas Cylinders Inspect for: Possible result: Dents Weakening of cylinder wall Cuts, gouges or digs Decrease in wall thickness Corrosion Decrease in wall thickness Pitting Decrease in wall thickness Crevice corrosion Weakening of cylinder wall Bulges Weakening of cylinder wall Neck defects Leak or cylinder explosion ARC/Torch burns Weakening of cylinder wall Valve ease-of-movement Corrosion leading to leak Valve thread serviceability Leak during operation 6.1 Suspect cylinders. Cylinders that are suspected to be deficient in any

manner will be removed from service. The supplier will then be notified and a representative of the supplier will be asked to inspect the cylinder. Company


87

employees discovering a cylinder suspected to be deficient in any manner should notify the following company representative __________________.

7. General company safety rules for use of compressed gas. 7.1 Pre-operation safety rules.

Read the Material Safety Data Sheet before use.

Inspect cylinder for damage before use.

Ensure "In use" label is present.

Ensure all labels/warnings are readable.

Place upright on stable dry surface.

Ensure cylinder is restrained above mid-point.

Keep heat, flame, and electrical sources from gas.

Operate in accordance with established procedures. 7.2 Post-operation safety rules.

Ensure "empty" or like label is present.

Remove from operation using established procedures.

Close valve completely and cap cylinder.

Transport cylinder using handtruck. 7.3 Full cylinder storage rules.


Do not smoke.

Mark cylinder with date of storage.

Ensure stock is properly rotated.

Use oldest stock first.

Inspect cylinder for damage before storage.

Store with like kind of gas.

Ensure all labels are readable.

Ensure valve assembly is tightly capped.

Ensure cylinder is restrained above midpoint.

Store upright on stable dry surface.

Keep electrical devices away from gas.

Keep combustible materials away from gas.

Keep heat and flame away from gas. 7.4 Empty cylinder storage rules.


Do not smoke.


88

Label cylinder "empty" before storage.

Ensure valve assembly closed tightly.

Ensure valve assembly capped tightly.

Inspect cylinder for damage before storage.

Store with like kind of gas cylinders.

Ensure all labels are readable.

Ensure cylinder is restrained above midpoint.

Store upright on stable dry surface.

Keep electrical devices away from gas.

Keep combustible materials away from gas.

Keep heat and flame away from gas. 7.5 H3O, Inc. shall ensure that our employees understand and comply with the restrictions and prohibitions of the Host employer's Policies and Procedures.


DATE: FEBRUARY 27, 2009 (Rev. 4-06-09) SUBJECT: Confined Space Entry Program (General Industry) REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.146 (Includes 1999 revisions) BASIS: Over 1 1/2 million workers enter confined spaces on an annual basis. Serious injury or death in a confined space can be the result of asphyxiation, engulfment, electric shock, falls, and heat stress. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) estimates that 85 percent of these accidents can be prevented if proper safety precautions at job sites are initiated. This poses a serious problem for exposed workers and their employer. The OSHA Confined Space Standard establishes uniform requirements to ensure that the hazards of confined spaces in U.S. workplaces are evaluated, safety procedures implemented, and that the proper hazard information is transmitted to all affected workers.

Contents of the Confined Space Program 1. Written program 2. General requirements 3. Training 4. Duties of authorized entrants 5. Duties of authorized attendants 6. Duties of entry supervisors 7. Procedures for Atmospheric Testing 8. Employee Involvement in the Confined Space Program


89

H3O, INC. Confined Space Entry Program 1. Written program. H3O, INC. will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction on an annual basis, or when changes occur to 29 CFR 1910.146, that prompt revision of this document, or when facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document. Additionally, H3O, Inc. will review the permit-required confined space program as necessary, to ensure that employees participating in entry operations are protected from permit space hazards. H3O, Inc. will adhere to all rules and regulations of Host Company. Rescue services for confinded space will be provided by the host facility, AND: required to be on site for all IDLH conditions while work is being performed. 2. General requirements. 2.1 Permit-required confined spaces. Those spaces meeting the criteria

delineated in this section and having a known potential to contain hazardous atmospheres will be designated as permit-required confined spaces. All spaces shall be considered permit-required confined spaces until the pre-entry procedures demonstrate otherwise. H3O, Inc. shall inform exposed employees, conducting awareness training, or by any other equally effective means, of the danger posed by the permit confined spaces

2.2 If H3O, INC. decides that only specific employees will enter permitted spaces, H3O, Inc.shall prevent non-trained employees from entering the permit-required confined spaces.

2.3 For employees that are required to perform work in permit-required confined spaces. H3O, Inc.shall implement the permit-required confined space entry program as delineated within this instruction. This written program will be available for inspection by employees, their authorized representatives, and authorized government inspectors. 2.3.1 Review the permit space program, using the canceled permits retained under paragraph (e)(6) of this section within 1 year after each entry and revise the program as necessary, to ensure that employees are protected. Note: Employers may perform a single annual review covering all entries performed during a 12-month period. If no entry is performed during a 12-month period, no review is necessary.


90

2.4 Permit Required Confined Space Certification. The Owner shall verify that the space is safe for entry and that the measures required by a written certification permit meeting the criteria in 29 CFR 1910.146 are accomplished. This written certification will contain as a minimum; the date, the location of the space, and the signature of the person providing the certification. The certification shall be made before entry and shall be made available to each employee entering the space.

2.5 If hazards arise within a permit space that has been declassified to a

non-permit space, each employee in the space shall immediately exit the space and notify their supervisor. The Owner shall then reevaluate the space and determine whether it must be reclassified as a permit space, in accordance with other applicable provisions of this instruction.

2.6 Company Responsibilities Regarding Sub-Contractor Operations in

Permitted Confined Spaces. When this employer arranges to have employees of another employer (contractor) perform work that involves permit space entry, this employer shall:

2.6.1 Inform the contractor that the workplace contains permit spaces and

that permit space entry is allowed only through compliance with the company permit space program meeting the requirements of this instruction.

2.6.2 Apprise the sub-contractor of the elements, including the hazards

identified and the host employer's experience with the space, that make the space in question a permit space;

2.6.3 Apprise the sub-contractor of any precautions or procedures that

the company has implemented for the protection of employees in or near permit spaces where contractor personnel will be working.

2.6.4 Coordinate entry operations with the sub-contractor, when both

company personnel and contractor personnel will be working in or near permit spaces.

2.6.5 Debrief the sub-contractor at the conclusion of the entry operation

regarding the company permit space program, and any hazards confronted or created in the concerned permit spaces during entry operations.

3. Training. .


91

3.1 Training shall be provided to each affected employee: 3.2 The training shall establish employee proficiency in the duties required by

this instruction and shall introduce new or revised procedures, as necessary, for compliance with this instruction or when future revisions occur. Each affected employee must be trained prior to initial assignment, prior to a change in assigned duties, if a new hazard has been created or special deviations have occurred.

3.3 This employer shall certify that the training required by this section has been

accomplished. The certification shall contain each employee's name, the signatures or initials of the trainers, and the dates of training. The certification shall be available for inspection by employees and their authorized representatives.

4. Duties of authorized entrants. H3O, Inc.shall ensure that all authorized entrants: 4.1 Know the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on

the mode, signs or symptoms, and consequences of the exposure. 4.2 Properly use equipment as required by 29 CFR 1910.146 4.3 Communicate with the attendant as necessary to enable the attendant to

monitor entrant status and to enable the attendant to alert entrants of the need to evacuate the space as required by this section.

4.4 Alert the attendant whenever: 4.4.1 The entrant recognizes any warning sign or symptom of exposure to

a dangerous situation. 4.4.2 The entrant detects a prohibited condition. 4.5 Exit from the permit space as quickly as possible whenever: 4.5.1 An order to evacuate is given by the attendant or the entry

supervisor. 4.5.2 The entrant recognizes any warning sign or symptom of exposure to

a dangerous situation. 4.5.3 The entrant detects a prohibited condition. 4.5.4 An evacuation alarm is activated.


92

5. Duties of authorized attendants. This employer shall ensure that each attendant: 5.1 Knows the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on

the mode, signs or symptoms, and consequences of the exposure. 5.2 Is aware of possible behavioral effects of hazard exposure in authorized

entrants. 5.3 Continuously maintains an accurate count of authorized entrants in the

permit space and ensures that the means used to identify authorized entrants under this section accurately identifies who is in the permit space.

5.4 Remains in a predesignated location outside the permit space during entry

operations until relieved by another attendant. 5.5 Communicates with authorized entrants as necessary to monitor entrant

status and to alert entrants of the need to evacuate the space. 5.6 Monitors activities inside and outside the space to determine if it is safe for

entrants to remain in the space including but not limited to, pedestrian, vehicle, and other barriers as necessary to protect entrants from external hazards, and orders the authorized entrants to evacuate the permit space immediately under any of the following conditions.

5.6.1 If the attendant detects a prohibited condition. 5.6.2 If the attendant detects the behavioral effects of hazard exposure in

an entrant. 5.6.3 If the attendant detects a situation outside the space that could

endanger the entrants. 5.6.4 If the attendant cannot effectively and safely perform all the duties

required under this section. 5.7 Summon rescue and other emergency services as soon as the attendant

determines that entrants may need assistance to escape from permit space hazards. (Follow host facility’s rescue plan)

5.8 Takes the following actions when unauthorized persons approach or enter a

permit space while entry is underway: 5.8.1 Warn the unauthorized persons that they must stay away from the

permit space.


93

5.8.2 Advise the unauthorized persons that they must exit immediately if they have entered the permit space.

5.8.3 Inform the authorized entrants and the entry supervisor if

unauthorized persons have entered the permit space. 5.9 Performs non-entry rescues. 5.10 Performs no duties that might interfere with the attendant's primary duty to

monitor and protect the entrants. 5.11 Monitors only one space at a time under any circumstance

5.12 At the conclusion of the confined space entry, the attendant will initial beside each entrants name as they exit the confinded space. After last entrant has vacated the confined space the attendant will then sign off.

6. Duties of entry supervisors. This employer shall ensure that each entry supervisor: 6.1 Knows the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on

the mode, signs or symptoms, and consequences of the exposure. 6.2 Verifies, by checking that the appropriate entries have been made on the

permit, that all tests specified by the permit have been conducted and that all procedures and equipment specified by the permit are in place before endorsing the permit and allowing entry to begin.

6.3 Terminates the entry and cancels the permit as required in accordance with

the "permit section" this instruction. 6.4 Verifies that rescue services are available and that the means for

summoning them are operable. 6.5 Ensures removal of unauthorized individuals who enter or who attempt to

enter the permit space during entry operations. 6.6 Determines, whenever responsibility for a permit space entry operation is

transferred and at intervals dictated by the hazards and operations performed within the space, that entry operations remain consistent with terms of the entry permit and that acceptable entry conditions are maintained.


94

7. Procedures for Atmospheric Testing. The Owner will provide entrants, or their authorized representatives, an opportunity to observe any testing of a space prior to entry and request additional monitoring at any time. Atmospheric testing for confined space entry is required for two distinct purposes: Evaluation of the hazards of the permit space and verification that acceptable entry conditions for entry into that space exist. 7.1 Evaluation testing. The Owner will ensure that the atmosphere of a

confined space is analyzed using equipment of sufficient sensitivity and specificity to identify and evaluate any hazardous atmospheres that may exist or arise. This is required to ensure that appropriate permit entry procedures specific to the operation can be developed and acceptable entry conditions stipulated for that specific space. Evaluation and interpretation of these data, and development of the entry procedure, will be done by, or reviewed by, a technically qualified professional based on evaluation of all serious hazards. The internal atmosphere will be tested, with a calibrated direct-reading instrument, for the following conditions in the order given:

(1) Oxygen content. (19.5% - 23.5%) (2) Flammable gases and vapors. (L.E.L) (3) CO2. (4) H2S 7.2 Verification testing. The atmosphere of a permit space which may contain a

hazardous atmosphere will be tested by The Owner for residues of all contaminants identified by evaluation testing using permit specified equipment to determine that residual concentrations at the time of testing and entry are within the range of acceptable entry conditions. Results of testing (i.e., actual concentration, etc.) will be recorded on the permit. The atmosphere will be verified, with a calibrated direct-reading instrument, for the following conditions in the order given:

(1) Oxygen content. (19.5% - 23.5%) (2) Flammable gases and vapors. (L.E.L) (3) CO2. (4) H2S 8. Employee Involvement in the Confined Space Program. 29 CFR 1910.146 requires that employers consult with their employees regarding the employers efforts in the development and implementation of the Confined Space Program. The Standard also requires us to train and educate our employees and to inform affected employees of the findings from incident investigations conducted under the Confined Space Program. It is our company policy that not only will we consult with our employees regarding efforts to develop, implement and maintain the Confined Space Program programs, but that we will, where ever possible, integrally involve our employees in the


95

entire process. This is essential because employees of H3O, Inc. comprise the best determination of confined space operational procedures, and solutions to confined space operations problems peculiar to our business. This will be accomplished through a "Safety Committee." This committee will be responsible for developing Confined Space policy and procedures. 7.1 H3O, Inc. shall ensure that our employees understand and comply with the restrictions and prohibitions of the Host employer's Policies and Procedures.


DATE: June 13, 2009 SUBJECT: Crane Safety Program OSHA STANDARDS: OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.179 - Overhead and Gantry Cranes OSHA - 29 CFR 1926.550 - Cranes and Derricks OSHA - 29 CFR 1903.1 (The General Duty Clause) CMAA - Spec. No. 70 and 74 Crane Operator’s Manual ANSI - ANSI/ASME B-30 series Cranes, Derricks, Hoists, B- 30.2 Overhead And Gantry Cranes (Top Running Hoist) B- 30.10 Hooks B- 30.11 Monorail And Underhung Cranes B- 30.16 Overhead Hoists (Underhung) B- 30.17 Overhead & Gantry Cranes (Underhung Hoists) B- 30.18 Stacker Cranes B- 30.21 Manually Lever Operated Hoists BASIS: Serious injury or death can be the result of improper use, or use of cranes having defective or poorly maintained components. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) estimates that most of these types of accidents can be prevented if proper safety precautions at job sites are initiated. This poses a serious problem for exposed workers and their employer. The OSHA Crane safety standards establish uniform requirements to ensure that the hazards associated with the use of cranes in U.S. workplaces are evaluated, safety procedures implemented, and that the proper hazard information is transmitted to all affected workers.


96

GENERAL: H3O Inc. will ensure that all cranes used within our facility(s) are evaluated. This standard practice instruction is intended to address comprehensively the issues of; evaluating the associated potential hazards, communicating information concerning these hazards, and establishing appropriate procedures, and protective measures for employees.

Contents of the Crane Safety Program

1. Written Program. 2. General Requirements. 3. Initial Training. 4. Refresher Training. 5. Safe Operating Practices for Operators. 6. Safe Operating Practices for Signalers. 7. Leaving or Parking Hoists or Cranes. 8. Handling Sling Loads. 9. Estimating the Weight of Loads. 10. Personal Protective Equipment. 11. Crane Inspections. 12. Daily Checks. 13. Monthly Checks. 15. Periodic CMAA Inspection Recommendations. 16. New, Idle, Altered, Used Cranes. 17. Preventive Maintenance Requirements. 18. Preoperational Testing Requirements. 19. Lockout Tagout Considerations.

H3O Inc. Crane Safety Program 1. Written Program. H3O Inc. will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction on an annual basis, or when changes occur to regulatory standards that prompt revision of this document, or when facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document. Effective implementation of this program requires support from all levels of management within this company. This written program will be communicated to all personnel that are affected by it. It encompasses the total workplace, regardless of number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals, and objectives. 2. General Requirements. H3O Inc. will establish crane safety and operational procedures through the use of this document. This standard practice instruction applies to cranes used in conjunction with other material handling equipment for the movement of material.


97

3. Initial Training. Training shall be conducted prior to job assignment. This employer shall provide training to ensure that the purpose, function, and proper use of cranes is understood by employees and that the knowledge and skills required for the safe application, and usage is acquired by employees. This standard practice instruction shall be provided to, and read by all employees receiving training. The training shall include, as a minimum the following: 3.1 Preoperational inspection requirements of the crane to be used. 3.2 Specific operational requirements of the crane to be used. 3.3 Principals of crane operations. 3.4 Recognition of applicable hazards associated with the work to be completed. 3.5 Load determination and balancing requirements. 3.6 Procedures for removal of a crane from service. 3.7 All other employees whose work operations are or may be in an area where

cranes may be utilized, shall be instructed to an awareness level concerning hazards associated with cranes.

3.8 Physical and mental requirements of operators. Crane operators will be

screened for physical and mental impairments that could result in improper use. Operators will meet as a minimum, the following requirements before being certified to operate cranes.

Be drug and alcohol free during any lifting event.

Be thoroughly trained in all facets of the required lift.

Have a mature and safe attitude at all times.

Have good depth perception (essential for load spotting).

Have good hearing and vision (corrected or uncorrected).

Have no history of unsafe acts in the workplace.

Have the ability to react quickly in an emergency.

Take no medication that will interfere with the operation.

Understand the requirements for all phases of the lift.

Pass a written examination

Pass a physical 3.9 Certification. This employer shall certify that employee training has been



98

3.10 Crane trainers. An accredited training agency will be the sole souse of individual employee training

4. Refresher Training. This standard practice instruction shall be provided to, and read by all employees receiving refresher training. The training content shall be identical to initial training. Refresher training will be conducted when the following conditions are met. 4.1 Retraining shall be provided for all authorized and affected employees

whenever (and prior to) there being a change in their job assignments, a change in the type of crane used, equipment being lifted, lifting procedures, or when a known hazard is added to the lifting environment.

4.2 Additional retraining shall also be conducted whenever a periodic inspection

reveals, or whenever this employer has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or use of crane procedures.


revised methods and procedures, as necessary. 4.4 Certification. This employer shall certify that employee training has been


5. Safe Operating Practices for Operators. Whenever any crane is used, the following safe practices (as a minimum) shall be observed:

1. Always check warning devices and signals before use. 2. Always document and maintain inspection records. 3. Always ensure cranes shall not be loaded in excess of their rated capacities. (Rating chart must be in plain view of Operator while seated at the controls.) 4. Always ensure the new location support the weight? 5. Always keep employees clear of lifted and or suspended loads. 6. Always keep suspended loads clear of all obstructions. 7. Always lockout before maintenance or repairing cranes. 8. Always position the hook directly over the load before lifting. 9. Always test brakes by a short lift to ensure control. 10. Before being lifted, loads will be checked for proper balance. 11. Manufactures’s specifications and limitations will always be followed. 12. Frequently inspect cranes exposed to adverse conditions. 13. Hands must clear of the suspension means and the load during lifting. 14. Know where you’re going to set the load down! 15. Know your travel path in advance of the lift! 16. Loads will in all cases be properly balanced to prevent slippage.


99

17. Move loads only after being signaled by the designated, qualified signaler. 18. Never allow riders on loads or hooks. 19. Never allow unauthorized persons to operate cranes. 20. Never attempt to operate a crane or hoist that is suspected to be unsafe. 21. Never carry loads over workers. 22. Never carry loads past workers (they must yield right of way). 23. Never use a crane that is damaged or defective in any way. 24. Operators must watch the signalers. 25. Shock loading is prohibited. 26. Signalers must keep line-of-sight with the operator. 27. Signalers must watch the load. 28. Test all hoist controls and brakes at the beginning of each shift. 29. Insurre atmosphere is of good quality and not concentrated with toxic gases or is oxygen deficient 30. Locate the 5BC rating fire extinguisher.

6. Safe Operating Practices for Signalers. Whenever any crane is used, the following safe practices (as a minimum) shall be observed:

1. Ensure that only one person is the designated signaler. 2. Ensure the operator acknowledges every signal. 3. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendations. 4. Know the new location will support the weight. 5. Maintain line-of-sight with the operator. 6. Operators must watch the signalers. 7. Plan in advance where the load is going! 8. Stop the operation any time comprehension is lost. 9. Hand signals to crane and derrick operators shall be those prescribed by the applicable ANSI standard for the type of crane in use.

7. Leaving or Parking Hoists or Cranes. Whenever leaving or parking hoists or cranes, the following safe practices (as a minimum) shall be observed:

1. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Make a visual check for any dangerous condition. 3. Place all controls in the “off” position. 4. Place main power switch in the “off” position. 5. Raise all hooks to - but not through - limit switches. 6. Report all cranes that are not in operation immediately. 7. Report any defects immediately. 8. Tag out defective equipment immediately.

8. Handling Sling Loads. The following general safe practices (as a minimum) shall be observed when handling slung loads:

1. Always keep hands and fingers clear of untensioned loads.


100

2. Always keep suspended loads clear of all obstructions. 3. Always keep suspended loads clear of employees. 4. Always pad or protect slings from sharp edges of the load. 5. Always think before you affect a load. 6. Determine the history of the care and usage of the sling. 7. Determine the number of sling legs (if used) and load requirements. 8. Ensure you know rated capacity of the sling. 9. Ensure you know the angle the sling makes with the horizontal line. 10. Ensure you know the size, weight, and center of gravity of the load. 11. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendations. 12. Never load in excess of the rated capacity. 13. Never pull a sling from a suspended load under tension. 14. Never shorten with knots, bolts or other makeshift devices. 15. Never use a sling that is damaged in any way.

9. Estimating the Weight of Loads. Lifting will not be conducted until load weights have been determined. When estimating load weights operators will stay within 50% of the cranes rated capacity when estimating loads (or manufacturer recommendation). Never attempt a load lift based solely on a guess! The following methods may be used to estimate the weight of loads.

1. Check equipment nomenclature plates. 2. Check shipping papers. 3. Consult with the equipment manufacturer. 4. Estimate weight using weights of similar loads. 5. Use a dynamometer. 6. Use industry standard tables or charts.

10. Personal Protective Equipment. Supervisor will ensure that a Job Hazard Analysis is conducted for specific lifting operations. Operators will use the required PPE in the conduct of lifting operations. Protective clothing and equipment considerations:

1. Ensure PPE is appropriate for the particular hazard(s). 2. Ensure PPE is kept clean, fully functional, and sanitary. 3. Maintained all PPE in good condition.. 4. Properly store PPE when not in use.

11. Electrical hazards. Electrical safety-related work practices shall be employed to prevent electric shock or other injuries resulting from either direct or indirect electrical contacts, when work is performed near or on overhead lines. The specific safety-related work practices shall be consistent with the nature and extent of the associated electrical hazards. If work is to be performed near overhead lines, the lines shall be deenergized and grounded, or other protective measures shall be provided before work is started. If the lines are to be deenergized, arrangements shall be made with the person or organization that operates or controls the electric circuits involved to deenergize and ground them. If protective measures, such as guarding, isolating, or


101

insulating, are provided, these precautions shall prevent employees from contacting such lines directly with any part of their body or indirectly through conductive materials, tools, or equipment. The following guidelines from 29CFR1910.333 will be followed. 11.1 For lines rated 50. kV or below, minimum clearance between the lines and any part of the crane or load shall be 10 feet. 12. Crane Inspections. Where not other wise delineated, crane inspections will be conducted in accordance with this section. 12.1 Crane inspectors. Only trained and licensed employees are considered

qualified to inspect cranes used by this company 12.2 Inspection intervals. 12.2.1 Daily inspections. Cranes will be inspected each day before being

used, the crane will inspected in accordance with OSHA, Consensus Standards, and Manufacturer recommendations.

12.2.2 Periodic inspections. Supervisors will determine and schedule

additional inspections periodically during crane use, where service conditions warrant. A thorough periodic inspection shall be made on a regular basis, to be determined on the basis of, frequency of crane use; severity of service conditions; nature of lifts being made; experience gained on the service life of cranes used in similar circumstances, and OSHA, Consensus Standards, and Manufacturer recommendations.

12.2.3 Scheduled inspections. The assigned operator will coordinate

inspection dates and times with all assigned crane inspectors. The inspections will be conducted on a rutine basis. Such inspections shall in no event be at intervals greater than once every 12 months.

12.3 Inspection documentation. Cranes inspections will be documented as

having been inspected. Scheduled inspections will be documented as having been conducted.

1. Identify items that were inspected. 2. Show the status of the inspected items. 3. Provide the signature of the inspector. 4. Show the date. 5. File it and maintain it! 6. Review the manufacturers specific inspection requirements!

12.4 Inspection documentation storage. Inspection records and certifications

shall be maintained in accordance with all state and local jurisdictions.


102

12.5 Damaged/unserviceable Cranes. Cranes found to be damaged or unserviceable will be immediately removed from service.

13. Daily Checks. The following items (as a minimum) shall be checked prior to use of any crane:

1. Check for air or hydraulic fluid leakage. 2. Check for load capacity stenciling on both sides of unit. 3. Check for rating chart in cab. 4. Check for twisted, broken or kinked cables or chains. 5. Check the operation of the crane; controls & movement. 6. Inspect for deformed, cracked, or stretched hooks. 7. Inspect for serviceable safety latches. 8. Observe correct drum spooling as the hook is raised. 9. Operate empty hook till it actuates the upper limit switch. 10. Operate hoist and trolley brakes, ensure no excessive coasting. 11. Visually inspect all units for integrity, leaks etc. 12. Review the manufacturers specific requirements! 13. Check to ensure a CO2 or dry chemical fire extinguisher is in the crane cab

or vicinity of the crane. 14. Monthly Checks. The following items (as a minimum) shall be checked monthly:

1. Follow any additional recommendations of the manufacturer. 2. Inspect for twisted, broken or kinked cables or chains. 3. Inspect hooks for cracks, missing or broken parts. 4. Measure hooks for deformation or stretching. 5. Measure lifting chains for excessive stretch, twisting etc. 6. Review the manufacturers specific inspection requirements! 7. Visually inspect all critical items. 8. Review the manufacturers specific requirements!

15. Periodic Checks. Review the manufacturers specific inspection requirements! The following items (as a minimum) shall be checked at periodic inspections (1 to 12 month intervals):

1. Interval dependent on the type of activity performed. 2. Interval dependent on the severity of service. 3. Interval dependent on the environmental conditions. 4. As a minimum the inspection should cover:

Chain Or Cable Reeving Hook Condition Electrification Hoist Drives Travel Drives Brakes Limit Switches Couplings Rails Balance Controls Warning Devices End Stops Signage


103

16. Periodic CMAA Inspection Recommendations: Class Description Typical Schedule A Standby or infrequent service annually B Light service - 2-5 lifts hr. Annually C moderate service - 50% capacity, 5-10 lifts hr. Annually D Heavy service - 50% capacity, 10-20 lifts hr. Semiannually E Severe service - near capacity, 20+ lifts hr. Quarterly F Continuous severe service - near capacity and continuous service throughout day bi-monthly Note: Different conditions may suggest different intervals. 17. New, Idle, Altered, Used Cranes: The use status of cranes will drive specific requirements for periodic maintenance and servicing. The status of the crane will be determined based on manufacturer recommendations and consultation with specific regulatory standards. Prior to initial or reintroduction into service cranes will be tested and inspected completely using the criteria applicable to periodic inspections. No modifications, altarations, or additions shall be made to any crawler, truck, or locomotive cranes that are not approved by the manufacture. Design, Inspection, Consruction, Testing, Maintenance and Operation of all cranes will conform to the ANSI B30.5-1968. A report will be generated and kept on file for future reference. The manufacturers specific requirements will be reviewed! Modifications or additions which affect the safe operation of the equipment may only be made with the manufacturer's written approval. 18. Preventive Maintenance: Preventative maintenance procedures will be developed and used for specific cranes. Maintenance procedures will be determined on the basis of, frequency of crane use; severity of service conditions; nature of lifts being made; experience gained on the service life of cranes used in similar circumstances, and OSHA, Consensus Standards, and Manufacturer recommendations. Typical requirements include:

1. Adjusting the brakes. 2. Adjusting the operation of limit switches. 3. Checking and filling the gear cases to the proper levels. 4. Cleaning and lubricating the wire rope (cable) and load chain. 5. Cleaning or replacing pitted or burned electrical contacts. 6. Cleaning or replacing the air and fluid filters. 7. Inspecting the operation of all controls and warning systems. 8. Lubricating the bearings, gears, pinions, linkages, shafts, etc. 9. Replacing any contaminated oils.

19. Preoperational Testing Requirements: Preoperational tests will be conducted prior to use of any crane. Testing requirements will be determined on the basis of, frequency of crane use; severity of service conditions; nature of lifts being made;


104

experience gained on the service life of cranes used in similar circumstances, and OSHA, Consensus Standards, and Manufacturer recommendations. Typical requirements include:

Preoperational Tests - General: 1. Check for obstructions in the travel path of the crane. 2. Check upper and lower limit switches. 3. Ensure all emergency disconnects are known before any test. 4. Ensure that the manufacturers recommendations are followed. 5. If you have a checklist - follow it! 6. If you’re not familiar with the cranes’ operation get help. 7. Inspect all electrical controls for proper operation. 8. Never unwind the spool completely! 9. Observe for smooth operation of the components. 10. Test all controls to determine proper operation.

Preoperational Tests - Hooks: 1. Replace if deformation or cracks are found. 2. Check for proper function of the safety latch. 3. Inspect for twists from the plane of the unbent hook. 4. Check for proper swivel. 5. Hook repair is generally not recommended. 6. Emergency hook repair must be performed only under competent supervision. 7. After any hook repairs, the hook must be load tested before being returned to normal service.

Preoperational Tests - Rope: 1. Broken or worn outside wires. 2. Corroded or broken wires at end of connections. 3. Corroded, cracked, bent, worn, or improperly applied end connections. 4. Reduction in rope diameter (replace if found). 5. Severe kinking, crushing, cutting or unstranding.

20. Lockout Tagout Considerations: Lockout Tagout will be conducted when maintenance or servicing is performed on any crane. Lockout requirements will be determined on the basis of, OSHA, Consensus Standards, and Manufacturer recommendations. Typical requirements include:

1. Review requirements for the individual crane. 2. Integrate lock out and maintenance requirements. 3. Ensure training in adequate for level of maintenance. 4. Ensure written programs are established and reviewed. 5. Carefully select lockout devices, ask the manufacturer for recommendations.


105

6. Do not necessarily assume devices are interchangeable between different types of cranes.


DATE: June 1, 2009 SUBJECT: Electrical Safety-Related Work Practices Program REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.331 - 335 BASIS: The National Safety Council estimates that there are at least 300 deaths annually from on-the-job electrocutions in the United States. Most of these are preventable. GENERAL: H3O Inc will ensure that work practices performed on or in proximity to electrical equipment/energy sources are evaluated to determine if proper safety precautions are instituted. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) recommends that certain guidelines be adhered to regarding these hazards. This standard practice instruction is intended to address comprehensively the issues of; evaluating and identifying potential energy sources where work is performed, evaluating the associated potential hazards, communicating information concerning these hazards, and establishing appropriate procedures, and protective measures for our employees.

Contents of the Electrical Safety-Related Work Practices Program


106

1. Written Program. 2. Facility/Department Evaluation. 3. General. 4. Training. 5. Selection and Use of Work Practices. 6. Use of Equipment. 7. Safeguards for Personnel Protection. 8. Definitions.


107

H3O Inc Electrical Safety-Related Work Practices Program 1. Written Program. H3O Inc will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction on an annual basis, or when changes occur to 29 CFR 1910.331 - 335, that prompt revision of this document, or when facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document. Effective implementation of this program requires support from all levels of management within this company. This written program will be communicated to all personnel that are affected by it. It encompasses the total workplace, regardless of number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals, and objectives. 2. Facility/Department Evaluation. This employer shall evaluate our facility(s) by department to determine where high risk from electrical hazards exist. Jobs/areas that present such risks will meet the criteria for designation as an electrical hazard area. 2.1 Employee notification. This employer shall inform exposed employees, by

posting danger signs, conducting awareness training, or by any other equally effective means, of the existence and location of and the danger posed by electrical hazard areas. A sign reading "DANGER ELECTRICAL HAZARD, AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY" or similar language in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.145 will be used to satisfy the requirement for untrained employee/visitor notification.

2.2 High risk electrical hazard jobs/areas. High Risk Electrical Hazard Jobs/Areas Listing Department Area/Job Date Evaluated ___________________ ___Working on electrical equipment _______________ ___________________ _____________________________ _______________ ___________________ _____________________________ _______________ ___________________ _____________________________ _______________ ___________________ _____________________________ _______________ ___________________ _____________________________ _______________ (Continue listing as needed) 2.3 Alerting techniques. The following alerting techniques shall be used to warn

and protect employees from hazards which could cause injury due to electric shock, burns, or failure of electric equipment parts:

2.3.1 Safety signs and tags. Safety signs, safety symbols, or accident

prevention tags shall be used where necessary to warn employees about electrical hazards which may endanger them, as required by 29 CFR 1910.145.


108

2.3.2 Barricades. Barricades shall be used in conjunction with safety signs where it is necessary to prevent or limit employee access to work areas exposing employees to uninsulated energized conductors or circuit parts. Conductive barricades may not be used where they might cause an electrical contact hazard.

2.3.3 Attendants. If signs and barricades do not provide sufficient

warning and protection from electrical hazards, an attendant shall be stationed to warn and protect employees.

3. General. This standard practice instruction will cover work by both qualified and unqualified persons. The provisions of 29 CFR 1910.331 through 1910.335 will be detailed to cover electrical safety-related work practices for both qualified persons (those who have training in avoiding the electrical hazards of working on or near exposed energized parts) and unqualified persons (those with little or no such training) working on, near, or with the following installations: 3.1 Premises wiring. Installations of electric conductors and equipment within or

on buildings or other structures, and on other premises such as yards, carnival, parking, and other lots, and industrial substations.

3.2 Wiring for connection to supply. Installations of conductors that connect to

the supply of electricity. 3.3 Other wiring. Installations of other outside conductors on the premises. 3.4 Optical fiber cable. Installations of optical fiber cable where such

installations are made along with electric conductors. 3.5 General electrical safety work practices by H3O Inc employee's. 4. Training. 4.1 Employees to be trained. Once an evaluation of jobs and areas of our

facility is performed. Training will be conducted for employees who face a risk of electric shock that is not reduced to a safe level by the existing source.

4.2 High risk occupations. Employees in occupations listed in Table S-4 (29

CFR 1910.332) face such a risk and are required to be trained. Other employees who also may reasonably be expected to face a comparable risk of injury due to electric shock or other electrical hazards must also be trained. These employees will be identified based upon their job title and or area(s) of the facility they are exposed to. The facility evaluation data referenced in section 2 of this SPI will be used to develop a personnel training listing by job and hazard area(s) exposure.

Table S-4 (29 CFR 1910.332)


109

Typical Occupational Categories of Employees Facing a Higher Than Normal Risk of Electrical Accident

OCCUPATION First line supervisors. Electrical and electronic engineers. Electrical and electronic equipment assemblers. Electrical and electronic technicians. Electricians. Industrial machine operators. Material handling equipment operators. Mechanics and repairers. Painters. Riggers and roustabouts. Stationary engineers. Welders. ___________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________ NOTE: Workers in the above listed groups do not need to be trained if their work or the work of those they supervise does not bring them or the employees they supervise close enough to exposed parts of electric circuits operating at 50 volts or more to ground for a hazard to exist. 4.3 Content of training. 4.3.1 General electrical safety policy. The Safety Officer will develop a

facility wide electrical policy that details this company's' general electrical safety policy.

4.3.2 Employee job specific training (unqualified). Employees who are

classified as "unqualified" (i.e., those not permitted to work on or near exposed energized parts) persons shall also be trained in and familiar with any electrically related safety practices inherent to their jobs which are necessary for their safety. First line supervisors in coordination with the Maintenance Manager (where required) will develop a training outline detailing the electrical hazards associated with a work area or job when an initial evaluation reveals a risk of electrocution.

4.3.3 Employee job specific training (qualified). Employees who are

classified as "qualified" (i.e., those permitted to work on or near exposed energized parts) persons shall be trained in and familiar with the safety-


110

related work practices that pertain to their respective job assignments. First line supervisors in coordination with the Maintenance Manager (where required) will develop a training outline detailing the electrical hazards associated with a work area or job when an initial evaluation reveals a risk of electrocution. Qualified persons (i.e., those permitted to work on or near exposed energized parts) shall, at a minimum, be trained in and familiar with the following:

4.3.3.1 The skills and techniques necessary to distinguish exposed

live parts from other parts of electric equipment. 4.3.3.2 The skills and techniques necessary to determine the

nominal voltage of exposed live parts, and 4.3.3.3 The clearance distances specified in 29 CFR 1910.333(c)

and the corresponding voltages to which the qualified person will be exposed.

NOTE 1: For the purposes of this SPI, Employee's must have the training required by the definition of a "qualified person" detailed above in order to be considered a qualified person. NOTE 2: Qualified persons whose work on energized equipment involves either direct contact or contact by means of tools or materials must also have the training needed for safe exposure to energized part (see below). 4.4 Type of training. The training required by this SPI shall be of the classroom

or on-the-job type. The degree of training provided shall be determined by the evaluated risk to the employee.

4.4.1 Initial Training. This employer shall provide training to ensure that

the electrical hazards associated with their job are understood by employees and that the knowledge and skills required for the safe application, usage, of work place equipment, and removal of the energy controls are acquired by employees. The training shall include the following:


recognition of applicable hazardous energy sources, the type and magnitude of the energy available in the workplace, and the methods and means necessary for energy isolation and control.

4.4.1.2 Each affected employee shall be instructed in the purpose

and use of the energy control procedure.


111

4.4.1.3 All other employees whose work operations are or may be in an area where energy control procedures may be utilized, shall be instructed about the procedure, and about the prohibition relating to attempts to restart or reenergize machines or equipment which are locked out or tagged out. Tags are essentially warning devices affixed to energy isolating devices, and do not provide the physical restraint on those devices that is provided by a lock. Non-legible or missing tags will be reported immediately.

4.5 Refresher Training. 4.5.1 Retraining shall be provided for all authorized and affected

employees whenever there is a change in their job assignments, a change in machines, equipment or processes that present a new hazard, when their work takes them into hazardous areas, or when there is a change in the energy control procedures.

4.5.2 Additional retraining shall also be conducted whenever a periodic

inspection reveals, or whenever this employer has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge of known hazards, or use of the energy control procedures.

4.5.3 The retraining shall reestablish employee proficiency and introduce

new or revised control methods and procedures, as necessary. 4.6 Certification. This employer shall certify that employee training has been


5. Selection and use of work practices. Supervisors shall develop and ensure use of standardized safety-related work practices to prevent electric shock or other injuries resulting from either direct or indirect electrical contacts. This will be accomplished whenever work is performed near or on equipment or circuits which are or may be energized. The specific safety-related work practices shall be consistent with the nature and extent of the associated electrical hazards. 5.1 Deenergized parts. Live parts to which an employee may be exposed shall

be deenergized before the employee works on or near them, unless it can be demonstrate that deenergizing introduces additional or increased hazards or is unfeasible due to equipment design or operational limitations. Live parts that operate at less than 50 volts to ground need not be deenergized if there will be no increased exposure to electrical burns or to explosion due to electric arcs.

Conductors and parts of electrical equipment that have been deenergized but not been locked or tagged out shall be treated as live parts.


112

NOTE 1: Examples of increased or additional hazards include interruption of life support equipment, deactivation of emergency alarm systems, shutdown of hazardous location ventilation equipment, or removal of illumination for an area. NOTE 2: Examples of work that may be performed on or near energized circuit parts because of unfeasibility due to equipment design or operational limitations include testing of electric circuits that can only be performed with the circuit energized and work on circuits that form an integral part of a continuous industrial process in a chemical plant that would otherwise need to be completely shut down in order to permit work on one circuit or piece of equipment. 5.2 Lockout and tagging. While any employee is exposed to contact with parts

of fixed electric equipment or circuits which have been deenergized, the circuits energizing the parts shall be locked out or tagged or both in accordance with the requirements of this company's lock-out/tag-out procedures program.

5.3 Energized parts. If the exposed live parts are not deenergized (i.e., for

reasons of increased or additional hazards or unfeasibility), supervisors will ensure that other safety-related work practices are used to protect employees who may be exposed to the electrical hazards involved. Such work practices shall protect employees against contact with energized circuit parts directly with any part of their body or indirectly through some other conductive object. The work practices that are used shall be suitable for the conditions under which the work is to be performed and for the voltage level of the exposed electric conductors, circuit parts, or materials. Only qualified company employees may work on electric circuit parts or equipment that have not been deenergized.

5.3.1 Authorized maintenance personnel. Only employees (once trained)

are authorized to work on or near exposed energized parts. 5.4 Contractor personnel. Contractor personnel will be notified that they may be

required to provide proof of certification for working on energized circuits, and shall be familiar with the proper use of special precautionary techniques, personal protective equipment, insulating and shielding materials, and insulated tools.

5.5 Overhead lines. If work is to be performed near overhead lines, the lines

shall be deenergized and grounded, or other protective measures shall be provided before work is started. If the lines are to be deenergized, arrangements shall be made with the person or organization that operates or controls the electric circuits involved to deenergize and ground them. If protective measures, such as guarding, isolating, or insulating are provided, these precautions shall prevent employees from contacting such lines directly with any part of their body or indirectly through conductive materials, tools, or equipment. Unqualified persons are prohibited from performing this type of work.


113

5.5.1 Unqualified employees (elevated). When an unqualified employee

is working in an elevated position near overhead lines, the location shall be such that the person and the longest conductive object he or she may contact cannot come closer to any unguarded, energized overhead line than the following distances:

5.5.1.1 For voltages to ground 50kV or below--10 ft. (305 cm) 5.5.1.2 For voltages to ground over 50kV--10 ft. (305 cm) plus 4 in.

(10 cm) for every 10kV over 50kV. 5.5.2 Unqualified employees (ground). Unqualified employees working

on the ground in the vicinity of overhead lines, the person may not bring any conductive object closer to unguarded, energized overhead lines than the distances given below.

5.5.2.1 For voltages to ground 50kV or below--10 ft. (305 cm) 5.5.2.2 For voltages to ground over 50kV--10 ft. (305 cm) plus 4 in.

(10 cm) for every 10kV over 50kV. NOTE: For voltages normally encountered with overhead power lines, objects which do not have an insulating rating for the voltage involved are considered to be conductive. 5.5.3 Qualified persons. When a qualified person is working in the vicinity

of overhead lines, whether in an elevated position or on the ground, the person may not approach or take any conductive object without an approved insulating handle closer to exposed energized parts than shown in Table S-5 (29 CFR 1910.333) unless:

5.5.3.1 The person is insulated from the energized part (gloves,

with sleeves if necessary, rated for the voltage involved are considered to be insulation of the person from the energized part on which work is performed).

5.5.3.2 The energized part is insulated both from all other

conductive objects at a different potential and from the person. 5.5.3.3 The person is insulated from all conductive objects at a

potential different from that of the energized part.


114

Table S-5 (29 CFR 1910.333)

Approach Distances for Qualified Employees--Alternating Current Voltage range (phase to phase) Minimum approach distance 300V and less Avoid contact Over 300V, not over 750V 1 ft. 0 in. (30.5 cm). Over 750V, not over 2kV l ft. 6 in. (46 cm). Over 2kV, not over 15kV 2 ft. 0 in. (61 cm). Over 15kV, not over 37kV 3 ft. 0 in. (91 cm). Over 37kV, not over 87.5kV 3 ft. 6 in. (107 cm). Over 87.5kV, not over 121kV 4 ft. 0 in. (122 cm). Over 121kV, not over 140kV 4 ft. 6 in. (137 cm). 5.5.4 Vehicular and mechanical equipment. 5.5.4.1 Company vehicles or mechanical equipment capable of

having parts of its structure elevated near energized overhead lines shall be operated so that a clearance of 10 ft. (305 cm) is maintained. If the voltage is higher than 50kV, the clearance shall be increased 4 in. (10 cm) for every 10kV over that voltage. However, under any of the following conditions, the clearance may be reduced:

5.5.4.1.1 If the vehicle is in transit with its structure lowered,

the clearance may be reduced to 4 ft. (122 cm). If the voltage is higher than 50kV, the clearance shall be increased 4 in. (10 cm) for every 10kV over that voltage.

5.5.4.1.2 If insulating barriers are installed to prevent

contact with the lines, and if the barriers are rated for the voltage of the line being guarded and are not a part of or an attachment to the vehicle or its raised structure, the clearance may be reduced to a distance within the designed working dimensions of the insulating barrier.

5.5.4.1.3 If the equipment is an aerial lift insulated for the

voltage involved, and if the work is performed by a qualified person, the clearance (between the uninsulated portion of the aerial lift and the power line) may be reduced to the distance given in Table S-5.


115

5.5.4.2 Employees standing on the ground may not contact the

vehicle or mechanical equipment or any of its attachments, unless: 5.5.4.2.1 The employee is using protective equipment rated

for the voltage. 5.5.4.2.2 The equipment is located so that no uninsulated

part of its structure (that portion of the structure that provides a conductive path to employees on the ground) can come closer to the line than 10 ft. (305 cm). If the voltage is higher than 50kV, the clearance shall be increased 4 in. (10 cm) for every 10kV over that voltage.

5.5.4.2.3 If any vehicle or mechanical equipment capable of

having parts of its structure elevated near energized overhead lines is intentionally grounded, employees working on the ground near the point of grounding may not stand at the grounding location whenever there is a possibility of overhead line contact. Additional precautions, such as the use of barricades or insulation, shall be taken to protect employees from hazardous ground potentials, depending on earth resistivity and fault currents, which can develop within the first few feet or more outward from the grounding point.

5.6 Illumination. 5.6.1 Supervisors will ensure that employees do not enter spaces

containing exposed energized parts, unless illumination is provided that enables the employees to perform the work safely.

5.6.2 Where lack of illumination or an obstruction precludes observation

of the work to be performed, employees may not perform tasks near exposed energized parts. Employees may not reach blindly into areas which may contain energized parts. Additionally, unless known otherwise the space shall be evaluated to determine if it meets the criteria for designation as a confined space. The company confined space program will be implemented to manage the entry.

5.7 Confined or enclosed work spaces. When an employee works in a confined

or enclosed space (such as a manhole or vault) that contains exposed energized parts, this employer shall provide, and the employee shall use, protective shields, protective barriers, or insulating materials as necessary to avoid inadvertent contact with these parts. Doors, hinged panels, and the like shall be secured to prevent their swinging into an employee and causing the employee to contact exposed energized parts. Additionally, unless known otherwise the space shall


116

be evaluated to determine if it meets the criteria for designation as a confined space. The company confined space program will be implemented to manage the entry.

5.8 Conductive materials and equipment. Conductive materials and equipment

that are in contact with any part of an employee's body shall be handled in a manner that will prevent them from contacting exposed energized conductors or circuit parts. Supervisors will ensure pre-written safety procedures are in place, and that all employees are trained when long dimensional conductive objects (such as ducts and pipes) in areas with exposed live parts, are used. Other protective measures (such as the use of insulation, guarding, and material handling techniques) will considered and used to minimize the hazard.

5.9 Portable ladders. Portable ladders shall have nonconductive siderails if they

are used where the employee or the ladder could contact exposed energized parts.

5.10 Conductive apparel. Conductive articles of jewelry and clothing (such as

watch bands, bracelets, rings, key chains, necklaces, metalized aprons, cloth with conductive thread, or metal headgear) may not be worn if they might contact exposed energized parts. However, such articles may be worn if they are rendered nonconductive by covering, wrapping, or other insulating means.

5.11 Housekeeping duties. Where energized parts present an electrical contact

hazard, employees may not perform housekeeping duties at such close distances to the parts that there is a possibility of contact, unless adequate safeguards (such as insulating equipment or barriers) are provided. Electrically conductive cleaning materials (including conductive solids such as steel wool, metalized cloth, and silicon carbide, as well as conductive liquid solutions) may not be used in proximity to energized parts unless procedures are followed which will prevent electrical contact.

5.12 Interlocks. Only a qualified employee may defeat an electrical safety

interlock, and then only temporarily while he or she is working on the equipment. The interlock system shall be returned to its operable condition when this work is completed.

6. Use of equipment. 6.1 Portable electric equipment. This paragraph applies to the use of cord- and

plug-connected equipment, including flexible cord sets (extension cords). 6.1.1 Handling. Portable equipment shall be handled in a manner which

will not cause damage. Flexible electric cords connected to equipment may not be used for raising or lowering the equipment. Flexible cords


117

may not be fastened with staples or otherwise hung in such a fashion as could damage the outer jacket or insulation.

6.1.2 Visual inspection. 6.1.2.1 Portable cord- and plug-connected equipment and flexible

cord sets (extension cords) shall be visually inspected before use on any shift for external defects (such as loose parts, deformed and missing pins, or damage to outer jacket or insulation) and for evidence of possible internal damage (such as pinched or crushed outer jacket). Cord- and plug-connected equipment and flexible cord sets (extension cords) which remain connected once they are put in place and are not exposed to damage need not be visually inspected until they are relocated.

6.1.2.2 If there is a defect or evidence of damage that might

expose an employee to injury, the defective or damaged item shall be removed from service, and no employee may use it until repairs and tests necessary to render the equipment safe have been made.

6.1.2.3 When an attachment plug is to be connected to a

receptacle (including any on a cord set), the relationship of the plug and receptacle contacts shall first be checked to ensure that they are of proper mating configurations.

6.1.3 Grounding-type equipment. 6.1.3.1 A flexible cord used with grounding-type equipment shall

contain an equipment grounding conductor. 6.1.3.2 Attachment plugs and receptacles may not be connected or

altered in a manner which would prevent proper continuity of the equipment grounding conductor at the point where plugs are attached to receptacles. Additionally, these devices may not be altered to allow the grounding pole of a plug to be inserted into slots intended for connection to the current-carrying conductors.

6.1.3.3 Adapters which interrupt the continuity of the equipment

grounding connection may not be used. 6.1.4 Conductive work locations. Portable electric equipment and flexible

cords used in highly conductive work locations (such as those inundated with water or other conductive liquids), or in job locations where employees are likely to contact water or conductive liquids, shall be approved for those locations.


118

6.1.5 Connecting attachment plugs. 6.1.5.1 Employees' hands may not be wet when plugging and

unplugging flexible cords and cord- and plug-connected equipment, if energized equipment is involved.

6.1.5.2 Energized plug and receptacle connections may be

handled only with insulating protective equipment if the condition of the connection could provide a conducting path to the employee's hand (if, for example, a cord connector is wet from being immersed in water).

6.1.5.3 Locking-type connectors shall be properly secured after

connection. 6.2 Electric power and lighting circuits. 6.2.1 Routine opening and closing of circuits. Load rated switches, circuit

breakers, or other devices specifically designed as disconnecting means shall be used for the opening, reversing, or closing of circuits under load conditions. Cable connectors not of the load-break type, fuses, terminal lugs, and cable splice connections may not be used for such purposes, except in an emergency.

6.2.2 Reclosing circuits after protective device operation. After a circuit is

deenergized by a circuit protective device, the circuit may not be manually reenergized until it has been determined that the equipment and circuit can be safely energized. The repetitive manual reclosing of circuit breakers or reenergizing circuits through replaced fuses is prohibited.

NOTE: When it can be determined from the design of the circuit and the overcurrent devices involved that the automatic operation of a device was caused by an overload rather than a fault condition, no examination of the circuit or connected equipment is needed before the circuit is reenergized. 6.2.3 Overcurrent protection modification. Overcurrent protection of

circuits and conductors may not be modified, even on a temporary basis, beyond that allowed by 29 CFR 1910.304(e), the installation safety requirements for overcurrent protection.

6.3 Test instruments and equipment. 6.3.1 Use. Only company qualified persons may perform testing work on

electric circuits or equipment.


119

6.3.2 Visual inspection. Test instruments and equipment and all associated test leads, cables, power cords, probes, and connectors shall be visually inspected for external defects and damage before the equipment is used. If there is a defect or evidence of damage that might expose an employee to injury, the defective or damaged item shall be removed from service, and no employee may use it until repairs and tests necessary to render the equipment safe have been made.

6.3.3 Rating of equipment. Test instruments and equipment and their

accessories shall be rated for the circuits and equipment to which they will be connected and shall be designed for the environment in which they will be used.

6.4 Occasional use of flammable or ignitable materials. Where flammable

materials are present only occasionally, electric equipment capable of igniting them shall not be used, unless measures are taken to prevent hazardous conditions from developing. Such materials include, but are not limited to: flammable gases, vapors, or liquids; combustible dust; and ignitable fibers or flyings.

NOTE: Electrical installation requirements for locations where flammable materials are present on a regular basis are contained Safeguards for personnel protection. 7. Safeguards for personnel protection. 7.1 Use of protective equipment. 7.1.1 Personal protective equipment. 7.1.1.1 Employees working in areas where there are potential

electrical hazards shall be provided with, and shall use, electrical protective equipment that is appropriate for the specific parts of the body to be protected and for the work to be performed.

NOTE: Personal protective equipment requirements are contained in subpart I of 29 CFR 1910. 7.1.1.2 Protective equipment shall be maintained in a safe, reliable

condition and shall be periodically inspected or tested, as required by 29 CFR 1910.137.

7.1.1.3 If the insulating capability of protective equipment may be

subject to damage during use, the insulating material shall be protected. (For example, an outer covering of leather is sometimes used for the protection of rubber insulating material.)


120

7.1.1.4 Employees shall wear nonconductive head protection wherever there is a danger of head injury from electric shock or burns due to contact with exposed energized parts.

7.1.1.5 Employees shall wear protective equipment for the eyes or

face wherever there is danger of injury to the eyes or face from electric arcs or flashes or from flying objects resulting from electrical explosion.

7.1.2 General protective equipment and tools. 7.1.2.1 When working near exposed energized conductors or

circuit parts, each employee shall use insulated tools or handling equipment if the tools or handling equipment might make contact with such conductors or parts. If the insulating capability of insulated tools or handling equipment is subject to damage, the insulating material shall be protected.

7.1.2.1.1 Fuse handling equipment, insulated for the circuit

voltage, shall be used to remove or install fuses when the fuse terminals are energized.

7.1.2.1.2 Ropes and handlines used near exposed

energized parts shall be nonconductive. 7.1.2.2 Protective shields, protective barriers, or insulating

materials shall be used to protect each employee from shock, burns, or other electrically related injuries while that employee is working near exposed energized parts which might be accidentally contacted or where dangerous electric heating or arcing might occur. When normally enclosed live parts are exposed for maintenance or repair, they shall be guarded to protect unqualified persons from contact with the live parts.

8. Definitions applicable to this standard practice instruction. Acceptable. An installation or equipment is acceptable to the Assistant Secretary of Labor, and approved within the meaning of this 29 CFR 1910 Subpart S:

If it is accepted, or certified, or listed, or labeled, or otherwise determined to be safe by a nationally recognized testing laboratory; or

With respect to an installation or equipment of a kind which no nationally recognized testing laboratory accepts, certifies, lists, labels, or determines to be safe, if it is inspected or tested by another Federal agency, or by a State, municipal, or other local authority responsible for enforcing occupational


121

safety provisions of the National Electrical Code and found in compliance with the provisions of the National Electrical Code as applied in this Subpart; or

With respect to custom-made equipment or related installations which are designed, fabricated for, and intended for use by a particular customer, if it is determined to be safe for its intended use by its manufacturer on the basis of test data which the employer keeps and makes available for inspection to the Assistant Secretary and his authorized representatives. Refer to 29 CFR 1910.7 for definition of nationally recognized testing laboratory.

Accepted. An installation is "accepted" if it has been inspected and found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to conform to specified plans or to procedures of applicable codes. Accessible. (As applied to wiring methods.) Capable of being removed or exposed without damaging the building structure or finish, or not permanently closed in by the structure or finish of the building. (See "concealed" and "exposed.") Accessible. (As applied to equipment.) Admitting close approach; not guarded by locked doors, elevation, or other effective means. (See "Readily accessible.") Ampacity. Current-carrying capacity of electric conductors expressed in amperes. Appliances. Utilization equipment, generally other than industrial, normally built in standardized sizes or types, which is installed or connected as a unit to perform one or more functions such as clothes washing, air conditioning, food mixing, deep frying, etc. Approved. Acceptable to the authority enforcing 29 CFR 1910 subpart S. The authority enforcing this subpart is the Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and Health. The definition of "acceptable" indicates what is acceptable to the Assistant Secretary of Labor, and therefore approved within the meaning of 29 CFR 1910 Subpart S. Approved for the purpose. Approved for a specific purpose, environment, or application described in a particular standard requirement. Suitability of equipment or materials for a specific purpose, environment or application may be determined by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, inspection agency or other organization concerned with product evaluation as part of its listing and labeling program. (See "Labeled" or "Listed.") Armored cable. Type AC armored cable is a fabricated assembly of insulated conductors in a flexible metallic enclosure. Askarel. A generic term for a group of nonflammable synthetic chlorinated hydrocarbons used as electrical insulating media. Askarels of various compositional types are used. Under arcing conditions the gases produced, while consisting


122

predominantly of noncombustible hydrogen chloride, can include varying amounts of combustible gases depending upon the askarel type. Attachment plug (Plug cap) (Cap). A device which, by insertion in a receptacle, establishes connection between the conductors of the attached flexible cord and the conductors connected permanently to the receptacle. Automatic. Self-acting, operating by its own mechanism when actuated by some impersonal influence, as, for example, a change in current strength, pressure, temperature, or mechanical configuration. Bare conductor. See "Conductor." Bonding. The permanent joining of metallic parts to form an electrically conductive path which will assure electrical continuity and the capacity to conduct safely any current likely to be imposed. Bonding jumper. A reliable conductor to assure the required electrical conductivity between metal parts required to be electrically connected. Branch circuit. The circuit conductors between the final overcurrent device protecting the circuit and the outlet(s). Building. A structure which stands alone or which is cut off from adjoining structures by fire walls with all openings therein protected by approved fire doors. Cabinet. An enclosure designed either for surface or flush mounting, and provided with a frame, mat, or trim in which a swinging door or doors are or may be hung. Cable tray system. A cable tray system is a unit or assembly of units or sections, and associated fittings, made of metal or other noncombustible materials forming a rigid structural system used to support cables.

Cable tray systems include ladders, troughs, channels, solid bottom trays, and other similar structures.

Cablebus. Cablebus is an approved assembly of insulated conductors with fittings and conductor terminations in a completely enclosed, ventilated, protective metal housing. Center pivot irrigation machine. A center pivot irrigation machine is a multi-motored irrigation machine which revolves around a central pivot and employs alignment switches or similar devices to control individual motors. Certified. Equipment is "certified" if it:


123

Has been tested and found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to meet nationally recognized standards or to be safe for use in a specified manner, or

Is of a kind whose production is periodically inspected by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, and

It bears a label, tag, or other record of certification. Circuit breaker.

(600 volts nominal, or less). A device designed to open and close a circuit by nonautomatic means and to open the circuit automatically on a predetermined overcurrent without injury to itself when properly applied within its rating.

(Over 600 volts, nominal). A switching device capable of making, carrying, and breaking currents under normal circuit conditions, and also making, carrying for a specified time, and breaking currents under specified abnormal circuit conditions, such as those of short circuit.

Class I locations. Class I locations are those in which flammable gases or vapors are or may be present in the air in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures. Class I locations include the following:

Class I, Division 1. A Class I, Division 1 location is a location:

In which hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or vapors may exist under normal operating conditions; or

In which hazardous concentrations of such gases or vapors may exist frequently because of repair or maintenance operations or because of leakage; or

In which breakdown or faulty operation of equipment or processes might release hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or vapors, and might also cause simultaneous failure of electric equipment.

Note: This classification usually includes locations where volatile flammable liquids or liquefied flammable gases are transferred from one container to another; interiors of spray booths and areas in the vicinity of spraying and painting operations where volatile flammable solvents are used; locations containing open tanks or vats of volatile flammable liquids; drying rooms or compartments for the evaporation of flammable solvents; locations containing fat and oil extraction equipment using volatile flammable solvents; portions of cleaning and dyeing plants where flammable liquids are used; gas generator rooms and other portions of gas manufacturing plants where flammable gas


124

may escape; inadequately ventilated pump rooms for flammable gas or for volatile flammable liquids; the interiors of refrigerators and freezers in which volatile flammable materials are stored in open, lightly stoppered, or easily ruptured containers; and all other locations where ignitable concentrations of flammable vapors or gases are likely to occur in the course of normal operations.

Class I, Division 2. A Class I, Division 2 location is a location:

In which volatile flammable liquids or flammable gases are handled, processed, or used, but in which the hazardous liquids, vapors, or gases will normally be confined within closed containers or closed systems from which they can escape only in case of accidental rupture or breakdown of such containers or systems, or in case of abnormal operation of equipment; or

In which hazardous concentrations of gases or vapors are normally prevented by positive mechanical ventilation, and which might become hazardous through failure or abnormal operations of the ventilating equipment; or

That is adjacent to a Class I, Division 1 location, and to which hazardous concentrations of gases or vapors might occasionally be communicated unless such communication is prevented by adequate positive-pressure ventilation from a source of clean air, and effective safeguards against ventilation failure are provided.

Note: This classification usually includes locations where volatile flammable liquids or flammable gases or vapors are used, but which would become hazardous only in case of an accident or of some unusual operating condition. The quantity of flammable material that might escape in case of accident, the adequacy of ventilating equipment, the total area involved, and the record of the industry or business with respect to explosions or fires are all factors that merit consideration in determining the classification and extent of each location. Piping without valves, checks, meters, and similar devices would not ordinarily introduce a hazardous condition even though used for flammable liquids or gases. Locations used for the storage of flammable liquids or a liquefied or compressed gases in sealed containers would not normally be considered hazardous unless also subject to other hazardous conditions. Electrical conduits and their associated enclosures separated from process fluids by a single seal or barrier are classed as a Division 2 location if the outside of the conduit and enclosures is a nonhazardous location. Class II locations. Class II locations are those that are hazardous because of the presence of combustible dust. Class II locations include the following:

Class II, Division 1. A Class II, Division 1 location is a location:


125

In which combustible dust is or may be in suspension in the air under normal operating conditions, in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures; or

Where mechanical failure or abnormal operation of machinery or equipment might cause such explosive or ignitable mixtures to be produced, and might also provide a source of ignition through simultaneous failure of electric equipment, operation of protection devices, or from other causes, or

In which combustible dusts of an electrically conductive nature may be present.

Note: This classification may include areas of grain handling and processing plants, starch plants, sugar-pulverizing plants, malting plants, hay-grinding plants, coal pulverizing plants, areas where metal dusts and powders are produced or processed, and other similar locations which contain dust producing machinery and equipment (except where the equipment is dust-tight or vented to the outside). These areas would have combustible dust in the air, under normal operating conditions, in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures. Combustible dusts which are electrically nonconductive include dusts produced in the handling and processing of grain and grain products, pulverized sugar and cocoa, dried egg and milk powders, pulverized spices, starch and pastes, potato and woodflour, oil meal from beans and seed, dried hay, and other organic materials which may produce combustible dusts when processed or handled. Dusts containing magnesium or aluminum are particularly hazardous and the use of extreme caution is necessary to avoid ignition and explosion.

Class II, Division 2. A Class II, Division 2 location is a location in which:

Combustible dust will not normally be in suspension in the air in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures, and dust accumulations are normally insufficient to interfere with the normal operation of electrical equipment or other apparatus; or

Dust may be in suspension in the air as a result of infrequent malfunctioning of handling or processing equipment, and dust accumulations resulting therefrom may be ignitable by abnormal operation or failure of electrical equipment or other apparatus.

Note: This classification includes locations where dangerous concentrations of suspended dust would not be likely but where dust accumulations might form on or in the vicinity of electric equipment. These areas may contain equipment from which appreciable quantities of dust would escape under abnormal operating conditions or be adjacent to a Class II Division 1 location, as described above, into which an explosive or ignitable concentration of dust may be put into suspension under abnormal operating conditions.


126

Class III locations. Class III locations are those that are hazardous because of the presence of easily ignitable fibers or flyings but in which such fibers or flyings are not likely to be in suspension in the air in quantities sufficient to produce ignitable mixtures. Class III locations include the following:

Class III, Division 1. A Class III, Division 1 location is a location in which easily ignitable fibers or materials producing combustible flyings are handled, manufactured, or used.

Note: Such locations usually include some parts of rayon, cotton, and other textile mills; combustible fiber manufacturing and processing plants; cotton gins and cotton-seed mills; flax-processing plants; clothing manufacturing plants; woodworking plants, and establishments; and industries involving similar hazardous processes or conditions. Easily ignitable fibers and flyings include rayon, cotton (including cotton linters and cotton waste), sisal or henequen, istle, jute, hemp, tow, cocoa fiber, oakum, baled waste kapok, Spanish moss, excelsior, and other materials of similar nature.

Class III, Division 2. A Class III, Division 2 location is a location in which easily ignitable fibers are stored or handled, except in process of manufacture.

Collector ring. A collector ring is an assembly of slip rings for transferring electrical energy from a stationary to a rotating member. Concealed. Rendered inaccessible by the structure or finish of the building. Wires in concealed raceways are considered concealed, even though they may become accessible by withdrawing them. [See "Accessible. (As applied to wiring methods.)"] Conductor.

Bare. A conductor having no covering or electrical insulation whatsoever.

Covered. A conductor encased within material of composition or thickness that is not recognized as electrical insulation.

Insulated. A conductor encased within material of composition and thickness that is recognized as electrical insulation.

Conduit body. A separate portion of a conduit or tubing system that provides access through a removable cover(s) to the interior of the system at a junction of two or more sections of the system or at a terminal point of the system. Boxes such as FS and FD or larger cast or sheet metal boxes are not classified as conduit bodies. Controller. A device or group of devices that serves to govern, in some predetermined manner, the electric power delivered to the apparatus to which it is connected.


127

Cooking unit, counter-mounted. A cooking appliance designed for mounting in or on a counter and consisting of one or more heating elements, internal wiring, and built-in or separately mountable controls. (See "Oven, wall-mounted.") Covered conductor. See "Conductor." Cutout. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) An assembly of a fuse support with either a fuseholder, fuse carrier, or disconnecting blade. The fuseholder or fuse carrier may include a conducting element (fuse link), or may act as the disconnecting blade by the inclusion of a nonfusible member. Cutout box. An enclosure designed for surface mounting and having swinging doors or covers secured directly to and telescoping with the walls of the box proper. (See "Cabinet.") Damp location. See "Location." Dead front. Without live parts exposed to a person on the operating side of the equipment. Device. A unit of an electrical system which is intended to carry but not utilize electric energy. Dielectric heating. Dielectric heating is the heating of a nominally insulating material due to its own dielectric losses when the material is placed in a varying electric field. Disconnecting means. A device, or group of devices, or other means by which the conductors of a circuit can be disconnected from their source of supply. Disconnecting (or Isolating) switch. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A mechanical switching device used for isolating a circuit or equipment from a source of power. Dry location. See "Location." Electric sign. A fixed, stationary, or portable self-contained, electrically illuminated utilization equipment with words or symbols designed to convey information or attract attention. Enclosed. Surrounded by a case, housing, fence or walls which will prevent persons from accidentally contacting energized parts. Enclosure. The case or housing of apparatus, or the fence or walls surrounding an installation to prevent personnel from accidentally contacting energized parts, or to protect the equipment from physical damage.


128

Equipment. A general term including material, fittings, devices, appliances, fixtures, apparatus, and the like, used as a part of, or in connection with, an electrical installation. Equipment grounding conductor. See "Grounding conductor, equipment." Explosion-proof apparatus. Apparatus enclosed in a case that is capable of withstanding an explosion of a specified gas or vapor which may occur within it and of preventing the ignition of a specified gas or vapor surrounding the enclosure by sparks, flashes, or explosion of the gas or vapor within, and which operates at such an external temperature that it will not ignite a surrounding flammable atmosphere. Exposed. (As applied to live parts.) Capable of being inadvertently touched or approached nearer than a safe distance by a person. It is applied to parts not suitably guarded, isolated, or insulated. (See "Accessible." and "Concealed.") Exposed. (As applied to wiring methods.) On or attached to the surface or behind panels designed to allow access. [See "Accessible. (As applied to wiring methods.)"] Exposed. (For the purposes of 29 CFR 1910.308(e), Communications systems.) Where the circuit is in such a position that in case of failure of supports or insulation, contact with another circuit may result. Externally operable. Capable of being operated without exposing the operator to contact with live parts. Feeder. All circuit conductors between the service equipment, or the generator switchboard of an isolated plant, and the final branch-circuit overcurrent device. Fitting. An accessory such as a locknut, bushing, or other part of a wiring system that is intended primarily to perform a mechanical rather than an electrical function. Fuse. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) An overcurrent protective device with a circuit opening fusible part that is heated and severed by the passage of overcurrent through it. A fuse comprises all the parts that form a unit capable of performing the prescribed functions. It may or may not be the complete device necessary to connect it into an electrical circuit. Ground. A conducting connection, whether intentional or accidental, between an electrical circuit or equipment and the earth, or to some conducting body that serves in place of the earth. Grounded. Connected to earth or to some conducting body that serves in place of the earth. Grounded, effectively. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) Permanently connected to earth through a ground connection of sufficiently low impedance and having sufficient


129

ampacity that ground fault current which may occur cannot build up to voltages dangerous to personnel. Grounded conductor. A system or circuit conductor that is intentionally grounded. Grounding conductor. A conductor used to connect equipment or the grounded circuit of a wiring system to a grounding electrode or electrodes. Grounding conductor, equipment. The conductor used to connect the non-current-carrying metal parts of equipment, raceways, and other enclosures to the system grounded conductor and/or the grounding electrode conductor at the service equipment or at the source of a separately derived system. Grounding electrode conductor. The conductor used to connect the grounding electrode to the equipment grounding conductor and/or to the grounded conductor of the circuit at the service equipment or at the source of a separately derived system. Ground-fault circuit-interrupter. A device whose function is to interrupt the electric circuit to the load when a fault current to ground exceeds some predetermined value that is less than that required to operate the overcurrent protective device of the supply circuit. Guarded. Covered, shielded, fenced, enclosed, or otherwise protected by means of suitable covers, casings, barriers, rails, screens, mats, or platforms to remove the likelihood of approach to a point of danger or contact by persons or objects. Health care facilities. Buildings or portions of buildings and mobile homes that contain, but are not limited to, hospitals, nursing homes, extended care facilities, clinics, and medical and dental offices, whether fixed or mobile. Heating equipment. For the purposes of 29 CFR 1910.306(g), the term heating equipment includes any equipment used for heating purposes if heat is generated by induction or dielectric methods. Hoistway. Any shaftway, hatchway, well hole, or other vertical opening or space in which an elevator or dumbwaiter is designed to operate. Identified. Identified, as used in reference to a conductor or its terminal, means that such conductor or terminal can be readily recognized as grounded. Induction heating. Induction heating is the heating of a nominally conductive material due to its own I \2\ R losses when the material is placed in a varying electromagnetic field. Insulated conductor. See Conductor.


130

Interrupter switch. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A switch capable of making, carrying, and interrupting specified currents. Irrigation machine. An irrigation machine is an electrically driven or controlled machine, with one or more motors, not hand portable, and used primarily to transport and distribute water for agricultural purposes. Isolated. Not readily accessible to persons unless special means for access are used. Isolated power system. A system comprising an isolating transformer or its equivalent, a line isolation monitor, and its ungrounded circuit conductors. Labeled. Equipment is labeled if there is attached to it a label, symbol, or other identifying mark of a nationally recognized testing laboratory which, (a) makes periodic inspections of the production of such equipment, and (b) whose labeling indicates compliance with nationally recognized standards or tests to determine safe use in a specified manner. Lighting outlet. An outlet intended for the direct connection of a lampholder, a lighting fixture, or a pendant cord terminating in a lampholder. Line-clearance tree trimming. The pruning, trimming, repairing, maintaining, removing, or clearing of trees or cutting of brush that is within 10 feet (305 cm) of electric supply lines and equipment. Listed. Equipment is listed if it is of a kind mentioned in a list which, (a) is published by a nationally recognized laboratory which makes periodic inspection of the production of such equipment, and (b) states such equipment meets nationally recognized standards or has been tested and found safe for use in a specified manner. Location

Damp location. Partially protected locations under canopies, marquees, roofed open porches, and like locations, and interior locations subject to moderate degrees of moisture, such as some basements, some barns, and some cold-storage warehouses.

Dry location. A location not normally subject to dampness or wetness. A location classified as dry may be temporarily subject to dampness or wetness, as in the case of a building under construction.

Wet location. Installations underground or in concrete slabs or masonry in direct contact with the earth, and locations subject to saturation with water or other liquids, such as vehicle-washing areas, and locations exposed to weather and unprotected.


131

May. If a discretionary right, privilege, or power is conferred, the word "may" is used. If a right, privilege, or power is abridged or if an obligation to abstain from acting is imposed, the word "may" is used with a restrictive "no," "not," or "only." (E.g., no employer may . . . ; an employer may not . . . ; only qualified persons may. . . .) Medium voltage cable. Type MV medium voltage cable is a single or multiconductor solid dielectric insulated cable rated 2000 volts or higher. Metal-clad cable. Type MC cable is a factory assembly of one or more conductors, each individually insulated and enclosed in a metallic sheath of interlocking tape, or a smooth or corrugated tube. Mineral-insulated metal-sheathed cable. Type MI mineral-insulated metal-sheathed cable is a factory assembly of one or more conductors insulated with a highly compressed refractory mineral insulation and enclosed in a liquidtight and gastight continuous copper sheath. Mobile X-ray. X-ray equipment mounted on a permanent base with wheels and/or casters for moving while completely assembled. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is a factory assembly of two or more insulated conductors having an outer sheath of moisture resistant, flame-retardant, nonmetallic material. Nonmetallic sheathed cable is manufactured in the following types:

Type NM. The overall covering has a flame-retardant and moisture-resistant finish.

Type NMC. The overall covering is flame-retardant, moisture-resistant, fungus-resistant, and corrosion-resistant. Oil (filled) cutout. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A cutout in which all or part of the fuse support and its fuse link or disconnecting blade are mounted in oil with complete immersion of the contacts and the fusible portion of the conducting element (fuse link), so that arc interruption by severing of the fuse link or by opening of the contacts will occur under oil.

Open wiring on insulators. Open wiring on insulators is an exposed wiring method using cleats, knobs, tubes, and flexible tubing for the protection and support of single insulated conductors run in or on buildings, and not concealed by the building structure. Outlet. A point on the wiring system at which current is taken to supply utilization equipment. Outline lighting. An arrangement of incandescent lamps or electric discharge tubing to outline or call attention to certain features such as the shape of a building or the decoration of a window.


132

Oven, wall-mounted. An oven for cooking purposes designed for mounting in or on a wall or other surface and consisting of one of more heating elements, internal wiring, and built-in or separately mountable controls. (See Cooking unit, counter mounted.) Overcurrent. Any current in excess of the rated current of equipment or the ampacity of a conductor. It may result from overload (see definition), short circuit, or ground fault. A current in excess of rating may be accommodated by certain equipment and conductors for a given set of conditions. Hence the rules for overcurrent protection are specific for particular situations. Overload. Operation of equipment in excess of normal, full load rating, or of a conductor in excess of rated ampacity which, when it persists for a sufficient length of time, would cause damage or dangerous overheating. A fault, such as a short circuit or ground fault, is not an overload. (See Overcurrent.) Panelboard. A single panel or group of panel units designed for assembly in the form of a single panel; including buses, automatic overcurrent devices, and with or without switches for the control of light, heat, or power circuits; designed to be placed in a cabinet or cutout box placed in or against a wall or partition and accessible only from the front. (See Switchboard.) Permanently installed decorative fountains and reflection pools. Those that are constructed in the ground, on the ground, or in a building in such a manner that the pool cannot be readily disassembled for storage and are served by electrical circuits of any nature. These units are primarily constructed for their aesthetic value and not intended for swimming or wading. Permanently installed swimming pools, wading and therapeutic pools. Those that are constructed in the ground, on the ground, or in a building in such a manner that the pool cannot be readily disassembled for storage whether or not served by electrical circuits of any nature. Portable X-ray. X-ray equipment designed to be hand-carried. Power and control tray cable. Type TC power and control tray cable is a factory assembly of two or more insulated conductors, with or without associated bare or covered grounding conductors under a nonmetallic sheath, approved for installation in cable trays, in raceways, or where supported by a messenger wire. Power fuse. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) See Fuse. Power-limited tray cable. Type PLTC nonmetallic-sheathed power limited tray cable is a factory assembly of two or more insulated conductors under a nonmetallic jacket. Power outlet. An enclosed assembly which may include receptacles, circuit breakers, fuseholders, fused switches, buses and watt-hour meter mounting means; intended to


133

supply and control power to mobile homes, recreational vehicles or boats, or to serve as a means for distributing power required to operate mobile or temporarily installed equipment. Premises wiring system. That interior and exterior wiring, including power, lighting, control, and signal circuit wiring together with all of its associated hardware, fittings, and wiring devices, both permanently and temporarily installed, which extends from the load end of the service drop, or load end of the service lateral conductors to the outlet(s). Such wiring does not include wiring internal to appliances, fixtures, motors, controllers, motor control centers, and similar equipment. Qualified person. One familiar with the construction and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved.

Note 1: Whether an employee is considered to be a "qualified person" will depend upon various circumstances in the workplace. It is possible and, in fact, likely for an individual to be considered "qualified" with regard to certain equipment in the workplace, but "unqualified" as to other equipment. (See 29 CFR 1910.332(b)(3) for training requirements that specifically apply to qualified persons.)

Note 2: An employee who is undergoing on-the-job training and who, in the course of such training, has demonstrated an ability to perform duties safely at his or her level of training and who is under the direct supervision of a qualified person is considered to be a qualified person for the performance of those duties.

Raceway. A channel designed expressly for holding wires, cables, or busbars, with additional functions as permitted in this subpart. Raceways may be of metal or insulating material, and the term includes rigid metal conduit, rigid nonmetallic conduit, intermediate metal conduit, liquidtight flexible metal conduit, flexible metallic tubing, flexible metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, underfloor raceways, cellular concrete floor raceways, cellular metal floor raceways, surface raceways, wireways, and busways. Readily accessible. Capable of being reached quickly for operation, renewal, or inspections, without requiring those to whom ready access is requisite to climb over or remove obstacles or to resort to portable ladders, chairs, etc. (See "Accessible.) Receptacle. A receptacle is a contact device installed at the outlet for the connection of a single attachment plug. A single receptacle is a single contact device with no other contact device on the same yoke. A multiple receptacle is a single device containing two or more receptacles. Receptacle outlet. An outlet where one or more receptacles are installed.


134

Remote-control circuit. Any electric circuit that controls any other circuit through a relay or an equivalent device. Sealable equipment. Equipment enclosed in a case or cabinet that is provided with a means of sealing or locking so that live parts cannot be made accessible without opening the enclosure. The equipment may or may not be operable without opening the enclosure. Separately derived system. A premises wiring system whose power is derived from generator, transformer, or converter winding and has no direct electrical connection, including a solidly connected grounded circuit conductor, to supply conductors originating in another system. Service. The conductors and equipment for delivering energy from the electricity supply system to the wiring system of the premises served. Service cable. Service conductors made up in the form of a cable. Service conductors. The supply conductors that extend from the street main or from transformers to the service equipment of the premises supplied. Service drop. The overhead service conductors from the last pole or other aerial support to and including the splices, if any, connecting to the service-entrance conductors at the building or other structure. Service-entrance cable. Service-entrance cable is a single conductor or multiconductor assembly provided with or without an overall covering, primarily used for services and of the following types:

Type SE, having a flame-retardant, moisture-resistant covering, but not required to have inherent protection against mechanical abuse.

Type USE, recognized for underground use, having a moisture-resistant covering, but not required to have a flame-retardant covering or inherent protection against mechanical abuse. Single-conductor cables having an insulation specifically approved for the purpose do not require an outer covering.

Service-entrance conductors, overhead system. The service conductors between the terminals of the service equipment and a point usually outside the building, clear of building walls, where joined by tap or splice to the service drop. Service entrance conductors, underground system. The service conductors between the terminals of the service equipment and the point of connection to the service lateral. Where service equipment is located outside the building walls, there may be no service-entrance conductors, or they may be entirely outside the building.


135

Service equipment. The necessary equipment, usually consisting of a circuit breaker or switch and fuses, and their accessories, located near the point of entrance of supply conductors to a building or other structure, or an otherwise defined area, and intended to constitute the main control and means of cutoff of the supply. Service raceway. The raceway that encloses the service-entrance conductors. Shielded nonmetallic-sheathed cable. Type SNM, shielded nonmetallic-sheathed cable is a factory assembly of two or more insulated conductors in an extruded core of moisture-resistant, flame-resistant nonmetallic material, covered with an overlapping spiral metal tape and wire shield and jacketed with an extruded moisture-, flame-, oil-, corrosion-, fungus-, and sunlight-resistant nonmetallic material. Show window. Any window used or designed to be used for the display of goods or advertising material, whether it is fully or partly enclosed or entirely open at the rear and whether or not it has a platform raised higher than the street floor level. Sign. See Electric Sign. Signaling circuit. Any electric circuit that energizes signaling equipment. Special permission. The written consent of the authority having jurisdiction. Storable swimming or wading pool. A pool with a maximum dimension of 15 feet and a maximum wall height of 3 feet and is so constructed that it may be readily disassembled for storage and reassembled to its original integrity. Switchboard. A large single panel, frame, or assembly of panels which have switches, buses, instruments, overcurrent and other protective devices mounted on the face or back or both. Switchboards are generally accessible from the rear as well as from the front and are not intended to be installed in cabinets. (See Panelboard.) Switches.

General-use switch. A switch intended for use in general distribution and branch circuits. It is rated in amperes, and it is capable of interrupting its rated current at its rated voltage.

General-use snap switch. A form of general-use switch so constructed that it can be installed in flush device boxes or on outlet box covers, or otherwise used in conjunction with wiring systems recognized by this subpart.

Isolating switch. A switch intended for isolating an electric circuit from the source of power. It has no interrupting rating, and it is intended to be operated only after the circuit has been opened by some other means.


136

Motor-circuit switch. A switch, rated in horsepower, capable of interrupting the maximum operating overload current of a motor of the same horsepower rating as the switch at the rated voltage.

Switching devices. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) Devices designed to close and/or open one or more electric circuits. Included in this category are circuit breakers, cutouts, disconnecting (or isolating) switches, disconnecting means, interrupter switches, and oil (filled) cutouts.

Transportable X-ray. X-ray equipment installed in a vehicle or that may readily be disassembled for transport in a vehicle. Utilization equipment. Utilization equipment means equipment which utilizes electric energy for mechanical, chemical, heating, lighting, or similar useful purpose. Utilization system. A utilization system is a system which provides electric power and light for employee workplaces, and includes the premises wiring system and utilization equipment. Ventilated. Provided with a means to permit circulation of air sufficient to remove an excess of heat, fumes, or vapors. Volatile flammable liquid. A flammable liquid having a flash point below 38 degrees C (100 degrees F) or whose temperature is above its flash point. Voltage (of a circuit). The greatest root-mean-square (effective) difference of potential between any two conductors of the circuit concerned. Voltage, nominal. A nominal value assigned to a circuit or system for the purpose of conveniently designating its voltage class (as 120/240, 480Y/277, 600, etc.). The actual voltage at which a circuit operates can vary from the nominal within a range that permits satisfactory operation of equipment. Voltage to ground. For grounded circuits, the voltage between the given conductor and that point or conductor of the circuit that is grounded; for ungrounded circuits, the greatest voltage between the given conductor and any other conductor of the circuit. Watertight. So constructed that moisture will not enter the enclosure. Weatherproof. So constructed or protected that exposure to the weather will not interfere with successful operation. Rainproof, raintight, or watertight equipment can fulfill the requirements for weatherproof where varying weather conditions other than wetness, such as snow, ice, dust, or temperature extremes, are not a factor. Wet location. See Location.


137

Wireways. Wireways are sheet-metal troughs with hinged or removable covers for housing and protecting electric wires and cable and in which conductors are laid in place after the wireway has been installed as a complete system.


DATE: FEBRUARY 27, 2009 (Rev. 4-06-09) SUBJECT: Elevated Work, Aerial and Scissor Lift Safety Program REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.67 OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.333 OSHA - 29 CFR 1926.453 BASIS: Accidents resulting from aerial lift truck operation can result in severe personal injury or death, major property damage and major damage to company products. This poses a serious problem for workers and their employer. The OSHA Aerial Lift Truck Standard establishes uniform requirements to make sure that hazards associated with the use of aerial lift trucks are evaluated, and that this hazard information and training is transmitted to all affected workers. GENERAL: H3O, INC. will ensure that the requirements of the OSHA Standard for aerial lift trucks will be adhered to. This standard practice instruction is intended to address comprehensively the issues of; employee training, authorization, safety requirements, fire protection, new purchase designs, maintenance, and general operation of aerial lift trucks used within our facility. Contents of the Aerial lift trucks Program 1. Written Program. 2. Training Program. 3. Operations Program. 4. Configuration Program. 5. Electrical Hazards Program. 6. Definitions. 7. Bucket Lift Safety Requirements 8. Scissor Lift Safety Requirements


138

H3O, INC. Aerial Lift Truck Program 1. Written Program. H3O, INC. will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction when any of the following occurs: * On an annual basis. * When changes occur to governing regulatory sources that require revision. * When changes occur to related company procedures that require a revision. * When facility operational changes occur that require a revision. * When there is an accident or close-call that relates to this area of safety. * Anytime the procedures fail. Effective implementation of this program requires support from all levels of management. This written program will be communicated to all personnel that are affected by it. It encompasses the total workplace, regardless of the number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals and objectives. 2. Training program. Operator training. Only trained and authorized operators shall be permitted to operate an aerial lift truck. All operator training and evaluation shall be conducted by persons who have the knowledge, training, and experience to train aerial lift truck operators and evaluate their competence. Employees will be trained in accordance with the following guidelines. 2.1 The company Safety Administrator, individual supervisor, or select trainers,

(once trained) will have the authority to provide training on the operation of aerial lift trucks.

2.2 Employees of H3O, INC. will not operate a aerial lift truck unless they have

received training in accordance with this standard practice instruction and 29 CFR 1910.67.

2.3 Personnel rotated within the company will have their training verified prior to

being allowed to operate an aerial lift truck. 2.4 Employee personnel records will be annotated with the date, title, and

specifics of said training. 2.5 Any employee who refuses such training will not be permitted to operate an

aerial lift truck. 2.6 Trainees may operate an aerial lift truck only: 2.6.1 Under the direct supervision of persons who have the knowledge,

training, and experience to train operators and evaluate their competence; and


139

2.6.2 Where such operation does not endanger the trainee or other

employees. 2.7 Retraining shall be provided for all operators: 2.7.1 Refresher training in relevant topics shall be provided to the

operator when: 2.7.2 The operator has been observed to operate the vehicle in an unsafe

manner; 2.7.3 The operator has been involved in an accident or near-miss

incident; 2.7.4 The operator has received an evaluation that reveals that the

operator is not operating the truck safely; 2.7.5 The operator is assigned to drive a different type of truck; or 2.7.6 A condition in the workplace changes in a manner that could affect

safe operation of the truck. 2.8 Retraining shall reestablish employee proficiency and introduce new or

revised control methods and procedures, as necessary. 2.9 Certification. This employer shall certify that employee training has been

accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification shall contain each employee's name and dates of training and any other information as required.

3. Operations Program. The following safety guidelines will be followed by all truck operators. 3.1 Trucks shall not be driven up to anyone standing in front of a fixed object. 3.2 No person shall be allowed to stand or pass under the elevated portion of

any truck, whether loaded or empty. 3.3 Unauthorized personnel shall not be permitted to ride on aerial lift trucks. A

safe place (in accordance with the vehicle manufacturers safety specifications) shall be provided where riders are authorized.

3.4 When an aerial lift truck is left unattended, the basket shall be fully lowered,

controls will be neutralized, power shut off, and brakes set. Wheels will be blocked if the truck is parked on an incline.


140

3.5 Lift controls shall be tested each day prior to use to determine that such controls are in safe working condition.

3.6 Belting off to an adjacent pole, structure, or equipment while working from an

aerial lift shall not be permitted. 3.7 Employees shall always stand firmly on the floor of the basket, and shall not

sit or climb on the edge of the basket or use planks, ladders, or other devices for a work position.

3.8 A body belt shall be worn and a lanyard attached to the boom or basket

when working from an aerial lift. 3.9 Boom and basket load limits specified by the manufacturer shall not be

exceeded. 3.10 The brakes shall be set and outriggers, when used, shall be positioned on

pads or a solid surface. Wheel chocks shall be installed before using an aerial lift on an incline.

3.11 An aerial lift truck may not be moved when the boom is elevated in a

working position with an individual in the basket, except for equipment which is specifically designed for this type of operation.

3.12 Articulating boom and extensible boom platforms, primarily designed as

personnel carriers, shall have both platform (upper) and lower controls. Upper controls shall be in or beside the platform within easy reach of the operator. Lower controls shall provide for overriding the upper controls. Controls shall be plainly marked as to their function. Lower level controls shall not be operated unless permission has been obtained from the employee in the lift, except in case of emergency.

3.13 The insulated portion of an aerial lift shall not be altered in any manner that

might reduce its electrical insulating value. 3.14 Before moving an aerial lift for travel, the boom(s) shall be inspected to see

that it is properly cradled and outriggers are in stowed position. 3.15 The operator will ensure sufficient headroom under overhead installations,

lights, pipes, sprinkler system, etc. before operating the vehicle in these areas. 3.16 Only approved aerial lift trucks will be used in hazardous locations. 3.17 Fire aisles, access to stairways, and fire equipment will be not be

obstructed at any time.


141

3.18 General requirements. Operators: 3.18.1 Will obey Plant/Site speeds and other traffic regulations at all

times. 3.18.2 Will not raise or lower baskets while moving. 3.18.3 Will use all plant/Site observation mirrors. 3.18.4 Will ensure vehicle sound/illuminated warning devices are

operational. Or use a spotter when backing. 3.18.5 Will yield right of way to pedestrians, emergency vehicles, and

avoid pedestrian lanes. 3.18.6 Will drive cautiously on uneven or slippery surfaces. 3.18.7 Will ensure fire protection equipment is carried with the vehicle and

is in proper working order. 3.19 Prestart requirements. Operators: 3.19.1 Will verify that all brakes, controls, gauges, lights, seat belts, and

routine operational features are in proper working order. They shall be examined before and after each shift. Defects when found shall be immediately reported and corrected.

3.19.2 Will remove the truck from service any time it is found to be in

need of repair, defective, or in any way unsafe, the truck will be taken out of service until it has been restored to safe operating condition.

3.19.3 Will check for leaks and perform necessary operator maintenance

before starting vehicle. 3.19.4 Will report deficiencies to maintenance. 3.19.5 Will ensure they know the load capacity and stay within it. 3.19.6 Will be cognizant of the planned route and aware of areas with

inadequate headroom, lighting, obstructions, and floor surface problems. 3.19.7 Will wear the same level of personal protective equipment as the

personnel they are directly working with. 3.19.8 Will not engage in stunt driving or horseplay.


142

3.19.9 Will slow down for wet and slippery floors. 3.19.10 Running over loose objects on the roadway surface shall be

avoided. 3.19.11 While negotiating turns, speed shall be reduced to a safe level by

means of turning the hand steering wheel in a smooth, sweeping motion. Except when maneuvering at a very low speed, the hand steering wheel shall be turned at a moderate, even rate.

3.20 Loading/Unloading requirements. Operators: 3.20.1 Will ensure basket worker load is within the trucks rated capacity. 3.20.2 Will lower baskets to a safe ground height for access. 3.20.3 Will never allow basket worker loading from an elevated height

such as a second story platform or other than ground level. 3.20.4 Will secure the vehicle when not in use to prevent unauthorized

personnel from operating the vehicle. 3.21 Parking requirements. Operators: 3.21.1 Must select flat parking surfaces, away from traffic where the

vehicle does not block, doors, pedestrian routes, aisles, exits, etc. 3.21.2 Must not leave a truck unattended without: 3.21.2.1 Fully lowering load-engaging means, neutralizing controls,

shutting off power, setting the brakes, and removing the keys. 3.21.2.2 Blocking the wheels if parked on an incline. 3.22 Refueling requirements. Operators: 3.22.1 Refuel only in assigned, ventilated areas containing no ignition

sources. 3.22.2 Turn off engine. 3.22.3 Have fire suppression and cleanup equipment available. 3.22.4 Extinguish smoking materials.


143

3.22.5 Follow the vehicle manufacturer's instructions for gas or propane fueling.

3.22.6 Never use open flame to check fuel level. 3.22.7 Try to prevent spills, clean any spills promptly, replace fuel cap

before starting or moving vehicle. 3.22.8 Take empty propane tanks to an authorized compressed gas

container disposal/storage area and follow host company policy for disposal/storage.



4. Configuration program. 4.1 No modifications or additions which affect capacity and safe operation shall

be performed without the manufacturers prior written approval. Capacity, operation, maintenance instruction plates, tags, or decals shall be changed accordingly.

4.2 All nameplates and markings will be verified as being in place and

maintained in a legible condition. 4.3 All aerial lifts shall be designed and constructed in conformance with

applicable requirements of the American National Standards for Vehicle Mounted Elevating and Rotating Work Platforms.

5. Electrical hazards. Electrical safety-related work practices shall be employed to prevent electric shock or other injuries resulting from either direct or indirect electrical contacts, when work is performed near or on overhead lines. The specific safety-related work practices shall be consistent with the nature and extent of the associated electrical hazards. If work is to be performed near overhead lines, the lines shall be deenergized and grounded, or other protective measures shall be provided before work is started. If the lines are to be deenergized, arrangements shall be made with the person or organization that operates or controls the electric circuits involved to deenergize and ground them. If protective measures, such as guarding, isolating, or insulating, are provided, these precautions shall prevent employees from contacting such lines directly with any part of their body or indirectly through conductive materials, tools, or equipment. The following guidelines from 29CFR1910.333 will be followed. 5.1 Basket distance requirements. Any vehicle or mechanical equipment

capable of having parts of its structure elevated near energized overhead lines shall be operated so that a clearance of 10 ft. (305 cm) is maintained. If the


144

voltage is higher than 50kV, the clearance shall be increased 4 in. (10 cm) for every 10kV over that voltage. However, under any of the following conditions, the clearance may be reduced:

5.2 In transit requirements. If the vehicle is in transit with its structure lowered,

the clearance may be reduced to 4 ft. (122 cm). If the voltage is higher than 50kV, the clearance shall be increased 4 in. (10 cm) for every 10 kV over that voltage.

5.3 Grounding. If the aerial truck is intentionally grounded, employees working

on the ground near the point of grounding may not stand at the grounding location whenever there is a possibility of overhead line contact. Additional precautions, such as the use of barricades or insulation, shall be taken to protect employees from hazardous ground potentials, depending on earth resistivity and fault currents, which can develop within the first few feet or more outward from the grounding point.

5.4 Insulating barriers. If insulating barriers are installed to prevent contact with

the lines, and if the barriers are rated for the voltage of the line being guarded and are not a part of or an attachment to the vehicle or its raised structure, the clearance may be reduced to a distance within the designed working dimensions of the insulating barrier.

5.5 Insulated equipment. If the equipment is an aerial lift insulated for the

voltage involved, and if the work is performed by a qualified person, the clearance (between the uninsulated portion of the aerial lift and the power line) may be reduced to the distance given in Table S-5 from 29CFR1910.333.

6. Definitions. "Aerial device." Any vehicle-mounted device, telescoping or articulating, or both, which is used to position personnel. "Aerial ladder." An aerial device consisting of a single- or multiple-section extensible ladder. "Articulating boom platform." An aerial device with two or more hinged boom sections. "Extensible boom platform." An aerial device (except ladders) with a telescopic or extensible boom. Telescopic derricks with personnel platform attachments shall be considered to be extensible boom platforms when used with a personnel platform. "Insulated aerial device." An aerial device designed for work on energized lines and apparatus.


145

"Mobile unit." A combination of an aerial device, its vehicle, and related equipment. "Platform." Any personnel-carrying device (basket or bucket) which is a component of an aerial device. "Vehicle." Any carrier that is not manually propelled. "Vertical tower." An aerial device designed to elevate a platform in a substantially vertical axis. Bucket Lift Safety Requirements 7.1 Operator Training. You are not permitted operate a Bucket Lift unless you have been trained by H3O, Inc. and the training has been documented and is on file with the safety office.

7.1.1 Training must be done by a qualified person experienced with the particular lift model.

7.1.2 Training must include:

7.1.2.1 Nature of electrical, fall, and other operational hazards. 7.1.2.2 Precautions for dealing with hazards. 7.1.2.3 Rated load capacity (workers, tools, materials, bucket liner, etc.). 7.1.2.4 Manufacturer requirements, as outlined in operator manual. 7.1.2.5 Demonstration of skill and knowledge in operation of the lift.

7.2 Maintenance Training Requirements.

7.2.1 Training of mechanics will be done by a qualified person experienced with the particular lift model. Maintenance training will include:

7.2.1.1 Knowledge of manufacturer’s maintenance requirements. 7.2.1.2 Inspection requirements of aerial lift by a qualified mechanic. 7.2.1.3 Periodic detailed inspections by a qualified mechanic. 7.2.1.4 Insulated aerial lift special electrical test requirements.

7.3 Operating or Moving Aerial Lifts

7.3.1 Do not modify aerial lift without written permission. 7.3.2 Check safety devices, operating controls before each use. 7.3.3 Check area in which aerial lift will be used for:


146

7.3.3.1 Level surface (Do not exceed slope recommendations). 7.3.3.2 Avoid Holes, drop-offs, bumps, debris, etc. 7.3.3.3 Check for overhead obstructions and overhead power lines. 7.3.3.4 Ensure vehicle is on a stable surface. 7.3.3.5 Set outriggers, brakes, wheel chocks as required.

7.3.4 Exiting Bucket. Never allow worker to exit bucket from elevated height. 7.3.5 Speed. Never exceed recommended safe speed of vehicle. 7.3.6 Momentum. Speed builds momentum, momentum is hard to overcome. 7.3.7 Passengers. Never accept passengers unless vehicle is so equipped. 7.3.8 By-Standers. Ensure by-standers are warned to keep clear of operation. 7.3.9 Manholes/Drain Covers. Check for stability before driving over them.

7.3.10 Note: Lift worker should never be left alone.

7.4 Preventing Electrocutions

7.4.1 Non-electrical workers must stay at least 10 feet away from overhead power lines. 7.4.2 Electrical workers must de-energize/insulate power lines or use proper PPE/equipment. 7.4.3 Use insulated buckets near overhead power lines. 7.4.4 Regularly check insulation on buckets. 7.4.5 Denergize electrical sources as required by the Lockout Tagout program.

7.5 Preventing Tip-Overs

7.5.1 Do not exceed manufacturer rated load capacity limits. 7.5.2 Do not exceed recommended speed of vehicle. 7.5.3 Do not travel to job location with lift in elevated position. 7.5.4 Set up proper work zone protection when working near traffic. 7.5.5 Do not drive near drop-offs or holes. 7.5.6 Do not raise bucket on uneven or soft surfaces. 7.5.7 Do not drive onto uneven or soft surfaces when elevated. 7.5.8 Do not raise bucket on slope or drive onto slope when elevated. 7.5.9 Do not raise bucket in windy or gusty conditions. 7.5.10 Avoid excessive horizontal forces during movement. 7.5.11 Sudden stops can tip over some lifts due to stopping force momentum.

7.6 Fall Protection

7.6.1 Fall protection is required (full body harness with self retracting lanyard). 7.6.2 Always close entrance chains or doors. 7.6.3 Always stand on floor of the bucket. 7.6.4 Always keep both feet flat on the floor of bucket. 7.6.5 Never climb on or lean over guardrails.


147

7.6.6 Ensure body harness plus lanyard is designed for size of lift platform. Scissor Lift Safety Requirements 8.1 Operator Training. You are not permitted operate a Scissor Lift unless you have been trained by H3O, Inc. and the training has been documented and is on file with the safety office.

8.1.1 Training must be done by a qualified person experienced with the particular lift model. 8.1.2 Training must include:

8.1.2.1 Nature of lifting, fall, electrical and other operational hazards. 8.1.2.2 Precautions for dealing with hazards. 8.1.2.3 Rated load capacity (workers, tools, materials, platform, etc.). 8.1.2.4 Manufacturer requirements, as outlined in operator manual. 8.1.2.5 Demonstration of skill and knowledge in operation of the lift.

8.2 Maintenance Training Requirements.

8.2.1 Training of mechanics will be done by a qualified person experienced with the particular lift model. Maintenance training will include:

8.2.1.1 Knowledge of manufacturer’s maintenance requirements. 8.2.1.2 Inspection requirements of the lift by a qualified mechanic. 8.2.1.3 Periodic detailed inspections by a qualified mechanic.

8.3 Operating or Moving Scissor Lifts

8.3.1 Never move the lift while it is elevated. 8.3.2 Never use the lift in outside areas. 8.3.3 Never use the lift as a scaffold. 8.3.4 Do not modify aerial lift without written permission. 8.3.5 Check safety devices, operating controls before each use. 8.3.6 Check area in which lift will be used for:

8.3.6.1 Level surface (Do not exceed slope recommendations). 8.3.6.2 Avoid Holes, drop-offs, bumps, debris, etc. 8.3.6.3 Check for overhead obstructions and overhead power lines. 8.3.6.4 Check for overhead ammonia or process lines. 8.3.6.5 Ensure vehicle is on a stable surface. 8.3.6.6 Set brakes, wheel chocks as required.

8.3.7 Exiting Lift. Never allow worker to exit lift from elevated height.


148

8.3.8 Speed. Never exceed recommended safe speed of vehicle. 8.3.9 Momentum. Speed builds momentum, momentum is hard to overcome. 8.3.10 Passengers. Never accept passengers unless vehicle is so equipped. 8.3.11 By-Standers. Ensure by-standers are warned to keep clear of operation. 8.3.12 Manholes/Drain Covers. Check for stability before driving over them.

8.3.13 Note: Lift worker should never be left alone.

8.4 Preventing Electrocutions

8.4.1 Ensure platform or others parts do not touch electrical sources. 8.4.2 Denergize electrical sources as required by the Lockout Tagout program.

8.5 Preventing Tip-Overs

8.5.1 Do not exceed manufacturer rated load capacity limits. 8.5.2 Do not travel to job location with lift in elevated position. 8.5.3 Set up proper work zone protection (cones, signs etc.). 8.5.4 Do not drive near drop-offs or holes. 8.5.5 Do not raise platform on uneven or soft surfaces. 8.5.6 Do not drive onto uneven or soft surfaces when elevated. 8.5.7 Do not raise platform on slope or drive onto slope when elevated. 8.5.8 Do not raise platform in windy or gusty conditions. 8.5.9 Avoid excessive horizontal forces. 8.5.10 Sudden stops can tip over some lifts due to stopping force momentum.

8.6 Fall Prevention

8.6.1 Always keep both feet flat on the platform floor when working. 8.6.2 Close and secure guard railings if they are equipped to open. 8.6.3 Do not climb on or lean over guardrails. 8.6.4 Always close entrance chains or doors. 8.6.5 Never extend reach over guard rails (move the vehicle closer).


149


DATE: FEBRUARY 27, 2009 SUBJECT: Emergency Preparedness REGULATORY STANDARDS: See Section 13, OSHA Requirements BASIS: Emergencies in workplaces in the United States occur on a daily basis. Effective emergency preparedness is essential to the protection of life and property. The Occupational Safety and health Administration (OSHA) estimates that losses can be reduced tremendously if proper safety precautions and preparation at job sites are initiated. This poses a serious problem for exposed workers and their employer.

Contents of the Emergency Preparedness Program 1. Written program

2. General 3. Planning requirements

4. Communications

5. Accounting for Personnel 6. Training

H3O, Inc. Emergency Preparedness Program 1. Written program. H3O, Inc. will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction on an annual basis, or when facility operational changes occur that require revision. Effective implementation of this program requires support from all levels of management within H3O, Inc.. This written program will be communicated to all personnel that are affected by it. It encompasses the total workplace, regardless of number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals, and objectives. 2. General. The importance of an effective workplace safety and health program cannot be overemphasized. There are many benefits from such a program including increased productivity, improved employee morale, reduced absenteeism and illness, and reduced workers' compensation rates; however, accidents still occur in spite of efforts to prevent them. This Standard Practice Instruction (SPI) details the basic steps and planning documents H3O, Inc. will initiate to prepare for emergencies at our


150

facility(s). These emergencies include accidental releases of toxic gases, chemical spills, fires, explosions, natural disasters and personal injury. This SPI is intended to serve as a guideline for planning for emergencies, to establish the required planning documents needed for emergency preparedness, and to assist company employees in updating and revising existing written programs. 2.1 H3O, Inc. shall ensure that our employees understand and comply with the restrictions and prohibitions of the Host employer's Policies and Procedures. 3. Planning requirements. Proper planning for emergencies is necessary to minimize employee injury and property damage. The effectiveness of response during emergencies depends on the amount of planning and training performed. Management must show its support of safety programs and the importance of emergency planning. If management is not interested in employee protection and minimizing property loss, little can be done to promote a safe workplace. It is therefore management's responsibility within H3O, Inc. to see that this program is instituted and that it is frequently reviewed and updated. The input and support of all employees must be obtained to ensure an effective program 3.1 Emergency action plans. When emergency action plans are required by a

particular OSHA standard, the plan will be in writing, the plan will include, as a minimum, the following elements related to the particular work site, these items will be in our safe work plan:

3.1.1 Emergency escape procedures and emergency escape route

assignments. 3.1.2 Procedures to account for all employees after emergency

evacuation has been completed. 3.1.3 Names or job titles of persons or departments to be contacted for

further information or explanation of duties under the plan. 3.2.4 Emergency evacuation. For emergency evacuation, floor plans or

workplace maps that clearly show the emergency escape routes and safe or refuge areas will be included in the plan. All employees will be told what actions they are to take in the emergency situations that may occur in the workplace.

3.2.5 Plan revision. This plan will be reviewed with employees initially

when the plan is developed, whenever the employees' responsibilities under the plan change, and whenever the plan is changed.


151

4. Communications. Each SPI developed by H3O, Inc. which addresses an emergency preparedness topic will ensure that communications requirements are addressed. During a major emergency involving a fire or explosion it may be necessary to evacuate all areas. Also, normal services, such as electricity, water, and telephones, may be nonexistent. Under these conditions, it may be necessary to have an evacuation relocation point established to which employees can report or that can act as a focal point for incoming and outgoing calls. Since time is an essential element for adequate response, the person designated as being in charge will make this the alternate headquarters so that he/she can be easily reached. 5. Accounting for Personnel. Management will need to know when all personnel have been accounted for. This can be difficult during shift changes. A responsible person should be appointed to account for personnel and to inform police or Emergency Response Team members of those persons believed missing. 6. Training. Training is important to the effectiveness of an emergency plan. Before implementing an emergency action plan, Training for each location of work prior to commencing work is necessary so that employees know what actions are required. 6.1 Additional training. In addition to the specialized training for Emergency

Response Team members, all employees will be trained in the following for each of our clients locations:

6.1.1 Evacuation plans. 6.1.2 Alarm systems. 6.1.3 Reporting procedures for personnel. 6.1.5 Types of potential emergencies. 6.2 These training programs will be provided as follows:

6.2.2 For all new employees. 6.2.4 When procedures have been updated or revised. 6.2.6 At least annually.


152


DATE: FEBRUARY 27, 2009 SUBJECT: Employee Orientation BASIS: Supervisor training greatly reduces the risk of workplace accidents and injuries. Supervisor training places the control of safety in the workplace at the most appropriate level. The focus of supervisor training at H3O, Inc. is to prevent future accidents and injuries in order to increase the safety and health of all our employees. Supervisor safety meetings assist in developing a sense of teamwork and unit cohesion. Safety meetings provide the opportunity for employees and supervisors to engage in reciprocal discussions on a variety of safety topics. Effective meetings promote cooperation and reinforce important safety and health operating philosophies and practices. .

Contents of the Supervisor Safety Meetings Program 1. New Employee Orientation Requirements

2. Tips for Conducting Effective Orientation

H3O, INC. Employee Orientation Program

1. New Employee Orientation Requirements. After completing our Employee Info. Packet, new employees will be given an initial safety and health Orientation by a supervisor/safety coordinator. Trainer will use the “New Employee Training List” form to ensure all training required by the new employee is documented before the employee starts work. (Employee Info Packet and New Employee Training List is in the Exhibit Portion In this Safety Program) 2. Tips for Conducting Effective Orientation. Ineffective safety and health training is detrimental to our safety program. The following tips are provided to help supervisors conduct such training. Tips to conducting effective job safety training: 2.1. Explain the objective of the training and the reason why the training is

important to the employee. Doing this will increase the person’s interest in learning.


153

2.2. Break down the points or procedure into specific parts and identify each key step. This breakdown can be used as a detailed outline to help guide workers through a job or procedure. By understanding how safety is integrated into each step of the job, employees learn to perform their work safety and correctly.

2.3. Use demonstrations in your training. Merely explaining is sometimes

insufficient. Do it a step at a time, pausing to emphasize the key points before going on. Encourage the group to ask questions at each stage, making sure he/she fully understands.

2.4. Visit the work area periodically to see how the worker is doing and to see if

there are any questions or problems. The follow-up process is an essential element, since early identification and correction of workplace safety issues will help an employee develop safe and efficient work habits.


DATE: FEBRUARY 27, 2009 SUBJECT: Ergonomics Program REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR 1903.1 (General Duty Clause) BASIS: A substantial number of American workers may be at risk of developing some type of ergonomic disorder due to their exposure to ergonomic hazards in the workplace. In recent years there has been a significant increase in the number of occupational ergonomic disorders reported, including cumulative trauma disorders (CTD), musculo skeletal disorders (MSD), and other work-related disorders due to ergonomics hazards. This poses a serious problem for exposed workers and their employer. This standard practice instruction establishes uniform requirements to ensure that ergonomic controls and procedures within H3O, Inc. are implemented, evaluated, and that the proper hazard information is transmitted to all affected workers.

Contents of the Occupational Ergonomics Program 1. Written Program

2. Training and Education


154

H3O, INC. Occupational Ergonomics Program 1. Written Program. Effective implementation requires a written program for job safety, health, and ergonomics that is endorsed and advocated by the highest level of management within H3O, Inc. and that outlines our goals and plans. This written program will be communicated to all personnel. It encompasses the total workplace, regardless of number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals, and objectives. H3O, INC. will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction: 1.1 On an annual basis. 1.2 When changes occur to related regulations that prompt a revision. 1.3 When operational changes occur that require a revision. 2. Training and Education. The purpose of training and education is to ensure that our employees are sufficiently informed about the ergonomic to which they may be exposed and thus are able to participate actively in their own protection. Training will consist of initial training, and follow-up training every 3 years. Additionally, training will be conducted in a language understandable to the employee.

2.1 General and specific job training: 2.1.1 General Training. Employees who are potentially exposed to

ergonomic hazards will be given formal instruction on the duties associated with their jobs and with their equipment. This will include information on the varieties of duties associated with the job, what risk factors cause or contribute to them, how to recognize and report symptoms, and how to prevent these disorders. This instruction will be repeated for each employee as necessary.


155


DATE: FEBRUARY 27, 2009 SUBJECT: EQUIPMENT LOCKOUT/TAGOUT REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.147 BASIS: Approximately three million workers in the United States on a daily basis, face extreme risk from uncontrolled energy when servicing machinery. Serious injury or death can be the result. Typical non-lethal injuries include fractures, lacerations, contusions, amputations, puncture wounds, electric shock, and falls. The average lost time for injuries runs approximately 24 days. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) estimates that approximately 120 fatalities and approximately 28,000 serious and 32,000 minor injuries each year could be prevented if proper lockout/tagout procedures at job sites are initiated. This poses a serious problem for exposed workers and their employer. The OSHA Control of Hazardous Energy Sources Standard establishes uniform requirements to ensure that the hazards of uncontrolled energy in U.S. workplaces are evaluated, safety procedures implemented, and that the proper hazard information is transmitted to all affected workers. GENERAL: H3O, INC. will ensure that all machinery meeting the criteria for lockout/tagout within our facility(s) are evaluated, and that information and training programs, and lockout/tagout procedures are implemented. This standard practice instruction is intended to address comprehensively the issues of; evaluating and identifying potential uncontrolled energy sources, evaluating the associated potential hazards, communicating information concerning these hazards, and establishing appropriate procedures, and protective measures for employees.

Contents of the Lockout/Tagout Program

1. Written Program. 2. General Requirements. 3. Program Implementation. 4. Protective Materials and Hardware. 5. Initial Training

6. Refresher Training

7. Energy Isolation

8. Notification of Employees

9. Application of Control 10. Release from Lockout / tagout

11. Testing of Machines, Equipment, or Components

12. Host Companys L.O.T.O. Program 13. Group Lockout / tagout

14. Shift or Personnel Changes

15. Definitions Applicable to this Instruction


156

H3O, INC. Lockout/Tagout Program 1. Written Program. H3O, INC. will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction on an annual basis, or when changes occur to 29 CFR 1910.147, that prompt revision of this document, or when facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document. Effective implementation of this program requires support from all levels of management within H3O, Inc.. This written program will be communicated to all personnel that are affected by it. It encompasses the total workplace, regardless of the number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals, and objectives. 2. General Requirements. H3O, INC. will establish lockout/tagout procedures through the use of this document. This standard practice instruction covers the servicing and maintenance of machines and equipment in which the unexpected energization or start up of the machines or equipment, or release of stored energy such as electrical, steam, hydraulic, tension, gravity, ect could cause injury to employees. 2.1. Application. This instruction applies to the control of energy during servicing

and/or maintenance of machines and equipment. Normal production operations are not covered. Servicing and/or maintenance which takes place during normal production operations is covered if:

2.1.1 An employee is required to remove or bypass a guard or other

safety device. 2.1.2 An employee is required to place any part of his or her body into an

area on a machine or piece of equipment where work is actually performed upon the material being processed (point of operation) or where an associated danger zone exists during a machine operating cycle.

Exception: Minor tool changes and adjustments, and other minor servicing activities, which take place during normal production operations, are not covered if they are routine, repetitive, and integral to the use of the equipment for production, provided that the work is performed using alternative measures which provide effective protection in accordance with company operational procedures. 2.1.3 This instruction does not apply to the following: 2.1.3.1 Work on cord and plug connected electric equipment for

which exposure to the hazards of unexpected energization or start up of the equipment is controlled by the unplugging of the equipment from the energy source and by the plug being under the


157

exclusive control of the employee performing the servicing or maintenance.

2.1.3.2 Hot tap operations involving transmission and distribution

systems for substances such as gas, steam, water or petroleum products when they are performed on pressurized pipelines, provided it is demonstrated that (1) continuity of service is essential; (2) shutdown of the system is impractical; and (3) documented company procedures are followed, and special equipment is used which will provide proven effective protection for our employees.

3. Program Implementation. H3O, Inc. will establish a program and utilize procedures for affixing appropriate lockout devices or tagout devices to energy isolating devices, and to otherwise disable machines or equipment to prevent unexpected energization, start-up or release of stored energy in order to prevent injury to employees. 3.1 Energy control program. H3O, Inc. shall establish a program consisting of

energy control procedures, employee training and periodic inspections to ensure that before any employee performs any servicing or maintenance on a machine or equipment where the unexpected energizing, start up or release of stored energy could occur and cause injury, the machine or equipment shall be isolated from the energy source, and rendered inoperative.

3.1.1 Future requirements. Whenever replacement or major repair,

renovation or modification of a machine or equipment is performed, and whenever new machines or equipment are installed, energy isolating devices for such machine or equipment shall be designed to accept a lockout device.



4. Protective Materials and Hardware. Appropriate lockout devices such as; locks, tags, chains, or other hardware shall be provided by H3O, Inc. for isolating, securing of machines or equipment from energy. 4.1.1 Lockout/tagout devices shall be singularly identified; shall be the

only devices(s) used for controlling energy; shall not be used for other purposes; and shall meet the following requirements:


158

4.1.2 Selected lockout and tagout devices shall be capable of withstanding the environment to which they are exposed for the maximum period of time that exposure is expected.

4.1.3 Selected tagout devices shall be constructed and printed so that

exposure to weather conditions or wet and damp locations will not cause the tag to deteriorate or the message on the tag to become illegible.

4.1.4 Tags shall not deteriorate when used in corrosive environments

such as areas where acid and alkali chemicals are handled and stored. 4.1.5 Removal requirements. 4.1.6.1 Lockout devices. Lockout devices shall be substantial

enough to prevent removal without the use of excessive force. 4.1.7 Identification requirements. 4.1.7.1 Lockout/tagout devices shall indicate the identity of the

employee applying the device(s). 5. Initial Training. 5.1 H3O, Inc. shall provide training to ensure that the purpose and function of

the energy control program are understood by employees and that the knowledge and skills required for the safe application, usage, and removal of the energy controls are acquired by employees. The training shall include the following:

5.1.1 Each authorized employee shall receive training in the recognition

of applicable hazardous energy sources, the type and magnitude of the energy available in the workplace, and the methods and means necessary for energy isolation and control.

5.1.2 Each affected employee shall be instructed in the purpose and use

of the energy control procedure. 5.1.3 All other employees whose work operations are or may be in an

area where energy control procedures may be utilized, shall be instructed about the procedure, and about the prohibition relating to attempts to


159

restart or reenergize machines or equipment which are locked out or tagged out.

5.2 When tagout systems are used, employees shall also be trained in the

following limitations of tags: 5.2.1 Tags are essentially warning devices affixed to energy isolating

devices, and do not provide the physical restraint on those devices that is provided by a lock.

5.2.2 When a tag is attached to an energy isolating means, it is not to be

removed without authorization of the authorized person responsible for it, and it is never to be bypassed, ignored, or otherwise defeated.

5.2.3 Tags must be legible and understandable by all authorized

employees, affected employees, and all other employees whose work operations are or may be in the area, in order to be effective. Non-legible or missing tags will be reported immediately.

5.2.4 Tags and their means of attachment must be made of materials

which will withstand the environmental conditions encountered in the workplace.

5.2.5 Tags may evoke a false sense of security, and their meaning needs

to be understood as part of the overall energy control program. 5.2.6 Tags must be securely attached to energy isolating devices so that

they cannot be inadvertently or accidentally detached during use. 6. Refresher Training. 6.1 Retraining shall be provided for all authorized and affected employees

whenever there is a change in their job assignments, a change in machines, equipment or processes that present a new hazard, or when there is a change in the energy control procedures.


reveals, or whenever H3O, Inc. has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or use of the energy control procedures.


revised control methods and procedures, as necessary.


160

6.4 Certification. H3O, Inc. shall certify that employee training has been accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification shall contain each employee's name and dates of training.

7. Energy Isolation. Lockout / tagout shall be performed only by the authorized employees who are performing the servicing or maintenance. 8. Notification of Employees. Affected employees shall be notified of the application and removal of lockout devices or tagout devices. Notification shall be given before the controls are applied, and after they are removed from the machine or equipment. 9. Application of Control. The lockout / tagout procedures shall cover the following elements and actions and shall be done in the following sequence:

9.1 Preparation for shutdown. Before an authorized or affected employee turns off a machine or equipment, the authorized employee shall have knowledge of the type and magnitude of the energy, the hazards of the energy to be controlled, and the method or means to control the energy.

9.2 Machine or equipment shutdown. The machine or equipment shall be turned

off or shut down using the procedures established for the machine or equipment. An orderly shutdown must be utilized to avoid any additional or increased hazard(s) to employees as a result of the equipment stoppage.

9.3 Machine or equipment isolation. All energy isolating devices that are needed

to control the energy to the machine or equipment shall be physically located and operated in such a manner as to isolate the machine or equipment from the energy source(s).

9.4 Lockout device application. 9.4.1 Lockout/tagout devices shall be affixed to each energy isolating

device by authorized employees. 9.4.2 Lockout devices, where used, shall be affixed in a manner to that

will hold the energy isolating devices in a "safe" or "off" position. 9.4.3 Tagout devices, where used, shall be affixed in such a manner as

will clearly indicate that the operation or movement of energy isolating devices from the "safe" or "off" position is prohibited.

9.5 Tagout device application. 9.5.1 Where tagout devices are used with energy isolating devices

designed with the capability of being locked, the tag attachment shall be fastened at the same point at which the lock has been attached.


161

9.6 Stored energy. 9.6.1 Following the application of lockout / tagout devices to energy

isolating devices, all potentially hazardous stored or residual energy shall be relieved, disconnected, restrained, and otherwise rendered safe.

9.6.2 If there is a possibility of reaccumulation of stored energy to a

hazardous level, verification of isolation shall be continued until the servicing or maintenance is completed, or until the possibility of such accumulation no longer exists.

9.7 Verification of isolation. Prior to starting work on machines or equipment that

have been locked out or tagged out, the authorized employee shall verify that isolation and deenergization of the machine or equipment have been accomplished.

10. Release from Lockout / tagout. 10.1 Before lockout / tagout devices are removed. Before lockout / tagout devices

are removed and energy is restored to the machine or equipment, procedures shall be followed and actions taken by the authorized employee(s) to ensure the following:

10.1.1 The machine or equipment. The work area shall be inspected to

ensure that nonessential items have been removed and to ensure that machine or equipment components are operationally intact.

10.1.2 Employees. The work area shall be checked to ensure that all

employees have been safely positioned or removed. 10.2 After lockout / tagout devices are removed. After lockout / tagout devices

are removed and before a machine or equipment is started, affected employees shall be notified that the lockout / tagout device(s) have been removed.

10.3 Lockout / tagout devices removal. Each lockout / tagout device shall be

removed from each energy isolating device by the employee who applied the device. When the authorized employee who applied the lockout / tagout device is not available to remove it, that device may be removed under the direction of a supervisor, provided that specific procedures and training for such removal have been developed, documented and incorporated into H3O, Inc.'s energy control program. H3O, Inc. shall demonstrate that the specific procedure provides equivalent safety to the removal of the device by the authorized employee who applied it. The specific procedure shall include at least the following elements:

10.3.1 Verification that the authorized employee who applied the device is

not at the facility.


162

10.3.2 Making all reasonable efforts to contact the authorized employee to inform him/her that his/her lockout / tagout device has been removed.

10.3.3 Ensuring that the authorized employee has this knowledge before

he/she resumes work at that facility. 11. Testing of Machines, Equipment, or Components. 11.1 Testing or positioning of machines, equipment or components thereof. In

situations in which lockout / tagout devices must be temporarily removed from the energy isolating device and the machine or equipment energized to test or position the machine, equipment or component thereof, the following sequence of actions shall be followed:

11.1.1 Clear the machine or equipment of tools and materials. 11.1.2 Remove employees from the machine or equipment area. 11.1.3 Remove the lockout / tagout devices as specified as part of the

individual machine procedures. 11.1.4 Energize and proceed with testing or positioning. 11.1.5 Deenergize all systems and reapply energy control measures in

accordance with machine procedures and continue the servicing and/or maintenance.

12. Host Companys L.O.T.O. Program 12.1 H3O, Inc. shall ensure that our employees understand and comply with the

restrictions and prohibitions of the Host employer's energy control program. 13. Group Lockout / tagout. 13.1 When servicing and/or maintenance is performed by a crew, craft,

department or other group, they shall utilize a procedure which affords the employees a level of protection equivalent to that provided by the implementation of a personal lockout / tagout device.

13.2 Group lockout / tagout devices shall be used in accordance with the

procedures required by this instruction governing individual procedures which shall include, but not necessarily limited to, the following specific requirements:

13.2.1 Primary responsibility will be vested in an authorized employee for

a set number of employees working under the protection of a group lockout / tagout device (such as an operations lock).


163

13.2.2 Provision for the authorized employee to ascertain the exposure

status of individual group members with regard to the lockout / tagout of the machine or equipment will be made.

13.2.3 When more than one crew, craft, department, etc. is involved,

assignment of overall job-associated lockout / tagout control responsibility will be vested to an authorized employee designated to coordinate affected work forces and ensure continuity of protection.

13.2.4 Each authorized employee shall affix a personal lockout / tagout

device to the group lockout device, group lockbox, or comparable mechanism when he or she begins work, and shall remove those devices when he or she stops working on the machine or equipment being serviced or maintained.

14. Shift or Personnel Changes. Specific procedures shall be utilized during shift or personnel changes to ensure the continuity of lockout / tagout protection, including provision for the orderly transfer of lockout / tagout device protection between off-going and oncoming employees, to minimize exposure to hazards from the unexpected energization or start-up of the machine or equipment, or the release of stored energy. 15. Definitions Applicable to this Instruction. Affected employee - An employee whose job requires him/her to operate or use a machine or equipment on which servicing or maintenance is being performed under lockout / tagout, or whose job requires him/her to work in an area in which such servicing or maintenance is being performed. Authorized employee - A person who locks out or tags out machines or equipment in order to perform servicing or maintenance on that machine or equipment. An affected employee becomes an authorized employee when that employee's duties include performing servicing or maintenance covered under this section. Capable of being locked out - An energy isolating device is capable of being locked out if it has a hasp or other means of attachment to which, or through which, a lock can be affixed, or it has a locking mechanism built into it. Other energy isolating devices are capable of being locked out, if lockout can be achieved without the need to dismantle, rebuild, or replace the energy isolating device or permanently alter its energy control capability. Energized - Connected to an energy source or containing residual or stored energy. Energy isolating device - A mechanical device that physically prevents the transmission or release of energy, including but not limited to the following:


164

1. A manually operated electrical circuit breaker. 2. A disconnect switch. 3. A manually operated switch by which the conductors of a circuit can be

disconnected from all ungrounded supply conductors, and, in addition, no pole can be operated independently.

4. A line valve; a block; and any similar device used to block or isolate energy. 5. Push buttons, selector switches and other control circuit type devices are not

energy isolating devices. Energy source - Any source of electrical, mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, chemical, thermal, or other energy. Hot tap - A procedure used in the repair, maintenance and services activities which involves welding on a piece of equipment (pipelines, vessels or tanks) under pressure, in order to install connections or appurtenances. It is commonly used to replace or add sections of pipeline without the interruption of service for air, gas, water, steam, and petrochemical distribution systems. Lockout - The placement of a lockout device on an energy isolating device, in accordance with an established procedure, ensuring that the energy isolating device and the equipment being controlled cannot be operated until the lockout device is removed. Lockout device - A device that utilizes a positive means such as a lock, either key or combination type, to hold an energy isolating device in a safe position and prevent the energizing of a machine or equipment. Included are blank flanges and bolted slip blinds. Normal production operations - The utilization of a machine or equipment to perform its intended production function. Servicing and/or maintenance - Workplace activities such as constructing, installing, setting up, adjusting, inspecting, modifying, and maintaining and/or servicing machines or equipment. These activities include lubrication, cleaning or unjamming of machines or equipment and making adjustments or tool changes, where the employee may be exposed to the unexpected energization or startup of the equipment or release of hazardous energy. Setting up - Any work performed to prepare a machine or equipment to perform its normal production operation. Tagout - The placement of a tagout device on an energy isolating device, in accordance with an established procedure, to indicate that the energy isolating device and the equipment being controlled may not be operated until the tagout device is removed.


165

Tagout device - A prominent warning device, such as a tag and a means of attachment, which can be securely fastened to an energy isolating device in accordance with an established procedure, to indicate that the energy isolating device and the equipment being controlled may not be operated until the tagout device is removed.


DATE: FEBRUARY 27, 2009 (Rev. 4-06-09) SUBJECT: Fall Protection Program REGULATORY STANDARDS: OSHA - 29 CFR 1926.500 BASIS: In the construction industry in the U.S., falls are the leading cause of worker fatalities. Each year, on average, between 150 and 200 workers are killed and more than 100,000 are injured as a result of falls at construction sites. OSHA recognizes that accidents involving falls are generally complex events frequently involving a variety of factors. Consequently, the standard for fall protection deals with both the human and equipment-related issues in protecting workers from fall hazards. The OSHA Safety Standards establish uniform requirements to make sure that the fall hazards in U.S. workplaces are evaluated, and that this hazard information is transmitted to all affected workers. GENERAL: H3O, Inc. will ensure that the hazards of all elevated work activities over 6 feet in height are evaluated, and that information concerning their hazards is transmitted to all employees. This standard practice instruction is intended to address comprehensively the issues of; evaluating potential fall hazards, communicating information concerning these hazards, and establishing appropriate protective measures for employees.

Contents of the Fall Protection Program

1. Written Program. 2. Statement of Policy 3. Workplace Evaluation. 4. Training 5. Fall Hazard Control Procedures 6. Protective Materials and Hardware 7. Fall Protection Systems 8. Safety Net Systems 9. Controlled Access Zones 10. Inspection and Maintenance. 11. Accident Investigations 12. Definitions


166

H3O, INC. Fall Protection Program

1. Written Program. The company will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction:

On an annual basis

When changes occur to 29 CFR, that prompts revision of this document

When facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document

When there is an accident or close-call that relates to this area of safety

Review the program any time fall protection procedures fail Effective implementation of this program requires support from all levels of management within H3O, Inc.. This written program will be communicated to all personnel that are affected by it. It encompasses the total workplace, regardless of the number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals, and objectives. 2. Statement of Policy. The hazards of potential falls at heights of 6 feet and above will be addressed in this document. This instruction describes a systematic approach that must be used to protect and prevent people from falling. This instruction also lists some of the most common fall hazards, and provides recommendations and guidelines for selecting fall arrest systems.

2.1 H3O, Inc. shall ensure that our employees understand and comply with the restrictions and prohibitions of the Host employer's Fall Protection Program.

3. Workplace Evaluation. The workplace will be assessed before each assigned job for potential fall hazards. Proper fall arrest equipment will be used for jobs requiring fall protection when elimination of the hazard(s) is not possible. Preliminary evaluation will detail the required steps for protecting employees from fall hazards. A fall hazards assessment sheet (see appendix) will be used to document fall hazard assessments. A complete list of fall hazard locations and protective measures procedures will be maintained. This rule does not cover those workers Inspecting, investigating, or assessing workplace conditions prior to the actual start of work or after all work has been completed. Also, requirements to provide fall protection for workers on scaffolds and ladders and for workers engaged in steel erection of buildings are covered in other subparts of OSHA regulations. 4. Training. A training program will be provided for all employees who will be exposed to fall hazards in the work area, and will be conducted by competent personnel. The program will include but will not be limited to:

A description of fall hazards in the work area

Procedures for using fall prevention and protection systems


167

Equipment limitations

The elements encompassed in total fall distance

Prevention, control and fall arrest systems

Inspection and storage procedures for the equipment Generally, workers will be trained to recognize the hazards of falling from elevations and to avoid falls from grade level to lower levels through holes or openings in walking/working surfaces. Training programs will include prevention, control and fall arrest systems. It must be ensured that appropriate fall arrest systems are installed, and that employees know how to use them before beginning any work that requires fall protection. 4.1 Initial training. Training will be conducted prior to job assignment. H3O, INC.

will provide training to ensure that the purpose, function, and proper use of fall protection is understood by employees, and that the knowledge and skills required for the safe application, and usage is acquired by employees. This standard practice instruction will be provided to, and read by all employees receiving training. The training will include, as a minimum the following:

4.1.1 Types of fall protection equipment appropriate for use. 4.1.2 Recognition of applicable fall hazards associated with the work

location and the work to be completed. 4.1.3 Load determination. 4.1.4 Procedures for removal of protection devices from service for repair

or replacement. 4.1.5 All other employees whose work operations are or may be in an area

where fall protection devices may be utilized, will be instructed to an awareness level concerning hazards associated with fall protection operations.

4.1.6 Equipment maintenance and inspection requirements.

4.1.7 Equipment donning and doffing procedures.

4.1.8 Equipment strengths and limitations. 4.1.9 Other options such as safety nets, guardrails, controlled access zones, and safety monitoring systems.

4.1.10 Certification. H3O, INC. will certify that employee training has

been accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification will


168

contain each employee's name and dates of training. Training will be accomplished by competent personnel.

4.2 Refresher training. This standard practice instruction will be provided to,

and read by all employees receiving refresher training. The training content will be identical to initial training. Refresher training will be conducted on an annual basis or when the following conditions are met, whichever event occurs sooner.

4.2.1 Change in Job Assignment. Retraining will be provided for all

authorized and affected employees whenever (and prior to) a change in their job assignments.

4.2.2 Change in Equipment or Hazards. Retraining will be provided for all

authorized and affected employees whenever there is a change in the type of fall protection equipment used, or when a known hazard is added to the work environment which affects the fall protection program.

4.2.3 Inadequacies in Employee Knowledge. Additional retraining will

also be conducted whenever a periodic inspection reveals, or whenever this employer has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or use of fall protection equipment or procedures.

4.2.4 Procedure Failure. Whenever a fall protection procedure fails. 4.2.5 Proficiency and Procedures. The retraining will reestablish

employee proficiency and introduce new or revised methods and procedures, as necessary.

4.2.6 Certification. This employer will certify that employee training has

been accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification will contain each employee's name and dates of training. Training will be accomplished by competent personnel.

5. Fall Hazard Control Procedures. 5.1 Control Procedures Development. Once a workplace evaluation has been

accomplished, procedures will be developed, documented and utilized for the control of potential fall hazards. Fall prevention plans will be designed, when necessary, by competent Company individuals or other pre approved competent personnel. Competent personnel will be provided with any required specialized training to recognize fall hazards, to understand and address fall prevention techniques, and to become familiar with fall arrest equipment and procedures. It is critical that they consider fall protection design for the safety of operations where employees must work at elevated heights. Safety during access and


169

egress from elevated work sites will also be considered. The following guidelines will be used when planning work at elevated heights:

Involve the Safety Department early in the project planning/job planning so that they can recommend appropriate fall-protection measures and equipment.

Involve qualified Engineers when load rating of anchorage points must be determined or is in doubt. Required training will be provided as necessary.

Involve engineering and maintenance when anchorage points must be installed.

The Safety Officer and Engineering Departments will use the expertise of fall protection equipment manufacturers such as Rose Manufacturing Company., Miller Equipment Company, Research and Trading Company and DBI/SALA, and others, where necessary to determine safety requirements for fall protection and prevention.

H3O, INC. will be specific in dealing with fall hazards when developing contracts. Subcontractors will be required to provide a written fall protection program, which describes the Contractors’ fall protection policies and procedures when they will be working at elevated heights.

5.2 Procedural Format. The following format will be followed when developing

fall protection procedures. The Safety Officer will be responsible for the implementation of these procedures. The procedures will clearly and specifically outline the scope, purpose, authorization, rules, and techniques to be utilized to control fall hazards, and the means to enforce compliance including, but not limited to, the following:

5.2.1 A specific statement of the intended use of the procedure. 5.2.2 A review of accident records, including OSHA 200 logs and

Workers’ Compensation documentation. 5.2.3 Interviews with employees and groups of employees whose work

environment includes. or may include, fall hazards. 5.2.4 Physical observations of the work environment(s) that involve fall

hazards or the potential of such. 5.2.5 Observations of individuals and their job tasks and work habits that

expose them to existing or potential fall hazards. 5.2.6 The procedures contained in the company fall protection program.


170

5.2.7 Specific procedural steps for the use and operation of body harness systems, and other fall protection systems.

5.2.8 Specific procedural steps for the placement, erection, inspection,

maintenance, disassembly and transfer of fall protection systems or devices and the person(s) responsible for them.

5.2.9 Specific requirements for testing fall protection systems or

equipment to determine and verify the effectiveness of the fall protection control measures (not load testing).

5.2.10 The correct procedures to rescue employees who have fallen. 5.2.11 The role of each employee in fall protection plans and applicable

policies.

5.2.12 Specific requirements for testing fall protection systems or equipment.

5.2.13 Requirements for guardrail installation

5.2.14 Other requirements including safety net systems, controlled

access zones, and safety monitoring systems. 6. Protective Materials and Hardware. Appropriate fall protection devices will be provided for potential fall hazards. Selection of the equipment will be based on the fall protection evaluation. Evaluations will be conducted by competent personnel authorized to evaluate fall protection requirements.

6.1 Selection Criteria. 6.1.1 Fall Protection devices will be singularly identified; will be the only

devices(s) used for controlling falls; will not be used for other purposes; and will meet the following requirements as stated by ANSI, ASTM, and or OSHA:

6.1.1.1 Capable of withstanding the environment to which they are

exposed for the maximum period of time that exposure is expected. 6.1.1.2 Anchor points will not deteriorate when located in corrosive

environments such as areas where acid and alkali chemicals are handled and stored.

6.1.1.3 Capable of withstanding the ultimate load of 5,000 lbs. for

the maximum period of time that exposure is expected.


171

6.1.1.4 Standardization within company facilities. Fall protection devices will be standardized whenever possible.

7. Fall Protection Systems. When fall hazards cannot be eliminated through any other means, fall protection systems will be used to control falls. Proper training on fall protection systems is essential and will be provided prior to working on any jobsite. 7.1 Personal Fall Arrest Systems. A personal fall arrest system consists of a

full-body harness, lanyard, energy shock absorber, self-locking snap hook and an anchorage point. If a personal fall arrest system is used for fall protection, it must do the following:

7.1.1 Limit maximum arresting force on an employee to 900 pounds (4

kiloNewtons) when used with a body belt. NOTE: As of January 1, 1998, the use of a body belt for fall arrest is prohibited; however, the use of a body belt in a positioning device system is acceptable.

7.1.2 Limit maximum arresting force on an employee to 1,800 pounds (8

kiloNewtons) when used with a body harness. 7.1.3 Be rigged so that an employee can neither free fall more than 6 feet

(1.8 meters) nor contact any lower level.

7.1.4 Bring an employee to a complete stop and limit maximum deceleration distance an employee travels to 3.5 feet (1.07 meters)

7.1.5 Have sufficient strength to withstand twice the potential impact energy of an employee free falling a distance of 6 feet (1.8 meters) or the free fall distance permitted by the system, whichever is less.

7.1.5 Personal fall arrest systems must be inspected prior to each use for wear or damage, and other deterioration. Defective components must be removed from service.

7.2 Dee-rings and Snaphooks.

7.2.1 Dee-rings and snaphooks must have a minimum tensile strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kiloNewtons). Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be proof-tested to a minimum tensile load of 3,600 pounds (16 kiloNewtons) without cracking, breaking, or suffering permanent deformation.

1. 7.2.2 Snaphooks shall be sized to be compatible with the member to which they will be connected, or shall be of a locking configuration. Unless the snaphook is a locking type and


172

designed for the following connections, they shall not be engaged:

2. Directly to webbing, rope, or wire rope 3. To each other 4. To a dee-ring to which another snaphook or other connecter is

attached 5. To a horizontal lifeline 6. To any object incompatible in shape or dimension relative to the

snaphook, thereby causing the connected object to depress the snaphook keeper and release unintentionally.

NOTE: OSHA considers a hook to be compatible when the diameter of the dee-ring to which the snaphook is attached is greater than the inside length of the snaphook when measured from the bottom (hinged end) of the snaphook keeper to the inside curve of the top of the snaphook. Thus, no matter how the dee-ring is positioned or moved (rolls) with the snaphook attached, the dee-ring cannot touch the outside of the keeper, thus depressing it open. As of January 1, 1998, the use of nonlocking snaphooks was prohibited.

7.3 Retractable Lifelines 7.3.1 A retractable lifeline is a fall arrest device used in conjunction with

other components of a fall arrest system. Retractable lifelines should be used by only one person at a time.

7.3.2 A properly inspected and maintained retractable lifeline, when

correctly installed and used as part of the fall arrest system, automatically stops a person’s descent in a short distance after the onset of an accidental fall.

7.3.3 Retractable lifelines may be considered when working in areas

such as on roofs and scaffolds, or in tanks, towers, vessels, and manholes. Also, retractable lifelines should be considered when climbing such equipment as vertical fixed ladders. The following apply to the use of retractable lifelines:

7.3.3.1 Retractable lifelines that automatically limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 meters) or less shall be capable of sustaining a minimum tensile load of 3,000 pounds (13.3 kiloNewtons) applied to the device with the lifeline in the fully extended position.

7.3.3.2 Retractable lifelines that do not limit free fall distance to 2

feet (0.61 meters) or less, shall be capable of sustaining a minimum


173

tensile load of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kiloNewtons) applied to the device with the lifeline in the fully extended position.

7.4 Ropes and Straps (webbing) 7.4.1 Ropes and straps used in lanyards, lifelines, and strength components of body belts and body harnesses shall be made of synthetic fibers. 7.4.2 Lanyards and vertical lifelines must have a minimum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kiloNewtons).

8. Safety Net Systems. H3O, INC. does not utilize safety net systems as part of fall protection, even though the option exists. If safety nets are introduced to the workplace, current usage criteria will be evaluated and adhered to. 9. Controlled Access Zones. A controlled access zone is a work area designated and clearly marked in which certain types of work (such as overhand bricklaying) may take place without the use of conventional fall protection systems- guardrail, personal fall arrest or safety net- to protect the employees working in the zone. H3O, INC. does not utilize this method as part of our fall protection program. Under no cercom stance will this method be allowed 10. Inspection and Maintenance. To ensure that fall protection systems are ready and able to perform their required tasks, a program of inspection and maintenance will be implemented and maintained. Each employee is responsible for the inspection and maintenance of there own equipment. The following as a minimum, will comprise the basic requirements of the inspection and maintenance: 10.1 Equipment manufacturer’s instructions will be incorporated into the

inspection and preventive maintenance procedures. 10.2 All fall protection equipment will be inspected prior to each use, and a

documented inspection at intervals, or in accordance with the manufacturers guidelines.

10.3 The user will inspect his/her equipment prior to each use and check the

inspection date. 10.4 Any fall protection equipment subjected to a fall or impact load, will be

removed from service immediately and inspected by a qualified person. 10.5 Check all equipment for mold, damage, wear, mildew, or distortion.


174

10.6 Hardware should be free of cracks, sharp edges, or burns. 10.7 Ensure that no straps are cut, broken, torn or scraped. 10.8 Special situations such as radiation, electrical conductivity, and chemical

effects will be considered. 10.9 Equipment that is damaged or in need of maintenance will be tagged as

unusable, and will not be stored in the same area as serviceable equipment. 11. Accident Investigations. If a near miss or accident occurs an Investigation will be

done in accordance with the accident investigation section of this safety manual on page 8 section 7

12. Definitions. Anchorage means a secure point of attachment for lifelines, lanyards or deceleration devices. Body belt means a strap with means both for securing it about the waist and for attaching it to a lanyard, lifeline, or deceleration device. Body harness means straps which may be secured about the employee in a manner that will distribute the fall arrest forces over at least the thighs, pelvis, waist, chest and shoulders with means for attaching it to other components of a personal fall arrest system. Competent person means a person who is capable of identifying hazardous or dangerous conditions in any personal fall arrest system or any component thereof, as well as in their application and use with related equipment. Connector means a device which is used to couple (connect) parts of the personal fall arrest system and positioning device systems together. It may be an independent component of the system, such as a carabiner, or it may be an integral component of part of the system. Deceleration device means any mechanism with a maximum length of 3.5 feet, such as a rope grab, ripstitch lanyard, tearing or deforming lanyards, self-retracting lifelines, etc. which serves to dissipate a substantial amount of energy during a fall arrest, or otherwise limit the energy imposed on an employee during fall arrest. Energy shock absorber means a device that limits shock-load forces on the body.


175

Failure means load refusal, breakage, or separation of component parts. Load refusal is the point where the ultimate strength is exceeded. Fall arrest system means a system specifically designed to secure, suspend, or assist in retrieving a worker in or from a hazardous work area. The basic components of a fall arrest system include anchorage, anchorage connector, lanyard, shock absorber, harness, and self-locking snap hook. Free fall means the act of falling before a personal fall arrest system begins to apply force to arrest the fall. Free fall distance means the vertical displacement of the fall arrest attachment point on the employee’s body belt or body harness between onset of the fall and just before the system begins to apply force to arrest the fall (maximum of 6 feet). This distance excludes deceleration distance, and lifeline/lanyard elongation, but includes any deceleration device slide distance or self-retracting lifeline/lanyard extension before they operate and fall arrest forces occur. Hole means a gap or void 2 inches or more in its least dimension, in a floor, roof, or other walking/working surface. Lanyard means a flexible line of rope, wire rope, or strap which generally has a connector at each end for connecting the body belt or body harness to a deceleration device, lifeline or anchorage. Leading edge means the edge of a floor roof, or formwork for a floor or other walking/working surface which changes location as additional floor, roof, decking, or formwork sections are placed, formed or constructed. A leading edge is considered to be an unprotected side and edge during periods when it is not actively and continuously under construction. Lifeline means a component consisting of a flexible line for connection to an anchorage at one end to hang vertically or for connection to anchorages at both ends to stretch horizontally and which serves as a means for connecting other components of a personal fall arrest system to the anchorage. Opening means a gap or void 30 inches or more high and 18 inches or more wide, in a wall or partition, through which employees can fall to a lower level. Personal fall arrest system means a system used to arrest an employee in a fall from a working level. It consists of an anchorage, connectors, a body belt or body harness and may include a lanyard, deceleration device, lifeline, or suitable combinations of these. As of January 1, 1998, the use of a body belt for fall arrest is prohibited.


176

Positioning device system means a body belt or body harness system rigged to allow an employee to be supported on an elevated vertical surface, such as a wall, and work with both hands free while leaning. Qualified person means one with a recognized degree or professional certificate and extensive knowledge and experience in the subject field who is capable of design, analysis, evaluation and specifications in the subject work, project, or product. Retractable lifeline means a fall arrest device that allows free travel without slack rope, but locks instantly when a fall begins. Rope grab means a deceleration device which travels on a lifeline and automatically, by friction, engages the lifeline and locks so as to arrest the fall of an employee. A rope grab usually employs the principle of inertial locking, cam/level locking, or both. Safety-monitoring system means a safety system in which a competent person is responsible for recognizing and warning employees of fall hazards. Self-retracting lifeline/lanyard means a deceleration device containing a drum-wound line which can be slowly extracted from, or retracted onto, the drum under slight tension during normal employee movement, and which, after onset of a fall, automatically locks the drum and arrests the fall. Snaphook means a connector comprised of a hook-shaped member with a normally closed keeper, or similar arrangement, which may be opened to permit the hook to receive an object and, when released, automatically closes to retain the object. Snaphooks are generally one of two types:

The locking type with a self-closing , self-locking keeper which remains closed and locked until unlocked and pressed open for connection or disconnection; or

The non-locking type with a self-closing keeper which remains closed until pressed open for connection or disconnection. As of January 1, 1998, the use of a non-locking snaphook as part of personal fall arrest systems and positioning device systems is prohibited.

Toeboard means a low protective barrier that will prevent the fall of materials and equipment to lower levels and provide protection from falls for personnel. Walking/Working surface means any surface, whether horizontal or vertical on which an employee walks or works, including, but not limited to, floors, roofs, ramps, bridges, runways, formwork and concrete reinforcing steel but not including ladders, vehicles, or trailers, on which employees must be located in order to perform their job duties. Warning line system means a barrier erected on a roof to warn employees that they are approaching an unprotected roof side or edge, and which designates an area in


177

which roofing work may take place without the use of guardrail, body belt, or safety net systems to protect employees in the area. Work area means that portion of a walking/working surface where job duties are being performed.


DATE: FEBRUARY 27, 2009 SUBJECT: Fire Prevention REGULATORY STANDARDS: OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.36 29 CFR 1910.38 29 CFR 1910.157 29 CFR 1910.165 BASIS: Over 150 major fires occur in workplaces on an annual basis. Fire is the third leading cause of accidental deaths in the United States. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) estimates that most of these accidents can be prevented if proper safety precautions at job sites are initiated. This poses a serious problem for exposed workers and their employer. The OSHA Fire Prevention Standards establish uniform requirements to ensure that fire hazards in U.S. workplaces are evaluated, safety procedures implemented, and that the proper fire prevention information is transmitted to all affected workers.

Contents of the Industrial Fire Prevention Program 1. Written program. 2. Evacuation procedures. 3. Portable Fire Suppression Equipment.

H3O, INC. Fire Prevention Program

1. Written program. H3O, INC. will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction upon initial assignment and at least annually thereafter, when changes occur to 29 CFR 1910, or when facility operational changes occur that require revision. Effective implementation of this program requires support from all levels of management within H3O, Inc.. This written program will be communicated to all personnel that are affected by it. It encompasses the total workplace, regardless of number of workers


178

employed or the number of work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals, and objectives. 2. Evacuation procedures. All employees will adhere to the following schedule for evacuation and relocation. 2.1 Procedures. In the event the warning system is activated or if you are

advised to evacuate the facility or department, follow the below listed guidelines. Above all use your common sense.

2.1.1 Panic kills, if you're calm it will help others.

2.1.2 Move quickly in the opposite direction of known hazards towards the

nearest unobstructed exit. 2.1.3 Notify co-workers along the way, talk later. 2.1.4 Once outside relocate to the evacuation relocation point instructed

in the safe work plan. 2.1.5 Report to your supervisor if he/she is present. 2.1.6 Senior employees will begin roll call immediately. 2.1.7 Notify senior management of missing, injured, deceased persons. 2.1.8 Don't forget facility visitors. 3. Portable Fire Suppression Equipment. The requirements of this section apply to the placement, use, maintenance, and testing of portable fire extinguishers provided for the use of employees of H3O, INC. 3.1 General requirements. H3O, Inc. shall provide portable fire extinguishers

and shall mount, locate and identify them so that they are readily accessible to employees without subjecting the employees to possible injury.

3.2 Only approved portable fire extinguishers shall be used to meet the

requirements of this section.


179

3.3 Selection and distribution. Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided for employee use and selected and distributed based on the classes of anticipated workplace fires and on the size and degree of hazard which would affect their use.

3.3.1 Class A fires. Class A fires are classed as ordinary combustibles or

fibrous material, such as wood, paper, clothe, rubber and some plastics. Portable fire extinguishers for use by employees on Class A fires will be distributed so that the travel distance for employees to any extinguisher is 75 feet (22.9 m) or less.

3.3.2 Class B fires. Class B fires are classed as flammable or

combustible liquids such as gasoline, kerosene, paint, paint thinners and propane. Portable fire extinguishers for use by employees on Class B fires will be distributed so that the travel distance from the Class B hazard area to any extinguisher is 50 feet (15.2 m) or less.

3.3.3 Class C fires. Class C fires are classed as energized electrical

equipment, such as appliances, switches, panel boxes and power tools. Portable fire extinguishers for use by employees on Class C fires will be distributed so that the travel distance from the Class C hazard area to any extinguishing agent is 50 feet (15.2 m) or less.

3.3.4 Class D fires. Class D fires are classed as certain combustible

metals, such as magnesium, titanium, potassium and sodium. Portable fire extinguishers or other containers of Class D extinguishing agent used by employees will be distributed so that the travel distance from the combustible metal working area to any extinguishing agent is 75 feet (22.9 m) or less.

3.4 Inspection, maintenance and testing. H3O, Inc. shall be responsible for the

inspection, maintenance and testing of all portable fire extinguishers used by H3O, Inc..

3.4.1 Annual maintenance check. Portable fire extinguishers will be

subjected to an annual maintenance check and documented. 3.4.2 All fire extinguishers used by employes will be inspected visually at leat monthly

4. Training

4.1 All employees of H3O, Inc. shall be trained in the proper use of fire extinguishers prior to initial assignment and al least annually thereafter.


180

4.2 All employes of H3O, Inc. shall be fully trained in a way that will familiarize them with the general principles of fire extinguisher use and the hazards involved in incipient stage firefighting.

4.3 Training schedules shall be established and kept current to include

practice drills annually.


DATE: FEBRUARY 27, 2009 SUBJECT: First Aid Response Program REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.151 BASIS: First aid in the workplace is essential. It is a common fact that informed and trained employees are the first link in the chain of those who help coworkers in emergencies. Employees trained in first aid need to know what to do before emergency medical services (EMS) arrives. Many injuries can be greatly lessened by prompt and decisive first aid measures during the first few minutes after an injury occurs. The OSHA Medical Services and First Aid Standard establish uniform requirements to ensure that a medical emergency response capability exists in U.S. workplaces. RESPONSIBILITY: The Company Safety Officer is responsible for insuring all Supervisors are current, capable, and responsible in adhering to this program and carry a valid Firs Aid/CPR certification.

Contents of the First Aid Response Program 1. Written Program. 2. First Aid and the Law. 3. Responding to a Health Emergency. 4. Heart Attack Response Actions. 5. Bleeding Emergency. 6. Shock Emergency. 7. Burn Emergency - General. 8. Burn Emergency - Heat. 9. Burn Emergency - Chemical. 10. Burn Emergency - Electrical. 11. Eye Emergency. 12. Nose Emergency. 13. Heat Stress Emergency. 14. Cold Conditions Emergency.


181

15. Emergency Reporting (Outside Services). 16. Emergency Reporting (Inside Services). 17. First Aid Log of Activities 18. First Aid Kits/Deluge Showers.

H3O, Inc. First Aid Response Program

1. Written Program. The company will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction:- On an annual basis;- When changes occur to 29 CFR 1910.151, that prompt revision of this document. - When facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document. - When there is an accident or close-call that relates to this topic. This written program will be communicated to all affected personnel. It encompasses the total workplace, regardless of number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals, and objectives. 2. First Aid and the Law. Legally, a victim must give consent to an offer to help before a person trained in first aid begins to help him or her. The law assumes that an unconscious person would give consent. If a victim is conscious, ask permission before helping him or her. State “Good Samaritan” laws give legal protection to rescuers who act in good faith and are not guilty of gross negligence or willful misconduct. The type of rescuer covered and the scope of protection vary from state to state. 3. Responding to a Health Emergency. In an emergency situation, training and fast reaction time are paramount. At all times on all job sites a person(s) who has a valid certificate in first aid training, the American Red Cross or equivalent shall be available at work sites to render emergency first aid. Every second you delay is critical to whether or not the injured party is properly treated. The very first thing you should do is call 911 or follow your local emergency management plan. There are specific things you can do that will help the Emergency Medical Service (EMS) understand the situation:

3.1 Survey the scene. Ask yourself the following questions:

- Is the scene safe? - What happened? - How many people are injured? - Are there bystanders who can help? - What assistance is available?


182

3.2 Do a primary survey of the victim to determine the type and extent of injuries. Tell the victim and bystanders who you are and that you are trained in first aid. This may help to reassure the victim. It will also help you take charge of the situation, letting others who may have been caring for the victim know that a trained person is on hand. 3.3 Phone the emergency medical services (EMS) system for help. Make the call to EMS yourself, or give that responsibility to bystanders. If possible, send two people to make the call, to ensure it is made accurately. Instruct the caller(s) to report back to you and tell you what the dispatcher said. It is very important for the caller to stay on the phone after giving all of the information listed below in case the EMS dispatcher has any further questions or instructions. Tell the dispatcher the following: - Who - The caller’s name. - What - What happened and the victims’ condition. - Where - The exact location of the emergency. - Where - The telephone number of the phone being used. - How many - The number of victims. 4. Heart Attack Response Actions. A heart attack happens when one or more of the blood vessels that supply blood to a portion of the heart become blocked. When this happens, the blood cannot get through to feed the part of the heart and the cells begin to die. The heart may not be able to pump properly because part of it is dying. NOTE: Many victims deny that they are having a heart attack. They may not want to admit to themselves or to others that they are having a heart attack. This denial may delay medical care when it is needed most.

4.1 If the attack is apparently beginning. The most significant sign of a heart attack is chest discomfort or pain. A victim may also describe the following:

- Chest pain. - Nausea. - Sweating. - Shortness of breath. - Uncomfortable pressure in the chest. - Squeezing, fullness or tightness in the chest. - Crushing, constricting, oppressive, or heavy feeling in the chest.

4.2 Initial quick response actions in case of heart attack include: - Call 9-1-1 and report the situation. - Have the victim sit or lie down in a comfortable position. - Loosen restrictive clothing. - Do not let the victim move around. - Have someone phone EMS for help. - Immediately attempt to find someone trained in CPR. - Have someone meet and guide EMTs to scene.


183

4.3 If the heart stops (cardiac arrest).

- Move victim to a stable flat surface - Initiate CPR immediately. - Ensure emergency responders are enroute. 5. Bleeding Emergency. Bleeding is very apparent because of the obvious blood loss. Bleeding can also occur on the inside of the body. Determination of Internal bleeding is best left to the experts since many times there are little or no outward symptoms. You should be aware that internal bleeding is dangerous and may not be obvious.

5.1 Bleeding can be divided into three types:

- Arterial bleeding is the loss of blood from an artery, which is a blood vessel that carries oxygen-rich blood from the heart through the body. The blood spurts with each heartbeat, and the color is bright red. Arterial bleeding is usually severe and hard to control, and it needs immediate medical attention. - Venous bleeding is the loss of blood from a vein, which is a blood vessel that carries blood without oxygen back to the heart. It has a steady flow, which can be heavy, and the color is dark red, almost maroon. Venous bleeding is easier to control than arterial bleeding. - Capillary bleeding is the loss of blood from capillaries, which are the smallest blood vessels. The blood flow is usually slow. The threat of infection is greater with capillary bleeding than it is with arterial or venous bleeding.

5.2 Bleeding basics:

- Bleeding may be external or internal. The only thing that you can do is to not move

the victim and try to minimize the external bleeding as much as possible. - Keep in mind that a relatively small amount of bleeding can look dramatic. Do not get so concerned at the sight of blood that you overlook other injuries. Bleeding can also frighten the victim, so remember to reassure him or her.

5.3 The purpose of first aid for external bleeding is to: - Stop the bleeding - Do this by applying direct pressure to the wound. Applying direct pressure to a wound will stop the blood flow long enough to allow it to clot and stop bleeding.


184

- Prevent infection - Use clean dressings and bandages. Wash minor wounds that are not bleeding severely with soap and water before applying the dressing. Do not try to clean major wounds that are bleeding severely, since that might cause more bleeding. - Prevent shock - Cover the injured with a blanket and keep them warm. - Elevate the wound -When a person is injured, their blood will flow out of the body unless the part of the body which is injured is elevated. Use pillows or any object to elevate a wound above the heart. The cleaner and more comfortable the better.

6. Shock Emergency. Shock can be caused by bleeding, poisoning, insect bites and stings, snakebites, electrical shock, burns, severe injuries, psychological trauma, heart attack, and other medical conditions. confused behavior; very fast or very slow pulse rate; very fast or very slow breathing; trembling and weakness in the arms or legs; cool and moist skin, pale or bluish skin, lips, and fingernails, and enlarged pupils.

6.1 Shock has many signs and symptoms. These include: - Confused behavior. - Very fast or very slow pulse rate. - Very fast or very slow breathing. - Trembling and weakness in the arms or legs. - Cool and moist skin.

- Pale or bluish skin, lips, and fingernails. - Enlarged pupils.

6.2 Emergency response actions for shock:

- If you do not suspect head or neck injuries or leg fractures, place the victim on the

back and elevate the legs 8 to 12 inches using a comfortable support. - If you do suspect head or neck injuries or leg fractures, place the victim on the back

and keep the safe until help arrives. Try not to bend or twist the victims body. - If the victim vomits place him or her on one side to prevent airway blockage. - If the victim has trouble breathing place them in a semi reclining position with boxes,

pillows or blankets raising the head and back. 7. Burn Emergency - General. Burns are injuries resulting from exposure to heat, chemicals, electricity, or radiation. The severity of burns depends on their depth, size, and location. Burns are most serious when they are located on the face, neck, hands, feet, and genitals; when they are spread over large areas of the body; or when they are


185

combined with other injuries, such as fractures. Burns bring the possibilities of shock, pain, and infection. They are also more serious for the very young and very old.

7.1 Common workplace burns include: - Heat burns. - Electrical burns. - Chemical burns.

7.2 Degree of burns. Burns are classified according to their depth, or degree. The deeper the burn, the more severe it is.

- First-degree burns are the least severe. They are characterized by redness or discoloration, mild swelling, and pain. - Second-degree burns are deeper than first-degree burns. They look read or mottled and have blisters. They may also look a little wet from the loss of fluid through the damaged skin layers. - Third-degree burns are the deepest burns. Burns of this type may look white or charred, or they may look like second-degree burns. They extend through all skin layers, and sometimes into the structures below the skin.

8. Burn Emergency - Heat. Heat burns are burns suffered because of accidental contact with high temperature sources, such as flame sources, hot equipment, and other high temperature surfaces.

8.1 General. Heat burns can be either first, second or third degree burns depending on the temperature of the surface contacted. Many people suffer these burns on their arms and hands where they made contact with the heat source in the program of their work.

8.2 Emergency response actions for heat burns include:

- For first and second-degree burns with no open blisters, flush with lots of cool running water. Apply moist dressings, and bandage loosely. - For second-degree burns with open blisters and third-degree burns, apply dry dressings and bandage loosely. Do not use water, as it increases the risk of shock.

9. Burn Emergency - Chemical. Chemical burns are burns suffered because of accidental contact with chemicals having a physical property that is incompatible with the human body. These can be materials such as concentrated acids and alkalines (such as bleaches).


186

9.1 General. Symptoms of chemical burns are typically the same as first degree burns. However depending on the material can be much worse. Many people suffer these burns on their arms and hands or upper body where they made contact with the material or were splashed in the program of their work.

9.2 Emergency response actions for chemical burns include:

- Use lots of running water to flush chemicals from the skin. - Keep flushing with water for 15 to 30 minutes - Remove any clothing and jewelry on which chemicals have spilled. - Cover burns with dry, loose dressings. - Care for possible shock.

10. Burn Emergency - Electrical. Electrical burns are burns suffered because of accidental contact with uncontrolled high voltage electrical energy sources.

10.1 General. Symptoms of electrical burns are typically the same as third degree burns. Many people suffer these burns on their arms and hands where they made contact with an uncontrolled energy source in the program of their work.

10.2 Emergency response actions for electrical burns include:

- Be careful not to get an electrical shock yourself. - If the emergency is outside, call the power company first. - Do not touch downed power lines. - If the emergency is inside, turn off the electricity to area. - Keep bystanders well away from any source of live current. - Be aware that electrical burns carry a strong possibility of cardiac arrest. - Check for more than one burn site. - Cover all burns with dry, loose dressings and then bandage. - Care for shock.

11. Eye Emergency. Since both eye and nose injuries are traumatic to any individual, you will want to help them remain calm and limit movement of the injured eye. The less movement that occurs to the eye, the less potential harmful after effects. Be extremely careful when touching the eyes. Wash your hands when possible before caring for an eye injury. Be gentle. If you cannot get a floating object off the surface of the eye or eyelid loosely wrap a bandage around both eyes, since the movement of one eye affects the other. Reassure the victim, since having one’s eyes bandaged is frightening. Seek medical help.

11.1 General. The most obvious sign of an eye injury is a clearly visible foreign object imbedded in the eye. Other signs and symptoms are redness, burning, pain, headache, and tears.

11.2 Emergency response actions for electrical burns include:


187

- An object that has become embedded in or has penetrated the eyeballs should not be removed by anyone but a doctor. First aid care for such an injury is to place an inverted paper cup over the injured eye. This prevents further damage by keeping the object in place without pressure. Then wrap a bandage around both eyes. - If the victim is unconscious, close the eyelids to keep the eyeballs from drying out. For chemical burns, wash the eye with lots of running water, flushing from the nose outward, for 15 to 30 minutes. Then wrap a bandage loosely around both eyes and reassure the victim. Monitor vital signs.

12. Nose Emergency. Severe nose bleeds can be frightening to the victim. It is possible that enough blood can be lost to cause shock. Reassure the victim. Get medical help.

12.1 General. The most obvious sign of a nose bleed is a range from mild to profuse bleeding from the nostrils.

12.2 Emergency response actions for nose injuries include:

- If you suspect that the victim has a possible head, neck, or back injury, do not try to control a nosebleed. Stopping the blood flow would increase pressure on injured soft tissues. Instead, leave the victim as you found him or her, and stabilize the head and the neck. If the victim is conscious, tell him or her not to move. - If you do not suspect a head, neck, or back injury, try to control the bleeding. Have the victim sit down and lean forward, chin toward chest. Then pinch the nose shut. - Encourage the victim to rest quietly, since walking, talking, laughing and blowing the nose can disturb blood clots and make the bleeding start again.

13. Heat Stress Emergency. On hot, humid days with no breeze, anyone may be affected by the heat. People who are especially susceptible to extreme heat are the very young and the very old, the chronically ill, the overweight, those who work in hot places, and athletes. It typically occurs when people exercise heavily or work in a warm, humid place where body fluids are lost through heavy sweating. Fluid loss causes blood flow to decrease in the vital organs, resulting in a form of shock. With heat exhaustion, sweat does not evaporate as it should, possibly because of high humidity or too many layers of clothing. As a result the body is not cooled effectively.

13.1 General. The usual signs and symptoms of heat exhaustion are cool, pale, and moist skin; heavy sweating; dilated pupils; headache; nausea; dizziness; and vomiting. Body temperature will be nearly normal.


188

13.2 Emergency response actions for heat stress:

- Get the victim out of the heat and into a cooler place. - Place victim in the shock position, lying on the back, with feet up - Either remove or loosen the victim’s clothing. - Cool the victim by fanning and applying cold packs (putting a cloth between the pack and the victim’s skin) or wet towels or sheets. - Treat for shock. - Give the victim one-half glassful of water to drink every 15 minutes, if he or she is fully conscious and can tolerate it. - These steps should bring improvement within a half hour.

14. Cold Conditions Emergency. The first sign of frostbite may be that the skin is slightly flushed. The skin color of the frostbitten area then changes to white or grayish yellow and finally grayish blue, as the frostbite develops. Pain is sometimes felt early on but later goes away. The frostbitten part feels very cold and numb. The victim may not be aware of the injury.

14.1 General. Frostbite has different degrees of tissue damage.

- Mild frostbite looks white or grayish, and the skin feels hard, even though the underlying tissue feels soft. - Moderate frostbite, large blisters form on the surface and in the tissues underneath. The frostbitten area is hard, cold, and insensitive. If freezing is deeper than the skin, tissue damage is severe. Gangrene may result from the loss of blood supply to the area.

14.2 Emergency response actions for frostbite:

- Get the victim into a warm place. - Put the frozen parts in warm (100-105 degrees) but not hot water. - Handle them gently, and do not rub or massage them. - If the toes or fingers are affected, put dry, sterile gauze between them after warming them. Loosely bandage the injured parts. - If the part has been thawed and refrozen, then you should rewarm it at room temperature.

15. Emergency Reporting (Outside Emergency Services - Beyond Basic First Aid Capabilities).

IF YOU’RE NOT SURE OF THE SEVERITY, SEEK OUTSIDE ASSISTANCE Note:. If host facility The local 911 system will be used by all employees for the reporting of any emergency requiring the assistance or presence of outside


189

emergency services. In the event 911 is not available the telephone numbers of the physicians, hospitals, or ambulances shall be conspicuously posted.The following is an example and will be filled out prior to commencing work at any new facility and will change depeding on where we are at. 15.1 Summoning outside emergency services. Dial 911 for emergency services,

if 911 is not available, dial ________ to reach an outside line. 15.2 Emergency Numbers. 15.2.1 Ambulance: _________________ 15.2.2 Fire: _________________ 15.2.3 Police: _________________ 15.2.4 Hospital: _________________ 15.2.5 _______: _________________ 15.2.6 _______: _________________ 15.3 In-house notification. Immediately dial _________ and notify _________

anytime outside emergency services are summoned or medical treatment is provided.

15.4 Directing ambulance services. Post an employee(s) at key points to direct

ambulance services to the injured employee’s location. A member of the department should accompany the person being treated. This person should report back to the department head and or __________ phone number _____________, concerning the status of the employee being transported.

16. Emergency Reporting (Inside Emergency Services - Within Basic First Capabilities). Minor injuries, such as cuts, scratches, bruises, and burns that do not require a doctor’s treatment, may be handled by one of the facility/department first-aid responders. If the situation escalates and additional or outside emergencies are required see above. 17. First Aid Log of Activities. All injuries or complaints treated by first aid responders will be entered into the log book/computer system (detail site specific actions) located at our office. As a minimum, the following information will be entered. 17.1 Date and time of injury 17.2 Date and time of treatment


190

17.3 Name of injured person and clock number 17.4 Name of person rendering first aid 17.5 Nature of injury 17.6 Type of treatment given 17.7 Work or non-work related 17.8 First treatment or follow-up treatment 18. First Aid Kits/Deluge Showers. Procedures and suitable facilities shall be provide for quick drenching or flushing of eyes or body where the eyes or body of any person may be exposed to injurious corrosive material within your work area, it is your responsibility to know where first aid kits and deluge showers are located in your facility/department.

18.1 Refer to safety plan prior to commencing work to identify the locations and availability of first aid kits and showers at each facility. First aid supplies shall be easily accessible when required.

18.2 Contact supervisor if there are no available first aid kits readily accessible to the job site 18.3 Audit contents of first aid kits to insure all appropriate items are adequate for which they will be used.

18.4 The contents of first aid kits shall be periodically assessed to ensure the availability of adequate first aid supplies. First aid kids shall be checked before being sent out to each job and at least weekly while on the job.


DATE: FEBRUARY 27, 2009 SUBJECT: Flammable and Combustible Liquids Safety Program REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.106


191

BASIS: There are an estimated 575,000 existing chemical products, and hundreds of new ones being introduced annually. Many of these chemical products contain properties that are flammable or combustible. This poses a serious problem for exposed workers and their employer. The OSHA Flammable and combustible liquids Standard establishes uniform requirements to ensure that the hazards associated the storage, handling, and use of all chemicals used in U.S. workplaces are evaluated, and that this hazard information is transmitted to all affected workers. GENERAL: H3O, Inc. will ensure that the hazards of all chemicals used within our facilities are evaluated, and that information concerning their hazards is transmitted to all affected employees. This standard practice instruction is intended to address comprehensively the issues of; storage, handling, and use of chemicals, communicating information concerning these hazards, and establishing appropriate protective measures for employees. SUPERVISOR’S RESPONSIBILITY: Supervisors control the work environment. This standard practice instruction will be adhered to by all supervisors. If proper workplace controls are not enforced, the storage and dispensing of flammable and combustible liquids can be extremely dangerous. To prevent catastrophic results, supervisors are required to strictly enforce these procedures.

Contents of the Flammable and Combustible Liquids Safety Program 1. Written Program. 2. Related Written Programs

3. Classes of Flammable and Combustible Liquids

4. Spill Control Equipment. 5. Employee Training

6. Handling of Flammable and Combustible Liquids (general requirements) 7. Warehousing

8. Fire Control 9. Ventilation

10. Special Hazards

11. Sources of Ignition

12. Housekeeping

H3O, Inc. Flammable and Combustible Liquids Safety Program


192

1. Written Program. The company will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction:

On an annual basis. When changes occur to 29 CFR 1910.106, that prompt revision of this document. When facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document. When there is an accident or close-call that relates to this topic.

This written program will be communicated to all personnel. It encompasses the total workplace, regardless of number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals, and objectives. 1.1 Emergency instructions. 1.1.1 Written instructions. All storage and dispensing locations will have

detailed written emergency instructions for each location. Each instruction will detail the emergency actions to be taken in the event of fire, spill, leak, power failure, failure of any safety system (including detection/monitoring and ventilation systems) and any other emergency condition affecting the safe operation of the area.

1.1.2 Posting locations. Written emergency instructions will be posted at

the entrance to all storage and dispensing location, or in a conspicuous manner in the area.

2. Related Written Programs. The following safety programs/company policies relate to this topic. These programs should be read and understood by all personnel affected by this program. Understanding the related programs will allow you to better understand the requirements outlined in this program.

Electrical Safety Fire Prevention Forklifts/Powered Industrial Trucks Hazard Communication Job Hazard Analysis Power Tools Safety Process Safety Protective Clothing Selection Policy Protective Clothing/Equipment Welding and Cutting safety

3. Classes of Flammable and Combustible Liquids. The following information is provided to ensure that users of this document are aware of the classes of flammable and combustible liquids.


193

3.1 Flammable liquid is defined as any liquid having a flashpoint below 100 deg. F. (37.8 deg. C.), except any mixture having components with flashpoints of 100 deg. F. (37.8 deg. C.) or higher, the total of which make up 99 percent or more of the total volume of the mixture. Flammable liquids are known as Class I liquids. Class I liquids are divided into three classes as follows:

- Class IA includes liquids having flashpoints below 73 deg. F. (22.8 deg.

C.) and having a boiling point below 100 deg. F. (37.8 deg. C.). - Class IB includes liquids having flashpoints below 73 deg. F. (22.8 deg.

C.) and having a boiling point at or above 100 deg. F. (37.8 deg. C.). - Class IC includes liquids having flashpoints at or above 73 deg. F. (22.8

deg. C.) and below 100 deg. F. (37.8 deg. C.). 3.2 Combustible liquid is defined as any liquid having a flashpoint at or above

100 deg. F. (37.8 deg. C.) Combustible liquids are divided into two classes as follows:

- Class II includes liquids with flashpoints at or above 100 deg. F. (37.8

deg. C.) and below 140 deg. F. (60 deg. C.), except any mixture having components with flashpoints of 200 deg. F. (93.3 deg. C.) or higher, the volume of which make up 99 percent or more of the total volume of the mixture.

- Class III includes liquids with flashpoints at or above 140 deg. F. (60 deg.

C.) Class III liquids are subdivided into two subclasses: - Class IIIA includes liquids with flashpoints at or above 140 deg. F. (60

deg. C.) and below 200 deg. F. (93.3 deg. C.), except any mixture having components with flashpoints of 200 deg. F. (93.3 deg. C.), or higher, the total volume of which make up 99 percent or more of the total volume of the mixture.

- Class IIIB includes liquids with flashpoints at or above 200 deg. F. (93.3

deg. C.). This section does not cover Class IIIB liquids. Where the term "Class III liquids" is used in this section, it must mean only Class IIIA liquids.

4. Spill Control Equipment. 4.1 Spill control equipment will be maintained in each area where storage and/or

dispensing is conducted. This equipment is generally supplied by the customer and will include as a minimum:


194

Spill Control Brooms Personnel Protective Equipment Absorbent Pads Shovels, Brooms, Mops, Pails

5. Employee Training. 5.1 All employees whose duties involved them with flammable and combustible

liquids will receive annual training applicable to their areas of responsibility as outlined in the H3O, Inc. Training Manual.

5.2 Initial Training. This employer shall provide training to ensure that the

purpose and function of this program is understood by employees and that the knowledge and skills required for the safe usage of flammable and combustible liquids is acquired by employees. The training shall include the following:

5.2.1 Each affected employee shall be instructed in the purpose and use

of these procedures. 5.2.2 Each affected employee shall receive training in the recognition and

control of applicable hazards. 5.2.3 Each affected employee shall receive training in the usage of

personal protective equipment. 5.2.4 All other employees whose work operations are or may be in an

area where storage and dispensing is conducted, shall be instructed about the procedures, and prohibitions relating to usage of flammable and combustible liquids.

5.3 Refresher Training. 5.3.1 Retraining shall be provided for all authorized and affected

employees whenever there is a change in their job assignments, a change in equipment or processes that present a new hazard, or when there is a change in these procedures.

5.3.2 Additional retraining shall also be conducted whenever a periodic

inspection reveals, or whenever this employer has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or use of these procedures.


195

5.3.3 The retraining shall reestablish employee proficiency and introduce new or revised hazard control methods and procedures, as necessary.

5.4 Certification. This employer shall certify that employee training has been


5.5 H3O, Inc. shall ensure that our employees understand and comply with the

restrictions and prohibitions of the Host employer's Policies and Procedures. 6. Handling of Flammable and Combustible Liquids (general requirements). 6.1 Flammable liquids shall be kept in covered containers when not actually in

use. 6.2 There shall be no open flames or other sources of ignition within the vapor

path of any flammable or combustible chemical used on company premises. 6.3 Transfer of liquids shall be accomplished by using a closed piping system,

by gravity through a self-closing valve, or by safety cans. 6.4 The quantity of flammable and combustible liquids in any area should not

exceed the amount required for one day or one shift or 120 gallons (NFPA 33). 6.5 *NO SMOKING* signs shall be posted in all locations where flammable or

combustible liquids are used or stored. Supervisors shall strictly enforce this policy.

6.6 The transfer of flammable liquids shall be done using appropriate bonding

and grounding of containers. 6.7 Containers supplying spray nozzles (i.e., spray guns, etc.) shall be kept

closed. 6.8 There shall be no sources of ignition (flame or spark producing) in any area

where flammable liquids are used, nor within 20 ft. unless separated by a partition.

6.9 Hot surfaces (steam pipes, etc.) shall not be located in areas where

combustible residues may accumulate without approved fire protection controls. 6.10 Electrical equipment located within areas where combustible residues may

accumulate shall be approved for Class I Div 1 locations. Electrical equipment adjacent to a spraying area in areas where combustible residues may accumulate and not separated by a partition shall be approved for Class I Div 2 locations.


196

6.11 Portable lamps shall not be used in any spraying area unless it is

specifically designed for a maintenance operation. If used for maintenance, they must intrinsically safe and conform to Class I Div 1 locations.

6.12 Areas using Class I liquids shall be ventilated at a rate of not less than one

cubic foot per minute per sq. ft. of floor area. 6.13 Maintenance operations involving hot work or the use of spark producing

tools may be done if the area has been proven safe (see hot work/welding safety procedures) and the work is supervised.

6.14 Housekeeping, i.e., cleaning of spills and leakage control. These

requirements shall be closely monitored. Supervisors shall strictly control housekeeping in areas where flammable and combustible liquids are used or stored.

6.15 Waste or residue shall be stored in approved covered metal containers. 7. Warehousing. Flammable and combustible liquids storage rooms where dispensing does not occur is called Warehousing. Warehousing requirements are extremely complex. Detailed assessments must be conducted to determine safe storage requirements. See NFPA 30, for spacing and quantity requirements. See NFPA 49 and 491M, for chemical compatibility and other fire safety requirements. The following considerations (as a minimum) apply:

Access Ways to Permit Approach of Fire Control Apparatus Alerting/warning systems Emergency evacuation Emergency rescue Emergency response by firefighters Fire suppression systems Ingress and Egress Intrinsically safe lighting, ventilation, heating and other equipment Recovery actions Signage Sources of ignition Spacing and quantity limitations Spill containment and control measures Written emergency plans and procedures

8. Fire Control. Extinguishers. Suitable fire control devices, such as small hose or portable fire extinguishers, will be available at locations where flammable or combustible liquids are stored.


197

8.1 Portable and special equipment. Portable fire extinguishment and control equipment must be provided in such quantities and types as are needed for the special hazards of operation and storage.

8.2 Water supply. Water must be available in volume and at adequate pressure

to supply water hose streams, foam-producing equipment, automatic sprinklers, or water spray systems as the need is indicated by the special hazards of operation, dispensing and storage.

8.3 Special extinguishers. Special extinguishing equipment such as that utilizing

foam, inert gas, or dry chemical must be provided as the need is indicated by the special hazards of operation dispensing and storage.

8.4 When 2 or more classes of materials are stored in a single pile, the

maximum gallonage in that pile must be the smallest of the 2 or more separate gallonages.

8.5 Within 200 ft. of each portable tank, there must be a 12-ft. wide access way

to permit approach of fire control apparatus. 8.6 The distances listed apply to properties that have protection for exposures

as defined. If there are exposures, and such protection for exposures does not exist, the distances in column 4 must be doubled.

8.7 When total quantity stored does not exceed 50 percent of maximum per pile,

the distances in columns 4 and 5 may be reduced 50 percent, but not less than 3 ft.

8.8 At least one portable fire extinguisher having a rating of not less than 12-B

units must be located outside of, but not more than 10 feet from, the door opening into any room used for storage.

8.9 At least one portable fire extinguisher having a rating of not less than 12-B

units must be located not less than 10 feet, nor more than 25 feet, from any Class I or Class II liquid storage area located outside of a storage room but inside a building.

8.10 Sprinklers. When sprinklers are provided, they will be installed in

accordance with NFPA requirements. 8.11 Open flames and smoking. Open flames, ignition sources and smoking are

not be permitted in flammable or combustible liquid storage areas. 8.12 Water reactive materials. Materials which will react with water must not be

stored in the same room with flammable or combustible liquids.


198

8.12.1 Flammable liquids must be kept in covered containers when not actually in use.

8.12.2 Where flammable or combustible liquids are used or handled,

except in closed containers, means will be provided to dispose promptly and safely of leakage or spills.

8.12.3 Class I liquids may be used only where there are no open flames

or other sources of ignition within the possible path of vapor travel. 8.12.4 Flammable or combustible liquids must be drawn from or

transferred into vessels, containers, or portable tanks within a building only through a closed piping system, from safety cans, by means of a device drawing through the top, or from a container or portable tanks by gravity through an approved self-closing valve. Transferring by means of air pressure on the container or portable tanks is prohibited.

9. Ventilation. 9.1 Class I liquids must be ventilated at a rate of not less than 1 cubic foot per

minute per square foot of solid floor area. This must be accomplished by natural or mechanical ventilation with discharge or exhaust to a safe location outside of the building. Provision must be made for introduction of makeup air in such a manner as not to short circuit the ventilation. Ventilation must be arranged to include all floor areas or pits where flammable vapors may collect.

9.2 Equipment used in a building and the ventilation of the building must be

designed so as to limit flammable vapor-air mixtures under normal operating conditions to the interior of equipment, and to not more than 5 feet from equipment which exposes Class I liquids to the air.

10. Special Hazards. Where the need is indicated by special hazards of operation, flammable or combustible liquid processing equipment, major piping, and supporting steel must be protected by approved water spray systems, deluge systems, approved fire-resistant coatings, insulation, or any combination of these. 11. Sources of Ignition. 11.1 Adequate precautions must be taken by all employee’s to prevent the

ignition of flammable vapors. Sources of ignition include but are not limited to open flames; lightning; smoking; cutting and welding; hot surfaces; frictional heat;


199

static, electrical, and mechanical sparks; spontaneous ignition, including heat-producing chemical reactions; and radiant heat.

11.2 Grounding. Class I liquids must not be dispensed into containers unless

the nozzle and container are electrically interconnected. 12. Housekeeping. 12.1 General. Maintenance and operating practices must be in accordance with

established procedures which will tend to control leakage and prevent the accidental escape of flammable or combustible liquids. Spills must be cleaned up promptly.

12.2 Access. Adequate aisles must be maintained for unobstructed movement

of personnel and so that fire protection equipment can be brought to bear on any part of flammable or combustible liquid storage, use, or any unit physical operation.

12.3 Waste and residue. Combustible waste material and residues in a building

or unit operating area must be kept to a minimum, stored in covered metal receptacles and disposed of daily.

12.4 Clear zones. Ground area around buildings and unit operating areas must

be kept free of weeds, trash, or other unnecessary combustible materials.


DATE: FEBRUARY 27, 2009 (Rev. 04-06-09) SUBJECT: Forklift Safety Policy REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.178 Purpose: To provide powered industrial truck operators with proper procedures for use of all powered industrial trucks, including fork trucks, platform lift trucks, motorized hand trucks and lifting gears.


200

1. Training

1.1 Training for Powered Industrial Truck (PIT) Operators shall be conducted by a certified instructor. All operational training shall be conducted under close supervision. All training and evaluation must be completed before an operator is permitted to use a powered industrial truck. Training records containing Operators Name’s, Training Dates, Evalation Dates, and Trainer’s Name are located in main office and will be available upon request.

1.2 Training consists of a combination of formal instruction, practical training exercises and evaluation of the operator’s performance in the workplace.

1.3 Refresher training shall be provided to the operator when:

1.4 The operator has been observed to operate the vehicle in an unsafe manner. 1.5 The operator has been involved in an accident or near-miss incident. 1.6 The operator has received an evaluation that reveals that the operator is not operating the truck safely. 1.7 The operator is assigned to drive a different type of truck. 1.8 A condition in the workplace changes in a manner that could affect the safe operation of the truck. 1.9 Re-certification training will be conducted every three years. 1.10 H3O, Inc. shall ensure that our employees understand and comply with the restrictions and prohibitions of the Host employer's Policies and Procedures.

2. Procedures:

2.1 Review Operator and Vehicle Information

2.2 Only authorized and trained personnel will operate PITs. 2.3 All PITs will be equipped with an overhead carriage, fire extinguisher, rotating beacon, face plate, horn, and back-up alarm.

2.4 The operator will perform daily pre-inspections.

2.5 Any safety defects (such as hydraulic fluid leaks, defective brakes, defective steering, missing face plate, non-working horn, missing fire extinguisher, etc.) will be reported for immediate repair or have the PIT taken out of service.


201

2.6 Operators will follow the proper recharging or refueling safety procedures.

2.7 Loads will be tilted back and carried no more than 6 inches from the ground. Loads that restrict the operator’s vision will be transported backwards.

2.8 Operator will sound horn and use extreme caution when meeting pedestrians, making turns and cornering.

2.9 Passengers may not ride on any portion of a PIT. Only the operator will ride PITs.

2.10 If PITs are used as a man lift, an appropriate man lift platform (cage with standard rails and toe-boards) will be used. Aisle will be maintained free from obstructions, marked and wide enough (six foot minimum) for vehicle operation.

2.11 Lift capacity will be marked on all PITs. Operator will assure load does not exceed rated limits.

2.12 When unattended, PITs will be turned off, forks lowered to the ground, parking brake applied and key removed

2.13 Operators are instructed to report all accidents, regardless of fault and severity to the Department of Safety and Environmental Compliance. 2.14 Operators will verify trailer chocks, supports, and dock plates prior to loading/unloading

3. Changing, Charging and Storing Batteries

3.1 Battery charging installations shall be located in well ventilated areas designated for that purpose. 3.2 Trucks shall be properly positioned and brake applied before attempting to change or charge batteries. 3.3 Care shall be taken to assure that vent caps are functioning. The battery (or compartment) cover(s) shall be open to dissipate heat. 3.4 Smoking is prohibited in the charging area. 3.5 Precautions shall be taken to prevent open flames, sparks or electric arcs in battery charging areas.


202

3.6 Storage of combustibles is prohibited in charging locations. 3.7 Tools and other metallic objects shall be kept away from the top of uncovered batteries.

4. Trucks:

4.1 The brakes of highway trucks shall be set while they are being unloaded.

5. Training program content. Powered industrial truck operators shall reieve initial training in the following topics, except in topics which the employer can demonstrate are not applicable to safe operation of the truck in the employer’s workplace.

Truck-related topics:

Operating instructions, warnings, and precautions for the types of

truck the operator will be authorized to operate;

Differences between the truck and the automobile;

Truck controls and instrumentation: where they are located, what they do, and how they work;

Engine or motor operation;

Steering and maneuvering;

Visibility (including restrictions due to loading);

Fork and attachment adaptaion, ooperation, and use limitations;

Vehicle capacity;

Vehicle stability

Any vehicle inspection and maintenance that the operator will be required to perform;

Refueling and/or charging and recharging of batteries;

Operating limitations;

Any other operation instructions, warnings, or precautions listed in the operator’s manual for the types of vehicle that the employee is being trained to operate.

Work-place related topics:

Surface conditions where the vehicle will be operated;


203

Composition of loads to be carried and load stability;

Load manipulation, stacking and unstacking;

Pedestrian traffic in areas where the vehicle will be operated;

Narrow aisles and other restricted places where the vehicle will be operated;

Hazardous (classified) locations where the vehicle will be operated;

Ramps and other sloped surfaces that could affect the vehicle’s stasbility;

Closed environments and other areas where insufficient ventialationor poor vehicle maintenance could cause a buildup of carbon monoxide or diesel exhaust;

Other unique or potentially hazardous environmental conditions in the workplace that could affect safe operation.

The requirements of this section. 5.1 Trucks shall not be driven up to anyone standing in front of a fixed object. 5.2 No person shall be allowed to stand or pass under the elevated portion of

any truck, whether loaded or empty. 5.3 Unauthorized personnel shall not be permitted to ride on powered industrial

trucks. A safe place to ride shall be provided where riding of trucks is authorized. 5.4 Arms or legs are prohibited from being placed between the uprights of the

mast or outside the running lines of the truck. 5.5 When a powered industrial truck is left unattended, load engaging means

shall be fully lowered, controls will be neutralized, power shut off, and brakes set. Wheels will be blocked if the truck is parked on an incline.

5.5.1 A powered industrial truck is unattended when the operator is 25 ft.

or more away from the vehicle which remains in his view, or whenever the operator leaves the vehicle and it is not in his view.

5.5.2 When the operator is dismounted and within 25 ft. of the truck still in

his view, the load engaging means will be fully lowered, controls neutralized, and the brakes set to prevent movement.

5.6 A safe distance shall be maintained from the edge of ramps or platforms

while on any elevated dock, platform, or freight car. Trucks will not be used for opening or closing freight doors.


204

5.7 Brakes will be set and wheel blocks in place to prevent movement of trucks, trailers, or railroad cars while loading or unloading. Fixed jacks may be necessary to support a semitrailer during loading or unloading when the trailer is not coupled to a tractor. The flooring of trucks, trailers, and railroad cars will be checked for breaks and weakness before they are driven onto.

5.8 The operator will ensure sufficient headroom under overhead installations,

lights, pipes, sprinkler system, etc. before operating the vehicle in these areas. 5.9 An overhead guard will be used as protection against falling objects. It

should be noted that an overhead guard is intended to offer protection from the impact of small packages, boxes, bagged material, etc., representative of the job application, but not to withstand the impact of a falling capacity load.

5.10 A load backrest extension will be used whenever necessary to minimize the

possibility of the load or part of it from falling rearward. 5.11 Only approved industrial trucks will be used in hazardous locations. 5.12 Whenever a truck is equipped with vertical only, or vertical and horizontal

controls elevatable with the lifting carriage or forks for lifting personnel, the following additional precautions will be taken for the protection of personnel being elevated.

5.12.1 Use of a safety platform firmly secured to the lifting carriage and/or

forks. 5.12.2 Means shall be provided whereby personnel on the platform can

shut off power to the truck. 5.12.3 Such protection from falling objects as indicated necessary by the

operating conditions will be provided. 5.13 Fire aisles, access to stairways, and fire equipment will be not be

obstructed at any time. 5.14 General requirements. Operators: 5.14.1 Will obey Plant/Site speeds and other traffic regulations at all

times. 5.14.2 Will operate loaded trucks with forks no more than 6-8 inches

above the ground, with the load carried low and tilted back. 5.14.3 Will not raise or lower loads while moving.


205

5.14.4 Will not carry anything on the overhead guard. 5.14.5 Will use all plant/Site observation mirrors 5.14.6 Will ensure vehicle sound/illuminated warning devices are

operational. 5.14.7 Will yield right of way to pedestrians, emergency vehicles, and

avoid pedestrian lanes. 5.14.8 Will drive cautiously on uneven or slippery surfaces. 5.14.9 Will ensure the load is pointed uphill where the gradient is greater

than 10 percent. 5.14.10 Will ensure fire protection equipment is carried with the vehicle

and is in proper working order. 5.15 Prestart requirements. Operators: 5.15.1 Will verify that all brakes, controls, gauges, lights, seat belts, and

routine operational features are in proper working order. They shall be examined before and after each shift. Defects when found shall be immediately reported and corrected.

5.15.2 Will remove the truck from service any time it is found to be in

need of repair, defective, or in any way unsafe, the truck will be taken out of service until it has been restored to safe operating condition.

5.15.3 Will check for leaks and perform necessary operator maintenance

before starting vehicle. 5.15.4 Will report deficiencies to maintenance. 5.15.5 Will ensure they know the load capacity and stay within it. 5.15.6 Will be cognizant of the planned route and aware of areas with

inadequate headroom, lighting, obstructions, and floor surface problems. 5.15.7 Will wear the same level of personal protective equipment as the

personnel they are directly working with. 5.15.8 Will not engage in stunt driving or horseplay. 5.15.9 Will slow down for wet and slippery floors.


206

5.15.10 Will properly secure dockboard or bridgeplates before they are driven over. Dockboard or bridgeplates will be driven over carefully and slowly and their rated capacity never exceeded.

5.15.11 Will approach any elevators slowly, and then enter squarely after

the elevator car is properly leveled. Once on the elevator, the controls shall be neutralized, power shut off, and the brakes set until the desired level is reached.

5.15.12 Motorized hand trucks must enter elevators or other confined

areas with load end forward. 5.15.13 Running over loose objects on the roadway surface shall be

avoided. 5.15.14 While negotiating turns, speed shall be reduced to a safe level by

means of turning the hand steering wheel in a smooth, sweeping motion. Except when maneuvering at a very low speed, the hand steering wheel shall be turned at a moderate, even rate.

5.15.15 Will use extreme care tilting the load forward or backward,

particularly when high tiering. Tilting forward with load engaging means elevated, shall be prohibited except to pick up a load. An elevated load shall not be tilted forward except when the load is in a deposit position over a rack or stack. When stacking or tiering, only enough backward tilt to stabilize the load shall be used.

5.16 Loading/Unloading requirements. Operators: 5.16.1 Will ensure load is within the trucks rated capacity. 5.16.2 Will place load squarely on forks until load touches carriage. 5.16.3 Will ensure load is stable and centered on forks, and stack or tie

loose or uneven loads (or ensure proper personnel accomplish this prior to loading).

5.16.4 Will secure the vehicle when not in use to prevent unauthorized

personnel from operating the vehicle. 5.16.5 Will tilt the mast back to lift load. 5.16.6 Will proceed straight into trailers or railcars to load/unload. 5.16.7 Will ensure if loading/unloading onto trucks that the wheels are

chocked, brakes are engaged, and loading platform is positioned properly.


207

5.16.8 Will ensure if loading/unloading onto or from racks the proper safe

weight or height-to-load ratio is maintained. 5.16.9. Will ensure if loading/unloading onto or from stacked materials the

proper safe weight or height-to-load ratio is maintained. 5.17 Parking requirements. Operators: 5.17.1 Must select flat parking surfaces, away from traffic where the

vehicle does not block, doors, pedestrian routes, aisles, exits, etc. 5.17.2 Must not leave a truck unattended or be more than 25 feet from

the vehicle without: 5.17.2.1 Fully lowering load-engaging means, neutralizing controls,

shutting off power, setting the brakes, and removing the keys. 5.17.2.2 Blocking the wheels if parked on an incline. 5.18 Refueling requirements. Operators: 5.18.1 Refuel only in assigned, ventilated areas containing no ignition

sources. 5.18.2 Turn off engine. 5.18.3 Have fire suppression and cleanup equipment available. 5.18.4 Extinguish smoking materials. 5.18.5 Use acid-resistant material-handling equipment and wear

corrosion-resistant PPE during battery charging/changing. 5.18.5.1 Remove battery cap slowly and leave open. 5.18.5.2 Pour acid into water, not water into acid. 5.18.6 Follow the vehicle manufacturer's instructions for gas or propane

fueling. 5.18.7 Never use open flame to check fuel level. 5.18.8 Try to prevent spills, clean any spills promptly, replace fuel cap

before starting or moving vehicle.


208

5.18.9 Take empty propane tanks to an authorized compressed gas container disposal/storage area and follow company policy for disposal/storage.

5.19 Spilled electrolyte. Facilities shall be provided for flushing and neutralizing

spilled electrolyte, for fire protection, for protecting charging apparatus from damage by trucks, and for adequate ventilation for dispersal of fumes from gassing batteries.

5.20 Battery maintenance requirements. A conveyor, overhead hoist, or

equivalent material handling equipment shall be provided for handling batteries. Reinstalled batteries shall be properly positioned and secured in the truck. A carboy tilter or siphon shall be provided for handling electrolyte. When charging batteries, acid shall be poured into water; water shall not be poured into acid. Trucks shall be properly positioned and brake applied before attempting to change or charge batteries. Care shall be taken to assure that vent caps are functioning. The battery (or compartment) cover(s) shall be open to dissipate heat. Smoking shall be prohibited in the charging area. Precautions shall be taken to prevent open flames, sparks, or electric arcs in battery charging areas. Tools and other metallic objects shall be kept away from the top of uncovered batteries.

6. Traveling:

6.1 All traffic regulations shall be observed, including authorized speed limits. A safe distance shall be maintained approximately three truck lengths from the truck ahead, and the truck shall be kept under control at all times.

7. Loading:

7.1 Only stable or safely arranged loads shall be handled. Caution shall be exercised when handling off-center loads which cannot be centered. 7.2 Only loads within the rated capacity of the truck shall be handled.

7.3 Extreme care shall be used when tilting the load forward or backward, particularly when high tiering. Tilting forward with load engaging means elevated shall be prohibited except to pick up a load. An elevated load shall not be tilted forward except when the load is in a deposit position over a rack or stack. When stacking or tiering, only enough backward tilt to stabilize the load shall be used.


209

8. Fueling Safety

8.1 Fuel tanks shall not be filled while the engine is running. Spillage shall be avoided.

8.2 No trucks shall be operated with a leak in the fuel system until the leak has been corrected.

8.3 Open flames shall not be used for checking electrolyte level in storage batteries or gasoline level in fuel tanks.

8.4 Fueling operations shall be located in well ventilated areas designated for that purpose.

9. Powered Industrial Truck Pre-Use Checklist: A check of the following items (as applicable) is to be conducted by the operator prior to

use each shift. Tires Chains Steering mechanism Mast Brakes Carriage Hydraulic system Attachments Horn Nameplate Controls Fire Extinguisher Overhead Guard Additional items, if applicable: Operating lights; flashing or rotating lights Clutch or Creeper control Load backrest extension Battery connectors Fuel line (for leaks and damage) Exhaust system (for sparks, flame or leaks) Water muffler water level Directional signals Back-up alarm Seat-actuated dead man brake Safety seat restraint system


210

If any deficiencies are noted, the unit is to be placed OUT OF SERVICE until the problem has been corrected. Additionally, it is the operator’s responsibility to notify the immediate supervisor and fill out a maintenance request 10. Safe Operation Procedure for Charging LPG Tank

10.1 No smoking. 10.2 Move LPG PIT outside for refueling. 10.3 Turn off PIT. 10.4 LPG tanks will be removed in the following order: 10.4.1 shut off service valve 10.4.2 disconnect tank from hose 10.4.3 unbuckle and remove tank from bracket 10.5 LPG tanks will be replaced in the following order: 10.5.1 place tanks in bracket and re-buckle 10.5.2 reconnect hose to tank and tighten firmly 10.5.3 open valve slowly and assure proper seal NOTE: Federal law Prohibits dispensing an improper fuel type into any Vehicle or into a

non- approved fuel container. 10.6 In Case of LPG Leaks or Tank Rupture DO NOT start or move the PIT.

10.7 If fuel hose is leaking, close the valve immediately and place PIT “Out of Service” until repaired.

10.8 If tank ruptures, warn others, immediately leave the area (at least 50 feet) and notify Management. Do not re-enter the area until cleared by Management.

GOOD HOUSEKEEPING

A first essential for employee safety and health is the observance of good housekeeping

practices. Orderly and clean work stations, uncluttered aisles, properly stored and cared for tools

and equipment, unimpeded exits, and related housekeeping procedures are everyone’s

responsibility. Good housekeeping also extends to lunchroom and restroom areas. A clean an

orderly plant also is just more pleasant to work in. We ask your cooperation and assistance.



211

DATE: June 13, 2009 SUBJECT: Occupational Exposure to Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S)

REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.119, Process Safety

OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.146, Confined Spaces OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.1000, Air Contaminants (Z Tables) OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.1200, Hazard Communication OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.132-138, Personal Protective Equipment

BASIS: Hydrogen Sulfide exposure can be fatal, the result of asphyxiation. Hydrogen Sulfide affects primarily the respiratory system. Hydrogen Sulfide is also a highly flammable gas. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) estimates that 85 percent of accidents involving asphyxiating and flammable gases can be prevented if proper safety precautions at job sites are initiated. This poses a serious problem for exposed workers and their employer. Various OSHA Standards establish uniform requirements to ensure that the hazards associated with asphyxiating and flammable gases in U.S. workplaces are evaluated, safety procedures are implemented, and that the proper hazard information is transmitted to all affected workers. GENERAL: H3O Inc. will ensure that all potential sources of Hydrogen Sulfide within our facility(s) or host employers are evaluated. This standard practice instruction is intended to address comprehensively the issues of; evaluating and identifying potential sources of Hydrogen Sulfide, evaluating the associated potential hazards, communicating information concerning these hazards, and establishing appropriate procedures, and protective measures for employees.

Contents of the Hydrogen Sulfide Safety Program 1. Written Program. 2. Related Programs. 3. Hazard Overview. 4. Health Affects. 5. OSHA Overview. 6. DOT Overview. 7. NFPA Overview. 8. General Requirements. 9. Confined Space Program. 10. Procedures For Atmospheric Testing. 11. Process Safety. 12. Mechanical Integrity. 13. Training. 14. Re-Training. 15. Work Operations. 16. Monitoring & Measurement Procedures. 17. Spill And Leak Procedures.


212

18. Emergency First Aid Procedures. 19. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). 20. Tool Selection, Evaluation & Condition.

H3O Inc. Hydrogen Sulfide Safety Program

Hydrogen Sulfide H2S 1. Written program. H3O Inc. will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction in accordance with the following:

On an annual basis.

When changes occur to governing regulatory sources that require revision.

When changes occur to related company procedures that require a revision.

When facility operational changes occur that require a revision.

When there is an accident or close-call that relates to this area of safety.

Anytime the procedures fail. Effective implementation of this program requires support from all levels of management. This written program will be communicated to all personnel that are affected by it. It encompasses the total workplace, regardless of the number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals and objectives. 2. Related programs. The following safety programs are to be used in consonance with this program:

Process Safety Program.

Confined Space Entry Program.

Hazard Communication Program.

3. Hazard overview. Hydrogen Sulfide is a colorless gas possessing the disagreeable odor associated with rotten eggs. It is occasionally encountered naturally as the result of decay of organic waste. Sewage and swamp water, for example, typically contain dissolved hydrogen sulfide. We sometimes hear that such materials “smell like sulfur.” But elemental sulfur is an odorless solid; what is actually meant is that such materials smell like hydrogen sulfide. Some amount of hydrogen sulfide is almost always present in our atmosphere. 4. Health Affects. Continued inhalation in an atmosphere containing hydrogen sulfide causes dizziness and the onset of a headache. One deep breath of pure hydrogen sulfide is fatal; breathing a concentration of 600 ppm by volume is fatal within 30 minutes. Since it possesses such a disagreeable odor, most people are initially aware


213

of its presence. However, hydrogen sulfide also deadens the sense of smell rapidly. Thus individuals who remain in an atmosphere containing hydrogen sulfide become oblivious to its presence and may inhale dangerous or lethal amounts unknowingly. 5. OSHA/NIOSH Overview. Hydrogen Sulfide is available industrially, mainly as a liquid, in containers. It is primarily used in the chemical industry to produce other sulfur-containing compounds, but hydrogen sulfide is also used in the metallurgical industry. In the workplace, OSHA regulates the exposure of employees to hydrogen sulfide. OSHA stipulates a permissible exposure limit of: - 20 ppm - Acceptable ceiling concentration. - 50 ppm - Acceptable maximum peak concentration for an 8-hr shift. - 10 ppm - NIOSH REL for hydrogen sulfide is 10 ppm as a 10-minute ceiling. 6. DOT Overview. The Department of Transportation regulates Hydrogen Sulfide as a poisonous gas. Containers are labeled POISON GAS and FLAMMABLE GAS, and their transport vehicles are similarly placarded. 7. NFPA Overview.

Description: Colorless gas; offensive strong odor similar to rotten eggs. Fire and Explosion Hazard: Flammable gas. Forms explosive mixtures with air. Flammable Range: 4.3% and 45%. Ignition Temperature: 500 degrees. Vapor Density: 1.2, (vapors are heavier than air) (air = 1.0) will seek lower areas. Boiling Point: -76 degrees. Freezing Point: -117 degrees. Chemical Abstract Service (CAS) Number: 7783-06-4.

8. General Requirements. H3O Inc. will establish Hydrogen Sulfide operational procedures through the use of this document. 8.1 Facility Evaluation. This employer shall evaluate our host employer facilities

to determine if any work area meets the criteria for designation as a Hydrogen Sulfide Hazard Area.

9. Permit-Required Confined Space Program. This employer will implement our confined space program when performing work in areas designated as a confined space. The permit-required confined space program will conform to the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.146. This employer shall: 9.1 Implement the measures necessary to prevent unauthorized entry. 9.2 Identify and evaluate the hazards of permit spaces before employees enter

them.


214

` 9.3 Pre-Entry requirements. Develop and implement the means, procedures, and practices necessary for safe permit space entry operations, including, but not limited to, the following:

9.3.1 Specifying acceptable entry conditions. 9.3.2 Isolating the permit space. 9.3.3 Purging, inerting, flushing, or ventilating the permit space as

necessary to eliminate or control atmospheric hazards. 9.3.4 Provide pedestrian, vehicle, or other barriers as necessary to

protect entrants from external hazards. 9.3.5 Verify that conditions in the permit space are acceptable for entry

throughout the duration of an authorized entry. 9.3.6 Develop and utilize checklists based on this standard practice

instruction and 29 CFR 1910.146. 9.4 Equipment requirements. Provide the following equipment at no cost to

employees, maintain that equipment properly, and ensure that employees are trained in the proper use of the equipment:

9.4.1 Testing and monitoring equipment needed to determine if

hazardous conditions exist or to verify that they do not exist. 9.4.2 Ventilating equipment needed to obtain acceptable air quality entry

conditions. 9.4.3 Communications equipment necessary for communication between

personnel involved in the entry operation. 9.4.4 Personal protective equipment insofar as feasible engineering and

work practice controls do not adequately protect employees. 9.4.5 Lighting equipment needed to enable employees to see well enough

to work safely and to exit the space quickly in an emergency. 9.4.6 Barriers and shields as required to protect workers from pedestrian,

and vehicular traffic. 9.4.7 Ladders, needed for safe ingress and egress by authorized

entrants.


215

9.4.8 Rescue, Retrieval, and Emergency equipment needed to extract or treat injured personnel, except to the extent that the equipment and or service is provided by rescue services that are immediately available.

9.4.9 Any other equipment necessary for safe entry into and rescue from

permitted spaces at our facility. 9.4.10 Principal equipment needed to conduct confined space operations.

The below listed intrinsically safe equipment as a minimum will be maintained where required for confined space operations.

Multi-gas monitors

Ventilation equipment

Rescue tripod/davit arm and winch system

Body harnesses

Extraction cable and lanyards

Air compressors (as required)

Supplied air respirators (as required)

Air purifying respirators (as required)

SCBA equipment (as required)

Emergency escape breathing apparatus (as required)

Radio communication system (as required)

Signage (as required)

Lock-out/tag-out equipment (as required)

Intrinsically safe lighting equipment

Personal protective clothing

Hearing protection equipment

Head protection equipment

Eye protection equipment

First aid kits

Time keeping equipment

Hand tools

Escape ladders for depths of four feet or shoulder height 10. Procedures For Atmospheric Testing. Atmospheric testing for Hydrogen Sulfide Hazard Areas is required for two distinct purposes: Evaluation of the hazards of the work area and verification that acceptable entry conditions for entry into that area exist. 10.1 Evaluation testing. The host employer facilities will ensure that the

atmosphere is analyzed using equipment of sufficient sensitivity and specificity to identify and evaluate any hazardous atmospheres that may exist or arise. Evaluation and interpretation of these data, and development of the entry procedure, will be done by, or reviewed by, a technically qualified professional (e.g., OSHA consultation service, or certified industrial hygienist, registered safety engineer, certified safety professional, certified marine engineer, etc.)


216

based on evaluation of all serious hazards. The internal atmosphere will be tested, with a calibrated direct-reading instrument, for the following conditions in the order given:

Oxygen content (19.5% - 23.5%) OSHA Mandated

Flammable gases and vapors OSHA Mandated

Potential toxic air contaminants OSHA Mandated

Airborne combustible dusts Site Specific 10.2 Verification testing. The atmosphere of a work area designated as a permit

space which may contain a hazardous atmosphere will be tested for residues of all contaminants identified by evaluation testing using permit specified equipment to determine that residual concentrations at the time of testing and entry are within the range of acceptable entry conditions. Results of testing (i.e., actual concentration, etc.) will be recorded on the permit in the space provided adjacent to the stipulated acceptable entry condition. The atmosphere will be verified, with a calibrated direct-reading instrument, for the following conditions in the order given:




Airborne combustible dusts Site Specific 10.3 Duration of testing. Measurement of values for each atmospheric

parameter will be made for at least the minimum response time of the test instrument specified by the manufacturer.

10.4 Testing stratified atmospheres. When monitoring for entries involving a

descent into atmospheres that may be stratified, the atmospheric envelope will be tested a distance of approximately 4 feet (1.22 m) in the direction of travel and to each side. If a sampling probe is used, the entrant's rate of progress will be slowed to accommodate the sampling speed and detector response. The stratified atmosphere will be tested, with a calibrated direct-reading instrument, for the following conditions in the order given:




Airborne combustible dusts Site Specific 11. Process Safety Management of Highly Hazardous Chemicals. This company has the potential for working with processes where Hydrogen Sulfide will be used. Hydrogen Sulfide has a threshold quantity (TQ) of 1500.00 Pounds. This means that where the quantities of Hydrogen Sulfide in the process exceed 1500.00 Pounds, the


217

Process Safety Management Program as delineated in 29 CFR 1910.119 will be triggered. Process safety management is the proactive identification, evaluation and mitigation or prevention of chemical releases that could occur as a result of failures in process procedures or equipment. The major objective of process safety management of highly hazardous chemicals is to prevent unwanted releases of hazardous chemicals especially into locations which could expose our employees and or community to serious hazards. 11.1 Each process that this company works on will be evaluated as a separate

entity. Where the material TQ exceeds the quantities delineated in 29 CFR 1910.119, this company will ensure that coordination is accomplished with the Process Safety Committee of the host company. The various lines of defense that have been incorporated into the design and operation of the process to prevent or mitigate the release of hazardous chemicals will be evaluated and strengthened where required to assure their effectiveness at each level. The following elements will be used in the evaluation process.

11.1.1 Process design. 11.1.2 Process technology. 11.1.3 Operational and maintenance activities/procedures. 11.1.4 Nonroutine tasks, activities and procedures. 11.1.5 Emergency preparedness plans and procedures. 11.1.6 Training programs. 11.1.7 Other elements which impact the process. 12. Mechanical Integrity. Maintenance programs and schedules in processes where Hydrogen Sulfide is used will be reviewed to see if there are areas where "breakdown" maintenance is used rather than an on-going mechanical integrity program. Equipment used to process, store, or handle Hydrogen Sulfide needs to be designed, constructed, installed and maintained to minimize the risk of releases of such chemicals. 12.1 Elements of a mechanical integrity program include: 12.1.1 Identification and categorization of equipment and instrumentation. 12.1.2 Inspections and tests. 12.1.3 Testing and inspection frequencies. 12.1.4 Development of maintenance procedures.


218

12.1.5 Training of maintenance personnel. 12.1.6 Establishment of criteria for acceptable test results, documentation

of test and inspection results, and documentation of manufacturer recommendations as to mean time to failure for equipment and instrumentation.

12.2 The first safety priority - preventing a release. The first safety priority for

any process our employees are involved will be to ensure that the process is operated and maintained as designed, and to keep the chemicals contained.

12.3 The second safety priority - controlling a release. The second safety

priority will be to control release of chemicals through engineering controls such as; venting to scrubbers, flares, or to surge or overflow tanks which are designed to receive such chemicals, etc. Also included are; fixed fire protection systems, water spray, or deluge systems, monitor guns, dikes, designed drainage systems, and other systems which would control or mitigate hazardous chemicals once an unwanted release occurs.

13. Training. 13.1 Types of training. The company will determine whether training required for

specific jobs will be conducted in a classroom or on-the-job. The degree of training provided shall be determined by the complexity of the job, the host facilitys specific requirements in conjunction with our emergency plan and the Hydrogen Sulfide exposure hazards associated with the individual job.

13.1.1 Initial Training. Prior to job assignment, this employer shall

provide training to ensure that the hazards associated with Hydrogen Sulfide are understood by employees and that the knowledge, skills and personal protective equipment required are acquired by employees. The training shall as a minimum include the following:


recognition of applicable hazards involved with the particular job and job site, as well as the methods and means necessary for safe work.

13.1.1.2 The specific nature of the operation which could result in

exposure to Hydrogen Sulfide. 13.1.1.3 The purpose, proper selection, fitting, use and limitation of

personal protective equipment (PPE) 13.1.1.4 The adverse health effects associated with excessive

exposure to Hydrogen Sulfide.


219

13.1.1.5 The engineering controls and work practices associated


13.1.1.6 The contents of any compliance plan in effect. 13.1.1.7 The employee's right of access to records under

29 CFR 1910.20. 13.1.2 Refresher Training. Scheduled refresher training will be conducted

on a(n) anual basis. 14. Retraining.

14.1 Retraining shall be provided for all affected employees as a minimum under the following conditions:

14.1.1 Whenever there is a change in job assignments. 14.1.2 Whenever there is a change in personal protective equipment. 14.1.3 Whenever there is a change in equipment that presents a new hazard. 14.1.4 Whenever there is a change in processes that presents a new hazard. 14.1.5 Whenever their work takes them into hazardous areas. 14.1.6 Whenever there is a change in Hydrogen Sulfide safety procedures. 14.1.7 Whenever safety procedure fails resulting in a near-miss, illness, or injury.

14.2 Additional retraining. Additional retraining shall also be conducted whenever a periodic inspection reveals, or whenever this employer has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge of known hazards, or use of equipment or procedures.

14.3 The retraining shall reestablish employee proficiency and introduce new

equipment, or revised control methods and procedures, as necessary.


220

14.4 Certification. This employer shall certify that employee training has been accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification shall contain a synopsis of the training conducted, each employee's name, and dates of training.

15. Work Operations. 15.1 Work operations in which Hydrogen Sulfide may be encountered involve

welding, burning, cutting, brazing, grinding, and abrasive blasting, and general pipe fitting work.

15.2 The equipment and materials used to accomplish work operations are

those normally associated with sandblasting and painting operations. 15.3 Employee crew size will vary and employee job responsibilities will be that

of their craft as stated in the company's policy manual. Specific additional responsibilities will be:


15.3.1.1 Monitors procedure to ensure compliance with this work practice.

15.3.2 Supervisors

15.3.2.1 Ensures that the initial determination for potential Hydrogen Sulfide or toxic exposure has been accomplished before work begins. 15.3.2.2 Supervises the safe performance of work in accordance with this and other related work practices. 15.3.2.3 Assigns jobs only to qualified employees.

15.3.3 Employees

15.3.3.1 Uses the protective and safety equipment as assigned and directed. 15.3.3.2 Abides by the requirements of this and site-specific work practices.

16. Monitoring and Measurement Procedures.


221

16.1 Eight Hour Time Weighted Average (TWA) Evaluations. Where possible 8hr TWAs will be taken so that the average eight-hour exposure is based on a single eight-hour sample. Air samples will be taken in the employee’s breathing zone and by qualified personnel.

16.2 Ceiling Evaluations. Where possible, measurements to determine

employee ceiling exposure will be taken during periods of maximum expected airborne concentrations of hydrogen Sulfide. Each measurement will consist of a fifteen (15) minute sample or series of consecutive samples totaling fifteen (15) minutes. Air samples will be taken in the employee’s breathing zone and by qualified personnel.

16.3 Peak And Above Ceiling Evaluations. Measurements to determine

employee peak exposure will be taken during periods of maximum expected airborne concentrations of Hydrogen Sulfide. Each measurement will consist of a ten (10) minute sample or series of consecutive samples totaling ten (10) minutes. A minimum of three measurements will be taken on one work shift and the highest of all measurements taken will be assumed to be an estimate of the employee’s exposure. Air samples will be taken in the employee’s breathing zone and by qualified personnel.

16.4 Sampling Methods. Sampling and analysis will be conducted in accordance with acceptable industrial hygiene practices. Sampling data will be maintained for the duration of employment of the affected employee plus 30 years.

17. Spill and Leak Procedures. Spill and leak procedures will largely depend on the capability and emergency procedures of the host employer. This employer will coordinate with the host employer to ensure adequate procedures are in-place protection of all employee’s (host and contractor) and the surrounding area.

17.1 Persons not wearing protective equipment and clothing will be restricted from areas of spills or leaks until cleanup has been completed. 17.2 Emergency Containment. Hydrogen Sulfide exposure can be fatal. Only authorized and trained emergency response personnel should attempt containment. If you are not trained in containment of Hydrogen Sulfide Gas, evacuate the area in accordance with established procedures If Hydrogen Sulfide is spilled or leaked the following steps as a minimum should be taken.

17.2.1 Remove all ignition sources. 17.2.2 Ventilate the area of the spill or leak to disperse gas. 17.2.3 If in gaseous form, stop flow of gas. If source of leak is a cylinder and the leak cannot be stopped in place, remove the leaking cylinder to a


222

safe place in the open air and repair the leak or allow the cylinder to empty. 17.2.4 If in a liquid form allow to vaporize.

18. Emergency First Aid Procedures. In the event of an emergency, institute first aid procedures and send for first aid or medical assistance in accordance with local procedures.

18.1 Eye Exposure: Wash immediately with large amounts of water. Lifting the lower and upper lids occasionally, get medical attention as soon as possible. 18.2 Skin Exposure: Immediately flush with copious amounts of water. Remove any clothing contaminated, and flush exposed skin areas, get medical attention as soon as possible. 18.3 Respiratory Exposure: Get the victim to open, fresh air immediately. If breathing has stopped perform CPR. Keep the victim warm and at rest. Get medical attention as soon as possible. 18.4 Rescue Considerations. Don’t become a second victim. Move the affected person from the hazardous area. If the exposed person has been overcome, initiate local emergency notification procedures. Understand the facility’s emergency rescue procedures and know the locations of rescue equipment before the need arises.

19. Protective Clothing and Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Where engineering controls, administrative controls, and job hazard analyses do not eliminate all job hazards, employees will (where appropriate) wear personal protective equipment (PPE). 19.1 These include items such as caps, hair nets, face shields, safety goggles,

glasses, hearing protection, footguards, gloves, etc. Supervisors will ensure that equipment selected will meet the following requirements:

19.1.1 It will be appropriate for the particular hazard. 19.1.2 It will be maintained in good condition. 19.1.3 It will be properly stored when not in use, to prevent damage or loss. 19.1.4 It will be kept clean, fully functional and sanitary.


223

19.2 Hazards associated with wear of protective clothing, PPE, personal clothing and jewelry. Protective clothing and PPE can present additional safety hazards. Supervisors will ensure workers wear appropriate clothing and PPE. These items will be worn so as not create additional hazards.

19.2.1 Personal clothing and jewelry. Personal clothing and jewelry will be monitored by the immediate supervisor. Clothing or jewelry that could become entangled in tools, equipment or machinery or of an excessively flammable nature will be prohibited.

19.3 Documentation. PPE requirements will be documented on a “Protective

Measures Determination” form and properly filed. 20. Tool Selection, Evaluation and Condition. The greatest hazards posed by tools usually result from misuse and/or improper maintenance. Tool selection sometimes is not considered a priority when arrangements are made to begin work. All employees will consider the following when selecting tools: 20.1 Is the tool correct for the type work to be performed? 20.2 Are guards installed properly and in good condition? 20.3 Are grounding methods sufficient when working in wet conditions? 20.4 Does the tool create sparks or heat? Has this been considered when

working around flammable substances? 20.5 Do impact tools such as chisels, wedges, or drift pins have mushroomed

heads? The heads can shatter on impact, sending sharp fragments flying! 20.6 Are wooden handled tools loose or splintered? This can result in the heads

flying off and striking the user/coworkers! 20.7 Are cutting tools sharp? Dull tools are more hazardous than sharp ones. 20.8 Is the tool used on the proper working surface? Tools used on dirty or wet

working surfaces can create a multitude of hazards. 20.9 Are tools stored properly when not being used? Saw blades, knives,

scissors and like sharp tools should be stored so that sharp edges are directed away from aisles and coworkers.

20.10 Is there sufficient clearance for tools requiring swinging motions such as

hammers, axes, picks, etc? 20.11 Tools will be checked for excessive vibration.


224

20.12 Have tools been modified beyond the manufacturers specification? If so,

have the modifications been approved by a “competent person”?


DATE: February 22, 2009 (Rev. 04-06-09) SUBJECT: Hand and Portable Powered Tools and Other Hand-Held Equipment. REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.241 - 244 BASIS: Thousands of workers are injured every year due to improper use of hand and portable powered tools. Serious injury or death can be the result of electrocution, severed fingers, blindness, and a host of other types of injuries. OSHA estimates that most of these accidents can be prevented if proper safety precautions at job sites are initiated. This poses a serious problem for exposed workers and their employer. The OSHA Hand and Portable Powered Tools Standards establish uniform requirements to ensure that the hazards of using these tools are evaluated, safety procedures implemented, and that the proper hazard information is transmitted to all affected workers. GENERAL: H3O, INC. will ensure that tool hazards are evaluated. This standard practice instruction is intended to address comprehensively the issues of; evaluating and identifying tool selection and use deficiencies, evaluating the associated potential hazards, communicating information concerning these hazards, and establishing appropriate procedures, and protective measures for employees.

Contents of the Hand and Portable Powered Tools Program 1. Written Program. 2. General Requirements. 3. Tool Selection. 4. Power Tool Precautions. 5. Methods of Guarding. 6. Portable Circular Saws.

H3O, INC. Hand and Portable Powered Tools Program


225

1. Written Program. H3O, INC. will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction on an annual basis, or when changes occur to 29 CFR 1910.221 - 244, that prompt revision of this document, or when facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document. Effective implementation requires a written program for job safety, health, that is endorsed and advocated by the highest level of management within H3O, Inc. and that outlines our goals and plans. This written program will be communicated to all required personnel. It is designed to establish clear goals, and objectives. 2. General requirements. H3O, INC. shall be responsible for the safe condition of tools and equipment used its employees, including tools and equipment which may be furnished by employees. H3O, INC. will develop hand and powered tool operational procedures through the use of this document. After tool selection and evaluation, tools will be used and maintained in a safe condition. Supervisors shall ensure that the proper types of tools are utilized at each job site. 2.1 H3O, Inc. shall ensure that our employees understand and comply with the restrictions and prohibitions of the Host employer's Policies and Procedures. 2.2 All tools will be used with a continuity assured power cord plugged into a G.F.C.I at all times 3. Tool Selection, Evaluation and Condition. The greatest hazards posed by tools usually result from misuse and or improper maintenance. Tool selection sometimes is not considered a priority when arrangements are made to begin work. All employees will consider the following when selecting tools: 3.1 Is the tool correct for the type work to be performed? 3.2 Are guards installed properly and in good condition? 3.3 Are grounding methods sufficient when working in wet conditions? 3.4 Does the tool create sparks or heat? Has this been considered when




working surfaces can create a multitude of hazards.


226

3.9 Are tools stored properly when not being used? Saw blades, knives,



hammers, axes, picks, etc? 4. Power tool precautions. Power tools can be hazardous when improperly used, H3O, Inc. uses several types. These types are based on the power source they use: Electric, liquid fuel, hydraulic, pneumatic, and powder-actuated. The following precautions will be taken by employees of H3O, Inc. to prevent injury. 4.1 Power tools will always be operated within their design limitations. 4.2 Eye protection, gloves and safety footwear are recommended during

operation. 4.3 Store tools in an appropriate dry location when not in use. 4.4 Work only in well illuminated locations. 4.5 Tools will not be carried by the cord or hose. 4.6 Cords or hoses will not be yanked to disconnect it from the receptacle. 4.7 Cords and hoses will be kept away from heat, oils, and sharp edges or any

other source that could result in damage. 4.8 Tools will be disconnected when not in use, before servicing, and when

changing accessories such as blades, bits and cutters. 4.9 Observers will be kept at a safe distance at all times from the work area. 4.10 Work will be secured with clamps or a vice where possible to free both

hands to operate tools. 4.10 To prevent accidental starting, employees should be continually aware not

to hold the start button while carrying a plugged in tool. 4.11 Tools will be maintained in a clean manner, and properly maintained in

accordance with the manufacturers guidelines. 4.12 Ensure that proper shoes are worn and that the work area is kept clean to

maintain proper footing and good balance.


227

4.13 Ensure that proper apparel is worn. Loose clothing, ties, or jewelry can become caught in moving parts.

4.14 Tools that are damaged will be removed from service immediately and

tagged "Do Not Use". They will be reported and turned over to a supervisor for repair or replacement.

4.15 Cracked saws. All cracked saws will be removed from service. 4.16 Grounding. Portable electric powered tools shall meet the electrical

requirements of the company Electrical Safety-Related Work Practices Program, and 29 CFR 1910.331 - 335.

4.17 Compressed air used for cleaning. Compressed air shall not be used for

cleaning purposes except where reduced to less than 30 p.s.i. and then only with effective chip guarding and personal protective equipment.

5. Methods of guarding. One or more methods of guarding shall be provided where required to protect the operator and other employees in the area from hazards such as those created by point of operation, inrunning nip points, rotating parts, flying chips and sparks. Examples of guarding methods are; barrier guards, two-hand tripping devices, electronic safety devices, etc. The guard shall be such that it does not offer an accident hazard in itself. Employee's will: 5.1 Inspect tools without guards for signs of guard removal. If it is evident that a

guard is required. Tag-out the tool and obtain a replacement. Tools will not be energized during inspection.

5.2 Inspect tools having guards for proper operation and maintenance prior to

use. Tools will not be energized during inspection. 5.3 Never remove a guard during use. 6. Portable circular saws. All portable, power-driven circular saws having a blade diameter greater than 2 in. will be equipped with guards above and below the base plate or shoe. The upper guard shall cover the saw to the depth of the teeth, except for the minimum arc required to permit the base to be tilted for bevel cuts. (Does not apply to circular saws used in the meat industry for meat cutting purposes). For authorized use the following conditions must be met. 6.1 An upper guard must cover the entire blade of the saw. 6.2 A retractable lower guard must cover the teeth of the saw.


228

6.3 Except when it makes contact with the work material, the lower guard must automatically return to the covering position when the tool is withdrawn from the work.


DATE: June 12, 2009 SUBJECT: Hazard Communication Program (General Industry) REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.1200 BASIS: About 32 million workers are potentially exposed to one or more chemical hazards on a daily basis. There are an estimated 575,000 existing chemical products, and hundreds of new ones being introduced annually. This poses a serious problem for exposed workers and their employer. The OSHA Hazard Communication Standard establishes uniform requirements to make sure that the hazards of all chemicals imported into, produced, or used in U.S. workplaces are evaluated, and that this hazard information is transmitted to all affected workers. GENERAL: H3O Inc. will ensure that the hazards of all chemicals used within our facility are evaluated, and that information concerning their hazards is transmitted to all employees. This standard practice instruction is intended to address comprehensively the issues of; evaluating the potential hazards of chemicals, communicating information concerning these hazards, and establishing appropriate protective measures for employees.

Contents of the Hazard Communication Program 1. Written Program. 2. Training Program. 3. Labeling Program. 4. Material Safety Data Sheets Program. 5. Non-Company Employees Program. 6. Trade Secrets. 7. Unlabeled Process Piping. 8. Non Routine Tasks. 9. Definitions. 10. Sample Letter Requesting an MSDS.


229

H3O Inc. Hazard Communication Program 1. Written Program. This standard practice instruction will be maintained in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1200 and updated as required. Where no update is required this document will be reviewed annually. Effective implementation of this program requires support from all levels of management within this company. This written program will be communicated to all personnel that are affected by it. It encompasses the total workplace, regardless of number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals, and objectives. H3O Inc. shall: 1.1 Annually review and revise this written hazard communication program

based on company operational requirements or, as required by the OSHA Hazard Communication Standard.

1.2 Provide a program for proper labeling of containers, describe other needed

forms of warning, and detail the use and purpose material safety data sheets (MSDS). Describe how employee information and training requirements will be met, to include the following:

1.2.1 Generate a list of the hazardous chemicals known to be present in

each department using an identity that is referenced from the appropriate material safety data sheet. This list will be available to all employees in the facility, and located as a minimum in the facility "Worker Right-To-Know Center".

1.2.2 Detail the method H3O Inc. will use to inform employees of the

hazards of non-routine tasks (for example cleaning of heat treatment pits). Immediate supervisors of affected employees will oversee this requirement. The Safety Officer may be consulted to provide any task hazard analysis assistance required.

1.2.3 The hazards associated with chemicals contained in process or

facility piping routed through their work area. Immediate supervisors of affected employees will oversee this requirement. The Safety Officer may be consulted to provide any hazard analysis assistance required. Any unlabeled pipes in their work areas must be immediately reported to a supervisor for labeling.

1.2.4 The methods H3O Inc. will use to inform employee(s) of any

precautionary measures that need to be taken to protect employees during normal operating conditions and in foreseeable emergencies. Immediate supervisors of affected employees will oversee this requirement. The Maintenance Manager and or the Safety Officer may be consulted to provide any task hazard analysis assistance required.


230

1.2.5 H3O Inc. shall make the written hazard communication program

available to all employees, during each work shift. Since all of our employees speak English this is the only language available at this time

2. Training Program. H3O Inc. shall provide employees with information and training on hazardous chemicals in their work area at the time of their initial assignment, annually, and whenever a new chemical is introduced into their work area that could present a potential hazard. 2.1 Information. H3O Inc. Employees shall be informed of: 2.1.1 Any operations in their work area where hazardous chemicals are

present. 2.1.2 The location and availability of the written hazard communication

program, including a list(s) of hazardous chemicals used in their department, and the associated material safety data sheet (MSDS). This information will be:

2.1.3 Centrally located at H3O Inc. in a "Worker Right-To-Know Center". All employees will have convenient access to this location and materials during each shift. A chemical list will be provided and broken down by department. 2.2 Training. Employee hazard communication training at H3O Inc. shall be

conducted annually by department. This training will be conducted by an approved training instructor. Newly hired personnel will be briefed on the general requirements of the OSHA hazard communication standard by a supervisor, as well as duty specific hazards by their immediate supervisor before they begin any duties within the department. Intradepartmentally transferred personnel will also be briefed on the duty specific hazards by their immediate supervisor before they begin any duties within the department. This training will include at least the following:

2.2.1 Methods (subjective and objective) that may be used to detect the

presence or release of a hazardous chemical in the work area. This will include; any monitoring conducted by H3O Inc., continuous monitoring devices, visual appearance, or odor of hazardous chemicals when being released, etc. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) will be used to augment this requirement where ever possible.

2.2.2 The physical and health hazards of the chemicals present in the

work area (MSDS).


231

2.2.3 The measures employees can take to protect themselves from these hazards. Specific procedures H3O Inc. has implemented to protect employees from exposure to hazardous chemicals, to include; appropriate work practices, Standard Practice Instructions, emergency procedures, and personal protective equipment.

2.2.4 An explanation of the labeling system used at H3O Inc., the material

safety data sheet, and how employees can obtain and use the appropriate hazard information.

2.2.5 The chemical (formal) and common name(s) of products used, and

all ingredients which have been determined to be health hazards. 2.2.6 Physical and chemical characteristics of the hazardous chemical

including, vapor pressure, and flash point. 2.2.7 The physical hazards of the hazardous chemical, including the

potential for fire, explosion, and reactivity. 2.2.8 The health hazards of the hazardous chemical, including signs and

symptoms of exposure, and any medical conditions which are generally recognized as being aggravated by exposure to the chemical.

2.2.9 The primary route(s) of entry; inhalation, absorption, ingestion,

injection, and target organs. 2.2.10 The OSHA permissible exposure limit, ACGIH Threshold Limit

Value, including any other exposure limit used or recommended by the chemical manufacturer.

2.2.11 Whether the hazardous chemical has been found to be a potential

carcinogen by the International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC). 2.2.12 Any generally applicable precautions for safe handling and use

which are known including appropriate hygienic practices, protective measures during repair and maintenance of contaminated equipment, and procedures for clean-up of spills and leaks.

2.2.13 Any generally applicable control measures which are known

appropriate engineering controls, work practices, or personal protective equipment.

2.2.14 Emergency and first aid procedures. 2.2.15 How to determine the date of preparation of the material safety

data sheet concerned, and or the last change to it.


232

2.2.16 Specific chemical identity such as the chemical name, Chemical

Abstracts Service (CAS) Registry Number, synonyms, or any other information pertinent to the training session.

2.3 Documentation. All training will be documented using a standard company

attendance roster. Certificates of completion will be issued to attendees. A copy of the completion certificate will be maintain as part of the employees permanent company record.

3. Labeling Requirements. Labeling requirements of containers of chemicals used at H3O Inc., as well as of containers of chemicals and hazardous materials being shipped off site. The following procedures apply: 3.1 Unmarked Containers. No unmarked container containing chemicals may

be used in conjunction with any duties or operations at H3O Inc.. Unless the container is a portable container in the control of a specific person for their immediate use. Container means any bag, barrel, bottle, box, can, cylinder, drum, reaction vessel, storage tank, or the like that contains a hazardous chemical. For purposes of this standard practice instruction, pipes or piping systems, and engines, fuel tanks, or other operating systems in a vehicle, are not considered to be containers. Immediate use means that the hazardous chemical will be under the control of and used only by the person who transfers it from a labeled container and only within the work shift in which it is transferred.

3.2 Container Labeling. H3O Inc. will maintain and provide a container labeling

kit to any employee requesting its use. Employees shall ensure that labels on incoming containers of hazardous chemicals are not removed or defaced. Containers containing hazardous chemicals will be properly disposed of and the labels defaced after use. Once they are emptied, chemical containers can never be used in the place of any other container (for example, trash receptacles).

3.3 Label Information for a single chemical (non-mixture). H3O Inc. will provide

the appropriate hazard rating and chemical compatibility charts to label containers. The MSDS will be consulted first to determine labeling requirements. The label as a minimum will contain:

3.3.1 Information concerning the personal protective equipment (PPE)

required to use or handle the chemical. 3.3.2 The DOT hazard class i.e., whether the chemical is Flammable,

Toxic, Irritating, Corrosive, Water Reactive, or is an oxidizer. 3.3.3 The chemical name as reflected on the MSDS. 3.3.4 The normal operational use of the chemical.


233

3.3.5 Name, address, and emergency phone number of the chemical

manufacturer, importer, or other responsible party. 3.4 Label Information (mixtures). H3O Inc. will provide the appropriate hazard

rating and chemical data to label containers. The MSDS's of the chemicals used to create the mixture will be consulted first to determine labeling requirements, see para 3.3.

3.4.1 If a mixture has been tested by an approved laboratory as a whole

to determine its hazardous characteristics, the results of such testing shall be used to determine whether the mixture is hazardous and to provide the appropriate labeling information.

3.4.2 If a mixture has not been tested as a whole to determine whether

the mixture is a health hazard, the mixture shall be assumed to present the same health hazards as do the components which comprise one percent (by weight or volume) or greater of the mixture. Scientifically valid data such as that provided on the MSDS to evaluate the physical hazard potential of the mixture must be used. The Safety Officer may be consulted to provide any hazard analysis assistance required.

3.5 Where Labels are not required. Questions concerning any of the exceptions

listed below should be directed to the Safety Officer for clarification. H3O Inc. generally should not be affected by these requirements, however they are provided for information and because they are included in the Hazard Communication Standard. The Hazard Communication Standard does not require labeling of the following chemicals:

3.5.1 Any pesticide as such term is defined in the Federal Insecticide,

Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act (7 U.S.C. 136 et seq.), when subject to the labeling requirements of that Act and labeling regulations issued under that Act by the Environmental Protection Agency.

3.5.2 Any food, food additive, color additive, drug, cosmetic, or medical or

veterinary device, including materials intended for use as ingredients in such products (e.g. flavors and fragrances), as such terms are defined in the Federal Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act (21 U.S.C. 301 et seq.) and regulations issued under that Act, when they are subject to the labeling requirements under that Act by the Food and Drug Administration;

3.5.3 Any distilled spirits (beverage alcohols), wine, or malt beverage

intended for nonindustrial use, as such terms are defined in the Federal Alcohol Administration Act (27 U.S.C. 201 et seq.) and regulations issued under that Act, when subject to the labeling requirements of that Act and


234

labeling regulations issued under that Act by the Bureau of Alcohol Tobacco, and Firearms.

3.5.4 Any consumer product or hazardous substance as those terms are

defined in the Consumer Product Safety Act (15 U.S.C. 2051 et seq.) and Federal Hazardous Substances Act (15 U.S.C. 1261 et seq.) respectively, when subject to a consumer product safety standard or labeling requirement of those Acts, or regulations issued under those Acts by the Consumer Product Safety Commission.

3.6 Labeling of containers of chemicals and hazardous materials being shipped

off site designated as hazardous waste. Where these materials are classified as hazardous waste they fall under the Solid Waste Disposal Act, as amended by the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976, as amended (42 U.S.C. 6901 et seq.), and the provisions of 40 CFR. And as such will be subject to regulations issued under that Act by the Environmental Protection Agency. Consult with the Safety and Environmental Administrator where this determination is unclear or assistance is required.

4. Evaluation and Distribution of Material Safety Data Sheets to Employees. 4.1 H3O Inc. shall maintain copies of any material safety data sheets that are

received with incoming shipments of the sealed containers of hazardous chemicals, shall obtain a material safety data sheet for sealed containers of hazardous chemicals received without a material safety data sheet if an employee requests the material safety data sheet, and shall ensure that the material safety data sheets are readily accessible during each work shift.

4.3 Master copies of each MSDS will be maintained in the office. 4.4 Right-To-Know (worker) copies will be available to all employees in the

facility, and located as a minimum in the office. Additionally, a list of the hazardous chemicals known to be present in each department using an identity that is referenced from the appropriate material safety data sheet will be located in the office. H3O Inc. will ensure a system is in place to maintain a current set of MSDS's.

4.5 MSDS copies will be maintained for all chemicals abandoned for use for a

period of 30 years. 4.6 MSDS requests. A request letter will be forwarded to any manufacturer,

supplier or vender who does not provide an MSDS with a product received by this company. The letter will be forwarded within 10 days of receipt of the material. The format will be the same as the sample letter located at the back of this instruction.


235

4.7 Employees must be familiar with the various sections of the MSDS. Section Contents Section I - Product Identity Section II - Hazardous Ingredients Section III - Physical/Chemical Characteristics Section IV - Fire and Explosion Hazard Data Section V - Reactivity Data Section VI - Health Hazards Data Section VII - Precautions for Safe Handling and Use Section VIII - Control Measures/Protection Info Section IX - Additional Information 5. Non-Company Employees Program. Visitors, Contract Employees, Contractor Personnel and In-House Representatives. The principle company escort or contact will advise visitors, contract employees, contractor personnel, and in-house representatives of any chemical hazards that may be encountered in the normal course of their work on the premises, the labeling system in use, the protective measures to be taken, the safe handling procedures to be used, and availability of MSDS's. Any contractor bringing chemicals on-site must provide H3O Inc. with the appropriate hazard information on these substances, including the labels used and the precautionary measures to be taken in working with these chemicals. 6. Trade Secrets. To protect trade secrets, the chemical manufacturer, importer, or employer may withhold the specific chemical identity, including the chemical name, and other specific identification of a hazardous chemical, from the material safety data sheet. To ensure the safety of our employees, H3O Inc. will obtain any information not shown on a MSDS from a supplier, when such information is needed to determine the hazardous constituents of chemicals used within our facility or by our employees. H3O Inc. employees will not use a specific chemical, if they cannot determine from the MSDS (or other approved source) proper protective measures to be used. The following conditions apply: 6.1 Emergency situations. Where a treating physician or nurse determines that

a medical emergency exists and the specific chemical identity of a hazardous chemical is necessary for emergency or first-aid treatment, H3O Inc. suppliers are required by law to immediately disclose the specific chemical identity of a trade secret chemical to that treating physician or nurse, regardless of the existence of a written statement of need of a confidentiality agreement.

6.2 Non-emergency situations. The following OSHA guidelines apply when

requesting information designated as a trade secret from a MSDS. Requesters of trade secret information will:


236

6.2.1 Provide the request in writing. 6.2.2 Explain in detail why the disclosure of the specific chemical identity

is essential. 6.2.3 Agree (when required) in a written confidentiality agreement that the

information will not be used for any purpose other than the health need(s) asserted and agree not to release the information under any circumstances other than to OSHA, as provided in 29 CFR 1910.1200.

6.2.4 Use the information for the following reasons: 6.2.4.1 To assess the hazards of the chemicals to which

employees will be exposed. 6.2.4.2 To conduct or assess sampling of the workplace

atmosphere to determine employee exposure levels. 6.2.4.3 To conduct pre-assignment or periodic medical surveillance

of exposed employees. 6.2.4.4 To provide medical treatment to exposed employees. 6.2.4.5 To select or assess appropriate personal protective

equipment for exposed employees. 6.2.4.6 To select or improve engineering controls or other

protective measures for exposed employees, and to conduct studies to determine the health effects of exposure.

7. Unlabeled Process Piping. Process piping containing hazardous materials will identify the material present, the direction of flow and the maximum pressure achieved in the system. 8. Non Routine Tasks. No employee will be allowed to perform tasks that they are not fully trained to accomplish. Non routine tasks will be evaluated prior to accomplishment of work and the related hazard(s) assessed to develop protective measures. This process will be documented on the company “non-routine assessment form”. 9. Definitions Commonly Found in the OSHA Hazard Communication Standard or that Relate to the Contents of the Standard. Article means a manufactured item: 1. Which is formed to a specific shape or design during manufacture.


237

2. which has end use function(s) dependent in whole or in part upon its shape or design during end use.

3. which does not release, or otherwise result in exposure to, a hazardous

chemical, under normal conditions of use. Assistant Secretary means the Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and Health, U.S. Department of Labor, or designee. Chemical means any element, chemical compound or mixture of elements and/or compounds. Chemical manufacturer means an employer with a workplace where chemical(s) are produced for use or distribution. Chemical name means the scientific designation of a chemical in accordance with the nomenclature system developed by the International Union of Pure and Applied Chemistry (IUPAC) or the Chemical Abstracts Service (CAS) rules of nomenclature, or a name which will clearly identify the chemical for the purpose of conducting a hazard evaluation. Combustible liquid means any liquid having a flashpoint at or above 100 F (37.8 C), but below 200 F (93.3 C), except any mixture having components with flashpoints of 200 F (93.3 C), or higher, the total volume of which make up 99 percent or more of the total volume of the mixture. Common name means any designation or identification such as code name, code number, trade name, brand name or generic name used to identify a chemical other than by its chemical name. Compressed gas means: 1. A gas or mixture of gases having, in a container, an absolute pressure

exceeding 40 psi at 70 F (21.1 C); or 2. A gas or mixture of gases having, in a container, an absolute pressure

exceeding 104 psi at 130 F (54.4 C) regardless of the pressure at 70 F (21.1 C); or

3. A liquid having a vapor pressure exceeding 40 psi at 100 F (37.8 C) as

determined by ASTM D-323-72. Designated representative means any individual or organization to whom an employee gives written authorization to exercise such employee's rights under this section. A recognized or certified collective bargaining agent shall be treated


238

automatically as a designated representative without regard to written employee authorization. Director means the Director, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, or designee. Distributor means a business, other than a chemical manufacturer or importer, which supplies hazardous chemicals to other distributors or to employers. Employee means a worker who may be exposed to hazardous chemicals under normal operating conditions or in foreseeable emergencies. Workers such as office workers or bank tellers who encounter hazardous chemicals only in non-routine, isolated instances are not covered. Employer means a person engaged in a business where chemicals are either used, distributed, or are produced for use or distribution, including a contractor or subcontractor. Explosive means a chemical that causes a sudden, almost instantaneous release of pressure, gas, and heat when subjected to sudden shock, pressure, or high temperature. Exposure or exposed means that an employee is subjected to a hazardous chemical in the course of employment through any route of entry (inhalation, ingestion, skin contact or absorption, etc.), and includes potential (e.g. accidental or possible) exposure. Flammable means a chemical that falls into one of the following categories: 1. Aerosol, flammable means an aerosol that, when tested by the method

described in 16 CFR 1500.45, yields a flame projection exceeding 18 inches at full valve opening, or a flashback (a flame extending back to the valve) at any degree of valve opening.

2. Gas, flammable means: 2.1 A gas that, at ambient temperature and pressure, forms a flammable

mixture with air at a concentration of thirteen (13) percent by volume or less.

2.2 A gas that, at ambient temperature and pressure, forms a range of

flammable mixtures with air wider than twelve (12) percent by volume, regardless of the lower limit.

2.3 Liquid, flammable means any liquid having a flashpoint below 100 F

(37.8 C), except any mixture having components with flashpoints of 100


239

F (37.8 C) or higher, the total of which make up 99 percent or more of the total volume of the mixture.

2.4 Solid, flammable means a solid, other than a blasting agent or

explosive as defined in § 190.109(a), that is liable to cause fire through friction, absorption of moisture, spontaneous chemical change, or retained heat from manufacturing or processing, or which can be ignited readily and when ignited burns so vigorously and persistently as to create a serious hazard. A chemical shall be considered to be a flammable solid if, when tested by the method described in 16 CFR 1500.44, it ignites and burns with a self-sustained flame at a rate greater than one-tenth of an inch per second along its major axis.

Flashpoint means the minimum temperature at which a liquid gives off a vapor in sufficient concentration to ignite when tested as follows: 1. Tagliabue Closed Tester (See American National Standard Method of Test for

Flash Point by Tag Closed Tester, Z11.24-1979 (ASTM D 56-79)) for liquids with a viscosity of less than 45 Saybolt University Seconds (SUS) at 100 F (37.8 C), that do not contain suspended solids and do not have a tendency to form a surface film under test; or

2. Pensky-Martens Closed Tester (See American National Standard Method of

Test for Flash Point by Pensky-Martens Closed Tester, Z11.7-1979 (ASTM D 93-79)) for liquids with a viscosity equal to or greater than 45 SUS at 100 F (37.8 C), or that contain suspended solids, or that have a tendency to form a surface film under test; or

3. Setaflash Closed Tester (see American National Standard Method of Test for

Flash Point by Setaflash Closed Tester (ASTMD 3278-78)). Organic peroxides, which undergo autoaccelerating thermal decomposition, are excluded from any of the flashpoint determination methods specified above.

Foreseeable emergency means any potential occurrence such as, but not limited to, equipment failure, rupture of containers, or failure of control equipment which could result in an uncontrolled release of a hazardous chemical into the workplace. Hazardous chemical means any chemical which is a physical hazard or a health hazard. Hazard warning means any words, pictures, symbols, or combination thereof appearing on a label or other appropriate form of warning which convey the hazard(s) of the chemical(s) in the container(s).


240

Health hazard means a chemical for which there is statistically significant evidence based on at least one study conducted in accordance with established scientific principles that acute or chronic health effects may occur in exposed employees. The term health hazard includes chemicals which are carcinogens, toxic or highly toxic agents, reproductive toxins, irritants, corrosives, sensitizers, hepatotoxins, nephrotoxins, neurotoxins, agents which act on the hematopoietic system, and agents which damage the lungs, skin, eyes, or mucous membranes. Appendix A, to 29 CFR 1910.1200 provides further definitions and explanations of the scope of health hazards covered by this section, and Appendix B, 29 CFR 1910.1200 describes the criteria to be used to determine whether or not a chemical is to be considered hazardous for purposes of this standard practice instruction. Identity means any chemical or common name which is indicated on the material safety data sheet (MSDS) for the chemical. The identity used shall permit cross-references to be made among the required list of hazardous chemicals, the label and the MSDS. Immediate use means that the hazardous chemical will be under the control of and used only by the person who transfers it from a labeled container and only within the work shift in which it is transferred. Importer means the first business with employees within the Customs Territory of the United States which receives hazardous chemicals produced in other countries for the purpose of supplying them to distributors or employers within the United States. Label means any written, printed, or graphic material, displayed on or affixed to containers of hazardous chemicals. Material safety data sheet (MSDS) means written or printed material concerning a hazardous chemical which is prepared in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1200, paragraph (g). Mixture means any combination of two or more chemicals if the combination is not, in whole or in part, the result of a chemical reaction. Organic peroxide means an organic compound that contains the bivalent -O-O-structure and which may be considered to be a structural derivative of hydrogen peroxide where one or both of the hydrogen atoms has been replaced by an organic radical. Oxidizer means a chemical other than a blasting agent or explosive as defined in 29 CFR 1910.109(a), that initiates or promotes combustion in other materials, thereby causing fire either of itself or through the release of oxygen or other gases. Physical hazard means a chemical for which there is scientifically valid evidence that it is a combustible liquid, a compressed gas, explosive, flammable, an organic peroxide, an oxidizer, pyrophoric, unstable (reactive) or water-reactive.


241

Produce means to manufacture, process, formulate, or repackage. Pyrophoric means a chemical that will ignite spontaneously in air at a temperature of 130 F (54.4 C) or below. Responsible party means someone who can provide additional information on the hazardous chemical and appropriate emergency procedures, if necessary. Specific chemical identity means the chemical name, Chemical Abstracts Service (CAS) Registry Number, or any other information that reveals the precise chemical designation of the substance. Trade secret means any confidential formula, pattern, process, device, information or compilation of information that is used in an employer's business, and that gives the employer an opportunity to obtain an advantage over competitors who do not know or use it. Unstable (reactive) means a chemical which in the pure state, or as produced or transported, will vigorously polymerize, decompose, condense, or will become self-reactive under conditions of shocks, pressure or temperature. Use means to package, handle, react, or transfer. Water-reactive means a chemical that reacts with water to release a gas that is either flammable or presents a health hazard. Often when the water is heated it goes into a gaseous state allowing oxygen to be released which can help feed a fire. Work area means a room or defined space in a workplace where hazardous chemicals are produced or used, and where employees are present. Work place means an establishment, job site, or project, at one geographical location containing one or more work areas. 10. Sample Letter Requesting an MSDS.

SAMPLE LETTER REQUESTING AN MSDS XYZ Manufacturing Company 1234 Street Anytown, USA 11222 Dear Sir:


242

The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Hazard Communication Standard (29 CFR 1910.1200) requires employers be provided Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS's) for all hazardous substances used in their facility, and to make these MSDS's available to employees potentially exposed to these hazardous substances. We, therefore, request a copy of the MSDS for your product listed as Stock Number __________. We did not receive an MSDS with the initial shipment. We also request any additional information, supplemental MSDS's, or any other relevant data that your company or supplier has concerning the safety and health aspects of this product. Please consider this letter as a standing request to your company for any information concerning the safety and health aspects of using this product that may become known in the future. The MSDS and any other relevant information should be sent to us within 10, 20, 30, days (select appropriate time). Delays may prevent use of your product. Send the information to the address listed below. Please be advised that if we do not receive the MSDS on the above chemical by __________, we may have to notify OSHA of our inability to obtain this information. Your cooperation is greatly appreciated. Thank you for your timely response to this request. If you have any questions please contact me at (541) 491-1006. Sincerely Safety and Health Manager H3O Inc. 29025 Hwy 99 E. Shedd, OR 97377


DATE: FEBRUARY 27, 2009


243

SUBJECT: Occupational Noise Exposure Program REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.95 BASIS: Approximately 16 million workers are exposed to excessive on-the-job noise levels on an annual basis. In addition to causing hearing loss by destroying the inner ear, noise can put stress on other parts of the body causing fatigue and unnecessary psychological stress. This preventable added burden to the body can result in increased injury rates. This poses a serious problem for exposed workers and their employer. The OSHA Occupational Noise Exposure Standard establishes uniform requirements to make sure that the noise hazards associated with all U.S. workplaces are evaluated, and that the hazards associated with high noise are transmitted to all affected workers so that mitigation measures can be instituted. GENERAL: H3O, Inc.will ensure that the noise hazards within our facility are evaluated, and that information concerning the hazards is transmitted to all employees. This standard practice instruction is intended to address comprehensively the issues of; evaluating the potential hazards of noise, communicating information concerning these hazards, and establishing appropriate protective measures for all employees.

Contents of the Noise Exposure Program 1. Written Program. 2. Audiometric Testing Program. 3. Hearing Conservation Program. 4. Training Program. 5. Recordkeeping.

H3O, Inc.Occupational Noise Exposure Program 1. Written program. Development and maintenance of a written noise exposure program. This standard practice instruction will be reviewed on annual basis and updated as changes in company occur, or as changes are noted to 29 CFR 1910.95 which require revision of this document. Effective implementation of this program requires support from all levels of management within H3O, Inc.. This written program will be communicated to all personnel that are affected by it. It encompasses the total


244

workplace, regardless of the number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals, and objectives. 2. Audiometric testing program. H3O, Inc. will maintain an audiometric testing program in accordance with the following guidelines. 2.1 H3O, Inc.will establish and maintain an audiometric testing program free of

charge for employees whose exposures equal or exceed an 8-hour time-weighted average of 85 decibels.

2.2 Audio metric tests will be performed by a licensed or certified audiologist,

otolaryngologist, or other physician, or by a technician who is certified by the Council of Accreditation in Occupational Hearing Conservation. A technician who performs audiometric tests must be responsible to an audiologist, otolaryngologist or physician.

2.3 All audiograms obtained pursuant to this standard practice instruction will

meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.95, Appendix C: Audiometric Measuring Instruments.

2.4 H3O, Inc.will provide protection against the effects of noise exposure when

the sound levels within our facility exceed those shown in Table 2.1, when measured on the A scale of a standard sound level meter at slow response.

Table 2.1 PERMISSIBLE NOISE EXPOSURES Duration per Sound level dBA day, hours slow response 8 90 6 92 4 95 3 97 2 100 1 1/2 102 1 105 0 1/2 110 1/4 or less 115 2.5 When noise levels are determined by octave band analysis, the equivalent

A-weighted sound level will be determined by using the appropriate table from 29 CFR 1910.95, appendix 1., equivalent sound level contours. Octave band sound


245

pressure levels may be converted to the equivalent A-weighted sound level by plotting them on the graph shown as Figure G-9, 29 CFR 1910.95 (included as an appendix to this instruction) and noting the A-weighted sound level corresponding to the point of highest penetration into the sound level contours. This equivalent A-weighted sound level, which may differ from the actual A-weighted sound level of the noise, will be used to determine exposure limits from Table 2-1 of this instruction.

2.6 When employees are subjected to sound exceeding those listed in Table 2-

1, H3O, Inc. will administer or have administered by qualified personnel, audiometric examinations, obtain valid audiograms, and ensure proper controls are reviewed and implemented where feasible. If such controls fail to reduce sound levels within the levels of Table 2.1, personal protective equipment will be provided and used to reduce sound levels within the levels of the table.

2.7 If the variations in noise level involve intervals of 1 second or less, it will be

considered to be continuous. When the daily noise exposure is composed of two or more periods of noise exposure of different levels, their combined effect will be considered, rather than the individual effect of each.

2.8 Exposure to impulsive or impact noise will not exceed 140 dB peak sound

pressure level. 3. Hearing conservation program. H3O, Inc.is dedicated to providing a safe and healthful working environment. We believe that safety in all operations and activities is of primary importance. Ultimately however, it is the employee's responsibility to seek assistance when required, and to carry out the job in a safe manner. H3O, Inc.will administer a continuing, effective hearing conservation program, as described in the following paragraphs, whenever employee noise exposures equal or exceed an 8 hour time weighted average sound level (TWA) of 85 decibels measured on the A scale (slow response) or, equivalently, a dose of fifty percent. For purposes of the hearing conservation program, employee noise exposures will be computed without regard to any attenuation provided by the use of personal protective equipment. 3.1 An 8 hour time weighted average of 85 decibels or a dose of fifty percent will

also be referred to as the action level. 3.2 Monitoring. When information indicates that any employee's exposure may

equal or exceed an 8 hour time weighted average of 85 decibels, H3O, Inc. will implement this monitoring program.

3.2.1 The company will conduct sampling on a(n) annualbasis and will be

designed to identify employees for inclusion in the hearing conservation program and to enable the proper selection of hearing protectors.


246

3.2.2 Where circumstances such as high worker mobility, significant variations in sound level, or a significant component of impulse noise make area monitoring generally inappropriate, H3O, Inc. will use representative personal sampling to comply with the monitoring requirements of this instruction unless it can be shown that area sampling produces equivalent results.

3.2.3 All continuous, intermittent and impulsive sound levels from 80

decibels to 130 decibels will be integrated into the noise measurements. 3.2.3.1 Instruments used to measure employee noise exposure will

have been calibrated to ensure measurement accuracy. 3.2.4 Monitoring will be repeated whenever a change in production,

process, equipment or controls increases noise exposures to the extent that:

3.2.4.1 Additional employees may be exposed at or above the

action level. 3.2.4.2 The attenuation provided by hearing protectors being used

by employees may be rendered inadequate to meet the requirements of of 29 CFR 1910.95.

3.2.5 Employee notification. H3O, Inc. will notify each employee exposed

at or above an 8 hour time weighted average of 85 decibels of the results of the monitoring.

3.2.6 Observation of monitoring. H3O, Inc. will provide affected employees or

their representatives with an opportunity to observe any noise measurements conducted.

3.2.7 Baseline audiogram. Within 6 months of an employee's first exposure at or above the action level, H3O, Inc. will establish a valid baseline audiogram against which subsequent audiograms can be compared. The company will obtain a valid baseline audiogram within 1 year of an employee's first exposure at or above the action level. Where baseline audiograms are obtained more than 6 months after the employee's first exposure at or above the action level, employees will wear hearing protectors for any period exceeding six months after first exposure until the baseline audiogram is obtained. (Mobile test van exception. Where mobile test vans are used to meet the audiometric testing obligation, baselines will be obtained within 1 year.)

3.2.7.1 Testing to establish a baseline audiogram will be preceded

by at least 14 hours without exposure to workplace noise. Hearing protectors may be used as a substitute for the requirement that


247

baseline audiograms be preceded by 14 hours without exposure to workplace noise.

3.2.7.2 This employer will notify employees of the need to avoid

high levels of non-occupational noise exposure during the 14 hour period immediately preceding the audiometric examination.

3.2.8 Annual audiogram. At least annually after obtaining the baseline

audiogram, this employer will obtain a new audiogram for each employee exposed at or above an 8 hour time weighted average of 85 decibels.

3.2.9 Evaluation of audiogram. Each employee's annual audiogram will

be compared to that employee's baseline audiogram to determine if the audiogram is valid and if a standard threshold shift has occurred. This comparison may be done by an individual trained to technician level. If the annual audiogram shows that an employee has suffered a standard threshold shift, a retest will be accomplished within 30 days and the results considered as the annual audiogram.

3.2.10 Problem audiograms. This employer will ensure that an

audiologist, otolaryngologist, or physician review problem audiograms and determine whether there is a need for further evaluation. The reviewer will be provided the following information:

3.2.10.1 The baseline audiogram and most recent audiogram of

the employee to be evaluated. 3.2.10.2 Measurements of background sound pressure levels in

the audiometric test room, (if the testing was not conducted at the reviewers facility).

3.2.10.3 Records of audiometer calibrations, (if the testing was not

conducted at the reviewers facility). 3.2.10.4 Records of audiometer calibrations, (if the testing was not

conducted at the reviewers facility). 3.2.10.5 A copy of the regulatory requirements for hearing

conservation, if not already available. 3.2.11 Follow-up procedures. If a comparison of the annual audiogram to the

baseline audiogram indicates a standard threshold shift has occurred, the employee will be informed of this fact in writing, within 21 days of the determination.


248

3.2.12 Standard threshold shift. A standard threshold shift is a change in hearing threshold relative to the baseline audiogram of an average of 10 dB or more at 2000, 3000, and 4000 Hz in either ear. In determining whether a standard threshold shift has occurred, allowance may be made for the contribution of aging (presbycusis) to the change in hearing level by correcting the annual audiogram according to the procedure described in Appendix F, 29 CFR 1910.95: Calculation and Application of Age Correction to Audiograms. Unless a physician determines that the standard threshold shift is not work related or aggravated by occupational noise exposure, this employer will ensure that the following steps are taken when a standard threshold shift occurs:

3.2.12.1 Employees exposed or potentially exposed to high noise

will be fitted with hearing protectors, trained in their use and care, and required to use them. For known high noise job assignments employees will be fitted and trained prior to job assignment.

3.2.12.2 Employees already using hearing protectors will be

refitted and retrained in the use of hearing protectors and provided with hearing protectors offering greater attenuation if necessary.

3.2.12.3 Employees will be referred for a clinical audiological

evaluation or an otological examination, as appropriate, if additional testing is necessary or if it is suspected that a medical pathology of the ear is caused or aggravated by the wearing of hearing protectors.

3.2.12.4 Employees will be informed of the need for an otological

examination if a medical pathology of the ear that is unrelated to the use of hearing protectors is suspected.

3.2.12.5 If subsequent audiometric testing of an employee whose

exposure to noise is less than an 8 hour TWA of 90 decibels indicates that a standard threshold shift is not persistent, this employer:

3.2.12.5.1 Will inform the employee of the new audiometric

interpretation. 3.2.12.5.2 May discontinue the required use of hearing

protectors for that employee. 3.2.13 Revised baseline. An annual audiogram may be substituted for

the baseline audiogram when, in the judgment of the audiologist, otolaryngologist or physician who is evaluating the audiogram determine that:


249

3.2.13.1 The standard threshold shift revealed by the audiogram is

persistent. 3.2.13.2 The hearing threshold shown in the annual audiogram

indicates significant improvement over the baseline audiogram. 3.2.14 Audiometric test requirements. Audiometric tests conducted on

employees of H3O, Inc. will be pure tone, air conduction, hearing threshold examinations, with test frequencies including as a minimum 500, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, and 6000 Hz. Tests at each frequency will be taken separately for each ear.

3.2.14.1 Audiometric tests will be conducted with audiometers

(including microprocessor audiometers) that meet the specifications of, and are maintained and used in accordance with, American National Standard Specification for Audiometers, S3.6-1969.

3.2.14.2 Pulsed-tone and self-recording audiometers, if used, will

meet the requirements specified in Appendix C, 29 CFR 1910.95: Audiometric Measuring Instruments.

3.2.14.3 Audiometric examinations will be administered in a room

meeting the requirements listed in Appendix D, 29 CFR 1910.95: Audiometric Test Rooms.

3.2.14.4 Audiometer calibration. The functional operation of the

audiometer will be checked before each day's use by testing a person with known, stable hearing thresholds, and by listening to the audiometer's output to make sure that the output is free from distorted or unwanted sounds. Deviations of 10 decibels or greater require an acoustic calibration.

3.2.14.5 Audiometer calibration will be checked acoustically at

least annually in accordance with Appendix E: Acoustic Calibration of Audiometers. Test frequencies below 500 Hz and above 6000 Hz may be omitted from this check. Deviations of 15 decibels or greater require an exhaustive calibration.

3.2.14.6 An exhaustive calibration will be performed at least every

two years in accordance with sections 4.1.2; 4.1.3.; 4.1.4.3; 4.2; 4.4.1; 4.4.2; 4.4.3; and 4.5 of the American National Standard Specification for Audiometers, S3.6-1969. Test frequencies below 500 Hz and above 6000 Hz may be omitted from this calibration.


250

3.3 Hearing protectors. This employer will make hearing protectors available to all employees exposed to an 8 hour time weighted average of 85 decibels or greater at no cost to the employees. Hearing protectors will be replaced at no cost as necessary.

3.3.1 This employer will ensure that hearing protectors are worn: 3.3.1.1 By any employee who is required by previous testing to

wear personal protective equipment. 3.3.1.2 By any employee who is exposed to an 8 hour time

weighted average of 85 decibels or greater, and who: has not yet had a baseline audiogram established, or has experienced a standard threshold shift.

3.3.2 Employees will be given the opportunity to select their hearing

protectors from a variety of suitable hearing protectors provided. 3.3.3 This employer will provide training in the use and care of all hearing

protectors provided to employees. 3.3.4 This employer will ensure proper initial fitting and supervise the

correct use of all hearing protectors. 3.4 Hearing protector attenuation. This employer will evaluate hearing protector

attenuation for the specific noise environments in which the protector will be used. One of the evaluation methods described in Appendix B: Methods for Estimating the Adequacy of Hearing Protection Attenuation will be used.

3.4.1 Selected hearing protectors will attenuate employee exposure at

least to an 8 hour time weighted average of 90 decibels. 3.4.2 For employees who have experienced a standard threshold shift,

selected hearing protectors must attenuate their exposure to an 8 hour time weighted average of 85 decibels or below.

3.4.3 The adequacy of hearing protector attenuation will be re-evaluated

whenever employee noise exposures increase to the extent that the hearing protectors provided may no longer provide adequate attenuation. More effective hearing protectors will be provided where necessary.

4. Training program. This employer will institute a training program for all employees who are exposed to noise at or above an 8 hour time weighted average of 85 decibels, and will ensure employee participation in such program.


251

4.1 The training program will be repeated annually for each employee included in the hearing conservation program. Information provided in the training program will be updated to be consistent with changes in protective equipment and work processes. Each employee will be informed of the following:

4.1.1 The effects of noise on hearing. 4.1.2 The purpose of hearing protectors, the advantages, disadvantages,

and attenuation of various types, and instructions on selection, fitting, use, and care.

4.1.3 The purpose of audiometric testing, and an explanation of the test

procedures. 4.2 Access to information and training materials. This employer will make

available to affected employees or their representatives copies of this standard practice instruction and 29 CFR 1910.95, and will also post a copy in the workplace.

4.2.1 This employer will provide to affected employees any informational

materials pertaining to 29 CFR 1910.95 that are supplied by OSHA. 5. Recordkeeping. Exposure measurements. This employer will maintain an accurate record of all employee exposure measurements. 5.1 Audiometric tests. This employer will retain all employee audiometric test

records. This record will include as a minimum: 5.1.1 Name and job classification of the employee. 5.1.2 Date of the audiogram. 5.1.3 The examiner's name. 5.1.4 Date of the last acoustic or exhaustive calibration of the audiometer. 5.1.5 Employee's most recent noise exposure assessment. 5.1.6 This employer will maintain accurate records of the measurements

of the background sound pressure levels in audiometric test rooms. 5.2 Record retention. This employer will retain audiometric and related records

for at least the following periods. 5.2.1 Noise exposure measurement records will be retained for two years.


252

5.2.2 Audiometric test records will be retained for the duration of the affected employee's employment.

5.3 Access to records. All records cited in this standard practice instruction will

be provided upon request to employees, former employees, representatives designated by the individual employee, and representatives of OSHA. The provisions of 29 CFR 1910.20 apply to access to records under this section.

5.4 Transfer of records. If this employer ceases to do business, the records will

be transferred to the successor employer and maintained by the successor employer. Should the company cease to function entirely the records will be provided to the respective employees, or as required by current law.


DATE: FEBRUARY 27, 2009 SUBJECT: Hot/Cold Working Environments REGULATORY STANDARDS: OSHA - 29 CFR 1903.1 WAC – 296-62-09510 BASIS: The National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) recommends that worker exposure to heat stress in the workplace be controlled. Heat induced occupational illnesses, injuries, and reduced productivity occur in situations in which the total heat load (environmental plus metabolic) exceeds the capacities of the body to maintain normal body functions without excessive strain. The reduction of adverse health effects can be accomplished by the proper application of engineering and work practice controls, worker training, measurements and assessment of heat stress, medical supervision, and proper use of heat-protective clothing and equipment.

Contents of the Safety-Related Practices for Hot Working Environments 1. Written Program. 2. Training. 3. Selection and Use of Work Practices

4. Workplace Limits and Surveillance. 5. Recordkeeping.

H3O, INC. Safety-Related Practices for Hot Working Environments


253

1. Written Program. H3O, INC. will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction on an annual basis, or when changes occur to the Occupational Safety & Health Act Para 5,A,1 (General Duty Clause), that prompt revision of this document, or when facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document. Effective implementation of this program requires support from all levels of management within H3O, INC.. This written program will be communicated to all personnel that are affected by it. It encompasses the total workplace, regardless of number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals, and objectives. 2. Training. 2.1 Types of training. Supervisors will determine whether training required for

specific jobs will be conducted in a classroom or on-the-job. The degree of training provided shall be determined by the complexity of the job and the associated heat stress hazards.

2.1.1 Initial Training/Acclimatization. Prior to job assignment, H3O, INC.

shall provide training to ensure that the heat stress hazards associated with predesignated job skills are understood by employees and that the knowledge and skills required for the safe application, usage, of work place procedures and equipment, are acquired by employees. The training shall include the following:


recognition of applicable heat stress hazards involved with a particular job, and the methods and means necessary for safe work.

2.1.1.2 All other employees whose work operations are or may be

in an area where an incidence of heat stress could occur, will be instructed about the procedure, and about the prohibitions relating to working in that area.

2.1.1.3 Training course content. All new and current workers, who

are unacclimatized to heat and work in areas where there is reasonable likelihood of heat injury or illness, will be kept informed, through continuing education programs. Initial and refresher training will, as a minimum cover the following:

- Heat stress hazards. - Predisposing factors and relevant signs and symptoms of heat

injury and illness.


254

- Potential health effects of excessive heat stress and first aid procedures.

- Proper precautions for work in heat stress areas. - Employee responsibilities for following proper work practices and

control procedures to help protect the health and provide for the safety of themselves and fellow employees, including instructions to immediately report to the job supervisor the development of signs or symptoms of heat stress overexposure.

- The effects of therapeutic drugs, over-the-counter medications, or

social drugs (including alcohol), that may increase the risk of heat injury or illness by reducing heat tolerance.

- The purposes for and descriptions of the environmental and

medical surveillance programs and of the advantages to the worker of participating in these surveillance programs.

- Proper use of protective clothing and equipment. 3. Selection and Use of Work Practices. Supervisors shall develop and ensure use of standardized safety-related work practices to prevent injuries resulting from incidence of heat stress. The specific safety-related work practices shall be consistent with the nature and extent of the associated work hazards. 4. Workplace Limits and Surveillance. 4.1 Recommended exposure limits (REL). 4.1.1 Recommended exposure limit (REL) (unacclimatized workers).

Total heat exposure to workers shall be controlled so that unprotected health workers who are not acclimatized to working in hot environments are not exposed to combinations of metabolic and environmental heat greater than the applicable permissible heat exposure Threshold Limit Values found in the Threshold Limit Values guidance provided by the American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH).

4.1.2 Recommended exposure limit (REL) (acclimatized workers). Total

heat exposure to workers shall be controlled so that unprotected health workers who are acclimatized to working in hot environments are not exposed to combinations of metabolic and environmental heat greater than the applicable permissible heat exposure Threshold Limit Values found in the Threshold Limit Values guidance provided by the ACGIH.


255

4.1.3 Effect of clothing. The REL given by the ACGIH is based on the assumption that the worker is healthy and medically fit for the level of activity required by their job. They are assumed to be wearing the type clothing used in the correction factors table in the TLV guidance produced by the ACGIH.

4.1.4 Ceiling limits. No worker will be exposed to combinations of

metabolic and environmental heat exceeding the applicable RELs produced by the ACGIH.

5. Recordkeeping. 5.1. H3O, INC. will establish and maintain an accurate record of all

measurements made to determine environmental and metabolic heat exposures to employees.

5.2 Availability of records. 5.2.1 H3O, INC. will make worker environmental surveillance records

available upon request for examination and copying to the subject employee or former employee or to anyone having the specific written consent of the subject employee or former employee in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.20.

5.2.2 Transfer of Records. H3O, INC. will comply with the requirements on the transfer of records set forth in the standard, Access to Medical Records, 29 CFR 1910.20(h).


DATE: FEBRUARY 27, 2009 SUBJECT: Welding, Cutting, and Brazing Safety-Related Work Practices Program


256

REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.251 - 252 NFPA - Standard 51B, 1962 BASIS: The welding, cutting, and brazing processes expose workers to a variety of hazards including; burns, fire, eye damage, possible lung irritation and damage, electric shock, slips and falls. Numerous injuries and deaths occur each year from the hazards associated with welding, cutting, and brazing operations in the American workplace. Most of these injuries and deaths are preventable. GENERAL: H3O Corporation will ensure that work practices that involve Welding, Cutting and Brazing equipment/operations are evaluated to determine if proper safety precautions are instituted. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) recommends that certain guidelines be adhered to regarding these hazards. This standard practice instruction is intended to address comprehensively the issues of; evaluating and identifying the specific hazards where hot work is performed, communicating information concerning these hazards, and establishing appropriate procedures, and protective measures for our employees.

Contents of the Welding, Cutting, and Brazing Safety-Related Work Practices Program

1. Written Program. 2. Fire Prevention and Protection. 3. Protection of Personnel. 4. Health Protection and Ventilation. 5. Industrial Applications. 6. Training. 7. Selection and Use of Work Practices. 8. Definitions.


257

H3O Corporation Welding, Cutting and Brazing Safety-Related Work Practices Program

1. Written Program. H3O Corporation will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction on an annual basis, or when changes occur to 29 CFR 1910.251 - 252, that prompt revision of this document, or when facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document. Effective implementation of this program requires support from all levels of management within this company. This written program will be communicated to all personnel that are affected by it. It encompasses the total workplace, regardless of number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals, and objectives. 2. Fire prevention and protection. Fire and explosion pose a serious risk to our employees during welding, cutting, and brazing operations. Sparks can travel as much as 35 feet, and spatter can bounce on the floor or fall through openings creating hazards in other work areas of our facility. 2.1 Basic safety precautions. The below listed basic safety precautions will be

followed by company employee's performing welding, cutting, and brazing operations. The basic precautions for fire prevention in welding or cutting work are:

2.1.1 Fire hazards. If the object to be welded or cut cannot readily be

moved, all movable fire hazards in the vicinity shall be taken to a safe place.

2.1.2 Guards. If the object to be welded or cut cannot be moved and if all

the fire hazards cannot be removed, then guards shall be used to confine the heat, sparks, and slag, and to protect the immovable fire hazards.

2.1.3 Restrictions. If the requirements stated in paragraphs 2.1.1 and

2.1.2 cannot be followed then welding and cutting shall not be performed. 2.1.4 Oxygen cylinders shall be stored in an upright secured position 20

feet from any flammable gases or petroleum products. 2.2 Special precautions. When the nature of the work to be performed requires

the use of guarding devices certain additional precautions may be necessary: 2.2.1 Combustible material. Wherever there are floor openings or cracks

in the flooring that cannot be closed, precautions shall be taken so that no readily combustible materials on the floor below will be exposed to sparks which might drop through the floor. The same precautions shall be observed with regard to cracks or holes in walls, open doorways and open or broken windows.


258

2.2.2 Fire extinguishers. Suitable fire extinguishing equipment shall be maintained in a state of readiness for instant use. Such equipment may consist of pails of water, buckets of sand, hose or portable extinguishers depending upon the nature and quantity of the combustible material exposed.

2.2.3 Fire watch. 2.2.3.1 Fire watchers shall be required whenever welding or cutting

is performed in locations where other than a minor fire might develop, or any of the following conditions exist:

2.2.3.1.1 Appreciable combustible material, in building

construction or contents, closer than 35 feet (10.7 m) to the point of operation.

2.2.3.1.2 Appreciable combustibles are more than 35 feet

(10.7 m) away but are easily ignited by sparks. 2.2.3.1.3 Wall or floor openings within a 35 foot (10.7 m)

radius expose combustible material in adjacent areas including concealed spaces in walls or floors.

2.2.3.1.4 Combustible materials are adjacent to the opposite

side of metal partitions, walls, ceilings, or roofs and are likely to be ignited by conduction or radiation.

2.2.3.2 Fire watchers shall have fire extinguishing

equipment readily available and be trained in its use. They shall be familiar with facilities for sounding an alarm in the event of a fire. They shall watch for fires in all exposed areas, try to extinguish them only when obviously within the capacity of the equipment available, or otherwise sound the alarm. A fire watch shall be maintained for at least a half hour after completion of welding or cutting operations to detect and extinguish possible smoldering fires.

2.2.4 Authorization. Before cutting or welding is permitted, the area shall

be inspected by the individual responsible for authorizing cutting and welding operations. He/she shall designate precautions to be followed in granting authorization to proceed preferably in the form of a written permit.

2.2.5 Floors. Where combustible materials such as paper clippings, wood

shavings, or textile fibers are on the floor, the floor shall be swept clean for a radius of 35 feet (10.7 m). Combustible floors shall be kept wet, covered


259

with damp sand, or protected by fire-resistant shields. Where floors have been wet down, personnel operating arc welding or cutting equipment shall be protected from possible shock.

2.2.6 Prohibited areas. Cutting or welding shall not be permitted in the

following situations: 2.2.6.1 In areas not authorized by management. 2.2.6.2 In sprinklered buildings while such protection is impaired. 2.2.6.3 In the presence of explosive atmospheres (mixtures of

flammable gases, vapors, liquids, or dusts with air), or explosive atmospheres that may develop inside uncleaned or improperly prepared tanks or equipment which have previously contained such materials, or that may develop in areas with an accumulation of combustible dusts.

2.2.6.4 In areas near the storage of large quantities of exposed,

readily ignitable materials such as bulk sulfur, baled paper, or cotton.

2.2.7 Relocation of combustibles. Where practicable, all combustibles

shall be relocated at least 35 feet (10.7 m) from the work site. Where relocation is impracticable, combustibles shall be protected with flameproofed covers or otherwise shielded with metal or asbestos guards or curtains.

2.2.8 Ducts. Ducts and conveyor systems that might carry sparks to

distant combustibles shall be suitably protected or shut down. 2.2.9 Combustible walls. Where cutting or welding is done near walls,

partitions, ceiling or roof of combustible construction, fire-resistant shields or guards shall be provided to prevent ignition.

2.2.10 Noncombustible walls. If welding is to be done on a metal wall,

partition, ceiling or roof, precautions shall be taken to prevent ignition of combustibles on the other side, due to conduction or radiation, preferably by relocating combustibles. Where combustibles are not relocated, a fire watch on the opposite side from the work shall be provided.

2.2.11 Combustible cover. Welding shall not be attempted on a metal

partition, wall, ceiling or roof having a combustible covering nor on walls or partitions of combustible sandwich-type panel construction.


260

2.2.12 Pipes. Cutting or welding on pipes or other metal in contact with combustible walls, partitions, ceilings or roofs shall not be undertaken if the work is close enough to cause ignition by conduction.

2.2.13 Management. Management shall recognize its responsibility for

the safe usage of cutting and welding equipment on its property and: 2.2.13.1 Based on fire potentials of plant facilities, establish areas

for cutting and welding, and establish procedures for cutting and welding, in other areas.

2.2.13.2 The authorized supervisor will be responsible for

authorizing cutting and welding operations in areas not specifically designed for such processes.

2.2.13.3 Ensure that cutters or welders and their supervisors are

suitably trained in the safe operation of their equipment and the safe use of the process.

2.2.13.4 Advise all contractors about flammable materials or

hazardous conditions of which they may not be aware. 2.2.14 Supervisor. The first line supervisor: 2.2.14.1 Shall be responsible for the safe handling of the cutting or

welding equipment and the safe use of the cutting or welding process. Workers in charge of oxygen or fuel-gas supply equipment (including distribution piping systems and generators) must be instructed and be competent for such work.

2.2.14.2 Shall determine the combustible materials and hazardous

areas present or likely to be present in the work location. 2.2.14.3 Shall protect combustibles from ignition by the following: 2.2.14.3.1 Have the work moved to a location free from

dangerous combustibles. 2.2.14.3.2 If the work cannot be moved, have the

combustibles moved to a safe distance from the work or have the combustibles properly shielded against ignition.

2.2.14.3.3 See that cutting and welding are so scheduled

that plant operations that might expose combustibles to ignition are not started during cutting or welding.


261

2.2.14.4 Shall secure authorization for the cutting or welding operations from the authorized supervisor.

2.2.14.5 Shall determine that the cutter or welder secures his

approval that conditions are safe before going ahead. 2.2.14.6 Shall determine that fire protection and extinguishing

equipment are properly located at the site. 2.2.14.7 Where fire watches are required, he/she shall see that

they are available at the site. 2.2.15 Fire prevention precautions. Cutting or welding shall be permitted

only in areas that are or have been made fire safe. When work cannot be moved practically, as in most construction work, the area shall be made safe by removing combustibles or protecting combustibles from ignition sources.

2.3 Welding or cutting containers. 2.3.1 Used containers. No welding, cutting, or other hot work shall be

performed on used drums, barrels, tanks or other containers until they have been cleaned so thoroughly as to make absolutely certain that there are no flammable materials present or any substances such as greases, tars, acids, or other materials which when subjected to heat, might produce flammable or toxic vapors. Any pipe lines or connections to the drum or vessel shall be disconnected or blanked.

2.3.2 Venting and purging. All hollow spaces, cavities or containers shall

be vented to permit the escape of air or gases before preheating, cutting or welding. Purging with inert gas is recommended.

2.4 Confined spaces. 2.4.1 Accidental contact. When arc welding is to be suspended for any

substantial period of time, such as during lunch or overnight, all electrodes shall be removed from the holders and the holders carefully located so that accidental contact cannot occur and the machine be disconnected from the power source.

2.4.2 Torch valve. In order to eliminate the possibility of gas escaping

through leaks or improperly closed valves, when gas welding or cutting, the torch valves shall be closed and the gas supply to the torch positively shut off at some point outside the confined area whenever the torch is not to be used for a substantial period of time, such as during lunch hour or


262

overnight. Where practicable, the torch and hose shall also be removed from the confined space.

3. Protection of personnel. 3.1 General 3.1.1 Railings. Employee's working on platforms, scaffolds, or runways

shall be protected against falling. This may be accomplished by the use of railings, safety belts, life lines, or some other equally effective safeguards.

3.1.2 Welding cables. Employees shall place welding cables and other

equipment so that it is clear of passageways, ladders, and stairways. 3.2 Eye protection. 3.2.1 Selection. 3.2.1.1 Helmets or hand shields shall be used during all arc

welding or arc cutting operations, excluding submerged arc welding. Helpers or attendants shall be provided with proper eye protection.

3.2.1.2 Goggles or other suitable eye protection shall be used

during all gas welding or oxygen cutting operations. Spectacles without side shields, with suitable filter lenses are permitted for use during gas welding operations on light work, for torch brazing or for inspection.

3.2.1.3 All operators and attendants of resistance welding or

resistance brazing equipment shall use transparent face shields or goggles, depending on the particular job, to protect their faces or eyes, as required.

3.2.1.4 Eye protection in the form of suitable goggles shall be

provided where needed for brazing operations. 3.2.2 Specifications for protectors. 3.2.2.1 Helmets and hand shields shall be made of a material

which is an insulator for heat and electricity. Helmets, shields and goggles shall be not readily flammable and shall be capable of withstanding sterilization.

3.2.2.2 Helmets and hand shields shall be arranged to protect the

face, neck and ears from direct radiant energy from the arc.


263

3.2.2.3 Helmets shall be provided with filter plates and cover plates

designed for easy removal. 3.2.2.4 All parts shall be constructed of a material which will not

readily corrode or discolor the skin. 3.2.2.5 Goggles shall be ventilated to prevent fogging of the lenses

as much as practicable. 3.2.2.6 All glass for lenses shall be tempered, substantially free

from striae, air bubbles, waves and other flaws. Except when a lens is ground to provide proper optical correction for defective vision, the front and rear surfaces of lenses and windows shall be smooth and parallel.

3.2.2.7 Lenses shall bear some permanent distinctive marking by

which the source and shade may be readily identified. 3.2.2.8 The following is a guide for the selection of the proper

shade numbers. These recommendations may be varied to suit the individual's needs.

Welding operation Shade No. Shielded metal-arc welding: 1/16-, 3/32-, 1/8-, 5/32-inch electrodes 10 Gas-shielded arc welding (nonferrous): 1/16-, 3/32-, 1/8-, 5/32-inch electrodes 11 Gas-shielded arc welding (ferrous) 1/16-, 3/32-, 1/8-, 5/32-inch electrodes 12 Shielded metal-arc welding: 3/16-, 7/32-, 1/4-inch electrodes 12 5/16-, 3/8-inch electrodes 14 Atomic hydrogen welding: 10-14 Carbon arc welding: 14 Soldering: 2 Torch brazing: 3 or 4 Light cutting, up to 1 inch: 3 or 4 Medium cutting, 1 inch to 6 inches: 4 or 5 Heavy cutting, 6 inches and over: 5 or 6 Gas welding (light) up to 1/8 inch: 4 or 5 Gas welding (medium) 1/8 inch to 1/2 inch: 5 or 6 Gas welding (heavy) 1/2 inch and over: 6 or 8


264

Note: In gas welding or oxygen cutting where the torch produces a high yellow light, it is desirable to use a filter or lens that absorbs the yellow or sodium line in the visible light of the operation. 3.2.2.8 All filter lenses and plates purchased by this company shall

meet the test for transmission of radiant energy prescribed in ANSI Z87.1--1968--American National Standard Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Protection.

3.2.3 Protection from arc welding rays. Where the work permits, the

welder should be enclosed in an individual booth painted with a finish of low reflectivity such as zinc oxide (an important factor for absorbing ultraviolet radiation) and lamp black, or shall be enclosed with noncombustible screens similarly painted. Booths and screens shall permit circulation of air at floor level. Workers or other persons adjacent to the welding areas shall be protected from the rays by noncombustible or flameproof screens or shields or shall be required to wear appropriate goggles.

3.3 Protective clothing. General requirements. Supervisors will ensure that

employees exposed to the hazards created by welding, cutting, or brazing operations be protected by personal protective equipment in accordance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.132 (Personal Protective Equipment, General Requirements). Appropriate protective clothing required for any welding operation will vary with the size, nature and location of the work to be performed.

3.4 Work in confined spaces. 3.4.1 General. As used herein confined space is intended to mean a

relatively small or restricted space such as a tank, boiler, pressure vessel, or small compartment of a ship.

3.4.2 Ventilation. Ventilation is a prerequisite to work in confined spaces.

The company confined space procedures will delineate ventilation requirements for specific operations where welding or cutting is required.

3.4.3 Securing cylinders and machinery. When welding or cutting is

being performed in any confined spaces the gas cylinders and welding machines shall be left on the outside. Before operations are started, heavy portable equipment mounted on wheels shall be securely blocked to prevent accidental movement.

3.4.4 Lifelines. Where a welder must enter a confined space through a

manhole or other small opening, means shall be provided for quickly removing him in case of emergency. When safety belts and lifelines are used for this purpose they shall be so attached to the welder's body that


265

his body cannot be jammed in a small exit opening. An attendant with a preplanned rescue procedure (see company confined space procedures) shall be stationed outside to observe the welder at all times and be capable of putting rescue operations into effect.

3.4.5 Electrode removal. When arc welding is to be suspended for any

substantial period of time, such as during lunch or overnight, all electrodes shall be removed from the holders and the holders carefully located so that accidental contact cannot occur and the machine disconnected from the power source.

3.4.6 Gas cylinder shutoff. In order to eliminate the possibility of gas

escaping through leaks of improperly closed valves, when gas welding or cutting, the torch valves shall be closed and the fuel-gas and oxygen supply to the torch positively shut off at some point outside the confined area whenever the torch is not to be used for a substantial period of time, such as during lunch hour or overnight. Where practicable the torch and hose shall also be removed from the confined space.

3.4.7 Warning signs. After welding operations are completed, the welder

shall mark the hot metal or provide some other means of warning other workers.

4. Health protection and ventilation. 4.1 General 4.1.1 Contamination. The requirements for contamination control have

been established on the basis of the following three factors in arc and gas welding which govern the amount of contamination to which welders may be exposed:

4.1.1.1 Dimensions of space in which welding is to be done (with

special regard to height of ceiling). 4.1.1.2 Number of welders. 4.1.1.3 Possible evolution of hazardous fumes, gases, or dust

according to the metals involved. 4.1.2 Screens. When welding must be performed in a space entirely

screened on all sides, the screens shall be so arranged that no serious restriction of ventilation exists. It is desirable to have the screens so mounted that they are about 2 feet (0.61 m) above the floor unless the work is performed at so low a level that the screen must be extended nearer to the floor to protect nearby workers from the glare of welding.


266

4.1.3 Maximum allowable concentration. Local exhaust or general

ventilating systems shall be provided and arranged to keep the amount of toxic fumes, gases, or dusts below the maximum allowable concentration as specified in 29 CFR 1910.1000 (Toxic and Hazardous Substances.

4.1.4 Precautionary labels. A number of potentially hazardous materials

are employed in fluxes, coatings, coverings, and filler metals used in welding and cutting or are released to the atmosphere during welding and cutting. Supervisors will ensure employees under their control are familiar with the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) applicable to the welding materials they are using.

4.2 Ventilation for general welding and cutting. 4.2.1 General. Mechanical ventilation shall be provided when welding or

cutting is done on metals other than the following: Fluorine compounds, Zinc, Lead, Beryllium, Cadmium, Mercury, and stainless steels.

4.2.1.1 In a space of less than 10,000 cubic feet (284 m3) per

welder. 4.2.1.2 In a room having a ceiling height of less than 16 feet (5 m). 4.2.1.3 In confined spaces or where the welding space contains

partitions, balconies, or other structural barriers to the extent that they significantly obstruct cross ventilation.

4.2.2 Minimum rate. Such ventilation shall be at the minimum rate of

2,000 cubic feet (57 m3) per minute per welder, except where local exhaust hoods and booths provide an equivalent or better rate, or airline respirators approved by the Mine Safety and Health Administration and the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, pursuant to the provisions of 30 CFR part 11, are provided. Natural ventilation is considered sufficient for welding or cutting operations where the following restrictions are not present.

4.2.2.1 In a space of less than 10,000 cubic feet (284 m3) per

welder. 4.2.2.2 In a room having a ceiling height of less than 16 feet (5 m). 4.2.2.3 In confined spaces or where the welding space contains

partitions, balconies, or other structural barriers to the extent that they significantly obstruct cross ventilation.


267

4.3 Local exhaust hoods and booths. Mechanical local exhaust ventilation may be by means of either of the following: 4.3.1 Hoods. Freely movable hoods intended to be placed by the welder

as near as practicable to the work being welded and provided with a rate of air-flow sufficient to maintain a velocity in the direction of the hood of 100 linear feet (30 m) per minute in the zone of welding when the hood is at its most remote distance from the point of welding. The rates of ventilation required to accomplish this control velocity using a 3 inch (7.6 cm) wide flanged suction opening are shown in the following table:

Minimum air Duct Welding zone flow *(1) diameter, cubic feet/ inches minute *(2) 4 to 6 inches from arc or torch 150 3 6 to 8 inches from arc or torch 275 3 1/2 8 to 10 inches from arc or torch 425 4 1/2 10 to 12 inches from arc or torch 600 5 1/2 {Footnote}*(1) When brazing with cadmium bearing materials or when cutting on such materials increased rates of ventilation may be required. {Footnote}*(2) Nearest half-inch duct diameter based on 4,000 feet per minute velocity in pipe. 4.3.2 Fixed enclosure. A fixed enclosure with a top and not less than two

sides which surround the welding or cutting operations and with a rate of airflow sufficient to maintain a velocity away from the welder of not less than 100 linear feet (30 m) per minute.

4.4 Ventilation in confined spaces. 4.4.1 Air replacement. All welding and cutting operations carried on in

confined spaces shall be adequately ventilated to prevent the accumulation of toxic materials or possible oxygen deficiency. This applies not only to the welder but also to helpers and other personnel in the immediate vicinity. All replacement air shall be clean and respirable.

4.4.2 Airline respirators. In such circumstances where it is impossible to

provide such ventilation, airline respirators or hose masks approved by the Mine Safety and Health Administration and the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, shall be used.


268

4.4.3 Self-contained units. In areas immediately dangerous to life and health (IDLH), hose masks with blowers or self-contained breathing equipment shall be used. The breathing equipment shall be approved by the Mine Safety and Health Administration and the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health.

4.4.4 Outside helper. Where company welding operations are carried on

in confined spaces and where welders and helpers are provided with hose masks, hose masks with blowers, or self-contained breathing equipment approved by the Mine Safety and Health Administration and the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, a worker shall be stationed on the outside of such confined spaces to insure the safety of those working within. This will done in accordance with the company confined space standard practice instructions.

4.4.5 Oxygen for ventilation. Because of its flammable properties,

Oxygen shall never be used for ventilation. 4.5 Fluorine compounds. 4.5.1 General. In confined spaces, welding or cutting involving fluxes,

coverings, or other materials which contain fluorine compounds shall be done in accordance with the safety precautions and work practices delineated on the MSDS. A fluorine compound is one that contains fluorine, as an element in chemical combination, not as a free gas.

4.5.2 Maximum allowable concentration. The need for local exhaust

ventilation or airline respirators for welding or cutting in other than confined spaces will depend upon the individual circumstances. However, experience has shown such protection to be desirable for fixed-location production welding and for all production welding on stainless steels. Where air samples taken at the welding location indicate that the fluorides liberated are below the maximum allowable concentration, such protection is not necessary.

4.6 Zinc. 4.6.1 Confined spaces. In confined spaces welding or cutting involving

zinc-bearing base or filler metals or metals coated with zinc-bearing materials shall be done in accordance with the "Ventilation in confined space" section of this SPI.

4.6.2 Indoors. Indoor welding or cutting involving zinc-bearing base or

filler metals coated with zinc-bearing materials shall be done in accordance with the "Local exhaust hoods and booths" section of this SPI.


269

4.7 Lead. 4.7.1 Confined spaces. In confined spaces, welding involving lead-base

metals (erroneously called lead-burning) shall be done in accordance with the "Ventilation in confined space" section of this SPI.

4.7.2 Indoors. Indoors, welding involving lead-base metals shall be done

in accordance with the "Local exhaust hoods and booths" section of this SPI.

4.7.3 Local ventilation. In confined spaces or indoors, welding or cutting

involving metals containing lead, other than as an impurity, or involving metals coated with lead-bearing materials, including paint shall be done using local exhaust ventilation or airline respirators. Outdoors such operations shall be done using respiratory protective equipment approved by the Mine Safety and Health Administration and the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health. In all cases, workers in the immediate vicinity of the cutting operation shall be protected as necessary by local exhaust ventilation or airline respirators.

4.8 Beryllium. Welding or cutting indoors, outdoors, or in confined spaces

involving beryllium-containing base or filler metals shall be done using local exhaust ventilation and airline respirators unless atmospheric tests under the most adverse conditions have established that the workers' exposure is within the acceptable concentrations defined by 29 CFR 1910.1000. In all cases, workers in the immediate vicinity of the welding or cutting operations shall be protected as necessary by local exhaust ventilation or airline respirators.

4.9 Cadmium. 4.9.1 General. Welding or cutting indoors or in confined spaces involving

cadmium-bearing or cadmium-coated base metals shall be done using local exhaust ventilation or airline respirators unless atmospheric tests under the most adverse conditions have established that the workers' exposure is within the acceptable concentrations defined by 29 CFR 1910.1000. Outdoors such operations shall be done using respiratory protective equipment such as fume respirators approved by the Mine Safety and Health Administration and the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health.

4.9.2 Confined space. Welding (brazing) involving cadmium-bearing filler

metals shall be done using ventilation in accordance with the "Ventilation in confined space" and the "Local exhaust hoods and booths" section of this SPI.


270

4.10 Mercury. Welding or cutting indoors or in a confined space involving metals coated with mercury-bearing materials including paint, shall be done using local exhaust ventilation or airline respirators unless atmospheric tests under the most adverse conditions have established that the workers' exposure is within the acceptable concentrations defined by 29 CFR 1910.1000. Outdoors such operations shall be done using respiratory protective equipment approved by the Mine Safety and Health Administration and the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health.

4.11 Cleaning compounds. 4.11.1 Manufacturer's instructions. In the use of cleaning materials,

because of their possible toxicity or flammability, appropriate precautions such as manufacturers instructions shall be followed.

4.11.2 Degreasing. Degreasing and other cleaning operations involving

chlorinated hydrocarbons shall be so located that no vapors from these operations will reach or be drawn into the atmosphere surrounding any welding operation. In addition, trichloroethylene and perchlorethylene should be kept out of atmospheres penetrated by the ultraviolet radiation of gas-shielded welding operations.

4.12 Cutting of stainless steels. Oxygen cutting, using either a chemical flux or

iron powder or gas-shielded arc cutting of stainless steel, shall be done using mechanical ventilation adequate to remove the fumes generated.

4.13 First-aid equipment. First-aid equipment shall be available at all times. All

injuries shall be reported to a supervisor in accordance with safety plan as soon as possible for medical attention. First aid shall be rendered until medical attention can be provided.

5. Industrial applications. 5.1 Transmission pipeline. 5.1.1 General. The requirements of the "Protection of personnel" and the

"Health protection and ventilation" sections of this SPI shall be observed. 5.1.2 Field shop operations. Where field shop operations are involved for

fabrication of fittings, river crossings, road crossings, and pumping and compressor stations the requirements of the "Fire prevention and protection", "Protection of personnel" and the "Health protection and ventilation" sections of this SPI shall be observed.


271

5.1.3 Electric shock. When arc welding is performed in wet conditions, or under conditions of high humidity, special protection against electric shock shall be supplied.

5.1.4 Pressure testing. In pressure testing of pipelines, the workers and

the public shall be protected against injury by the blowing out of closures or other pressure restraining devices. Also, protection shall be provided against expulsion of loose dirt that may have become trapped in the pipe.

5.1.5 Construction standards. The welded construction of transmission

pipelines shall be conducted in accordance with the Standard for Welding Pipe Lines and Related Facilities, API Std. 1104--1968.

5.1.6 Flammable substance lines. The connection, by welding, of

branches to pipelines carrying flammable substances shall be performed in accordance with Welding or Hot Tapping on Equipment Containing Flammables, API Std. PSD No. 2201--1963.

5.1.7 X-ray inspection. The use of X-rays and radioactive isotopes for the

inspection of welded pipeline joints shall be carried out in conformance with the American National Standard Safety Standard for Non-Medical X-ray and Sealed Gamma-Ray Sources, ANSI Z54.1--1963.

5.2 Mechanical piping systems 5.2.1 General. The requirements of the "Fire prevention and protection",

"Protection of personnel" and the "Health protection and ventilation" sections of this SPI shall be observed.

5.2.2 X-ray inspection. The use of X-rays and radioactive isotopes for the

inspection of welded piping joints shall be in conformance with the American National Standard Safety Standard for Non-Medical X-ray and Sealed Gamma-Ray Sources, ANSI Z54.1--1963.

6. Training. 6.1 Types of training. Supervisors will determine whether training required for

specific jobs will be conducted in a classroom or on-the-job. The degree of training provided shall be determined by the complexity of the welding, brazing, or cutting requirements of the individual job and the associated hazards.

6.1.1 Initial Training. Prior to job assignment, this employer shall provide

training to ensure that the hazards associated with welding, brazing, and cutting operations are understood by employees and that the knowledge and skills required for the safe application, usage, of work place equipment, are acquired by employees. Employees assigned to operate


272

arc welding equipment must first be properly instructed and qualified to operate such equipment. The training shall include the following in accordance with 1910.254 1910.252 (a)(b) & (c):


recognition of applicable hazards involved with particular job. The methods and means necessary for safe work.

6.1.1.2 Each affected employee shall be instructed in the purpose

and use of confined space entry procedures (where required). 6.1.1.3 All other employees whose work operations are or may be

in an area where welding, brazing, or cutting is to be performed, shall be instructed about the procedure, and about the prohibitions relating to working in that area.

6.1.1.4 Operators of equipment should report any equipment

defect or safety hazards and discontinue use of equipment until its safety has been assured. Repairs shall be made only by qualified personnel.

6.1.2 Refresher Training. Scheduled refresher training will be conducted

on an anual basis. 6.1.2.1 Retraining shall be provided for all authorized and affected

employees whenever there is a change in their job assignments, a change in welding equipment, equipment or processes that present a new hazard, when their work takes them into hazardous areas, or when there is a change in the confined space entry procedures (when used).

6.1.2.2 Additional retraining shall also be conducted whenever a

periodic inspection reveals, or whenever this employer has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge of known hazards, or use of equipment or procedures.

6.1.2.3 The retraining shall reestablish employee proficiency and

introduce new equipment, or revised control methods and procedures, as necessary.

6.1.3 Certification. This employer shall certify that employee training has

been accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification shall contain a synopsis of the training conducted, each employee's name, and dates of training.


273

7. Selection and use of work practices. Supervisors shall develop and ensure use of standardized safety-related work practices to prevent injuries resulting from hot-work accidents. The specific safety-related work practices shall be consistent with the nature and extent of the associated hot-work hazards. 8. Definitions. Welder and welding operator mean, any operator of electric or gas welding and cutting equipment. Approved means, listed or approved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. Refer to 29 CFR 1910.155 for definitions of listed and approved, and 29 CFR 1910.7 for nationally recognized testing laboratory. All other welding terms are used in accordance with American Welding Society.


DATE: FEBRUARY 27, 2009 SUBJECT: Occupational Exposure to Chromium VI REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA – Industrial: 29 CFR 1910.1026 BASIS: Chromium VI is an extremely toxic metal commonly found in industrial workplaces, particularly where any ore is being processed or smelted. Chromium VI exposure can occur in a variety of sources in certain industrial environments. The respiratory tract is the major target organ for acute (short-term) and chronic (long-term) inhalation exposures. Shortness of breath, coughing, and wheezing are some of the symptoms reported in cases of acute exposure to chromium VI, while perforations and ulcerations of the septum, bronchitis, decreased pulmonary function, pneumonia, and other respiratory effects have been connected with chronic exposure. Human studies have clearly established that inhaled chromium VI is a human carcinogen, possibly resulting in an increased risk of lung cancer. Chromium compounds are used for chrome plating, the manufacture of dyes and pigments, leather and wood preservation, and treatment of cooling tower water. Smaller amounts are used in drilling muds, textiles, and toner for copying machines. This poses a serious problem for exposed workers and their employer. This standard practice instruction establishes uniform requirements to ensure that procedures within H3O, Inc. to limit the spread of such hazards are implemented, evaluated, and that the proper hazard information is transmitted to all affected workers.


274

Contents of the Chromium VI Safety Program 1. Written Program Requirements. 2. General Requirements. 3. Exposure Monitoring. 4. Medical Surveillance. 5. Note To Employees

H3O, INC. Chromium VI Safety Program 1. Written Program Requirements.

1.1 Written Program Review. H3O, INC. will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction in accordance with the following:

1.1.1 On an annual basis. 1.1.2 When changes occur to governing regulatory sources that require revision. 1.1.3 When changes occur to related company procedures that require a revision. 1.1.4 When facility operational changes occur that require a revision. 1.1.5 When there is an accident or close-call that relates to this area of safety. 1.1.6 Anytime the procedures fail.

2. General Requirements. OSHA guidelines require that each employer who has employee(s) with potential occupational exposure to chromium VI prepare an exposure determination. This exposure determination shall contain the following:

2.1 A list of job classifications for all employees whose job classifications have occupational exposure.


275

3. Exposure Monitoring. Jobs or areas having the potential for employee exposure to chromium VI at or above the action levels identified in 29CFR1910.1026 will be sampled to ensure no employee is exposed to hazardous levels of chromium VI. Sampling will be done in accordance with the provisions of 29CFR1910.1026. This employer shall use a method of monitoring and analysis that can measure chromium VI to within an accuracy of plus or minus 25 percent (+/- 25%) (or in accordance with stricter monitoring techniques recommended by a competent person) and can produce accurate measurements to within a statistical confidence level of at least 95 percent for airborne concentrations at or above the action level.

3.1 Exposure Limits – Action Level (AL). 2.5 ug/m3 (two and on half micrograms per cubic meter of air calculated as an 8-hour time-weighted average) , the AL is the exposure level at which OSHA regulations take effect and the lower limit where an occupational health risk could occur. The AL is generally one-half of the PEL. 3.2 Permissible Exposure Limits (PEL). 5 ug/m3 (five micrograms per cubic meter of air) (TWA) calculated as an 8-hour time-weighted average (TWA).

4. Medical Surveillance. The medical surveillance provisions of this standard practice instruction are intended to provide our employees with a comprehensive approach to prevention of chromium VI-related disease. The primary purpose is to supplement the OSHA standard's primary mechanisms of disease and illness prevention, the elimination or reduction of airborne concentrations of chromium VI and sources of ingestion, by facilitating the early detection of medical effects associated with exposure to chromium VI. 5. Note To Employees: The medical surveillance section of 29CFR.1910.1026 is quite extensive. In the interest maintaining a concise, practical document for use by all employees and not duplicating large amounts of the regulation, it is not detailed in its entirety below. Employees interested in reading the section can reference the Regulation. A copy of the Regulation may be obtained on-line at www.orosha.org.


DATE: June 10, 2009 SUBJECT: Ladder Safety Program. REGULATORY STANDARD: 29 CFR 1910.25 Portable Wood Ladders. 29 CFR 1910.26 Portable Metal Ladders.

http://www.orosha.org/


276

BASIS: Ladders are a major source of injuries and fatalities. OSHA estimates that there are approximately 25,000 injuries and as many as 35 fatalities each year due to falls from stairways and ladders. Most of these accidents can be prevented if proper safety precautions are initiated. This poses a serious problem for exposed workers and their employer. The OSHA Standards governing Stairs and Ladders establish uniform requirements to ensure that the hazards existing in U.S. workplaces are evaluated, safety procedures implemented, and that the proper hazard information is transmitted to all affected workers. GENERAL: H3O Inc. will ensure that all potential hazards regarding ladders within our facility or job sites are evaluated. This standard practice instruction is intended to address comprehensively the issues of; evaluating and identifying potential deficiencies, evaluating the associated potential hazards, communicating information concerning these hazards, and establishing appropriate procedures, and protective measures for employees.

Contents

H3O Inc. Ladders Safety Program (Industrial) 1. Written Program. 2. General Requirements. 3. Fiberglass/Wooden Ladders Safety Policy. 4. Portable Fiberglass/Wooden Ladders. 5. Metal Ladders Safety Policy. 6. Portable Metal Ladders. 7. Procurement and Disposal of Ladders.

H3O Inc. Ladders Safety Program 1. Written Program. H3O Inc. will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction on an annual basis, or when changes occur to the governing regulatory standards, that prompt revision of this document, or when facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document. Effective implementation requires a written program for job safety and health, that is endorsed and advocated by the highest level of management within this company and that outlines our goals and plans. This written program will be communicated to all required personnel. It is designed to establish clear goals, and objectives. 2. General Requirements. All facilities and equipment owned by this company will be maintained in a safe and healthful manner. Certain work conditions may contain a


277

reasonable probability of injury that can be prevented by proper maintenance and supervision. H3O Inc. will do all possible to ensure the safety of our employees. No employee will knowingly be subjected to a hazardous condition without all possible protective measures first being implemented. 3. Fiberglass/Wooden Ladders Safety Policy. To insure safety and serviceability the following precautions concerning the care and use of fiberglass/wooden ladders will be observed: 3.1 Care, fiberglass/wooden ladders. The following safety precautions will be

observed in connection with the care of fiberglass/wooden ladders: 3.1.1 Ladders will be maintained in good condition at all times, the joint

between the steps and side rails will be tight, all hardware and fittings securely attached, and the movable parts will operate freely without binding or undue play.

3.1.2 Metal bearings of locks, wheels, pulleys, etc., will be frequently

lubricated. 3.1.3 Frayed or badly worn rope will be replaced. 3.1.4 Safety feet and other auxiliary equipment will be kept in good

condition to insure proper performance. 3.1.5 Ladders will be inspected frequently and those which have

developed defects will be withdrawn from service for repair or destruction and tagged or marked as "Dangerous, Do Not Use."

3.1.6 Rungs should be kept free of grease and oil. 3.2 Use. The following safety precautions will be observed in connection with

the use of fiberglass/wooden ladders: 3.2.1 Portable rung and cleat ladders will, where possible, be used at

such a pitch that the horizontal distance from the top support to the foot of the ladder is one-quarter of the working length of the ladder (the length along the ladder between the foot and the top support). The ladder will be so placed as to prevent slipping, or it will be lashed, or held in position. Ladders will not be used in a horizontal position as platforms, runways, or scaffolds.

3.2.2 Ladders for which dimensions are specified should not be used by

more than one person at a time nor with ladder jacks and scaffold planks where use by more than one person is anticipated. In such cases,


278

specially designed ladders with larger dimensions of the parts should be procured.

3.2.3 Portable ladders will be so placed that the side rails have a secure

footing. The top rest for portable rung and cleat ladders will be reasonably rigid and will have ample strength to support the applied load.

3.2.4 Ladders will not be placed in front of doors opening toward the

ladder unless the door is blocked, locked, or guarded. 3.2.5 Ladders will not be placed on boxes, barrels, or other unstable

bases to obtain additional height. 3.2.6 Ladders with broken or missing steps, rungs, or cleats, broken side

rails, or other faulty equipment will not be used, ladders having any of these conditions present will be destroyed and disposed of. Improvised repairs will not be made.

3.2.7 Short ladders will not be spliced together to provide long sections. 3.2.8 Ladders made by fastening cleats across a single rail will not be

used. 3.2.9 Ladders will not be used as guys, braces, or skids, or for other than

their intended purposes. 3.2.10 Tops of ordinary stepladders will not be used as steps. 3.2.11 On two-section extension ladders the minimum overlap for the two

sections in use will be as follows:

Size Of Ladder (Feet) Overlap (Feet) Up to and including 36 3 Over 36 up to and including 48 4 Over 48 up to and including 60 5

3.2.12 Portable rung ladders with reinforced rails will only be used with

the metal reinforcement on the under side. 3.2.13 No ladder should be used to gain access to a roof or elevated work

area unless the top of the ladder is extended at least 3 feet above the point of support.

3.2.14 All portable rung ladders will be equipped with nonslip bases when

there is a hazard of slipping. Nonslip bases are not intended as a


279

substitute for care in safely placing, lashing, or holding a ladder that is being used upon oily, metal, concrete, or slippery surfaces.

3.2.15 The bracing on the back legs of step ladders is designed solely for

increasing stability and not for climbing. 4. Portable Fiberglass/Wooden Ladders. In order to insure safety under normal conditions of usage, this company will purchase and maintain portable fiberglass/wooden ladders that conform the following minimum requirements for the construction, care, and use of common types of portable fiberglass/wooden ladders. 4.1 General requirements. 4.1.1 Materials. All fiberglass/wooden parts will be maintained free from

sharp edges and splinters; sound and free from accepted visual inspection from shake, wane, compression failures, decay, or other irregularities.

4.1.2 Step spacing. Must not be more than 12 inches. Steps will be

parallel and level when the ladder is in position for use to conform with OSHA specifications.

4.1.3 Side rail width. The minimum width between side rails at the top,

inside to inside, must not be less than 11 1/2 inches. From top to bottom, the side rails must spread at least 1 inch for each foot of length of stepladder.

4.1.4 Metal spreaders/locking devices. A metal spreader or locking

device of sufficient size and strength to securely hold the front and back sections in open positions must be properly maintained for each stepladder. The spreader must have all sharp points covered or removed to protect the user.

4.2 Portable stepladders. Stepladders longer than 20 feet will not be used by

this company. Stepladders of one of the following types specified will be used: 4.2.1 Type I--Industrial stepladder, 3 to 20 feet for heavy duty, such as

utilities, contractors, and industrial use. 4.2.2 Type II--Commercial stepladder, 3 to 12 feet for medium duty, such

as painters, offices, and light industrial use. 4.2.3 Type III--Household stepladder, 3 to 6 feet for light duty, such as

light household use. 4.3 Portable rung ladders.


280

4.3.1 Single ladder. Single ladders longer than 30 feet will not be used by this company.

4.3.2 Two-section ladder. Two-section extension ladders longer than 60

feet will not be used by this company. 4.3.3 Trestle and extension trestle ladder. Trestle ladders, or extension

sections or base sections of extension trestle ladders longer than 20 feet will not be used.

4.4 Special-purpose ladders. 4.4.1 Painter's stepladder. Painter's stepladders longer than 12 feet will

not be used. 4.4.2 Mason's ladder. A mason's ladder is defined as a special type of

single ladder intended for use in heavy construction work. Mason's ladders longer than 40 feet will not be used.

5. Metal Ladders Safety Policy. To insure safety and serviceability the following precautions concerning the care and use of metal ladders will be observed: NOTE: ELECTRICAL WORK IS NEVER PERMITTED WITH THE USE OF A METAL LADDER. THERE ARE NO EXCEPTIONS TO THIS POLICY. 5.1 Care and selection of metal ladders. The following safety precautions will be

observed in connection with the care of metal ladders: 5.1.1 Selection. Metal ladders selected for use will never under any

circumstances be used in proximity to electrically energized sources. There are no exceptions to this policy.

5.1.2 Ladders must be maintained in good usable condition at all times. 5.1.3 If a ladder is involved in any of the following, immediate inspection

is necessary: 5.1.3.1 If ladders tip over, inspect ladder for side rails dents or

bends, or excessively dented rungs; check all rung-to-side-rail connections; check hardware connections; check rivets for shear.

5.1.3.2 If ladders are exposed to oil and grease, equipment

should be cleaned of oil, grease, or slippery materials. This can easily be done with a solvent or steam cleaning.


281

5.1.4 Ladders having defects are to be marked and taken out of service until repaired by either maintenance department or the manufacturer.

5.2 Use, metal ladders. The following safety precautions will be observed in

connection with the use care of metal ladders: 5.2.1 A simple rule for setting up a ladder at the proper angle is to place

the base a distance from the vertical wall equal to one-fourth the working length of the ladder.

5.2.2 Portable ladders are designed as a one-man working ladder based

on a 200-pound load. 5.2.3 The ladder base section must be placed with a secure footing. 5.2.4 The top of the ladder must be placed with the two rails supported,

unless equipped with a single support attachment. 5.2.5 When ascending or descending, the climber must face the ladder. 5.2.6 Ladders must not be tied or fastened together to provide longer

sections. They must be equipped with the hardware fittings necessary if the manufacturer endorses extended uses.

5.2.7 Ladders should not be used as a brace, skid, guy or gin pole,

gangway, or for other uses than that for which they were intended, unless specifically recommended for use by the manufacturer.

5.2.8 Metal ladders will not be used when work is performed on or near

electric circuits. See 29 CFR 1910.333. 5.2.9 No new metal ladders will be purchased. All metal ladders removed

from service for any reason will be replaced with fiberglass ladders. 6. Portable Metal Ladders. 6.1 General requirements. This company will purchase only ladders without

structural defects or potential accident hazards such as sharp edges, burrs, etc. This company will purchase ladders meeting industrial grade specifications. Homemade or in-house constructed ladders will not be used by this company.

7. Procurement and Disposal of Ladders. All procurement and disposal of ladders will be performed through or with the knowledge of a competent person. Ladders will be destroyed beyond use prior to disposal to prevent further use by anyone. Procurement of ladders will be accomplished based on the type of work anticipated to be performed


282

and in accordance with this Standard Practice Instruction and applicable OSHA Regulations.

All ladders must be equipped with safety (non-skid) feet.


283

Portable ladders must be used at such a pitch that the horizontal distance from the top

support to the foot of the ladder is about one-quarter of the working length of the ladder.


284

Lead Policy

1. Do not touch or disturb any materials that may contain lead.

2. If work has to be performed in an area suspected to have materials

containing lead, a supervisor will inform you and you will be required to

follow these safety precautions:

A. Do not eat, chew gum, or drink in work area. i.e.

(Smoking or chewing tobacco included.)

B. Wear proper P.P.E., gloves, eye protection at all

times.

3. If a job requires removal or disturbance of lead, or if

airborne lead is suspected, H3O will depart the area

immediately and not perform these activities. The local

project manager will arrange for a qualified abatement

contractor to remove the hazard per WAC 296-155-176.

4. Employees will receive annual training in lead awareness

per WAC 296-155-176 section 13.

Jared Hunter

VP/Safety Coordinator


285


DATE: FEBRUARY 27, 2009 SUBJECT: Personal Protective Equipment/Job Hazard Analysis Program REGULATORY STANDARD: 29 CFR §1910.132-138/CFR §1926.95. BASIS: Injuries in the workplace often occur because employees are not adequately trained in the proper job procedure. Establishing proper job procedures is accomplished by conducting a job hazard analysis. Improving how work is performed reduces injuries, improves absenteeism rates promotes a an increase in productivity. Job hazards pose a serious problem for exposed workers and their Employer. This standard practice instruction establishes uniform requirements to ensure that job hazards are evaluated, controls and procedures are implemented, and that the proper hazard information is transmitted to all affected workers. GENERAL: H3O, Inc. will ensure that jobs having a potential for employee injury within our facility(s) are evaluated and controlled. This standard practice instruction is intended to address comprehensively the issues of; evaluating and identifying potential job hazards, work practices, training, and establishing appropriate procedures and personal protective equipment.

Contents of Personal Protective Equipment Program

1. Written Program. 2. General Requirements. 3. OSHA Standard Applicability. 4. Selection of Jobs for Hazard Analysis. 5. Pre-Survey for Job Hazard Analysis. 6. Job Hazard Analysis. 7. Training and Education. 8. Personal Protective Equipment Selection. 9. Tool Selection, Evaluation and Condition. 10. Hazard Prevention and Control. 11. Employee Notification.


286

H3O, Inc. Personal Protective Equipment Program 1. Written Program. The Company will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction on an annual basis, or when changes occur that prompt revision of this document, or when facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document. Effective implementation requires a written program for job safety that is endorsed and advocated by the highest level of management within H3O, Inc. and that outlines our goals and plans. This written program will be communicated to all personnel. It encompasses the total workplace, regardless of number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals, and objectives. 2. General Requirements. Once trained, first line supervisors will be responsible for job hazard analysis. The supervisor controls the work environment. The Company will establish personal protective equipment (PPE) requirements, job hazard analysis procedures, and improve operational procedures through the use of this document. Preventing workplace injuries in our Company is the principle purpose of job hazard analysis. This document will provide a basis for studying and recording each step of a job, identifying existing or potential job hazards (both safety and health), determining PPE requirements and establishing the best way to perform the job to reduce or eliminate these hazards. 2.1 H3O, Inc. shall ensure that our employees understand and comply with the restrictions and prohibitions of the Host employer's Policies and Procedures. 3. OSHA Standard Applicability. Specific standards issued by OSHA will be consulted as part of the overall job hazard analysis. When OSHA standards apply to a specific job, these standards will be incorporated into the hazard analysis to ensure that the requirements of the standard and hazard analysis are combined to create as optimally safe job conditions as is possible. 4. Selection of Jobs for Hazard Analysis. H3O, Inc. will identify through the use of medical management records, injury statistics, and screening surveys, jobs that place employees at risk. After this analysis has been completed, a job hazard analysis for each job so identified will be conducted. Job hazard analyses will be routinely performed by a qualified person(s) for jobs that put workers at risk. This analysis will identify risk factors at jobs, establish a system to measure if risk factors have been reduced or eliminated to the maximum extent feasible, and recommend PPE. 4.1 The Safety Officer is responsible to perform job hazard analysis and PPE

surveys for H3O, Inc. when individual supervisors do not have a sufficient level of training. Supervisors will conduct the training once trained.

4.2 High risk jobs. Once the hazard analysis has been completed H3O, Inc. will

compile a list of high risk jobs. Jobs will be analyzed to determine the following:


287

4.2.1 Procedural hazards of each job. 4.2.2 Physical hazards of each job. 4.2.3 Environmental hazards of each job. 5. Pre-Survey for Job Hazard Analysis. Prior to beginning a job hazard analysis the following pre-survey will be conducted to evaluate the general conditions under which the job is performed. 5.1 Are there tripping hazards in the job vicinity? 5.2 Is the lighting adequate for work conditions? 5.3 Are there explosive hazards associated with the job? 5.4 Are there electrical hazards associated with the job? 5.5 Are tools associated with the job in good condition? 5.6 Is the noise level excessive (below 85db TWA)? 5.7 Is communication hampered because of excessive noise? 5.8 Is the vibration level excessive, leading to numbness? 5.9 Is fire protection equipment readily available? 5.10 Have employees received fire training? 5.11 Are emergency exits properly marked and accessible? 5.12 Are employees wearing proper protective equipment? 5.13 Are trucks/motorized vehicles properly equipped? 5.14 Have employees received training in the use of trucks? 5.15 Have industrial hygiene complaints been received? 5.16 Does the job involve confined spaces? 5.17 Does the job involve lock-out tag-out? 5.18 Do employees know emergency response procedures?


288

5.19 Does the job isolate workers from other co-workers? 5.20 How often does the supervisor visit the job location? 5.21 What is the maximum amount of time a worker is alone? 5.22 Do employees know the evacuation relocation point? 5.23 What atmospheric testing has been performed? 5.24 What atmospheric contaminants are present? 5.25 Will jewelry or clothing get caught in machinery? 5.26 Can the worker get caught between moving parts? 5.27 Can the worker fall from one level to another? 5.28 Can anything fall on the worker from above? 5.29 Is the worker in an off-balance position at any time? 5.30 Is the standing surface clean to maintain stability? 5.31 Are the environmental conditions (heat/cold) adequate? 5.32 Do possible eye/face injury conditions exist? 5.33 Do possible head injury conditions exist? 5.34 Do possible foot injury conditions exist? 5.35 Do possible hand injury conditions exist? 5.39 Lifting Hazards. Work stations having tasks requiring manual materials

handling will have the maximum weight-lifting values calculated. (The NIOSH Work Practices Guide for Manual Lifting, 1981 (or most recent edition), should be used for basic calculations. Note that this guide does not address lifting that involves twisting or turning motions.)

6. Job Hazard Analysis. Once trained, supervisors will be responsible for job hazard analysis. Once the pre-survey has been conducted this information will be used to reduce general hazards in the work area. After the general hazards in the work area have been reduced to the lowest appropriate level. The following procedures for job hazard analysis will be followed:


289

6.1 Supervisor involvement. The procedure will be discussed with the

employee's supervisor to explain its purpose. Ensure the supervisor understands that the job is being analyzed, not the employee's job performance. This will also serve as training for the supervisor. First line supervisors will be versed in the procedures used for job hazard analysis. Once trained, supervisors will be required to conduct future job hazard analyses for H3O, Inc..

6.2 Employee involvement. Discuss the procedure with the employee

performing the job to explain its purpose. Ensure the employee understands that the job is being analyzed, not the employee's job performance. Their input to procedural changes is critical.

6.3 Hazard analysis. Record the steps required to accomplish the job on the job

hazard task analysis form. If the job is complex, it should be broken down into detailed segments. Each step will be reviewed in the order of occurrence as the employee is observed performing the job. Each segment will be reviewed in proper sequence.

6.4 Videotape hazard analysis method. The use of videotape, where feasible,

will be used as a method for analysis of the work process. Slow-motion videotape or equivalent visual records of workers performing their routine job tasks will be used where practical to determine the demands of the task on the worker and how each worker actually performs each task. A job hazard analysis log/form will be used to break down the job into components that can be individually analyzed.

6.5 Immediate feedback. From reviewing the job steps discuss the potential

hazards with the worker. Obtain his/her comments concerning safety improvements.

6.6 Documentation. Each job hazard analysis will be documented. The

Company will use the “Protective Measures Determination” form found in the appendixes to this instruction. Attachments will be included to the form as required to document or support protective measures requirements for the specific job. Copies of the form will be maintained as follows:

I. Employee’s will be given a copy of the form. II. The supervisor will maintain a copy in his or her office files. III. A copy of the form will be maintained in the employee’s personnel record. IV. The Company will maintain a copy of the form in the office.

6.7 Job hazard reevaluation. Supervisors will conduct a reevaluation when one

or more of the following conditions occur:


290

6.7.1 When an accident or injury occurs. It must be determined if the incident occurred as a result of the employee ignoring established safety practices, or if the safety practices need revision.

6.7.2 Anytime there is a change in the methods, materials, machinery, or

procedures used in the conduct of the job. 6.7.3 Periodic review. A periodic review will be conducted on a(n) annual

basis to ensure that the job is evaluated for safety. 7. Training and Education. The purpose of training and education is to ensure that our employees are sufficiently informed about the job hazards to which they may be exposed and thus are able to participate actively in their own protection. 7.1 Employees will be adequately trained about the Company’s personal

protective equipment program. Proper training will allow managers, supervisors, and workers to better understand the hazards associated with a job, task, or process. The training program will include:

7.1.1 All affected employees. 7.1.2 Engineers and maintenance personnel. 7.1.3 Supervisors. 7.1.4 Managers. 7.1.5 Health care providers. 7.2 Learning level. The program will be presented in language and at a level of

understanding appropriate for the individuals being trained. It will provide an overview of the potential job hazards, their causes, and means of correction.

7.3 Evaluation. The program will also include a means for adequately evaluating

its effectiveness. This will be achieved by using combinations of: 7.3.1 Employee surveys. 7.3.2 Injury and illness statistics. 7.3.3 Observation of work practices. 7.4 Training for affected employees will consist of both general and specific job

training:


291

7.4.1 General Training. Employees who are working in jobs requiring changes do to a job hazard analysis will be given formal instruction on the hazards associated with their jobs and with their equipment. This will include information on the varieties of hazards associated with the job, what risk factors cause or contribute to them, how to recognize and report suspected hazards. This training will be conducted on an annual basis.

7.4.2 Job-Specific Training. New employees and reassigned workers will

receive an initial orientation and hands-on training prior to being placed in a full-production job. Each new hire will receive a demonstration of the proper use of and procedures for all tools and equipment. The initial training program will include the following:

7.4.2.1 Care, use, and handling techniques pertaining to tools. 7.4.2.2 Use of special tools and devices associated with work

stations. 7.4.2.3 Use of appropriate guards and safety equipment, including

PPE. 7.4.2.4 Use of proper lifting techniques and devices. 7.5 Training for Supervisors. Supervisors are responsible for ensuring that

employees follow safe work practices and receive appropriate training to enable them to do this. Supervisors therefore will undergo training comparable to that of the person doing the initial job hazard analysis. First line supervisors are in the best position to control hazards in the workplace, and to correct such deficiencies.

7.6 Training for Managers/Senior Company officials. Managers/Senior Officials

will be made aware of their safety and health responsibilities and will receive sufficient training pertaining to PPE and job hazard analysis issues so that they can effectively carry out their responsibilities.

7.7 Training for Engineers and Maintenance Personnel. Company engineers

and maintenance personnel will be trained in the prevention and correction of job hazards through job and work station design and proper maintenance, both in general and as applied to the specific conditions of the facility.

7.8 Training for Visitors. Visitors observing operations will have the same level

of protection provided to the worker being observed. 7.9 Initial training. Worker training will involve instruction, and where necessary

hands-on training in the following:


292

7.9.1 A description and identification of the hazards associated with particular jobs/tasks/machines/workstations.

7.9.2 Specific safeguards, how they provide protection, and the hazards

for which it is intended to block. 7.9.3 How to properly use the safety devices and why. 7.9.4 How to install, operate, and remove safety devices. 7.9.5 What to do if the device is damaged, missing, unable to provide

adequate protection. 7.9.6 Training in the recognition of applicable hazard sources. 7.9.7 Recognition of applicable hazards associated with guarding

devices. 7.9.8 Procedures for removal of a guard from service. 7.9.9 Guard identification. Guards having identification numbers will be

checked for legibility. Guards having illegible identification will be turned in for testing and remarking.

7.9.10 Personal Protective Equipment requirements of the individual

worker. 7.9.11 Certification. H3O, Inc. shall certify that employee training has

been accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification shall contain each employee's name and dates of training.

7.10 Refresher training. This standard practice instruction shall be provided to,

and read by all employees receiving refresher training. The training content shall be identical to initial training. Refresher training will be conducted on an annual basis or when the following conditions are met, which ever event occurs sooner.

7.10.1 Retraining shall be provided for all authorized and affected

employees whenever there is a change in their job assignments, a change in machines, equipment or processes that present a new hazard, or when there is a change in the type guard installed on a given machine. Training will be provided before reassignment.

7.10.2 Additional retraining shall be conducted whenever a periodic

inspection reveals, or whenever H3O, Inc. has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies in the employees’ knowledge of safe job operations.


293

7.10.3 The retraining shall reestablish employee proficiency and introduce

new or revised safe work practices, methods, procedures, and use of PPE as necessary.

7.10.4 Certification. H3O, Inc. shall certify that employee training has

been accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification shall contain each employee's name and dates of training.

8. Protective Clothing and Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Where engineering controls and job hazard analyses do not eliminate all job hazards, employees will (where appropriate) wear personal protective equipment (PPE). 8.1 These include items such as, hardhats, face shields, safety goggles,

glasses, hearing protection, footware, gloves etc. Supervisors will ensure that equipment suplyed by this employer or by the employee will meet the following requirements:

8.1.1 It will be appropriate for the particular hazard. 8.1.2 It will be maintained in good condition. (if damaged the equipment will not be used) 8.1.3 It will be properly stored when not in use, to prevent damage or

loss. 8.1.4 It will be kept clean, fully functional and sanitary. 8.1.5 It will meet all State and Local regulatory standards 8.1.6 Fitting, including proper donning, doffing, cleaning, and maintenance must be fitted to each affected employee. 8.2 Hazards associated with wear of protective clothing, PPE, personal clothing

and jewelry. Protective clothing and PPE can present additional safety hazards. Supervisors will ensure workers wear appropriate clothing and PPE. These items will be worn so as not create additional hazards.

9. Tool Selection, Evaluation and Condition. The greatest hazards posed by tools usually result from misuse and or improper maintenance. Tool selection sometimes is not considered a priority when arrangements are made to begin work. The tools, personal protective equipment, and dimensions and adjustability of the work station will be noted for each job hazard analysis. All employees will consider the following when selecting tools:


294

9.1 Is the tool correct for the type work to be performed? 9.2 Are guards installed properly and in good condition? 9.3 Are grounding methods sufficient when working in wet conditions? 9.4 Does the tool create sparks or heat? Has this been considered when




working surfaces can create a multitude of hazards. 9.9 Are tools stored properly when not being used? Saw blades, knives,



hammers, axes, picks, etc.? 9.11 Tools will be checked for excessive vibration. 9.12 Have tools been modified beyond the manufacturers specification. If so

have the modifications been approved by a “competent person”. See the appendix to this instruction for a sample of a modified tool documentation form.

10. Hazard Prevention and Control. H3O, Inc. understands that engineering solutions, where feasible, are the preferred method of control for workplace hazards. The focus of the Company’s PPE/job hazard analysis program is to eliminate hazards from the workplace. This is accomplished whenever possible by redesigning the work station, work methods, or tool(s) to reduce the hazards associated with the demands of the job. This program will whenever possible research into currently available controls and technology. 11. Employee Notification. Employee's will be notified when they are placed in job descriptions where it is known or suspected that unresolved job hazards exist. These positions will be identified through the PPE/job hazard analysis program, and from the list of known high-risk jobs.


295


DATE: April 8, 2009 SUBJECT: PSM Safety. REGULATORY STANDARDS: WAC 296-67-029

Contents of the PSM Safety Program 1. Application

2. Employer responsibilities

3. Contract employer responsibilities

4. Chemicals 5. Training

1. Application. 1.1 This section applies to contractors performing maintenance or repair, turnaround, major renovation, or specialty work on or adjacent to a covered process. It does not apply to contractors providing incidental services which do not influence process safety, such as janitorial work, food and drink services, laundry, delivery, or other supply services. 2. Employer responsibilities. 2.1 The employer, when selecting a contractor, shall obtain and evaluate information regarding the contract employer's safety performance and programs. 2.2 The employer shall inform contract employers of the known potential fire, explosion, or toxic release hazards related to the contractor's work and the process. 2.3 The employer shall explain to contract employers the applicable provisions of the emergency action plan required by WAC 296-67-053. 2.4 The employer shall develop and implement safe work practices consistent

http://apps.leg.wa.gov/WAC/default.aspx?cite=296-67-053


296

with WAC 296-67-021, to control the entrance, presence, and exit of contract employers and contract employees in covered process areas. 2.5 The employer shall periodically evaluate the performance of contract employers in fulfilling their obligations as specified in subsection (3) of this section. 2.6 The employer shall maintain a contract employee injury and illness log related to the contractor's work in process areas. 3. Contract employer responsibilities. 3.1 The contract employer shall assure that each contract employee is trained in the work practices necessary to safely perform his/her job. 3.2 The contract employer shall assure that each contract employee is instructed in the known potential fire, explosion, or toxic release hazards related to his/her job and the process, and the applicable provisions of the emergency action plan. 3.3 The contract employer shall document that each contract employee has received and understood the training required by this paragraph. The contract employer shall prepare a record which contains the identity of the contract employee, the date of training, and the means used to verify that the employee understood the training. 3.4 The contract employer shall assure that each contract employee follows the safety rules of the facility including the safe work practices required by WAC 296-67-021. 3.5 The contract employer shall advise the employer of any unique hazards presented by the contract employer's work, or of any hazards found by the contract employer's work. 4. Chemicals 4.1 When working in a PSM covered process or adjacent to, following chemicals are to be considered part of PSM. 4.1.1 Chlorine Dioxide 4.1.2 Methanol




297

4.1.3 The MSDS for both of these chemicals is part of this document. The hazards of chlorine Dioxide and Methanol must be reviewed with all persons who will be working in the PSM covered area or adjacent areas to. All contractor employees must be made aware of all the hazards of this work area. 4.1 The contractor pre plan for emergency situations will include but not limited to emergency evacuation and medical emergency. The contractor pre plan will be reviewed by Boise. 5. Training 5.1 Contract employer responsibilities 5.2 The contract employer shall assure that each contract employee is trained in the work practices necessary to safely perform his/her job. All 14 elements of PSM must be covered. 5.3 The contract employer shall assure that each contract employee in instructed in the known potential fire, explosion, or toxic release hazard related to his/her job and the process, and the applicable provisions of the emergency action plan. 5.4 The contract employer shall document that each contract employee has received and understood the training required by this paragraph. The contract employer shall prepare a record which contains the identity of the contract employee, the date of training, and the means used to verify that the employee understood the training. 5.5 The contract employer shall assure that each contract employee follows the safety rules of the facility including the safe work practices required by WAC 296-67-021. 5.6 The contract employer shall advise the employer of any unique hazards presented by the contract employer’s work, or any hazards found by the contract employer’s work


298


DATE: June 11, 2009, 2009 SUBJECT: Respiratory Protection Program REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.134 (Revised 1998) ANSI - Z88.2, 1992 BASIS: About 32 million workers are potentially exposed to one or more chemical hazards on a daily basis. There are an estimated 575,000 existing chemical products, and hundreds of new ones being introduced annually. This poses a serious problem for exposed workers and their employer. The OSHA Respiratory Protection Standard establishes uniform requirements to make sure that the respiratory hazards of all U.S. workplaces are evaluated, and that engineering controls, and work practice controls are implemented, and where not feasible, a respiratory protection program instituted. GENERAL: H3O Inc will ensure that respiratory hazards within our facility are evaluated, and that information concerning these hazards is transmitted to all employees. This standard practice instruction is intended to address comprehensively the issues of; evaluating the potential respiratory hazards, communicating information concerning these hazards, and establishing appropriate engineering, work practice, or respiratory protective measures for employees.

Contents of the Respiratory Protection Program 1. Written Program. 2. Employer/Employee Responsibility. 3. Policy Statement. 4. Program Requirements. 5. Respiratory Selection Policy. 6. Use of Respirators. 7. Hazard Evaluation. 8. Care of Respiratory Equipment. 9. Respiratory Training Program. 10. Retraining and Refresher Training. 11. Continuing Respirator Effectiveness. 12. Respirator Fit Testing. 13. Medical Evaluation.


299

14. Forms Used With This Instruction. 15. Definitions. 16. Fit Testing Procedures. (Appendix A)

H3O Inc Respiratory Protection Program

1. Written Program. H3O Inc will develop and implement a written respiratory protection program with required worksite-specific procedures and elements for required respirator use. The program will be administered by a suitably trained program administrator. The program administrator will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction:

1.1 On at least an annual basis. 1.2 When changes occur to governing regulatory sources that require revision. 1.3 When changes occur to related company procedures that require a revision. 1.4 When facility operational changes occur that require a revision. 1.5 When there is an accident or close-call that relates to this area of safety. 1.6 Anytime the procedures fail.

NOTE: Effective implementation of this program requires support from all levels of management within this company. This written program will be communicated to all personnel that are affected by it. It encompasses the total workplace, regardless of number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals and objectives. 2. Employer and Employee Responsibility. 2.1 Employer's Responsibility. 2.1.1 Respirators, training, and medical evaluations will be provided by

this employer when they are necessary to protect employee health. 2.1.2 The respirator provided will be suitable for the intended use.

2.1.3 This employer will offer at least three types of respirators for employees to select from. 2.1.4 This employer will be responsible for establishing and maintaining a respiratory program whenever respirators are used. A program administrator will be appointed to oversee the program. The program administrator for H3O Inc is Sam Hesseltine.

2.2 Employee's Responsibility.


300

2.2.1 The employee will use the respiratory protection in accordance with instructions and training received or contracted by H3O Inc. 2.2.2 The employee will guard against damage to the respirator, and immediately replace suspect respirators.

2.2.3 The employee will report any trouble with or malfunction of the

respirator to his/her supervisor. 3. Policy Statement. 3.1 Engineering controls. To control and/or minimize the threat of occupational

diseases caused by breathing air contaminated with harmful dusts, fogs, fumes, mists, gases, smokes, sprays, or vapors. The primary objective of this program will be to prevent atmospheric contamination. This will be accomplished as far as feasible by accepted engineering control measures (for example, enclosure or confinement of the operation, general and local ventilation, and substitution of less toxic materials). When effective engineering controls are not feasible, or while they are being instituted, appropriate respirators will be used.

3.2 Respirators. Respirators will be provided by this employer when such

equipment is necessary to protect the health of the employee. This employer will:

3.2.1 Provide the respirators which are applicable and suitable for the

purpose intended. 3.2.2 Be responsible for the establishment and maintenance of a written

respiratory protective program which will include the requirements outlined in 29 CFR 1910.134.

3.3 The employee will use the provided respiratory protection in accordance with

instructions and training received. 3.4 Respirators will be selected on the basis of hazards to which the worker is

exposed. 3.5 The user will be instructed and trained in the proper use of respirators and

their limitations. 3.6 Respirators will be regularly cleaned and disinfected. Those used by more

than one worker will be thoroughly cleaned and disinfected after each use. 3.7 Respirators will be stored in a convenient, clean, and sanitary location.


301

3.8 Respirators used routinely will be inspected during cleaning. Worn or deteriorated parts will be replaced. Respirators for emergency use such as self-contained devices will be thoroughly inspected at least once a month and after each use.

3.9 Appropriate surveillance of work area conditions and degree of employee

exposure or stress will be maintained. 3.10 There will be regular inspection and evaluation to determine the continued

effectiveness of the program. 3.11 Employees will not be assigned to tasks requiring use of respirators unless

it has been determined that they are physically able to perform the work and use the equipment. A physician will determine what health and physical conditions are pertinent. The respirator user's medical status will be reviewed on a(n) annual basis.

3.12 NIOSH approved or accepted respirators will be used when they are

available. The respirator furnished will provide adequate respiratory protection against the particular hazard for which it is designed.

4. Program Requirements. This program as a minimum will include the following program elements: 4.1 Procedures for selecting respirators for use in the workplace; 4.2 Medical evaluations of employees required to use respirators; 4.3 Fit testing procedures for tight-fitting respirators; 4.4 Procedures for proper use of respirators in foreseeable emergency

situations; 4.5 Procedures and schedules for cleaning, disinfecting, storing, inspecting,

repairing, discarding, and otherwise maintaining respirators; 4.6 Procedures to ensure adequate air quality, quantity, and flow of breathing air

for atmosphere-supplying respirators; 4.7 Training of employees in the respiratory hazards to which they are potentially

exposed during routine and emergency situations. 5. Respiratory Selection Policy. This employer will allow employees to select respirators from at least three different types of respirator models and sizes so that the respirator is acceptable to, and correctly fits, the user. Selection of respirators will be made according to the specific hazard involved 29 CFR 1910.1000 and will be selected


302

in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions or other related requirements (OSHA or ANSI standards, NIOSH, etc.). 5.1 Filter cartridges and canisters. Filter cartridges and canisters will used and

stored according manufacturers guidelines. Change-out of filters will be done based on the individual job.

5.2 Identification of filters, cartridges, and canisters. This employer will ensure

that all filters, cartridges and canisters used in the workplace are labeled and color coded with the NIOSH approved label and that the label is not removed and remains legible.

5.3 Where a specific OSHA standard exists. Each task/job having the potential

for respiratory hazards will be evaluated to determine worker protection requirement. The specific OSHA standard will be consulted to determine delineated respiratory requirements. The standards are listed in the "Z" tables to 29 CFR 1910.1000-1101.

5.4 Where a specific OSHA standard does not exist, prudent Industrial Hygiene

practices will be used. After all criteria have been identified and evaluated and after the requirements and restrictions of the respiratory protection program have been met, the class of respirators that should provide adequate respiratory protection will be determined.

5.5 Air quality. Compressed air, compressed oxygen, liquid air, and liquid

oxygen used for respiration will be of high purity. 5.5.1 Oxygen will meet the requirements of the United States

Pharmacopoeia for medical or breathing oxygen. 5.5.2 Breathing air will meet at least the requirements of the specification

for Grade D breathing air as described in Compressed Gas Association Commodity Specification G-7.1-1966.

5.5.3 Compressed oxygen will not be used in supplied-air respirators or in

open circuit self-contained breathing apparatus that have previously used compressed air. Oxygen must never be used with air line respirators. Breathing air may be supplied to respirators from cylinders or air compressors.

5.5.3.1 Compressed breathing air will meet at least the

requirements for Type 1-Grade D breathing air described in ANSI/Compressed Gas Association Commodity Specification for Air, G-7.1-1989, to include:

1. Oxygen content (v/v) of 19.5-23.5%;


303

2. Hydrocarbon (condensed) content of 5 milligrams per cubic meter of air or less;

3. Carbon monoxide (CO) content of 10 ppm or less; 4. Carbon dioxide content of 1,000 ppm or less; and 5. Lack of noticeable odor.

Note: Compressed oxygen may not used in atmosphere-supplying respirators that have previously used compressed air. 5.5.4 Compressed oxygen will not be used in supplied-air respirators or in

open circuit self-contained breathing apparatus that have previously used compressed oxygen.

5.5.5 This employer will ensure that cylinders used to supply breathing air

to respirators meet the following requirements:

1. Cylinders are tested and maintained as prescribed in the Shipping Container Specification Regulations of the Department of Transportation (49 CFR part 173 and part 178); 2. Cylinders of purchased breathing air have a certificate of analysis from the supplier that the breathing air meets the requirements for Type 1--Grade D breathing air; 3. The moisture content in the cylinder does not exceed a dew point of -50 deg.F (-45.6 deg.C) at 1 atmosphere pressure. Cylinders will be tested and maintained as prescribed in the Shipping Container Specification Regulations of the Department of Transportation (49 CFR part 178).

5.6 Supplied Air. Compressors purchased by this company for supplying air will

be equipped with the necessary safety and standby devices. A breathing-air type compressor will be used. The type compressor used will be constructed and situated so as to avoid entry of contaminated air into the system and suitable in-line air purifying sorbent beds and filters installed to further assure breathing air quality. A receiver of sufficient capacity to enable the respirator wearer to escape from a contaminated atmosphere in event of compressor failure, and alarms to indicate compressor failure and overheating will be installed in the system. If an oil-lubricated compressor is used, it will have a high-temperature or carbon monoxide alarm, or both. If only a high-temperature alarm is installed in the system, the air from the compressor will be frequently tested for carbon monoxide to ensure that levels are below the exposure limit for carbon monoxide.

5.6.1 Air line couplings used will be incompatible with outlets for other gas

systems to prevent inadvertent servicing of air line respirators with nonrespirable gases or oxygen.


304

5.6.2 Breathing gas containers will be properly marked and stored in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.101.

5.7 Breathing air quality and use. This employer will provide employees using

atmosphere-supplying respirators (supplied-air and SCBA) with breathing gases of high purity.

5.8 This employer will ensure that compressed air, compressed oxygen, liquid

air, and liquid oxygen used for respiration meets the following specifications: 5.9 Compressors. This employer will ensure that compressors used to supply

breathing air to respirators are constructed and situated so as to: 5.9.1 Prevent entry of contaminated air into the air-supply system; 5.9.2 Minimize moisture content so that the dew point at 1 atmosphere

pressure is 10 degrees F (5.56 deg.C) below the ambient temperature; 5.9.3 Have suitable in-line air-purifying sorbent beds and filters to further

ensure breathing air quality. Sorbent beds and filters will be maintained and replaced or refurbished periodically following the manufacturer's instructions.

5.9.4 Have a tag containing the most recent change date and the

signature of the person authorized by this employer to perform the change. The tag will be maintained at the compressor.

5.9.5 For compressors that are not oil-lubricated, this employer will

ensure that carbon monoxide levels in the breathing air do not exceed 10 ppm.

5.9.6 For oil-lubricated compressors, this employer will use a high-

temperature or carbon monoxide alarm, or both, to monitor carbon monoxide levels. If only high-temperature alarms are used, the air supply will be monitored at intervals sufficient to prevent carbon monoxide in the breathing air from exceeding 10 ppm.

5.9.7 This employer will ensure that breathing air couplings are

incompatible with outlets for nonrespirable worksite air or other gas systems.

5.9.8 This employer will use breathing gas containers marked in

accordance with the NIOSH respirator certification standard, 42 CFR part 84.


305

5.9.9 Recordkeeping. This employer will establish and retain written information regarding medical evaluations, fit testing, and the respirator program.

5.9.10 Medical evaluation. Records of medical evaluations will be

retained and made available in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020. 6. Use of Respirators. This employer may provide respirators at the request of employees or permit employees to use their own respirators, if it is determined that such respirator use will not in itself create a hazard. If voluntary respirator use is permissible, this employer will provide the respirator user(s) with the necessary information for safe and effective use. In addition, we will ensure that any employee using a respirator voluntarily is medically able to use that respirator, and that the respirator is cleaned, stored, and maintained so that its use does not present a health hazard to the user. This employer will provide respirators, training, and medical evaluations at no cost to the employee. There are five conditions under which respirators must be used:

1. In regulated areas within the facility; 2. In emergencies; 3. Where engineering and work practice controls are inadequate; 4. Where exposures exceed permissible limits, and; 5. During maintenance and repair activities during brief or intermittent operations

where engineering and work practice controls are not feasible or required. 6.1 This document will specify standard procedures for respirator use. These

will include all information and guidance necessary for their proper selection, use, and care. Possible emergency and routine uses of respirators will be, where possible, anticipated and planned for.

6.2 The correct respirator will be specified for each job. The respirator type will

be specified in the work procedures by a competent person who supervises the respiratory protective program. The individual issuing them will be adequately instructed to ensure that the correct respirator is issued.

6.3 Fit instructions. Every respirator wearer will receive fitting instructions

including demonstrations and practice in how the respirator should be worn, how to adjust it, and how to determine if it fits properly. Respirators will not be worn when conditions prevent a good face seal. Such conditions may be a growth of beard, sideburns, a skull cap that projects under the facepiece, jewelry or temple pieces on glasses. Also, the absence of one or both dentures can seriously affect the fit of a facepiece and interfere with the face-to-facepiece seal or valve function.


306

6.4 Fit Evaluation (wearer). The facepiece fit will be checked by the wearer each time he/she puts on the respirator. This will be done by following the manufacturer's facepiece fitting instructions.

6.5 Fit Evaluation (company). Periodic checks of employees while wearing

respirators will be accomplished by trained fit tester to assure proper protection. This will be done in accordance with the manufacturer's facepiece fitting instructions.

6.6 Hair/apparel. If hair growth or apparel interfere with a satisfactory fit, then they will be altered or removed so as to eliminate interference and allow a satisfactory fit. If a satisfactory fit is still not attained, the employee must use a positive-pressure respirator such as powered air-purifying respirators, supplied air respirator, or self-contained breathing apparatus.

6.7 Corrective vision requirements (full-face respirators). Full-face respirators

having provisions for optical inserts will be reviewed for use by this company. These inserts when used will be used according to the manufacturer’s specification. When employees must wear optical inserts as part of the facepiece, the facepiece and lenses will be fitted by qualified individuals to provide good vision, comfort, and a gas-tight seal. This company will provide corrective lenses for respirators based on optometry recommendations from an optometrist.

6.7.1 Conventional eye glasses. Conventional eye glasses will not be

used with full-face respirators. A proper seal cannot be established if the temple bars of eye glasses extend through the sealing edge of the full facepiece.

6.7.2 Contact lenses. Contact lenses will not be used with full-face

respirators. Wearing of contact lenses in contaminated atmospheres with a respirator will not be allowed.

6.7.3 If corrective spectacles or goggles are required, they will be worn so

as not to affect the fit of the facepiece. Proper selection of equipment will minimize or avoid this problem.

6.8 Use of personal protective equipment. If an employee wears corrective

glasses or goggles or other personal protective equipment, the equipment must be worn in a manner that does not interfere with the seal of the facepiece to the face of the user.

6.9 User seal check procedures. The follow procedures must be performed to

ensure that an adequate seal is achieved each time the respirator is put on. Either the positive and/or negative pressure checks listed below will be


307

performed, or the respirator manufacturer's recommended user seal check method is to be used:

I. Facepiece Positive and/or Negative Pressure Checks. A. Positive pressure check. Close off the exhalation valve and exhale gently into the facepiece. The face fit is considered satisfactory if a slight positive pressure can be built up inside the facepiece without any evidence of outward leakage of air at the seal. For most respirators this method of leak testing requires the wearer to first remove the exhalation valve cover before closing off the exhalation valve and then carefully replacing it after the test. B. Negative pressure check. Close off the inlet opening of the canister or cartridge(s) by covering with the palm of the hand(s) or by replacing the filter seal(s), inhale gently so that the facepiece collapses slightly, and hold the breath for ten seconds. The design of the inlet opening of some cartridges cannot be effectively covered with the palm of the hand. The test can be performed by covering the inlet opening of the cartridge with a thin latex or nitrile glove. If the facepiece remains in its slightly collapsed condition and no inward leakage of air is detected, the tightness of the respirator is considered satisfactory. II. Manufacturer's Recommended User Seal Check Procedures. The respirator manufacturer's recommended procedures for performing a user seal check may be used instead of the positive and/or negative pressure check procedures provided that it can be demonstrated that the manufacturer's procedures are equally effective.

7. Hazard Evaluation. This employer will identify and evaluate the respiratory hazard(s) in the workplace using the “Job Hazard Analysis Program,” this evaluation will include a reasonable estimate of employee exposures to respiratory hazard(s) and an identification of the contaminant's chemical state and physical form. Where exposure cannot be identified or reasonably estimated, the area or location will consider the atmosphere to be immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH). 7.1 Respirators for IDLH atmospheres. This employer will provide the following

respirators for employee use in IDLH atmospheres:

7.1.1 A full facepiece pressure demand SCBA certified by NIOSH for a minimum service life of thirty minutes, or 7.1.2 A combination full facepiece pressure demand supplied-air respirator (SAR) with auxiliary self-contained air supply. 7.1.3 Respirators provided only for escape from IDLH atmospheres will be NIOSH-certified for escape from the atmosphere in which they will be used.


308

7.1.4 All oxygen-deficient atmospheres will be considered IDLH. Exception: If it can be demonstrated that, under all foreseeable conditions, the oxygen concentration can be maintained within the acceptable ranges specified in 29 CFR 1910.134 (i.e., for the altitudes set out in the table), then any atmosphere-supplying respirator approved by the Safety Officer may be used.

7.2 Respirators for atmospheres that are not IDLH. This employer will provide a

respirator that is adequate to protect the health of the employee and ensure compliance with all other OSHA statutory and regulatory requirements, under routine and reasonably foreseeable emergency situations.

7.2.1 The respirator selected will be appropriate for the chemical state and physical form of the contaminant.

7.3 Respirators for protection against gases and vapors. This employer will provide:

7.3.1 An atmosphere-supplying respirator, or 7.3.2 An air-purifying respirator, provided that the respirator is equipped with an end-of-service-life indicator (ESLI) certified by NIOSH for the contaminant; or if there is no ESLI appropriate for conditions a change schedule for canisters and cartridges will be implemented that is based on objective information or data that will ensure that canisters and cartridges are changed before the end of their service life. This employer will describe in the respirator program the information and data relied upon and the basis for the canister and cartridge change schedule and the basis for reliance on the data.

7.4 Respirators for protection against particulates. This employer will provide: 7.4.1 An atmosphere-supplying respirator; or 7.4.2 An air-purifying respirator equipped with a filter certified by NIOSH under 30 CFR part 11 as a high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter, or an air-purifying respirator equipped with a filter certified for particulates by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84; or 7.4.4 For contaminants consisting primarily of particles with mass median aerodynamic diameters (MMAD) of at least 2 micrometers, an air-purifying respirator equipped with any filter certified for particulates by NIOSH.

7.5 Dangerous atmospheres. Written procedures/checklists for specific routine

tasks/jobs will be prepared covering safe use of respirators in dangerous


309

atmospheres that might be encountered in normal operations or in emergencies. Personnel will be made familiar with these procedures and the available respirators.

7.5.1 In areas where the wearer, with failure of the respirator, could be

overcome by a toxic or oxygen-deficient atmosphere, at least one additional person will be present. Communications (visual, voice, or signal line) will be maintained between both or all individuals present. Planning will be such that one individual will be unaffected by any likely incident and have the proper rescue equipment to be able to assist the other(s) in case of emergency.

7.5.2 When a self-contained breathing apparatus or hose masks with

blowers are used in atmospheres IDLH, standby personnel must be present with suitable rescue equipment.

7.5.3 Employees using air line respirators in atmospheres that are IDLH

will be equipped with safety harnesses and safety lines for lifting or removing persons from hazardous atmospheres or other equivalent provisions for the rescue of persons from hazardous atmospheres will be used. Standby personnel with suitable self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) will be at the nearest fresh air base for emergency rescue.

8. Inspection, Maintenance, and Care of Respiratory Equipment. This employer will provide for the cleaning and disinfecting, storage, inspection, and repair of respirators used by our employees. Equipment will be properly maintained to retain its original state of effectiveness. 8.1 Cleaning and disinfecting. This employer will provide each respirator user

with a respirator that is clean, sanitary, and in good working order. This employer will ensure that respirators are cleaned and disinfected using OSHA approved procedures or procedures recommended by the respirator manufacturer, provided that such procedures are of equivalent effectiveness. The respirators will be cleaned and disinfected at the following intervals:

8.2 Exclusive use respirators. Respirators issued for the exclusive use of an

employee will be cleaned and disinfected as often as necessary to be maintained in a sanitary condition.

8.3 Respirators issued to more than one employee. Respirators issued to more

than one employee will be cleaned and disinfected before being worn by different individuals.

8.4 Respirators maintained for emergency. Respirators maintained for

emergency use will be cleaned and disinfected after each use.


310

8.5 Respirators used in fit testing. Respirators used in fit testing and training will be cleaned and disinfected after each use.

8.6 Storage of respirators. Respirators will be stored as follows: 8.6.1 All respirators will be stored to protect them from damage,

contamination, dust, sunlight, extreme temperatures, excessive moisture, and damaging chemicals, and they will be packed or stored to prevent deformation of the facepiece and exhalation valve.

8.7 Emergency respirators. Emergency respirators will be: 8.7.1 Kept accessible to the work area; 8.7.1 Stored in compartments or in covers that are clearly marked as

containing emergency respirators; and 8.7.1 Stored in accordance with any applicable manufacturer instructions. 8.8 Inspection. Respirators will be inspected as follows: 8.8.1 All respirators used in routine situations will be inspected before

each use and during cleaning in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications.

8.8.2 All respirators maintained for use in emergency situations will be

inspected at least monthly and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and will be checked for proper function before and after each use; and

8.8.3 Emergency escape-only respirators will be inspected before being

carried into the workplace for use. 8.8.4 A check of respirator function, tightness of connections, and the

condition of the various parts including, but not limited to, the facepiece, head straps, valves, connecting tube, and cartridges, canisters or filters; and

8.8.5 A check of elastic parts for pliability and signs of deterioration. 8.8.6 Self-contained breathing apparatus. In addition to the requirements

of above; self-contained breathing apparatus will be inspected monthly. Air and oxygen cylinders will be maintained in a fully charged state and will be recharged when the pressure falls to 90% of the manufacturer's


311

recommended pressure level. Regulator and warning devices will be monitored for proper function.

8.9 Respirators maintained for emergency use. All respirators will be inspected

routinely before and after each use. A respirator that is not routinely used but is kept ready for emergency use will be inspected after each use and at least monthly to assure that it is in satisfactory working condition. This employer will:

8.9.1 Certify the respirator by documenting the following:

· The date the inspection was performed · The name (or signature) of the inspector · Notable findings · Required remedial actions to be taken · Serial number or other means of identifying the inspected

respirator 8.9.2 Annotate inspection information on a tag or label that is attached to

the storage compartment for the respirator and keep the tag or label with the respirator, or ensure that it is included in inspection reports stored as paper or electronic files. This information will be maintained until replaced following a subsequent certification.

8.10 Repairs. Respirators that fail an inspection or are otherwise found to be

defective will be removed from service, and discarded, repaired or adjusted only by persons appropriately trained to perform such operations and will use only the respirator manufacturer's NIOSH-approved parts designed for the respirator.

8.11 Specific procedures for disassembly, cleaning and maintenance of

respirators used by this company will be done according the manufacturer’s written instructions.

8.12 Random inspections. Respiratory protection is no better than the respirator

in use, even though it may be worn conscientiously. Frequent random inspections will be conducted to assure that respirators are properly selected, used, cleaned, and maintained. The respirator manufacturer’s inspection criteria will be used as the basis for the inspections. Inspection records will be maintained in the office.

8.13 Routine use respirators. All routine use respirators will be inspected before

and after each use. The respirator manufacturer’s inspection criteria will be used as the basis for the inspection. Routinely used respirators will be collected, cleaned, and disinfected as frequently as necessary to ensure that proper protection is provided for the wearer.


312

8.13.1 Routine use respirators. Routinely used respirators, such as dust respirators, may be placed in plastic bags. Respirators having removable cartridges with imbedded compounds that could evaporate into a sealed bag should be removed so as not to permeate into the rubber parts of the respirator. Respirators should not be stored in such places as lockers or tool boxes unless they are in carrying cases or cartons.

9. Respiratory Protection Training Program. This company will develop a standardized training format to meet the requirement for a respiratory protection training program. The training will be comprehensive, understandable, and recur annually, and more often if necessary. 9.1 Previous training. If a new employee is able to demonstrate that he or she

has received training within the last 12 months that addresses the training required by 29 CFR 1910.134 the employee will not be required to repeat the training provided that the employee can demonstrate knowledge. Training not repeated initially by this employer must be provided no later than 12 months from the date of the previous training.

9.2 Basic advisory information. The basic advisory information on respirators,

as presented in 29 CFR 1910.134, Appendix D, will be provided by this employer in any written or oral format to employees who wear respirators.

9.3 Program evaluation. This employer will conduct evaluations of the

workplace to ensure that the written respiratory protection program is being properly implemented. We will consult employees to determine and ensure that they are using their respirators properly.

9.4 Workplace evaluations. This employer will conduct evaluations of the

workplace as necessary to ensure that the provisions of this written program are being effectively implemented and that it continues to be effective.

9.5 When training will be provided. Training will be provided to each affected

employee: 9.5.1 Before the employee is first assigned duties that require respiratory

protection.

9.5.2 Before there is a change in assigned duties. 9.5.3 Whenever there is a change in operations that present a hazard for

which an employee has not previously been trained. 9.5.4 Whenever this employer has reason to believe that there are

deviations from established respiratory procedures required by this


313

instruction or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or use of these procedures.

9.6 The training content that will be provided. Training of employees will as a

minimum include: 9.6.1 Putting on and removing respirators (donning and doffing). 9.6.2 Any limitations on their use. 9.6.3 Maintenance requirements. 9.6.4 Procedures for regularly evaluating the effectiveness of the

program. 9.6.5 Where respirator use is not required. 9.7 Demonstration of knowledge. This employer will ensure that each employee

can demonstrate knowledge of at least the following: 9.7.1 Why the respirator is necessary and how improper fit, usage, or

maintenance can compromise the protective effect of the respirator; 9.7.1 What the limitations and capabilities of the respirator are; 9.7.2 How to use the respirator effectively in emergency situations,

including situations in which the respirator malfunctions; 9.7.3 How to inspect, put on and remove, use, and check the seals of the

respirator; 9.7.4 What the procedures are for maintenance and storage of the

respirator; 9.7.5 How to recognize medical signs and symptoms that may limit or

prevent the effective use of respirators; and 9.7.6 The general requirements of 29 CFR 1910.134. 9.8 Employee involvement. This employer will regularly consult employees

required to use respirators to assess the employees' views on program effectiveness and to identify any problems. Any problems that are identified during this assessment will be corrected. Factors to be assessed include, but are not limited to:


314

9.8.1 Respirator fit (including the ability to use the respirator without interfering with effective workplace performance);

9.8.2 Appropriate respirator selection for the hazards to which the

employee is exposed; 9.8.3 Proper respirator use under the workplace conditions the employee

encounters; and 9.8.4 Proper respirator maintenance. 9.9 Employee proficiency. The training will establish employee proficiency in the

duties required by this instruction and will introduce new or revised procedures, as necessary, for compliance with this instruction or when future revisions occur.

9.10 Trainer qualification. This employer will designate a program administrator

who is qualified by appropriate training or experience that is commensurate with the complexity of the program to administer or oversee the respiratory protection program and conduct the required evaluations of program effectiveness.

9.11 Training certification. This employer will certify that the training required by

29 CFR 1910.134 has been accomplished. The certification will contain each employee's name, the signatures or initials of the trainers, and the dates of training. The certification will be available for inspection by employees and their authorized representatives.

10. Retraining and Refresher Training. Retraining will be administered annually. Retraining will reestablish employee proficiency and introduce new or revised control methods and procedures, as necessary. Retraining will be administered when the following situations occur (as a minimum): 10.1 Changes in the workplace or the type of respirator render previous training

obsolete; 10.2 Inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or use of the respirator indicate

that the employee has not retained the requisite understanding or skill; or 10.3 Any other situation arises in which retraining appears necessary to ensure

safe respirator use. 11. Continuing Respirator Effectiveness. Appropriate surveillance will be maintained of work area conditions and degree of employee exposure or stress. When there is a change in work area conditions or degree of employee exposure or stress that may affect respirator effectiveness, this employer will reevaluate the continued effectiveness of the respirator.


315

11.1 This employer will ensure that employees leave the respirator use area under the following conditions:

11.1.1 To wash their faces and respirator face pieces as necessary to

prevent eye or skin irritation associated with respirator use; or 11.1.2 If they detect vapor or gas breakthrough, changes in breathing

resistance, or leakage of the face piece; or 11.1.3 To replace the respirator or the filter, cartridge, or canister

elements. 11.1.4 If the employee detects vapor or gas breakthrough, changes in

breathing resistance, or leakage of the face piece, this employer must replace or repair the respirator before allowing the employee to return to the work area.

12. Respirator Fit Testing. This employer will conduct fit testing using the procedures found in Appendix A to this instruction before an employee is required to use any respirator. The employee must be fit tested with the same make, model, style, and size of respirator that will be used. 12.1 This employer will establish a record of the qualitative and quantitative fit

tests in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020 administered to an employee including:

· Date of test; · Type of fit test performed; · The name or identification of the employee tested; · Specific make, model, style, and size of respirator tested; · Fit test records will be retained for respirator users until the next fit test

is administered; · The pass/fail results for QLFTs or the fit factor and strip chart recording

or other recording of the test results for QNFTs. 12.2 Tight-fitting face piece respirators. This employer will ensure that

employees using a tight-fitting face piece respirator pass an appropriate qualitative fit test (QLFT) or quantitative fit test (QNFT). Fit testing of tight-fitting atmosphere-supplying respirators and tight-fitting powered air-purifying respirators will be accomplished by performing quantitative or qualitative fit testing in the negative pressure mode, regardless of the mode of operation (negative or positive pressure) that is used for respiratory protection. Additionally, we will ensure that an employee using a tight-fitting facepiece respirator is fit tested;

· Prior to initial use of the respirator


316

· Whenever a different face piece (size, style, model or make) is used · At least annually thereafter.

12.3 Additional fit test requirements. We will conduct an additional fit test

whenever changes in the employee's physical condition occur that could affect respirator fit. Such conditions include, but are not limited to, facial scarring, dental changes, cosmetic surgery, or an obvious change in body weight. Additionally, if after passing a QLFT or QNFT, the fit of the respirator is unacceptable, the employee will be given a reasonable opportunity to select a different respirator face piece and to be retested.

13. Medical Evaluation. Using a respirator may place a physiological burden on employees that varies with the type of respirator worn, the job and workplace conditions in which the respirator is used, and the medical status of the employee. This employer will provide a medical evaluation to determine the employee's ability to use a respirator before the employee is fit tested or required to use the respirator in the workplace. This employer may discontinue an employee's medical evaluations when the employee is no longer required to use a respirator. 13.1 Medical evaluation procedures. This employer will identify a Physician or

other Licensed Health Care Professional (PLHCP) to perform medical evaluations using a medical questionnaire or an initial medical examination that obtains the same information as the medical questionnaire.

13.2 Follow-up medical examination. This employer will ensure that a follow-up

medical examination is provided for an employee who gives a positive response to any question among questions 1 through 8 in the medical evaluation questionnaire (See Section 14., Forms Used In Conjunction With This Instruction.) and/or demonstrates the need for a follow-up medical examination. The follow-up medical examination will include any medical tests, consultations, or diagnostic procedures that the PLHCP deems necessary to make a final determination.

13.3 Administration of the medical questionnaire and examinations. The

medical questionnaire and examinations will be administered confidentially during the employee's normal working hours or at a time and place convenient to the employee. The medical questionnaire will be administered in a manner that ensures that the employee understands its content. This employer will provide the employee with an opportunity to discuss the questionnaire and examination results with the PLHCP.

13.4 Information to be provided to the PLHCP. The following information will be

provided to the PLHCP before he or she makes a recommendation concerning an employee's ability to use a respirator:

· The expected physical work effort;


317

· Additional protective clothing and equipment to be worn; · Temperature and humidity extremes that may be encountered; · The type and weight of the respirator to be used by the employee; · The duration and frequency of respirator use (including use for rescue

and escape); · Any supplemental information provided previously to the PLHCP

regarding an employee need not be provided for a subsequent medical evaluation if the information and the PLHCP remain the same;

· Copy of the written respiratory protection program; · Copy of the 29 CFR 1910.134 plus Appendices.

Note: When this employer replaces a PLHCP, we will ensure that the new PLHCP obtains this information, either by providing the documents directly to the PLHCP or having the documents transferred from the former PLHCP to the new PLHCP. However, employees do not have to be medically reevaluated solely because a new PLHCP has been selected. 13.5 Medical determination. In determining the employee's ability to use a

respirator, this employer will accomplish the following:

· Obtain a written recommendation regarding the employee's ability to use the respirator;

· Determine any limitations on respirator use related to the medical

condition of the employee, or relating to the workplace conditions in which the respirator will be used, including whether or not the employee is medically able to use the respirator;

· Determine the need, if any, for follow-up medical evaluations; and · Ensure that the PLHCP has provided the employee with a copy of the

PLHCP's written recommendation. · If the respirator is a negative pressure respirator and the PLHCP finds

a medical condition that may place the employee's health at increased risk if the respirator is used, this employer will provide a powered air-pressure respirator (PAPR) if the PLHCP's medical evaluation finds that the employee can use such a respirator; if a subsequent medical


318

evaluation finds that the employee is medically able to use a negative pressure respirator, then this employer is no longer required to provide a PAPR.

13.6 Additional medical evaluations. As a minimum, this employer will provide

additional medical evaluations based on the following conditions:

· If an employee reports medical signs or symptoms that are related to his or her ability to use a respirator;

· If a PLHCP, supervisor, or the respirator program administrator informs

this employer that an employee needs to be reevaluated; · If information from the respiratory protection program, including

observations made during fit testing and program evaluation, indicates a need for employee reevaluation; or

· If a change occurs in workplace conditions (e.g., physical work effort,

protective clothing, temperature) that may result in a substantial increase in the physiological burden placed on an employee.

14. Forms Used In Conjunction With This Instruction.

1. Respirator assignment record. 2. Respirator inspection record. 3. Qualitative fit test form 4. Respirator license form 5. Selection of respirators form 6. Cartridge change out schedule 7. Medical evaluation questionnaire 8. Employee respirator information

15. Definitions Air-purifying respirator means: A respirator with an air-purifying filter, cartridge, or canister that removes specific air contaminants by passing ambient air through the air-purifying element. Atmosphere-supplying respirator means: A respirator that supplies the respirator user with breathing air from a source independent of the ambient atmosphere, and includes supplied-air respirators (SARs) and self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) units.


319

Canister or cartridge means: A container with a filter, sorbent, or catalyst, or combination of these items, which removes specific contaminants from the air passed through the container. Demand respirator means: An atmosphere-supplying respirator that admits breathing air to the face piece only when a negative pressure is created inside the face piece by inhalation. Emergency situation means: Any occurrence such as, but not limited to, equipment failure, rupture of containers, or failure of control equipment that may or does result in an uncontrolled significant release of an airborne contaminant. Employee exposure means: Exposure to a concentration of an airborne contaminant that would occur if the employee were not using respiratory protection. End-of-service-life indicator (ESLI) means: A system that warns the respirator user of the approach of the end of adequate respiratory protection, for example, that the sorbent is approaching saturation or is no longer effective. Escape-only respirator means: A respirator intended to be used only for emergency exit. Filter or air purifying element means: A component used in respirators to remove solid or liquid aerosols from the inspired air. Filtering facepiece (dust mask) means: A negative pressure particulate respirator with a filter as an integral part of the facepiece or with the entire facepiece composed of the filtering medium. Fit factor means: A quantitative estimate of the fit of a particular respirator to a specific individual, and typically estimates the ratio of the concentration of a substance in ambient air to its concentration inside the respirator when worn. Fit test means: The use of a protocol to qualitatively or quantitatively evaluate the fit of a respirator on an individual. (See also Qualitative fit test QLFT and Quantitative fit test QNFT.) Helmet means: A rigid respiratory inlet covering that also provides head protection against impact and penetration. High efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter means: A filter that is at least 99.97% efficient in removing monodisperse particles of 0.3 micrometers in diameter. The equivalent NIOSH 42 CFR 84 particulate filters are the N100, R100, and P100 filters. Hood means: A respiratory inlet covering that completely covers the head and neck and may also cover portions of the shoulders and torso.


320

Immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH) means: An atmosphere that poses an immediate threat to life, would cause irreversible adverse health effects, or would impair an individual's ability to escape from a dangerous atmosphere. Interior structural firefighting means: The physical activity of fire suppression, rescue or both, inside of buildings or enclosed structures which are involved in a fire situation beyond the incipient stage. (See 29 CFR 1910.155) Loose-fitting facepiece means: A respiratory inlet covering that is designed to form a partial seal with the face. Negative pressure respirator (tight fitting) means: A respirator in which the air pressure inside the facepiece is negative during inhalation with respect to the ambient air pressure outside the respirator. Oxygen deficient atmosphere means: An atmosphere with an oxygen content below 19.5% by volume. Physician or other licensed health care professional (PLHCP) means: An individual whose legally permitted scope of practice (i.e., license, registration, or certification) allows him or her to independently provide, or be delegated the responsibility to provide, some or all of the health care services required by the respiratory protection standard. Positive pressure respirator means: A respirator in which the pressure inside the respiratory inlet covering exceeds the ambient air pressure outside the respirator. Powered air-purifying respirator (PAPR) means: An air-purifying respirator that uses a blower to force the ambient air through air-purifying elements to the inlet covering. Pressure demand respirator means: A positive pressure atmosphere-supplying respirator that admits breathing air to the facepiece when the positive pressure is reduced inside the facepiece by inhalation. Qualitative fit test (QLFT) means: A pass/fail fit test to assess the adequacy of respirator fit that relies on the individual's response to the test agent. Quantitative fit test (QNFT) means: An assessment of the adequacy of respirator fit by numerically measuring the amount of leakage into the respirator. Respiratory inlet covering means: That portion of a respirator that forms the protective barrier between the user's respiratory tract and an air-purifying device or breathing air source, or both. It may be a facepiece, helmet, hood, suit, or a mouthpiece respirator with nose clamp.


321

Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) means: An atmosphere-supplying respirator for which the breathing air source is designed to be carried by the user. Service life means: The period of time that a respirator, filter or sorbent, or other respiratory equipment provides adequate protection to the wearer. Supplied-air respirator (SAR) or airline respirator means: An atmosphere-supplying respirator for which the source of breathing air is not designed to be carried by the user. Tight-fitting facepiece means: A respiratory inlet covering that forms a complete seal with the face. *User seal check means: An action conducted by the respirator user to determine if the respirator is properly seated to the face.


DATE: FEBRUARY 27, 2009 SUBJECT: Scaffolding Safety Program. REGULATORY STANDARDS: 29 CFR 1910.28 Safety Requirements For Scaffolding. 29 CFR 1910.29 Manually Propelled Mobile Scaffolds. BASIS: Scaffolds are a major source of injuries and fatalities. Of the 510,500 injuries and illnesses that occur in the construction industry annually, 9,750 are related to scaffolds. In addition, of the estimated 924 occupational fatalities occurring annually, at least 79 are associated with work on scaffolds. Most of these accidents can be prevented if proper safety precautions are initiated. This poses a serious problem for exposed workers and their employer. The OSHA Standards governing Scaffolding establish uniform requirements to ensure that the hazards existing in U.S. workplaces are evaluated, safety procedures implemented, and that the proper hazard information is transmitted to all affected workers. GENERAL: H3O, Inc. will ensure that all potential hazards regarding Scaffolding in our facility or job sites are evaluated. This standard practice instruction is intended to address comprehensively the issues of; evaluating and identifying potential deficiencies, evaluating the associated potential hazards, communicating information concerning these hazards, and establishing appropriate procedures, and protective measures for employees.


322

Contents of the Scaffolding Safety Program (Industrial) 1. Written Program. 2. General Requirements. 3. Manufacturers Recommendations for Safety. 4. Company Fixed Scaffolding Safety Policy. 5. Company Mobile (Rolling) Scaffolding Safety Policy. 6. Erecting of Scaffolding. 7. Pre-Inspection of Erected Scaffolding. 8. Final Inspection of Erected Scaffolding. 9. Training.

H3O, Inc.Scaffolding Safety Program 1. Written Program. H3O, Inc.will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction on an annual basis, or when changes occur to the governing regulatory standards, that prompt revision of this document, or when facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document. Effective implementation requires a written program for job safety and health, that is endorsed and advocated by the highest level of management within H3O, Inc. and that outlines our goals and plans. This written program will be communicated to all affected personnel. It is designed to establish clear goals, and objectives. 2. General Requirements. All facilities and equipment owned by H3O, Inc. will be maintained in a safe and healthful manner. Certain work conditions may contain a reasonable probability of injury that can be prevented by proper maintenance and supervision. H3O, Inc. will do all possible to ensure the safety of our employees. No employee will knowingly be subjected to a hazardous condition without all possible protective measures first being implemented. 3. Manufacturers Recommendations for Safety. To insure safety and serviceability the general precautions from the manufacture concerning the use of Scaffolding will be observed: 4. Company Fixed Scaffolding Safety Policy. To insure safety and serviceability the following general precautions concerning the care and use of Scaffolding will be observed: 4.1 Footing and anchorages. The footing and or anchorage for scaffolds will be

sound, rigid, and capable of carrying the maximum intended load without settling


323

or displacement. Unstable objects such as barrels, boxes, loose brick, or concrete blocks will not be used to support scaffolds or planks.

4.2 Scaffolds and their components will be capable of supporting without failure

at least four times the maximum intended load. 4.3 Scaffolds will be maintained in a safe condition at all times in accordance

with the manufacturers recommendations. Fixed scaffolds will not be altered or moved horizontally while they are in use or occupied.

4.4 Any scaffold damaged or weakened from any cause will be immediately

repaired and will not be used until repairs have been completed. 4.5 Scaffolds will not be loaded in excess of the working load for which they are

intended. 4.6 All load-carrying timber members of scaffold framing will be a minimum of

1,500 f. (Stress Grade) construction grade lumber. 4.7 All planking will be Scaffold Grade as recognized by grading rules for the

type of wood used. The scaffold manufacturers recommendations will be followed.

4.8 Nails or bolts used in the construction of scaffolds will be of adequate size

and in sufficient numbers at each connection to develop the designed strength of the scaffold. Nails will not be subjected to a straight pull and will be driven full length.

4.9 All planking or platforms will be overlapped (minimum 12 inches) or secured

from movement. 4.10 An access Scaffold or equivalent safe access will be provided. 4.11 Scaffold planks will extend over their end supports not less than 6 inches

nor more than 18 inches. 4.12 The poles, legs, or uprights of scaffolds will be plumb, and securely and

rigidly braced to prevent swaying and displacement. 4.13 Materials being hoisted onto a scaffold will have a tag line. 4.14 Overhead protection will be provided for men on a scaffold exposed to

overhead hazards. 4.15 Scaffolds will be provided with a screen between the toeboard and the

guardrail, extending along the entire opening, consisting of No. 18 gauge U.S.


324

Standard Wire one-half-inch mesh or the equivalent, where persons are required to work or pass under the scaffolds.

4.16 Employees will not work on scaffolds which are covered with ice or snow,

unless all ice or snow is removed and planking sanded to prevent slipping. 4.17 Tools, materials, and debris will not be allowed to accumulate in quantities

to cause a hazard. 4.18 Only treated or protected fiber rope will be used for or near any work

involving the use of corrosive substances or chemicals. 4.19 Wire or fiber rope used for scaffold suspension will be capable of

supporting at least six times the intended load. 4.20 The use of shore scaffolds or lean-to scaffolds will not be used by H3O,

Inc.. 4.21 Lumber sizes, when used in this section, refer to nominal sizes except

where otherwise stated. 4.22 Scaffolds will be secured to permanent structures, through use of anchor

bolts, reveal bolts, or other equivalent means. Window cleaners' anchor bolts will not be used.

4.23 Special precautions will be taken to protect scaffold members, including

any wire or fiber ropes, when using a heat-producing process. 5. Company Mobile (Rolling) Scaffolding Safety Policy. To insure safety and serviceability the following general precautions concerning the care and use of Scaffolding will be observed: 5.1 Working loads. Work platforms and scaffolds will be capable of carrying the

design load under varying circumstances depending upon the conditions of use. 5.2 The design load of all scaffolds will be calculated on the basis of: Light - Designed and constructed to carry a working load of 25 pounds

per square foot. Medium - Designed and constructed to carry a working load of 50 pounds

per square foot. Heavy - Designed and constructed to carry a working load of 75 pounds

per square foot. 5.3 Nails, bolts, or other fasteners used in the construction of ladders, scaffolds,

and towers will be of adequate size and in sufficient numbers at each connection


325

to develop the designed strength of the unit. Nails will be driven full length. (All nails should be immediately withdrawn from dismantled lumber.)

5.4 All exposed surfaces will be free from sharp edges, burrs or other safety

hazards. 5.5 Work levels. The maximum work level height will not exceed four (4) times

the minimum or least base dimensions of any mobile scaffold. Where the basic mobile unit does not meet this requirement, suitable outrigger frames will be employed to achieve this least base dimension, or provisions will be made to guy or brace the unit against tipping.

5.6 The minimum platform width for any work level will not be less than 20

inches for mobile scaffolds (towers). Ladder stands will have a minimum step width of 16 inches.

5.7 The supporting structure for the work level will be rigidly braced, using

adequate cross bracing or diagonal bracing with rigid platforms at each work level.

5.8 The work level platform of scaffolds (towers) will be of wood, aluminum, or

plywood planking, steel or expanded metal, for the full width of the scaffold, except for necessary openings. Work platforms will be secured in place. All planking will be 2-inch (nominal) scaffold grade minimum 1,500 f. (stress grade) construction grade lumber or equivalent.

5.9 All scaffold work levels 10 feet or higher above the ground or floor will have a

standard (4-inch nominal) toeboard. 5.10 All work levels 10 feet or higher above the ground or floor will have a

guardrail of 2- by 4-inch nominal or the equivalent installed no less than 36 inches or more than 42 inches high, with a mid-rail, when required, of 1- by 4-inch nominal lumber or equivalent.

5.11 Wheels or casters. Wheels or casters will be inspected to ensure that they

are provided with strength and dimensions to support four (4) times the design working load.

5.12 All scaffold casters will be inspected to ensure that they are provided with a

positive wheel and/or swivel lock to prevent movement. 5.13 Where leveling of the elevated work platform is required, screw jacks or

other suitable means for adjusting the height will be used. 5.14 Employees are not permitted to ride rolling scaffolds during relocation.


326

5.15 Adjusting screws may not be extended more than 12 inches. 5.16 Before moving the platform secure all equipment and material. 5.17 Casters or wheels must have a serviceable locking device. 5.18 Be aware of overhead obstructions when moving scaffolds. 5.19 Never run over electrical cords. 5.20 Never pull scaffolds from the top, always push at base level. 5.21 Work only from the platform area never extend work beyond guardrailing. 6. Erecting of Scaffolding. All Scaffold Erecting will by done by an out side sorce. No employees of H3O, Inc. will Erect or Motify any Scaffording of any kind. 7. Pre-Inspection of Erected Scaffolding. The three main areas of inspection are for rust, straightness of members, and welds. Only trained employees of H3O, Inc. will conduct the pre-inspection. Pertinent OSHA regulations and information and guidance provided by the manufacturer of the particular type of scaffolding will be used. The following as a minimum apply: 7.1 Rust. Heavily rusted scaffolding equipment is a possible sign of abuse or

neglect. Severely rusted components should be thoroughly inspected and cleaned before approved for use.

7.2 Straightness of members. Mishandling, trucking and storing may cause

damage to scaffolding equipment. All members or parts of all steel scaffolding components should be straight and free from bends, kinks or dents.

7.3 Welds. Scaffolding equipment should be checked before use for damaged

welds and any piece of equipment showing damaged welds or rewelding beyond the original factory weld should not be used. The factory weld reference pertains to location and quality of rewelds.

7.4 Check serviceability of locking devices. 7.5 Check alignment of coupling pins and braces. 7.6 Check serviceability of caster brakes (rolling scaffolds). 8. Final Inspection of Erected Scaffolding. Only trained and authorized employees of H3O, Inc. will conduct the final inspection of erected scaffolding. Pertinent OSHA regulations and information and guidance provided by the manufacturer of the particular type of scaffolding will be used. The following as a minimum apply:


327

8.1 Check for proper support under every leg of every frame. 8.2 Check for wash out (if outside) due to rain. 8.3 Check to ensure all base plates or adjustment screws are in firm contact with

supports. 8.4 Check frames for plumbness and squareness in both directions. 8.5 Check serviceability and correctness of all cross braces. 8.6 Check to ensure that all planking and accessories are properly installed. 8.7 Check to ensure that all guard rails are in place. 8.8 Recheck periodically to ensure conditions remain safe. 8.9 Anything that does not comply shall be tagged out with the description of the

defect found. 9. Training. A training program will be provided for all employees who will be using scaffolding in the course of their duties. The training will be conducted by competent personnel. The program will include but will not be limited to:

A description of fall hazards in the work area or job site

Procedures for using fall prevention and protection systems

Scaffolding access and egress procedures

Scaffolding equipment limitations

Inspection procedures for the equipment 9.1 Initial training. Training will be conducted prior to job assignment. H3O,

INC.will provide training to ensure that the purpose, function, and proper use of scaffolding is understood by employees and that the knowledge and skills required for the safe application, and usage is acquired by employees. This standard practice instruction will be provided to, and read by all employees receiving training. The training will include, as a minimum the following:

9.1.1 Types of scaffolding used by H3O, Inc.. 9.1.2 Recognition of applicable fall hazards associated with the work to be

completed and the locations of such. 9.1.3 Load determination and balancing requirements. 9.1.4 Safety precautions in the use of scaffolds.


328

9.1.5 All other employees whose work operations are or may be in an

area where scaffolding may be utilized, will be instructed to an awareness level concerning the associated hazards.

9.1.6 Equipment maintenance and inspection requirements. 9.1.7 Equipment strengths and limitations. 9.1.8 Certification. H3O, INC.will certify that employee training has been

accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification will contain each employee's name and dates of training. Training will be accomplished by competent personnel.

9.2 Refresher training. This standard practice instruction will be provided to, and

read by all employees receiving refresher training. The training content will be identical to initial training. Refresher training will be conducted on an as needed basis or when the following conditions are met, whichever event occurs sooner.

9.2.1 Whenever (and prior to) a change in their job assignments, a

change in the type of scaffolding equipment used, or when a known hazard is added to the work environment which affects this program.

9.2.2 Additional retraining will also be conducted whenever a periodic

inspection reveals, or whenever H3O, INC.has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or use of scaffolding equipment or procedures.

9.2.3 Whenever a scaffolding safety procedure fails. 9.2.4 The retraining will reestablish employee proficiency and introduce

new or revised methods and procedures, as necessary. 9.2.5 Certification. H3O, INC.will certify that employee training has been

accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification will contain each employee's name and dates of training. Training will be accomplished by competent personnel.

9.3 H3O, Inc. shall ensure that our employees understand and comply with the restrictions and prohibitions of the Host employer's Policies and Procedures.


329


DATE: June 14, 2009 SUBJECT: Sling Safety Program REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.184 ANSI - B30.9-1971 BASIS: Serious injury or death can be the result of improper use, or use of defective slings. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) estimates that most of these types of accidents can be prevented if proper safety precautions at job sites are initiated. This poses a serious problem for exposed workers and their employer. The OSHA sling safety standard establishes uniform requirements to ensure that the hazards associated with the use of slings in U.S. workplaces are evaluated, safety procedures implemented, and that the proper hazard information is transmitted to all affected workers. GENERAL: H3O Inc. will ensure that all slings used within our facility(s) are evaluated. This standard practice instruction is intended to address comprehensively the issues of; evaluating and identifying serviceable and unserviceable slings, evaluating the associated potential hazards, communicating information concerning these hazards, and establishing appropriate procedures, and protective measures for employees.

Contents of the Sling Safety Program

1. Written program. 2. General requirements. 3. Initial training requirements. 4. Refresher training requirements. 5. Safe operating practices. 6. Sling inspections. 7. Sling inventory. 8. Requirements for specific types of slings. 9. Definitions.

H3O Inc. Sling Safety Program


330

1. Written program. H3O Inc. will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction on an annual basis, or when changes occur to 29 CFR 1910.184, that prompt revision of this document, or when facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document. Effective implementation of this program requires support from all levels of management within this company. This written program will be communicated to all personnel that are affected by it. It encompasses the total workplace, regardless of number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals, and objectives. 2. General requirements. H3O Inc. will establish sling safety operational procedures through the use of this document. This standard practice instruction applies to slings used in conjunction with other material handling equipment for the movement of material by hoisting. The types of slings covered are those made from alloy steel chain, wire rope, metal mesh, natural or synthetic fiber rope (conventional three strand construction), and synthetic web (nylon, polyester, and polypropylene). 3. Initial training. Training shall be conducted prior to job assignment. This employer shall provide training to ensure that the purpose, function, and proper use of slings is understood by employees and that the knowledge and skills required for the safe application, and usage is acquired by employees. This standard practice instruction shall be provided to, and read by all employees receiving training. The training shall include, as a minimum the following: 3.1 Types of slings appropriate for use. 3.2 Recognition of applicable hazards associated with the work to be completed. 3.3 Load determination and balancing requirements. 3.4 Procedures for removal of a sling from service. 3.5 All other employees whose work operations are or may be in an area where

slings may be utilized, shall be instructed to an awareness level concerning hazards associated with slings.

3.6 Sling identification. Slings having identification numbers will be checked for

legibility. Slings having illegible identification will be turned in for load testing and remarking.

3.7 Certification. This employer shall certify that employee training has been


3.8 Sling trainers. The following employees or position titles will receive training

and as required, serve as sling trainers


331

4. Refresher training. This standard practice instruction shall be provided to, and read by all employees receiving refresher training. The training content shall be identical to initial training. Refresher training will be conducted on a(n) annual basis or when the following conditions are met, which ever event occurs sooner. 4.1 Retraining shall be provided for all authorized and affected employees

whenever (and prior to) there being a change in their job assignments, a change in the type of sling used, equipment being loaded, loading procedures, or when a known hazard is added to the loading environment.


reveals, or whenever this employer has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or use of sling procedures.


revised methods and procedures, as necessary. 4.4 Certification. This employer shall certify that employee training has been


5. Safe operating practices. Whenever any sling is used, the following practices shall be observed: 5.1 Slings that are damaged or defective shall not be used. 5.2 Slings shall not be shortened with knots or bolts or other makeshift devices. 5.3 Sling legs shall not be kinked. 5.4 Slings shall not be loaded in excess of their rated capacities. 5.5 Slings used in a basket hitch shall have the loads balanced to prevent

slippage. 5.6 Slings shall be securely attached to their loads. 5.7 Slings shall be padded or protected from the sharp edges of their loads. 5.8 Suspended loads shall be kept clear of all obstructions. 5.9 All employees shall be kept clear of loads about to be lifted and of

suspended loads.


332

5.10 Hands or fingers shall not be placed between the sling and its load while the sling is being tightened around the load.

5.11 Shock loading is prohibited. 5.12 A sling shall not be pulled from under a load when the load is resting on the

sling. 5.13 Before being lifted completely from its resting loads will be checked for

proper balance. 5.14 Unapproved makeshift slings such as fan belts will never be used at this

company. 5.15 Allways use a tag line to help control the load being lifited 6. Sling inspections. Where not other wise delineated, sling inspections will be conducted in accordance with this section. 6.1 Sling inspectors. employees will receive training and as required, 6.2 Inspection intervals. 6.2.1 Daily inspections. Slings will be inspected each day before being

used, the sling and all fastenings and attachments shall be inspected for damage or defects.

6.2.2 Periodic inspections. Supervisors will determine and schedule

additional inspections periodically during sling use, where service conditions warrant. A thorough periodic inspection shall be made on a regular basis, to be determined on the basis of, frequency of sling use; severity of service conditions; nature of lifts being made; and experience gained on the service life of slings used in similar circumstances.

6.2.3 Scheduled inspections. The inspections will be conducted on a

annual basis. Such inspections shall in no event be at intervals greater than once every 12 months.

6.3 Inspection documentation. Slings having identification numbers will be

documented as having been inspected. Scheduled inspections will be documented as having been conducted.

6.4 Inspection documentation storage. Inspection records and certifications

shall be maintained in the shop.


333

6.5 Damaged/unserviceable slings. Slings found to be damaged or unserviceable will be immediately removed from service and disposed of.

6.6 Rigging equipment not in use shall be removed from the immediate work

area so as not to present a hazard to employees. 7. Safe operating practices for rigging equipment. Whenever rigging equipment is used, the following practices shall be observed: 7.1 Rigging equipment that is damaged or defective shall not be used. 7.2 Rigging equipment shall not be loaded in excess of their rated capacities. 7.3 Rigging equipment used in a basket hitch shall have the loads balanced to

prevent slippage. 7.4 Rigging equipment shall be securely attached to their loads. 7.5 Rigging equipment shall be padded or protected from the sharp edges of their loads. 7.6 Suspended loads shall be kept clear of all obstructions. 7.7 All employees shall be kept clear of loads about to be lifted and of

suspended loads. 7.8 Hands or fingers shall not be placed between the sling and its load while the

sling is being tightened around the load. 7.9 Shock loading is prohibited. 7.10 All latches will be inspected and in good working order. Hooks on overhaul

ball assemblies, lower load blocks, or other attachment assemblies shall be of a type that can be closed and locked, eliminating the hook throat opening. Alternatively, an alloy anchor type shackle with a bolt, nut and retaining pin may be used.

7.11 Before being lifted completely from its resting loads will be checked for

proper balance. 7.12 Unapproved makeshift rigging equipment will never be used at this

company. 7.13 Allways use a tag line to help control the load being lifited


334

8. Requirements for specific types of slings. 8.1 Alloy steel chain slings. 8.1.1 Sling identification. Alloy steel chain slings shall have permanently

affixed durable identification stating size, grade, rated capacity, and reach. 8.1.2 Attachments. 8.1.2.1 Hooks, rings, oblong links, pear shaped links, welded or

mechanical coupling links or other attachments shall have a rated capacity at least equal to that of the alloy steel chain with which they are used or the sling shall not be used in excess of the rated capacity of the weakest component.

8.1.2.2 Makeshift links or fasteners formed from bolts or rods, or

other such attachments, shall not be used. 8.1.3 Inspections. 8.1.3.1 A thorough periodic inspection of alloy steel chain slings in

use shall be made on a regular basis, to be determined on the basis of, frequency of sling use; severity of service conditions; nature of lifts being made; and experience gained on the service life of slings used in similar circumstances. Such inspections shall in no event be at intervals greater than once every 12 months.

8.1.3.2 This employer shall make and maintain a record of the

most recent month in which each alloy steel chain sling was thoroughly inspected, and shall make such record available for examination by employees, OSHA personnel or other persons having a need to know.

8.1.3.3 Inspection of alloy steel chain slings shall be performed by

any member qualified by this company to inspect slings, and shall include a thorough inspection for wear, defective welds, deformation and increase in length. Where such defects or deterioration are present, the sling shall be immediately removed from service.

8.1.4 Proof testing. This company shall ensure that before use, each

new, repaired, or reconditioned alloy steel chain sling, including all welded components in the sling assembly, shall be proof tested by the sling manufacturer in accordance with paragraph 5.2 of the American Society of Testing and Materials Specification A391-65 (ANSI G61.1 1968). The


335

certificate of the proof test and shall be retained and made available for examination to qualified persons.

8.1.5 Sling use. Alloy steel chain slings shall not be used with loads in

excess of the rated capacities prescribed in Table N-184-1 of 29 CFR 1910.184. Slings not included in this table shall be used only in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

8.1.6 Safe operating temperatures. Alloy steel chain slings shall be

permanently removed from service if they are heated above 1000F. When exposed to service temperatures in excess of 600F, maximum working load limits permitted in Table N-184-1 of 29 CFR 1910.184 shall be reduced in accordance with the chain or sling manufacturer's recommendations.

8.1.7 Repairing and reconditioning alloy steel chain slings. 8.1.7.1 Worn or damaged alloy steel chain slings or attachments

shall not be used until repaired. When welding or heat testing is performed, slings shall not be used unless repaired, reconditioned and proof tested by the sling manufacturer.

8.1.7.2 Mechanical coupling links or low carbon steel repair links

shall not be used to repair broken lengths of chain. 8.1.8 Effects of wear. If the chain size at any point of any link is less than

that stated in Table N-184-2 of 29 CFR 1910.184, the sling shall be removed from service.

8.1.9 Deformed attachments. 8.1.9.1 Alloy steel chain slings with cracked or deformed master

links, coupling links or other components shall be removed from service.

8.1.9.2 Slings shall be removed from service if hooks are cracked,

have been opened more than 15 percent of the normal throat opening measured at the narrowest point or twisted more than 10 degrees from the plane of the unbent hook.

8.2 Wire rope slings. 8.2.1 Sling use. Wire rope slings shall not be used with loads in excess

of the rated capacities shown in Tables N-184-3 through N-184-14 of 29 CFR 1910.184. Slings not included in these tables shall be used only in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.


336

8.2.2 Minimum sling lengths. 8.2.2.1 Cable laid and 6 x 19 and 6 x 37 slings shall have a

minimum clear length of wire rope 10 times the component rope diameter between splices, sleeves or end fittings.

8.2.2.2 Braided slings shall have a minimum clear length of wire

rope 40 times the component rope diameter between the loops or end fittings.

8.2.2.3 Cable laid grommets, strand laid grommets and endless

slings shall have a minimum circumferential length of 96 times their body diameter.

8.2.3 Safe operating temperatures. Fiber core wire rope slings of all

grades shall be permanently removed from service if they are exposed to temperatures in excess of 200 F. When nonfiber core wire rope slings of any grade are used at temperatures above 400 F or below minus 60 F, recommendations of the sling manufacturer regarding use at that temperature shall be followed.

8.2.4 End attachments. 8.2.4.1 Welding of end attachments, except covers to thimbles,

shall be performed prior to the assembly of the sling. 8.2.4.2 All welded end attachments shall not be used unless proof

tested at twice their rated capacity prior to initial use. Certificates of the proof test will be retained a made it available for examination by authorized persons.

8.2.5 Removal from service. Wire rope slings shall be immediately

removed from service if any of the following conditions are present: 8.2.5.1 Ten randomly distributed broken wires in one rope lay, or

five broken wires in one strand in one rope lay. 8.2.5.2 Wear or scraping of one-third the original diameter of

outside individual wires. 8.2.5.3 Kinking, crushing, bird caging or any other damage

resulting in distortion of the wire rope structure. 8.2.5.4 Evidence of heat damage.


337

8.2.5.5 End attachments that are cracked, deformed or worn. 8.2.5.6 Hooks that have been opened more than 15 percent of the

normal throat opening measured at the narrowest point or twisted more than 10 degrees from the plane of the unbent hook.

8.2.5.7 Corrosion of the rope or end attachments. 8.3 Metal mesh slings. 8.3.1 Sling marking. Each metal mesh sling shall have permanently

affixed to it a durable marking that states the rated capacity for vertical basket hitch and choker hitch loadings.

8.3.2 Handles. Handles shall have a rated capacity at least equal to the

metal fabric and exhibit no deformation after proof testing. 8.3.3 Attachments of handles to fabric. The fabric and handles shall be

joined so that: 8.3.3.1 The rated capacity of the sling is not reduced. 8.3.3.2 The load is evenly distributed across the width of the fabric. 8.3.3.3 Sharp edges will not damage the fabric. 8.3.4 Sling coatings. Coatings which diminish the rated capacity of a

sling shall not be applied. 8.3.5 Sling testing. All new and repaired metal mesh slings, including

handles, shall not be used unless proof tested by the manufacturer or equivalent entity at a minimum of 1 1/2 times their rated capacity. Elastomer impregnated slings shall be proof tested before coating.

8.3.6 Proper use of metal mesh slings. Metal mesh slings shall not be

used to lift loads in excess of their rated capacities as prescribed in Table N-184-15 of 29 CFR 1910.184. Slings not included in this table shall be used only in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

8.3.7 Safe operating temperatures. Metal mesh slings which are not

impregnated with elastomers may be used in a temperature range from minus 20 F to plus 550 F without decreasing the working load limit. Metal mesh slings impregnated with polyvinyl chloride or neoprene may be used only in a temperature range from zero degrees to plus 200 F. For operations outside these temperature ranges or for metal mesh slings


338

impregnated with other materials, the sling manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed.

8.3.8 Repairs. 8.3.8.1 Metal mesh slings which are repaired shall not be used

unless repaired by a metal mesh sling manufacturer or an equivalent entity.

8.3.8.2 Once repaired, each sling shall be permanently marked or

tagged, or a written record maintained, to indicate the date and nature of the repairs and the person or organization that performed the repairs. Records of repairs shall be made available for examination.

8.3.9 Removal from service. Metal mesh slings shall be immediately

removed from service if any of the following conditions are present: 8.3.9.1 A broken weld or broken brazed joint along the sling edge. 8.3.9.2 Reduction in wire diameter of 25 per cent due to abrasion

or 15 per cent due to corrosion. 8.3.9.3 Lack of flexibility due to distortion of the fabric. 8.3.9.4 Distortion of the female handle so that the depth of the slot

is increased more than 10 per cent. 8.3.9.5 Distortion of either handle so that the width of the eye is

decreased more than 10 per cent. 8.3.9.6 A 15 percent reduction of the original cross sectional area

of metal at any point around the handle eye. 8.3.9.7 Distortion of either handle out of its plane. 8.4 Natural and synthetic fiber rope slings. 8.4.1 Sling use. 8.4.1.1 Fiber rope slings made from conventional three strand

construction fiber rope shall not be used with loads in excess of the rated capacities prescribed in Tables N-184-16 through N-184-19 of 29 CFR 1910.184.


339

8.4.1.2 Fiber rope slings shall have a diameter of curvature meet of 29 CFR 1910.184.

8.4.1.3 Slings not included in these tables shall be used only in

accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 8.4.2 Safe operating temperatures. Natural and synthetic fiber rope

slings, except for wet frozen slings, may be used in a temperature range from minus 20 F to plus 180 F without decreasing the working load limit. For operations outside this temperature range and for wet frozen slings, the sling manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed.

8.4.3 Splicing. Spliced fiber rope slings shall not be used unless they

have been spliced in accordance with the following minimum requirements and in accordance with any additional recommendations of the manufacturer:

8.4.3.1 In manila rope, eye splices shall consist of at least three full

tucks, and short splices shall consist of at least six full tucks, three on each side of the splice center line.

8.4.3.2 In synthetic fiber rope, eye splices shall consist of at least

four full tucks, and short splices shall consist of at least eight full tucks, four on each side of the center line.

8.4.3.3 Strand end tails shall not be trimmed flush with the surface

of the rope immediately adjacent to the full tucks. This applies to all types of fiber rope and both eye and short splices. For fiber rope under one inch in diameter, the tail shall project at least six rope diameters beyond the last full tuck. For fiber rope one inch in diameter and larger, the tail shall project at least six inches beyond the last full tuck. Where a projecting tail interferes with the use of the sling, the tail shall be tapered and spliced into the body of the rope using at least two additional tucks (which will require a tail length of approximately six rope diameters beyond the last full tuck).

8.4.3.4 Fiber rope slings shall have a minimum clear length of rope

between eye splices equal to 10 times the rope diameter. 8.4.3.5 Knots shall not be used in lieu of splices. 8.4.3.6 Clamps not designed specifically for fiber ropes shall not be

used for splicing.


340

8.4.3.7 For all eye splices, the eye shall be of such size to provide an included angle of not greater than 60 degrees at the splice when the eye is placed over the load or support.

8.4.4 End attachments. Fiber rope slings shall not be used if end

attachments in contact with the rope have sharp edges or projections. 8.4.5 Removal from service. Natural and synthetic fiber rope slings shall

be immediately removed from service if any of the following conditions are present:

8.4.5.1 Abnormal wear. 8.4.5.2 Powdered fiber between strands. 8.4.5.3 Broken or cut fibers. 8.4.5.4 Variations in the size or roundness of strands. 8.4.5.5 Discoloration or rotting. 8.4.5.6 Distortion of hardware in the sling. 8.4.6 Repairs. Only fiber rope slings made from new rope shall be used.

Use of repaired or reconditioned fiber rope slings is prohibited. 8.5 Synthetic web slings. 8.5.1 Sling identification. Each sling shall be marked or coded to show

the rated capacities for each type of hitch and type of synthetic web material.

8.5.2 Webbing. Synthetic webbing shall be of uniform thickness and

width and selvage edges shall not be split from the webbing's width. 8.5.3 Fittings. Fittings shall be: 8.5.3.1 Of a minimum breaking strength equal to that of the sling. 8.5.3.2 Free of all sharp edges that could in any way damage the

webbing. 8.5.4 Attachment of end fittings to webbing and formation of eyes.

Stitching shall be the only method used to attach end fittings to webbing and to form eyes. The thread shall be in an even pattern and contain a


341

sufficient number of stitches to develop the full breaking strength of the sling.

8.5.5 Sling use. Synthetic web slings illustrated in Fig. N-184-6 of 29

CFR 1910.184 shall not be used with loads in excess of the rated capacities specified in Tables N-184-20 through N-184-22 of 29 CFR 1910.184. Slings not included in these tables shall be used only in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

8.5.6 Environmental conditions. When synthetic web slings are used, the

following precautions shall be taken: 8.5.6.1 Nylon web slings shall not be used where fumes, vapors,

sprays, mists or liquids of acids or phenolics are present 8.5.6.2 Polyester and polypropylene web slings shall not be used

where fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of caustics are present.

8.5.6.3 Web slings with aluminum fittings shall not be used where

fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of caustics are present. 8.5.7 Safe operating temperatures. Synthetic web slings of polyester and

nylon shall not be used at temperatures in excess of 180 F. Polypropylene web slings shall not be used at temperatures in excess of 200 F.

8.5.8 Repairs. 8.5.8.1 Synthetic web slings which are repaired shall not be used

unless repaired by a sling manufacturer or an equivalent entity. 8.5.8.2 Each repaired sling shall be proof tested by the

manufacturer or equivalent entity to twice the rated capacity prior to its return to service. The employer shall retain a certificate of the proof test and make it available for examination.

8.5.8.3 Slings, including webbing and fittings, which have been

repaired in a temporary manner shall not be used. 8.5.9 Removal from service. Synthetic web slings shall be

immediately removed from service if any of the following conditions are present:

8.5.9.1 Acid or caustic burns.


342

8.5.9.2 Melting or charring of any part of the sling surface. 8.5.9.3 Snags, punctures, tears or cuts. 8.5.9.4 Broken or worn stitches. 8.5.9.5 Distortion of fittings. 9. Definitions. Angle of loading is the inclination of a leg or branch of a sling measured from the horizontal or vertical plane as shown in Fig. N-184-5 of 29 CFR 1910.184; provided that an angle of loading of five degrees or less from the vertical may be considered a vertical angle of loading. Basket hitch is a sling configuration whereby the sling is passed under the load and has both ends, end attachments, eyes or handles on the hook or a single master link. Braided wire rope is a wire rope formed by plaiting component wire ropes. Bridle wire rope sling is a sling composed of multiple wire rope legs with the top ends gathered in a fitting that goes over the lifting hook. Cable laid endless sling mechanical joint is a wire rope sling made endless by joining the ends of a single length of cable laid rope with one or more metallic fittings. Cable laid grommet-hand tucked is an endless wire rope sling made from one length of rope wrapped six times around a core formed by hand tucking the ends of the rope inside the six wraps. Cable laid rope is a wire rope composed of six wire ropes wrapped around a fiber or wire rope core. Cable laid rope sling mechanical joint is a wire rope sling made from a cable laid rope with eyes fabricated by pressing or swaging one or more metal sleeves over the rope junction. Choker hitch is a sling configuration with one end of the sling passing under the load and through an end attachment, handle or eye on the other end of the sling. Coating is an elastomer or other suitable material applied to a sling or to a sling component to impart desirable properties. Cross rod is a wire used to join spirals of metal mesh to form a complete fabric. (See Fig. N-184-2 of 29 CFR 1910.184.)


343

Designated means selected or assigned by the employer or the employer's representative as being qualified to perform specific duties. Equivalent entity is a person or organization (including an employer) which, by possession of equipment, technical knowledge and skills, can perform with equal competence the same repairs and tests as the person or organization with which it is equated. Fabric (metal mesh) is the flexible portion of a metal mesh sling consisting of a series of transverse coils and cross rods. Female handle (choker) is a handle with a handle eye and a slot of such dimension as to permit passage of a male handle thereby allowing the use of a metal mesh sling in a choker hitch. (See Fig. N-184-1 of 29 CFR 1910.184.) Handle is a terminal fitting to which metal mesh fabric is attached. (See Fig. N-184-1 of 29 CFR 1910.184.) Handle eye is an opening in a handle of a metal mesh sling shaped to accept a hook, shackle or other lifting device. (See Fig. N-184-1 of 29 CFR 1910.184.) Hitch is a sling configuration whereby the sling is fastened to an object or load, either directly to it or around it. Link is a single ring of a chain. Male handle (triangle) is a handle with a handle eye. Master coupling link is an alloy steel welded coupling link used as an intermediate link to join alloy steel chain to master links. (See Fig. N-184-3 of 29 CFR 1910.184.) Master link or gathering ring is a forged or welded steel link used to support all members (legs) of an alloy steel chain sling or wire rope sling. (See Fig. N-184-3 of 29 CFR 1910.184.) Mechanical coupling link is a nonwelded, mechanically closed steel link used to attach master links, hooks, etc., to alloy steel chain. Proof load is the load applied in performance of a proof test. Proof test is a nondestructive tension test performed by the sling manufacturer or an equivalent entity to verify construction and workmanship of a sling. Rated capacity or working load limit is the maximum working load permitted by the provisions of this section.


344

Reach is the effective length of an alloy steel chain sling measured from the top bearing surface of the upper terminal component to the bottom bearing surface of the lower terminal component. Selvage edge is the finished edge of synthetic webbing designed to prevent unraveling. Sling is an assembly which connects the load to the material handling equipment. Sling manufacturer is a person or organization that assembles sling components into their final form for sale to users. Spiral is a single transverse coil that is the basic element from which metal mesh is fabricated. (See Fig. N-184-2 of 29 CFR 1910.184.) Strand laid endless sling-mechanical joint is a wire rope sling made endless from one length of rope with the ends joined by one or more metallic fittings. Strand laid grommet-hand tucked is an endless wire rope sling made from one length of strand wrapped six times around a core formed by hand tucking the ends of the strand inside the six wraps. Strand laid rope is a wire rope made with strands (usually six or eight) wrapped around a fiber core, wire strand core, or independent wire rope core (IWRC). Vertical hitch is a method of supporting a load by a single, vertical part or leg of the sling. (See Fig. N-184-4 of 29 CFR 1910.184.)


DATE: FEBRUARY 27, 2009 SUBJECT: OSHA Recordkeeping Program REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR 1904 BASIS: Records provide employers and OSHA with statistical data to enable safety programs to determine where emphasis should be placed in order to mitigate or eliminate injuries or accidents in the future. The OSHA Recordkeeping Standard establishes uniform requirements to make sure that the illnesses and injuries sustained in U.S. workplaces are evaluated, and that this information is properly collected, compiled, retained, analyzed, and transmitted to all affected workers and to OSHA. GENERAL: H3O, Inc. fully understands that companies with eleven (11) or more employees at any time during the calendar year must comply with the provisions of 29


345

CFR 1904. This standard practice instruction provides for recordkeeping and reporting requirements covered under 29 CFR 1904 as necessary or appropriate for developing information regarding the causes and prevention of occupational accidents and illnesses, and for maintaining a program of collection, compilation, and analysis of occupational safety and health statistics both for H3O, Inc. and as part of the national system for analysis of occupational safety and health.

Contents of the OSHA Recordkeeping Program

1. Written Program

2. General Recordkeeping Requirements

3. Log of Injuries and Illnesses (OSHA 300). 4. Illness and Injury Report (OSHA 301

5. Summary of Illnesses and Injuries (OSHA 300A

6. Records Retention

7. Access to Records

8. Change of Ownership

9. Petitions for Recordkeeping Exceptions

10. Statistical Program

11. Recordability and Classification

12. Annual OSHA Injury and Illness Surveys

13. Appendix A - OSHA 300

14. Appendix B - OSHA 301

15. Appendix C - OSHA 300A

H3O, Inc. OSHA Recordkeeping Program

1. Written Program. H3O, Inc. will develop and maintain a written OSHA Recordkeeping program. H3O, Inc. will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction on an annual basis, or when changes occur to 29 CFR 1904, that prompt revision of this document, or when facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document. Effective implementation of this program requires support from all levels of management within H3O, Inc.. This written program will be communicated where required, to all personnel that are affected by it. It encompasses the total workplace, regardless of number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals, and objectives. 2. General Recordkeeping Requirements. H3O, Inc. fully understands that companies with eleven (11) or more employees at any time during the calendar year immediately preceding the current calendar year must comply with the provisions of 29 CFR 1904. This section provides for recordkeeping and reporting by H3O, Inc. covered under 29 CFR 1904 as necessary or appropriate for developing information regarding


346

the causes and prevention of occupational accidents and illnesses, and for maintaining a program of collection, compilation, and analysis of occupational safety and health statistics both for H3O, Inc. and as part of the national system for analysis of occupational safety and health. Records shall be established on a calendar year basis. 2.1 H3O, Inc. will report under 29 CFR 1904 concerning fatalities or multiple

hospitalization accidents. 2.2 H3O, Inc. will maintain a log of occupational injuries and illnesses under 29

CFR 1904 as required by the standard. 3. Log of Injuries and Illnesses (OSHA 300). The log will be used for classifying occupational injuries and illnesses, and for noting the extent of each case. The log shows when the occupational injury or illness occurred, to whom, the regular job of the injured or ill person at the time of the injury or illness exposure the department in which the person was employed, the kind of injury or illness, how much time was lost, whether the case resulted in a fatality, etc. H3O, Inc. shall: 3.1 Maintain a log and summary of all recordable occupational injuries and

illnesses by calendar year. 3.1.1 The form will be updated to include newly discovered cases and to

reflect changes which occur in recorded cases after the end of the calendar year. Although all OSHA injury and illness records will be retained, only the log must be updated by H3O, Inc.. If, during the 5-year retention period, there is a change in the extent or outcome of an injury or illness which affects an entry on a previous year's log, then the first entry will be lined out and a corrected entry made on that log. New entries for previously unrecorded cases that are discovered will also be documented. Log totals will also be modified to reflect these changes.

3.2 Enter each recordable injury and illness on the log and summary as early as

practicable but no later than 7 days after receiving information that a recordable injury or illness has occurred. For this purpose OSHA Form No. 300 or an equivalent which is as readable and comprehensible to a person not familiar with it will be used. Computerized versions are acceptable so long as they contain the same information as the OSHA version.

3.3 If H3O, Inc. elects to maintain the log of occupational injuries and illnesses at

a place other than this establishment or by means of data-processing equipment, or both, it will meet the following criteria:

3.3.1 There will be available at the place where the log is maintained

sufficient information to complete the log to a date within 7 working days after receiving information that a recordable case has occurred.


347

3.3.2 At each facility belonging to H3O, Inc., there will be available a copy of the log which reflects separately the injury and illness experience of that establishment.

3.4 Circumstances when an employee’s name should be omitted from the OSHA

Form 300. The words “privacy case” will be inserted instead of the persons name.

3.4.1 Injury or illness to an intimate part of the body. 3.4.2 Injury or illness resulting from a sexual assault. 3.4.3 A mental illness. 3.4.4 A case of HIV infection, hepatitis, or tuberculosis. 3.4.5 A needlestick or “sharps” cut from potentially contaminated blood. 3.4.6 Other illness where the employee requests omissions of their name. 3.4.7 A case of HIV infection, hepatitis, or tuberculosis. 4. Illness and Injury Report (OSHA 301). In addition to the log of occupational injuries and illnesses (OSHA 300) H3O, Inc. shall maintain the OSHA 301 (illness and injury report). The record shall be completed in the detail prescribed in the accompanying instructions provided by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration. Computerized versions are acceptable so long as they contain the same information as the OSHA version. 4.1 Fatality Reporting Or Multiple Hospitalization. The site controlling employer or

designee will be responsible for filing a report if no more than two employees of a single employer were hospitalized but, collectively, three or more workers were hospitalized as in-patients. H3O, Inc. will report the following to the nearest OSHA office within 8 hours of a work related fatality.

The Establishment Name; The Location of the Incident; The Time of the Incident; The Number of Fatalities or Hospitalized Employees; The Names of Any Injured Employees; Contact Person and His or Her Phone Number; and A Brief Description of the Incident.

5. Summary of Illnesses and Injuries (OSHA 300A). H3O, Inc. shall post an annual summary of occupational injuries and illnesses for each facility under our control on

February 1st for 3 months (Feb 1 – Apr 30). The summary shall contain information


348

from the previous year. This summary shall consist of a copy of the year's totals from the form OSHA No. 300 and the following information from that form: 5.1 Calendar year covered. 5.2 Company Name and establishment address. 5.3 Certification signature, title, and date by a company executive. 5.4 A form OSHA No. 300A shall be used in presenting the summary. If no

injuries or illnesses occurred in the year, zeros will be entered on the totals line, and the form posted.

5.6 H3O, Inc. shall post a copy of the establishment's summary in each facility in

the manner required under 29 CFR 1904 and 1903. The summary shall be completed in the detail prescribed in the accompanying instructions provided by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration. Computerized versions are acceptable so long as they contain the same information as the OSHA version.

6. Records Retention. Records maintained by H3O, Inc. will be retained for the following time periods following the end of the year to which they relate. 6.1 Log occupational injuries and illnesses (OSHA 300 or equivalent) as

described in 29 CFR 1904.2. Retained for 3 years. 6.2 Supplementary records (OSHA 301 or equivalent) for each occupational

injury or illness for this facility as described in 29 CFR 1904.4. Retained for 3 years.

6.3 Employee exposure and medical records for company employees as

described in 29 CFR 1910.20. Retained for 30 years. 6.4 Noise exposure measurement records as described in 29 CFR 1910.95.

Retained for 25 years. 6.5 Audiometric test records as described in 29 CFR 1910.95. Retained for the

duration of the affected employee's employment. 7. Access to Records. H3O, Inc. shall provide, upon request, records provided for in 29 CFR 1904, for inspection and copying by any representative of the Secretary of Labor for the purpose of carrying out the provisions of the OSHA act, and by representatives of the Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare, or by any representative of a State accorded jurisdiction for occupational safety and health inspections or for statistical compilation, or by any employee for their personal records only. These records are filed in a locked cabinet located in our office.


349

8. Change of Ownership. Should H3O, Inc. changed ownership, the company shall notify the buyers of the requirement to preserve those records, if any, of the prior ownership which are required to be kept. 9. Petitions for Recordkeeping Exceptions. Should H3O, Inc. wish to maintain records in a manner different from that required, the company will submit a petition containing the information specified by the Regional Commissioner of the Bureau of Labor Statistics in our region. 10. Statistical Program. H3O, Inc. will comply with all requirements to maintain, provide, and use statistical summaries. Upon receipt of an Occupational Injuries and Illnesses Survey Form, H3O, Inc. shall promptly complete the form in accordance with the instructions contained therein, and return it in accordance with the instructions. 11. Recordability and Classification. 11.1 Case analysis. The following decision logic will be followed: 11.1.1 Determine whether a case occurred (death, injury, illness). 11.1.2 Establish that the case was work related.

11.1.3 Work related means: Cases resulting from an event or exposure in the work environment.

An event or exposure in the work environment either caused or contributed to the resulting

condition or; An event or exposure in the work environment significantly aggravated a pre-

existing injury or illness.

In addition to the physical location, equipment or materials used in the course of an employee's work are also considered part of the employee's work environment.

11.2 Establishing that the case was not work related. 11.2.1 The case will be considered not work related when an employee is

off duty on our premises as a member of the general public and not as an employee.

11.2.2 The case will be considered not work related when an employee

has symptoms that merely surface on company premises, but are the result of a nonwork-related event or exposure off the premises.

11.3 Determining if the case is an illness or injury. 11.3.1 Illness cases. Illnesses usually result from a long term exposure,

or cases where the illness does not develop as the result of an


350

instantaneous event. This concept of illness includes acute illnesses which result from exposures of relatively short duration.

11.3.2 Injury cases. Injuries are only required to be recorded when they

require medical attention (other than first aid). Injuries are usually caused by instantaneous events in the work environment. Cases resulting from anything other than instantaneous events are considered illnesses. This concept of illness includes acute illnesses which result from exposures of relatively short duration.

11.4 Recordable case. If the case is an injury, decide if it is recordable. The

following criteria will be used as a basis for recordability. Injuries or illnesses resulting in, or requiring:

11.4.1 Death 11.4.2 Loss of consciousness, 11.4.3 Days away from work, 11.4.4 Restricted work activity; 11.4.5 Job transfer; 11.4.6 Medical treatment beyond first aid; 11.4.7 Related injury or illness that is diagnosed by a physician or other licensed health care professional; 11.4.8 Work- related case involving cancer, 11.4.9 Chronic irreversible disease 11.4.10 Fractured or cracked bone 11.4.12 Punctured eardrum. 11.4.13 Any needlestick injury or cut from a sharp object that is contaminated with another person’s blood or other potentially infectious material. 11.4.14 Tuberculosis infection as evidenced by a positive skin test or diagnosis by a physician or other licensed health care professional after exposure to a known case of active tuberculosis.


351

11.4.15 Any case requiring an employee to be medically removed under the requirements of an OSHA health standard. 11.4.16 Positive skin test or diagnosis by a physician or other licensed health care professional after exposure to a known case of active tuberculosis. 11.4.17 Medical treatment includes managing and caring for a patient for the purpose of combating disease or disorder. 11.4.18 Any other condition required under 29 CFR 1904.

11.5 Illness case. Generally, occupationally induced illness should be recorded as a separate entry on the OSHA 300 (or equivalent) log. However, certain illnesses, such as silicosis, may have prolonged effects which recur over time. The recurrence of these symptoms will not be recorded as new cases on the OSHA forms. The recurrence of symptoms of previous illness may require adjustments of entries on the log for previously recorded illnesses to reflect possible change in the extent or outcome of the particular case. Where it is unclear where an entry should be made, ____________ telephone ________ will be contacted to offer advice for proper annotation.

11.5.1 Cases not resulting in death or lost workdays. These cases

consist of the relatively less serious injuries and illnesses which satisfy the criteria for recordability but which do not result in death or require the affected employee to have days away from work or days of restricted work activity beyond the date of injury or onset of illness.

12. Annual OSHA Injury and Illness Surveys. OSHA has the authority to collect establishment-specific data on different work places. These surveys require employers to report information to OSHA that is contained in records that employers are required to create and maintain pursuant to 29 CFR 1904, and the number of workers they employed and hours their employees worked during designated periods. 12.1 H3O, Inc. will, upon receipt of OSHA’s Annual Survey Form, report to

OSHA or OSHA’s designee the number of workers we employed and number of hours worked by the employees for periods designated in the survey form and such information as OSHA may request from records pursuant to 29 CFR part 1904

12.2 Survey reports will be sent to OSHA by mail or other means described in

the Survey Form within the time stated in the Survey Form.


352

13. Appendix A - OSHA 300.


353

14. Appendix B - OSHA 301.


354

15. Appendix C - OSHA 300A.


355

Facets of construction H3O, Inc is currently not providing services for. 1. Abrasive Blasting Statement; 1.1 H3O, Inc performs no aspects of Abrasive Blasting. These duties will always be performed by others and will not be a service supplied, managed, or assisted by H3O, Inc. Thus is the reasoning for not needing an Abrasive Blasting Program. 2. Crane Operator (Offshore) 2.1 H3O, Inc performs no aspects of Offshore Crane Work. These duties will always be performed by others and will not be a service supplied, managed, or assisted by H3O, Inc. Thus is the reasoning for not needing an Offshore Crane Program. 3. Trenching/Shoring/Excavation 3.1 H3O, Inc performs no aspects of Trenching/Shoring/Excavation. These duties will always be performed by others and will not be a service supplied, managed, or assisted by H3O, Inc. Thus is the reasoning for not needing an Trenching/Shoring/Excavation Program.


356


DATE: March 15, 2010 SUBJECT: Occupational Exposure to Lead REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR 1910.1025 BASIS: Millions of American workers are at risk of developing cancer and other types of illnesses due to their exposure to lead materials in the workplace. In recent years there has been a significant increase in the number of cases reported. This poses a serious problem for exposed workers and their employer. This standard practice instruction establishes uniform requirements to ensure that procedures within this company to limit the spread of such hazards are implemented, evaluated, and that the proper hazard information is transmitted to all affected workers. GENERAL: H3O, Inc. will ensure that all potential lead exposure hazards within our facility(s) are evaluated and controlled. This standard practice instruction is intended to address comprehensively the issues of; evaluating and identifying potential sources of lead exposure, evaluating engineering controls, work practices, administrative controls, medical management, training, and establishing appropriate procedures.

Contents of the Lead Safety Program 1. Written Program. 2. General Requirements. 3. Job Classification and Exposure Control. 4. Training. 5. Work Operations. 6. Medical Surveillance. 7. Selection and Use of Safe Work Practices and Monitoring. 8. Recordkeeping. 9. Definitions.


357

H3O, Inc. Lead Safety Program 1. Written program. H3O, Inc. will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction at least once every year, or when changes occur that prompt revision of this document, or when facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document, or should the procedures ever fail. This written program will be communicated to all personnel. It encompasses the total workplace, regardless of number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals, and objectives. 1.1 Supervisors of this company will develop and maintain the following for each

job where lead is emitted. 1.1.1 A description of each job. 1.1.2 A list of machinery used in the job. 1.1.3 Types of materials processed. 1.1.4 Exposure controls that are in place. 1.1.5 Crew size (if applicable). 1.1.6 Employee job responsibilities. 1.1.7 Operating procedures specific to the job. 1.1.8 Maintenance practices specific to the job. 1.2 Means to achieve compliance. Each job where lead is emitted will have a

written description of the specific means that will be employed to achieve compliance, including engineering plans and studies used to determine methods selected for controlling exposure to lead.

1.3 Technology. Any reports of the technology considered by this company to

achieve compliance will be maintained as long as is appropriate. 1.4 Air monitoring data. Any air monitoring data which documents the source of

lead emissions will be maintained. 1.5 Implementation schedules. Data which supports the implementation of this

program or equipment upgrades will be maintained as long as appropriate. 1.6 Administrative controls. Where administrative controls are used as a means

of reducing employees TWA exposure to lead a job rotation schedule will be implemented which includes but is not limited to the following:


358

1.6.1 Name and or identification number of employee. 1.6.2 Duration of work, and exposure levels at each job. 1.6.3 Any other company specific information useful in assessing the

reliability of administrative controls to reduce exposure. 2. General requirements. OSHA guidelines require that each employer who has employee(s) with potential occupational exposure to lead prepare an exposure determination. This exposure determination shall contain the following: 2.1 A list of job classifications for all employees whose job classifications have

occupational exposure. 2.2 A list of job classifications in which some employees have occupational

exposure. 2.3 A list of all tasks and procedures or groups of closely related tasks and

procedures in which occupational exposure occurs and that are performed by employees in job classifications listed in accordance with the provisions of the this standard practice instruction.

2.4 The schedule and method of implementation, methods of compliance,

Communication of Hazards and record keeping required by 29 CFR 1910.1025. 2.5 The procedure for the evaluation of circumstances surrounding incidents. 2.6 Methods of compliance. 3. Job Classification and Exposure Control. 3.1 Job Classifications in Which All Employees in Those Classifications Have

Occupational Exposure. 3.1.1 Boiler Work At Covanta . 3.2 Job Classifications in Which Some Employees Have Occupational Exposure: 3.2.1 Boiler Work At Covanta.


359

4. Training. 4.1 Types of training. The company will determine whether training required for

specific jobs will be conducted in a classroom or on-the-job. The degree of training provided shall be determined by the complexity of the job and the lead exposure hazards associated with the individual job.

4.1.1 Initial Training. Prior to job assignment, this employer shall provide

training to ensure that the hazards associated with lead are understood by employees and that the knowledge, skills and personal protective equipment required are acquired by employees. The training shall as a minimum include the following:


recognition of applicable hazards involved with particular job. The methods and means necessary for safe work.

4.1.1.2 The contents of 29 CFR 1910.1025 and appendices A & B. 4.1.1.3 The specific nature of the operation which could result in

exposure to lead above the action level. 4.1.1.4 The purpose, proper selection, fitting, use and limitation of

respirators. 4.1.1.5 The purpose and a description of the medical surveillance

program, and the medical removal protection program including information concerning the adverse health effects associated with excessive exposure to lead (with particular attention to the adverse reproduction effects on both males and females).

4.1.1.6 The engineering controls and work practices associated


4.1.1.7 Instructions to employees that chelating agents should not

routinely be used to remove lead from their bodies and should not be used at all except under the direction of a licensed physician.

4.1.1.8 The company shall make readily available to all affected

employees a copy of 29 CFR 1910.1025 and all other pertinent information upon request.

4.1.1.9 The contents of any compliance plan in effect.


360

4.1.1.10 The employee's right of access to records under 29 CFR 1910.20.

4.1.2 Refresher Training. Scheduled refresher training will be conducted

on an anual basis. 4.1.2.1 Retraining shall be provided for all authorized and affected

employees whenever there is a change in their job assignments, a change in personal protective equipment, equipment or processes that present a new hazard, when their work takes them into hazardous areas, or when there is a change in the lead safety procedures. Retraining will also be provided whenever a safety procedure fails resulting in a near-miss, illness, or injury.

4.1.2.2 Additional retraining shall also be conducted whenever a

periodic inspection reveals, or whenever this employer has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge of known hazards, or use of equipment or procedures.

4.1.2.3 The retraining shall reestablish employee proficiency and

introduce new equipment, or revised control methods and procedures, as necessary.

4.1.3 Certification. This employer shall certify that employee training has

been accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification shall contain a synopsis of the training conducted, each employee's name, and dates of training.

5. Work Operations. 5.1 Work operations in which lead may be encountered involve welding, burning,

cutting, brazing, grinding, and abrasive blasting. (detail other site specific instances)

5.2 The equipment and materials used to accomplish work operations are those

normally associated with sandblasting and painting operations. (detail other site specific instances)

5.3 Employee crew size will vary and employee job responsibilities will be that of

their craft as stated in the company's policy manual. Specific additional responsibilities will be:



361

5.3.1.1 Monitors procedure to ensure compliance with this work practice and 29 CFR 1910.1025.

5.3.2 Supervisors 5.3.2.1 Ensures that the initial determination for potential lead or

toxic exposure has been accomplished before work begins. 5.3.2.2 Supervises the safe performance of work in accordance

with this and other work practices and 29 CFR 1910.1025. 5.3.2.3 Assigns jobs only to qualified employees. 5.3.3 Employee 5.3.3.1 Uses the protective and safety equipment as assigned and

directed. 5.3.3.2 Abides by the requirements of this work practice. 5.3.3.3 Participates in the biological monitoring. 5.3.4 Company Safety Director 5.3.4.1 Coordinates the requirements of this program in

accordance with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.1025. 6. Medical Surveillance. The medical surveillance provisions of this standard practice instruction are intended to provide our employees with a comprehensive approach to prevention of lead-related disease. The primary purpose is to supplement the OSHA standard's primary mechanisms of disease and illness prevention, the elimination or reduction of airborne concentrations of lead and sources of ingestion, by facilitating the early detection of medical effects associated with exposure to lead. 6.1 All medical examinations and procedures will be performed by or under the

supervision of a licensed physician and are to be provided without cost to employees at a reasonable time and place.

6.2 Two phases of surveillance. The medical surveillance provisions

contemplate two phases of medical surveillance; one is initial medical surveillance, the other is a medical surveillance program.

6.2.1 Initial medical surveillance consists of biological monitoring in the

form of blood sampling and analysis for lead and zinc protoporphyrin levels. It will be provided to our employees occupationally exposed to airborne concentrations of lead on any one day at or above the action


362

level as well as to employees performing high exposure "trigger tasks" during initial exposure assessment.

6.2.2 Action level medical surveillance. If an employee's airborne lead

exposure is at or above the action level (30 ug/m3, TWA) for more than 30 days a year, and whose BLL exceeds 40 ug/dl, this employer shall provide a medical surveillance program to the employee consisting of routine monitoring of an employee's blood lead and ZPP levels. If a routine and follow-up blood test for blood lead exceed the removal criteria of 50 ug/dl, then the employee will be removed from exposure to airborne lead that exceeds the action level. Employees will be notified in writing of their blood lead levels within five working days after the receipt of biological monitoring results.

6.3 Surveillance initiation. This employer will provide a full medical surveillance

program to any employee, including annual medical exams, when it is determined that the employee's blood lead level exceeds 40 ug/dl, or if the employee's airborne exposure is, or may be at or above the action level for more than 30 days a year

6.4 Examination criteria. The content and frequency will be at the discretion of

the attending physician. Upon request of an employee, a pregnancy test or male fertility test will be provided. Each examination as a minimum will include:

A work and medical history

A physical examination

A blood pressure measurement

Determinations of blood lead level (PbB)

Hematocrit, hemoglobin, peripheral smear morphology and red cell indices

Levels of zinc protoporphyrin (ZPP)

Routine urinalysis (specific gravity, sugar, protein determinations, and microscopic examination), blood urea nitrogen (BUN), and serum creatinine (S-Creat).

6.5 Medical consultations. Medical consultations will be provided upon

notification by an employee under the following conditions: 6.5.1 The employee has developed symptoms commonly associated with

lead-related disease. 6.5.2 The employee desires advice concerning the effects of lead on

reproductive capacity, or is pregnant. 6.5.3 The employee has demonstrated difficulty in breathing during fit

testing or use of a respirator.


363

6.6 Multiple physician review. To meet the requirements of the standard, this company will ensure the surveillance program contains a multiple physician review mechanism which provides workers an opportunity to obtain a second and possibly third opinion regarding the medical determinations made. An employee may designate a second physician to review any findings, determinations or recommendations of an initial physician chosen by this employer. Efforts will be made to resolve any disagreement which may arise between the two physicians. Should they be unable to agree, a third physician they jointly select will resolve the disagreement. It is expected that the third physician will consult with the two prior physicians, and upon request, this employer will supply the same information to the third physician given to the initial physicians.

6.6.1 Cost. This employer will bear the expense of the multiple physician

review mechanism where it is used. 6.7 Medical Removal Protection. This employer will remove an employee from

work having an exposure to lead under the following conditions: 6.7.1 Action level exceedance. When it is suspected from any source

that an employee has reached an exposure level at or above the action level.

6.7.2 Periodic and or follow-up test. On each occasion that a periodic

and a follow-up blood sampling test indicate that the employee's blood lead level is at or above 50 ug/dl.

6.7.3 Medical determination. On each occasion that a final medical

determination results in a medical finding, determination, or opinion that the employee has a detected medical condition which places the employee at increased risk of material impairment to health from exposure to lead.

6.8 Return to work. 6.8.1 Blood lead level exceedance. Any employee removed from

exposure to lead at or above the action level due to a blood lead level at or above 50 ug/dl this employer may return the employee to former job status when two consecutive blood sampling tests indicate that the blood level is at or below 40 ug/dl pending no other restrictions are present.

6.8.2 Final medical determination. Any employee removed from

exposure to lead due to a final medical determination, the employee will be returned to work when a subsequent final medical determination results in a medical finding, determination, or opinion that the employee no longer has a detected medical condition which places the employee at increased risk of material impairment of health from exposure to lead.


364

6.9 Medical benefits. Should this employer remove an employee from exposure

to lead or otherwise place limitations on an employee due to the effects of lead exposure on the employee's medical condition, the employee will be entitled to full medical removal protection benefits. Benefits will continue for up to eighteen months or as long as the job the employee was removed from continues, whichever comes first.

7. Selection and use of safe work practices. Supervisors shall develop and ensure use of standardized safety-related work practices to reduce and prevent illnesses and injuries resulting from exposure to lead. The specific safety-related work practices shall be consistent with the nature and extent of the associated hazards. 7.1 Work procedures and the specific means and technology to protect

employees and to achieve compliance with the occupational exposure to lead program include:

7.1.1 Basis of initial determination. An initial determination shall be made

to ascertain the potential exposure to lead before any work in undertaken. The basis of the initial determination shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

7.1.1.1 Past history and record of similar or like work operations

which would indicate employee exposure to lead. 7.1.1.2 Previous measurements and records of airborne lead and

analytical findings, observations, calculations or other information. 7.1.1.3 Analysis of paint or other materials involved in the specific

work operation. 7.1.1.4 Employee complaints of symptoms which may be

attributable to exposure to lead. 7.1.2 Monitoring for initial determination of exposure. As a minimum, this

company will monitor a representative sample of employees who it is believed are exposed to the greatest airborne concentrations of lead.

7.1.3 Previous Data. Where measurements of airborne lead have been

obtained in the preceding 12 months, this data may be used to fulfill initial monitoring requirements if it is representative and is accurate to a confidence level of 95%.

7.1.4 Positive Initial Determination and Initial Monitoring - when the initial

determination shows that the possibility of employee lead exposure exists at or above the action level the following shall be adhered to:


365

7.1.4.1 Engineering controls and work practices shall be

implemented. These include, but are not limited to, increased ventilation, enclosures or removing work to another location.

7.1.4.2 Respirators shall be used whenever engineering and work

practice controls are not sufficient to reduce exposure to or below the permissible exposure limit and/or in any emergency.

7.1.4.3 Respirators shall be provided whenever an employee

requests a respirator. 7.1.4.4 Respirators shall be used in accordance with the

supervisor's instructions and the company Respiratory Protection Program.

7.1.5 Negative Initial Determination - when a determination is made that

no employee is exposed to airborne lead at or above the action level, this information will be documented. The documentation shall include at least the following:

7.1.5.1 Date of determination. 7.1.5.2 Location of determination. 7.1.5.3 Name and social security number of each employee

monitored. 7.1.5.4 Records of past history and record of similar or like work

operations which would indicate employee exposure to lead. 7.1.5.5 Records of previous measurements and records of

airborne lead and analytical findings, observations, calculations or other information.

7.1.5.6 Records of analysis of paint or other materials involved in

the specific work operation. 7.1.5.7 Records of employee complaints of symptoms which may

be attributable to exposure to lead. 7.1.6 Frequency of Monitoring: 7.1.6.1 If the initial determination (representatively sampled for at

least seven continuous hours for each shift) reveals employee


366

exposure below the action level, the monitoring need not be repeated.

7.1.6.2 If the initial determination reveals employee exposure to be

at or above the action level, but below the permissible exposure limit, monitoring shall be repeated at least every 6 months. The monitoring shall continue until at least two consecutive measurements, taken at least 7 days apart, are below the action level, at which time the monitoring for that employee or operation may be discontinued.

7.1.6.3 If the initial monitoring reveals that employee exposure is

above the permissible exposure limit, the monitoring shall be repeated quarterly. The monitoring shall continue until at least two consecutive measurements, taken at least 7 days apart, are below the permissible exposure level, at which time the monitoring for that employee or operation may be discontinued.

7.1.7 Additional monitoring - whenever there has been a production,

process, control or personnel change which may result in new or additional exposure to lead, or whenever the employer has any reason to suspect a change which may result in new or additional exposures to lead, additional monitoring shall be conducted.

7.1.8 The employer must, within 15 working days after the receipt of the results of any monitoring performed under this section, notify each affected employee of these results either individually in writing or by posting the results in an appropriate location that is accessible to affected employees. 7.1.9 Whenever the results indicate that the representative employee exposure, without regard to respirators, exceeds the permissible exposure limit, the employer shall include in the written notice a statement that the permissible exposure limit was exceeded and a description of the corrective action taken or to be taken to reduce exposure to or below the permissible exposure limit. Accuracy of measurement. The employer shall use a method of monitoring and analysis which has an accuracy (to a confidence level of 95%) of not less than plus or minus 20 percent for airborne concentrations of lead equal to or greater than 30 ug/m(3).

7.2 Exposure monitoring shall be conducted immediately at the start of the

operation which may involve lead exposure. 7.2.1 Monitoring shall be representative of the exposure for each

employee in the workplace who is exposed to lead.


367

7.3 Observation of monitoring. This employer will provide employees or their

representatives with the opportunity to observe monitoring of employee exposures to lead. Observers will be entitled as a minimum to the following:

7.3.1 An explanation of the measurement procedure. 7.3.2 To observe all steps related to the measurement procedure. 7.3.3 To record the results obtained. 7.4 Signs shall be posted in each work area where the Permissible Exposure Level is

exceeded. The signs shall be illuminated and cleaned as necessary and shall read:

WARNING HAZARD

LEAD WORK AREA NO SMOKING, EATING OR DRINKING

7.5 Protective work clothing and equipment shall be provided to employees as

appropriate. It is each employee's responsibility to use the appropriate protective work clothing and equipment such as, but not limited to:

7.5.1 Coveralls or similar full-body work clothing. 7.5.2 Shoes or disposable shoe coverlets, gloves, and hats. 7.5.3 Face shields, vented goggles, welders gloves, etc. 7.6 Cleaning and Replacement of Protective Clothing and Equipment 7.6.1 Protective clothing shall be supplied in a clean condition at least

weekly, and daily to employees whose exposure levels, without regard to a respirator, are over 200 ug/m3 of lead as an 8 hour TWA.

7.6.2 All protective clothing shall be removed only in designate change

areas.


368

7.6.3 Contaminated protective clothing which is to be cleaned, laundered,

or disposed of shall be placed in a closed container in the designated change area which prevents dispersion of lead outside the container.

7.6.4 Any person who cleans or launders protective clothing or

equipment, shall be informed, in writing, of the potentially harmful effect of exposure to lead.

7.6.5 Containers of contaminated protective clothing and equipment shall

be labeled as follows:

CAUTION: CLOTHING CONTAMINATED WITH LEAD. DO NOT REMOVE DUST BY BLOWING OR SHAKING. DISPOSE OF LEAD CONTAMINATED WASH WATER IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE LOCAL, STATE, OR FEDERAL REGULATIONS.

7.6.6 The removal of lead from protective clothing or equipment by

blowing, shaking, or any other means which disperses lead into the air is prohibited.

7.7 Housekeeping 7.7.1 All surfaces shall be maintained as free as practicable of

accumulations of lead. 7.7.2 Cleaning Floors. 7.7.2.1 Floors and other surfaces where lead accumulates shall

not be cleaned by the use of compressed air or heavy sweeping. Care will be taken at all times to reduce the lofting of material into the ambient air.

7.7.2.2 When vacuuming or other equally effective methods are

not feasible, wet methods, including wet sweeping, wet shoveling, or wet brushing, shall be used. Dry methods may be used only when vacuuming and wet methods are not practicable.

7.7.3 Vacuuming. When vacuuming methods are utilized, only a vacuum

with an absolute filter shall be used and the residue collected shall be treated and disposed of as hazardous waste.

7.8 Hygiene Facilities and Practices.


369

7.8.1 Eating and Drinking. In areas where employees are exposed to lead above the Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL), without regard to the use of respirators, the following shall apply:

7.8.1.1 Foods/beverages cannot be present or consumed. 7.8.1.2 Tobacco products cannot be present or used. 7.8.1.3 Cosmetics cannot be applied. 7.8.2 Designated Change Areas. 7.8.2.1 Clean, designated change areas shall be provided for

employees who work in areas where their airborne exposure to lead is above the PEL. The airborne exposure is without regard to the use of respirators.

7.8.2.2 Designated change areas shall be equipped with separate

storage facilities for protective work clothing and equipment and shall include a separate storage area for street clothes to prevent cross contamination.

7.8.3 Washing Facilities 7.8.3.1 Employees who work in areas where their airborne

exposure to lead is above the PEL, without regard to the use of respirators, shall shower or wash at the end of the work shift.

7.8.3.2 The washing facilities shall be in accordance with 29 CFR

1926.51, i.e., "Washing facilities. The employer shall provide adequate washing facilities for employees engaged in the application of paints, coatings, herbicides, or insecticides, or in other operations where contaminants may be harmful to the employees. Such facilities shall be in near proximity to the worksite and shall be so equipped as to enable employees to remove such substances."

7.8.3.3 Employees who are required to shower or wash shall not

leave the jobsite wearing any clothing or equipment worn during the work shift.

7.8.4 Food and Beverage Consumption Areas 7.8.4.1 Food and beverage consumption areas shall be sufficiently

removed from the affected work area for the employees who work


370

in areas where their airborne exposure to lead is above the PEL, without regard to the use of respirators.

7.8.4.2 Food and beverage consumption areas shall be readily

accessible to employees. 7.8.4.3 Employees who work in areas where there is airborne

exposure to lead shall wash their hands and face prior to eating, drinking, smoking, or applying cosmetics.

7.8.4.4 Employees shall not enter food and beverage consumption

areas with protective work clothing or equipment unless surface lead dust has been removed by vacuuming or other approved cleaning methods.

7.9 Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL) 7.9.1 No employee shall be exposed to lead at concentrations greater

than 50 micrograms per cubic meter of air (50 ug/m3) averaged over an 8 hour period.

7.9.2 If an employee is exposed to lead for more than 8 hours in any day,

the permissible exposure limit, as a time weighted average (TWA) for that day, shall be reduced according to the following formula: Maximum Permissible Limit (expressed in ug/m3) = 400 divided by the hours worked in that day.

7.9.3 When respirators are used to supplement engineering and work

practice controls to comply with the PEL and all the requirements of respiratory protection have been met, employee exposure, for the purpose of determining whether this employer has complied with the PEL, may be considered to be at a level provided by the protection factor of the respirator for those periods the respirator is worn. Those periods may be averaged with exposure levels during periods when respirators are not worn to determine the employee's daily TWA exposure.

8. Recordkeeping. This employer will keep all records of exposure monitoring for airborne lead. 8.1 These records will include as a minimum the following: - Name and job classification - Details of sampling and the analytic technique used - Results of sampling - Type of respiratory protection being worn


371

8.2 Records of biological monitoring will include: - Names of the employee - The physician's written opinion - A copy of the results of the examination 8.3 Records retention. All of the above kinds of records must be kept for 40

years, or for at least 20 years after termination of employment, whichever is longer.

8.3.1 Records will also be retained if the employee is temporarily

removed from the job under the medical removal protection program. This record will include:

- The employees name and social security number - How the removal was or is being accomplished - Dates of removal from work and return - Details of how each removal was or is being accomplished - Whether or not the removal was due to elevated BLL 8.3.2 This company will keep each medical removal record for the

duration of an employee's employment. For employees who request to see or copy environmental monitoring, blood lead level monitoring, or medical removal records, they will be made available to the employee or to a representative that he or she authorizes. The union (if in place) also will have access to these records. Medical records other than PbB's will also be provided upon request, to the attending physician or to any other person whom the employee may specifically designate. Union officials will not have access to employee personal medical records unless the employee authorizes access.

9. Definitions. Action Level - means employee exposure, without regard to the use of respirators, to an airborne concentration of lead of 30 micrograms per cubic meter of air (30 ug/m3) averaged over an 8 hour period. Lead - means metallic lead, all inorganic lead compounds, and inorganic lead soaps. Excluded from this definition are all other organic lead compounds. Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL) - the legally established time-weighted average (TWA) concentration or ceiling concentration of a contaminant that shall not be exceeded. No employee shall be exposed to lead at concentrations greater than fifty micrograms per cubic meter of air (50 ug/m3) averaged over an 8-hour period.

Documents

Safety Program